Berk PDF

ENGLISH
SYNTAX
FROM WORD
TO DISCOURSE
LYNN M. BERK
ENGLISH SYNTAX
ENGLISH SYNTAX
From Word to D i s c o u r s e
Lynn M. Berk
New York Oxford

OXFORD UNIVERSITY PRESS
1999
Oxford University Press
Oxford New York

Athens Auckland Bangkok Bogota Buenos Aires Calcutta
Cape Town Chennai Dar es Salaam Delhi Florence Hong Kong Istanbul
Karachi Kuala Lumpur Madrid Melbourne Mexico City Mumbai
Nairobi Paris Sao Paulo Singapore Taipei Tokyo Toronto Warsaw
and associated companies in

Berlin Ibadan
Copyright 1999 by Lynn M. Berk
Published by Oxford University Press, Inc.

198 Madison Avenue, New York, New York 10016
Oxford is a registered trademark of Oxford University Press, Inc.
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise,
without the prior permission of Oxford University Press.
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Berk, Lynn M., 1943-
English syntax : from word to discourse / Lynn M. Berk,
p. cm.
Includes bibliographical references
ISBN-13 978-0-19-512352-4; 978-0-19-512353-1 (pbk.)
ISBN 0-19-512352-2; 0-19-512353-0 (pbk.)
1. English languageSyntax. I. Title.
PE1361.B47 1999
425-dc21 98-23348
CIP
20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Printed in the United States of America

on acid-free paper
For Toby
and
In memory of
my father
Contents
Preface xv
Acknowledgments xvi i
Introduction I
What Does Grammar Mean? I
Grammaticality (Acceptability) Judgments 4
Historical Periods 5
Edited English 6
It's All in Your Head 7
Chapter I. Basic Sentence Structure 9
The Subject 11
Syntax of the Subject I!
Semantic Roles of the Subject 14
Agent Subjects 15
Causer Subjects 16
Instrument Subjects I7
Experiencer Subjects I7
Patient Subjects (and Patient Direct Objects) 19
Described and Located Subjects 20
Empty It 21
Cataphoric It 21
Some Other Semantic Roles 22
Discourse Functions of the Subject 23
The Predicate 25
Transitive Verbs and Direct Objects 25
Semantic Roles of the Direct Object 27
Patient Direct Objects 21
Experiencer Direct Objects 21
Created Direct Objects 28
Locative Direct Objects 29
Some Other Semantic Roles 29
Covert Direct Objects 30
"Light" Transitive Verbs 31
vii
viii Contents
Degrees of Transitivity 32
Intransitive Verbs 32
Ditransitive Verbs and Indirect Objects 34
Degrees of Ditransitivity 39
Not All Recipients Alternate 39
Discourse Functions of the Indirect Object 41
Benefactives 43
Copulas and Subject Complements 44
Sensory Copulas 45
Stative Copulas 46
Change of State Copulas 46
Copula Be 47
Restricted CopulasStativeand Change of State 47
Complex Transitive Verbs and Object Complements 49
Degrees of Complex Transitivity 50
Marked and Unmarked Word Order 51
Summing Up 52
Chapter 2. The Noun Phrase 55
The Determiner 57
Articles 58
Demonstratives (and Deixis) 61
Indefinite This 62
Quantifying Determiners 63
Genitive Determiners 63
Interrogative Determiners 64
Predeterminers and Postdeterminers 65
Genitives 67
Genitive Semantic Types 68
Double Genitives 73
Group Genitive 74
Generic Reference 75
Proper Nouns 75
Non-Count Nouns 78
Categorizing Non-Count Nouns 79
Collective Nouns 82
Pronouns 83
Personal Pronouns 83
Reflexive Pronouns 87
Possessive Reflexives 89
Reciprocal Pronouns 90
Demonstrative Pronouns 90
Quantifying Pronouns 91
Indefinite Pronouns 91
Indefinite Pronouns and Gender 92
Contents ix
Interrogative Pronouns 93
Noun Phrases in Discourse 93
Summing Up 95
Chapter 3. The Verb Phrase 97
Tense 98
Tense and Meaning 101
Past Tense 101
Present Tense 102
What About Future Time? 105
Finite and Non-Finite Verbs 105
Aspect 106
Progressive Aspect 107
Meaning of the Progressive 107
Dynamic and Stative Verbs 108
Punctual Verbs 110
Perfect Aspect I 10
Meaning of the Perfect 111
Tense and Aspect in Discourse 114
Passive Voice 116
Transitive Verbs that Don't (Readily) Passivize I 16
Get Passive I 18
Passives with No Corresponding Active I 19
The Passive in Discourse I 19
Agentless Passives 120
Constructions That are Active in Form and Passive in Meaning 122
Word Order and the Passive 122
Primary Auxiliaries and the Lexical Verb 123
Multi-Word Lexical Verbs 125
Movable Particles 126
Unmovable Particles 127
Identifying Multi-Word Verbs 128
Modality 130
Epistemic Modality in General 130
Deontic Modality in General 13 I
Modal Auxiliaries 132
Modal Auxiliaries and Epistemic Modality 133
Modal Auxiliaries and Deontic Modality 134
Modal Auxiliaries Used in Directives 134
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Volition
and Commitment 135
Dare and Need I 36
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Ability 137
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Habitual Actions 137
Modals and Word Order 137
jr
Contents
Semi-Auxiliaries 138
Epistemic Semi-Auxiliaries 139
Deontic Semi-Auxiliaries 140
Semi-Auxiliaries Used to Express Obligation 140
Semi-Auxiliaries Used to Express Volition, Commitment,
and Threats 141
Semi-Auxiliary Used to Express Ability 141
The Habitual Semi-Auxiliary 141
Semi-Auxiliaries and Discourse 142
Semi-Auxiliaries and Word Order 142
Semi-Auxiliaries and Aspect 142
Auxiliaries, Time, and Tense 143
Using the Perfect to Express Past Modality 144
Mood and Modality 146
Imperative Mood 146
First Person Imperative 147
Imperatives with Overt Subjects 147
The Imperative in Discourse 148
Subjunctive Mood 149
Mandative Subjunctive 149
Volitional Subjunctive 150
Formulaic Subjunctive 150
The Verb Phrase and Scope of Negation 151
Scope of Negation and Auxiliaries 152
The Verb Phrase and Questions 153
Yes / No Questions 154
Information Seeking Questions (Wh Questions) 154
Tag Questions 155
Multi-Word Auxiliaries as Operators in Questions and Tags 156
Historical Development of the Operator 157
Exclamations 158
Existential There Constructions 158
Narrative Discourse and the Verb Phrase 161
Summing Up 163
Chapter 4. Modification 165
Modification of the Noun and the Noun Phrase 165

Prenominal Adjectives 169
Predicate Adjectives !7I
Postnominal Adjectives and Adjective Phrases 172
Object Complement Adjectives 173
Intensifying and Downtoning Adjectives 174
Limiters 175
Gradability 175
Adjectives and Compound Nouns 177
Contents xi
Adjective Order in the Noun Phrase 179

Internal Structure of the Adjective Phrase 180
Intensifies 181
Downtoners / 81
Modification of Comparative and Superlative Forms 182
Other Degree Modifiers 183
Adjective Complements 184
Use of the Term Adverb 185
Adjunct Adverbs 186
Intensifying, Downtoning, and Limiting Adjuncts 186
Locatives (Space Adverbs) 188
Adverbs of Place 188
Adverbs of Direction 189
Meanings of Spatial Prepositions 19 /
Direct Object Versus Prepositional Constructions 191
Locative Inversion 192
Temporal Adverbs 193
Adverbs of Point or Boundary in Time 193
Adverbs of Duration 195
Adverbs of Frequency 195
Time Relationship Adverbs 196
Constraining the Time Frame 197
Adverbs of Manner 197
Adverbs of Means 199
Adverbs of Reason/Purpose 200
Adverbs of Result 200
Adverbial Proforms 201
Some Other Adjunct Categories 202
Problems in Categorizing Adjuncts 202
Movability of Adjuncts 203
Adjuncts and the Scope of Negation 204
Stacking and Coordination of Adjuncts 205
Adjective Phrases Revisited 206
Adjunct Forms That Modify Adjectives 206
Adjectives That Function as Adjuncts 207
Disjuncts 208
Attitude Disjuncts 209
Style Disjuncts 209
Point of View Disjuncts 210
Epistemic Disjuncts 210
Conjuncts 211
Sequencing Conjuncts 21 I
Adding and Reinforcing Conjuncts 212
Resulting Conjuncts 212
Transitional Conjuncts 213
Concessive Conjuncts 214
xii Contents
Some Other Conjuncts 214

Conjuncts in Discourse 214
Summing Up 215
Chapter 5. Clauses: Coordination and Subordination 217
Clauses 217
Conjoining 218
Conjunction And 218
Conjunction Or 222
Conjunction But 223
Coordination and Questions 224
Ellipsis and Gapping 225
Embedding 226
Nominal Clauses 227
That Clauses 228
That Clauses as Direct Objects 228
That Clauses and Ditransitive Verbs 230
That Clauses as Predicate Nominatives 231
That Clauses as Verb Complements 232
That Clauses as Subjects 233
Extraposition of That Clauses 234
Factive and Non-Factive Constructions 236
Infinitive Clauses 237
Infinitive Clauses as Direct Objects 237
Infinitive Clauses as Predicate Nominatives 239
Infinitive Clauses as Verb Complements 240
Dual Structure Infinitive Clauses 245
Infinitive Clauses as Subjects 247
Extraposition of Infinitive Clauses 248
Infinitive Clauses Are Problematic 249
ING Clauses 249
ING Clauses as Direct Objects 251
Infinitive and ING Clauses Compared 253
ING Clauses as Predicate Nominatives 254
ING Clauses as Verb Complements 254
ING Clauses as Subjects 255
Relative Tense in Non-Finite Clauses 256
Wh Nominal Clauses 256
Wh Clauses as Direct Objects 257
Wh Clauses as Predicate Nominatives 260
Wh Clauses as Indirect Objects and Object Complements 260
Wh Clauses as Subjects 261
Extraposition of Wh Clauses 261
Clauses as Adjective Complements 262
Postnominal Modification 265
Contents xiii
Restrictive Relative Clauses 265

Deleting the Relative Profonn 268
Extraposition of Relative Clauses 269
Infinitive Restrictive Clauses 269
Discourse Functions of Restrictive Relative Clauses 270
Other Restrictive Postnominal Modifiers 271
Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses 273
Discourse Functions of Non-Restrictive Relative Clauses
and Appositives 275
Restrictive Appositives 276
Adverbial Clauses 277
Locative Adverbs 278
Temporal Adverbs 278
Adverbs of Time (Point or Boundary) 278
Adverbs of Frequency 279
Adverbs of Duration 279
Temporal Adverbs in Discourse 280
Word Order and Temporal Adverbial Clauses 280
Adverbs of Manner 281
Adverbs of Means 281
Adverbs of Reason/Purpose and Result 282
Disjuncts and Conjuncts 283
Concessive and Conditional Clauses 284
Summing Up 285
Notes 289
Glossary 291
References 303
Index 307
Preface
Although English Syntax: From Word to Discourse has been influenced by a num-
ber of syntactic theories, my overall goal is to provide a descriptive grammar
of English and my overall approach is loosely discourse/functional. This book
presumes no theoretical background on the part of the student and the mate-
rial should be completely accessible to anyone with a rudimentary knowledge
of English grammar. Grammatical constructions are discussed in terms of their
form, meaning, and function in discourse. 1 have tried to ensure that students
learn the basics of English grammar but that at the same time they come to un-
derstand the richness and complexity of the system.
English Syntax: From Word to Discourse is filled with examples; some are my
own creation, many come from literary and other print sources, and others
from actual conversations. Most sections also conclude with a summary chart
containing at least one example of each structure discussed. Whenever a new
term is introduced, it appears in boldface. Most boldface terms also appear in
the extensive glossary at the end of the book.
Sometimes the nature of a particular construction can be illuminated by a
look at its linguistic history. This text includes some very brief forays into the
history of the English language, especially in cases where constructions have
been influenced by language contact between the English and the Norman
French.
I field-tested earlier drafts of this book in a number of sections of English
Syntax at Florida International University. This introductory M.A.-level course
serves Linguistics majors, TESOL students, and a few English majors. The ex-
amples, ideas, and critical comments provided by these students were invalu-
able in shaping this textbook.
XV
Acknowledgments
I am grateful to all the English Syntax students who used various versions of
this book. Their ideas were invaluable and they proved to be astute reviewers,
excellent editors, and a wonderful source of examples and counter-examples.
I would like to thank Florida International University and the United Fac-
ulty of Florida for the sabbatical that allowed me to finish the final draft of the
book. I also benefitted from the hospitality of the Linguistics Department at the
University of Colorado, where I spent two sabbatical years (1989-90 and
1996-97). Special thanks to University of Colorado faculty members Barbara
Fox and Susanna Cumming (now of University of California, Santa Barbara),
who taught me the value of discourse-functional syntax, and to my FIU col-
league Kemp Williams, who read pieces of the manuscript and listened pa-
tiently as I bounced ideas around.
Many thanks to the all the Tunas in my life (especially those in Boulder
and Miami) for not letting me take myself too seriously.
Above all, I am deeply grateful to my husband Toby, who offered constant
encouragement and unqualified support, as well as significant technical and
editorial assistance. I know that there were many months when his work load
doubled because I was too busy with this project to do my share.
xvii
ENGLISH SYNTAX
Introduction
W h a t D o e s Grammar Mean?
To most nonlinguists, the term grammar refers to set of prescriptive rules, i.e.,
rules that dictate which forms and structures are "correct" and which are not.
The following are classic examples:
Don't say ain't.

Never end a sentence with a preposition.
Don't split an infinitive.
Never use a double negative.
School children often learn such rules about the same time that they learn
the basic rules of table etiquette:
Never chew with your mouth open.

Don't put your elbows on the table.
Don't slurp your soup.
Don't eat with your fingers.
It's no accident that these two sets of rules have a similar ring. Both were
established to outline the parameters for socially acceptable behavior. Neither
traditional rules of grammar nor table manners are essential to life; they are
simply aesthetic flourishes. The teenager who eats with her elbows on the table
will not jeopardize her digestion by doing so, just as the child who says 1 don't
want no cookies doesn't really impede communication by using the double neg-
ative.
But this prescriptive approach to English grammar is ubiquitous and its
origins are centuries old. Speakers of Germanic languages came to literacy late.
The various Germanic speaking groups that came to Roman Britain in 449 had
only the most rudimentary writing system and it was used primarily for cast-
I
2 Introduction
ing magic spells. By the time English had established itself as a separate Ger-
manic language in Britain, Latin had long been the language of religion and
diplomacy in Western Europe. During much of the medieval period, when Eng-
lish speakers read at all, they read Latin. But of course classical Latin was not
a living language and it had to be taught in formal and artificial ways to those
who wished to learn it. The first dictionaries and grammars used in Britain
were designed to teach Latin to native speakers of Irish Gaelic and English and
for centuries the word "grammar'7 meant "Latin grammar/'
Very early on then grammars were associated with the study of Latin; me-
dieval students never studied the structures of their native languages. During
the Renaissance, an intense interest in all things classical gave new impetus to
the status of Latin. Latin was seen as the language of a golden age; it was beau-
tiful and pure. Jonathon Swift (1667-1745), the author of Gulliver's Travels, ex-
pressed a view widely held among the English intelligentsia when he wrote to
the Lord High-Treasurer of Great Britain:
I believe your Lordship will agree with me in the Reason why our Language
is less refined that those of Italy, Spain, or France. It is plain, that the Latin
Tongue in its Purity was never in this Island. (1957, p. 6) 1
But of course Latin was an artifact, a fossil. Spoken languages evolve and
change much like organisms. Classical Latin no longer had native speakers; it
existed only in ancient texts. Its very immutability made it seem far purer than
contemporary languages. This fact, combined with the long tradition of schol-
arship in Latin, conspired to enshrine Latin grammar as the standard for all
European grammars.
The whole notion of a grammar designed to instruct speakers in how to
use their native language would have seemed preposterous to a twelfth-
century citizen of England. One was born in a dialect region and into a social
class and these constraints shaped both social and linguistic behavior. But by
the fifteenth century, social structures began to crumble due to internal politi-
cal and economic forces, including the bubonic plague, which greatly increased
social mobility. (A serious labor shortage in the cities meant that serfs were no
longer tied to the land.) By the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, a new
and socially insecure middle class had emerged. Suddenly individuals were
not sure how to speak, how to act, how to dress. The result was a spate of how-
to manuals. It is no accident that the first serious dictionary of English, the first
comprehensive grammar of English, and the first etiquette books were all pub-
lished in the middle of the eighteenth century.
Bishop Robert Lowth's A Short Introduction to English Grammar with Criti-
cal Notes, first published in 1761, was the most important English grammar of
its time and was to become a model for most future English grammars. Its in-
fluence can be felt even today. Given the history of language study in Britain,
it is not surprising that Bishop Lowth's grammar was based heavily on Latin
models. In the Preface to his grammar Lowth responds to Jonathon Swift's
complaints.
What Does Grammar Mean? 3
Does [Swift's charge] mean, that the English Language, as it is spoken by the
politest part of the nation, and as it stands in the writings of our most approved
authors, often offends against every part of Grammar? Thus far, I am afraid,
the charge is true. Or does it farther imply, that our language is in its nature
irregular and capricious; not hitherto subject, nor easily reducible, to a System
of rules? In this respect, I am persuaded, the charge is wholly without foun-
dation. (1767, iv)
Lowth then proceeded to set out a system of grammatical rules. His goal
was to root out "inaccuracy" and teach us "to express ourselves with propri-
ety in that Language, and to enable us to judge of every phrase and form of
construction, whether it be right or not" (viii). Lowth believed that teaching
"correctness" should be the primary goal of English grammar and, like most
of his contemporaries, his view of correctness was shaped in large part by the
forms and structures of classical Latin. Unfortunately, English and Latin are
only remotely related and the two languages are very different structurally.
Many of the "rules" put forth by Lowth and his followers simply did not re-
flect the English usage of his time or any other.
In the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, Western scholars began to study
languages that were hitherto unfamiliar to Europeans and most North Amer-
icans. Indigenous American languages, sub-Saharan African languages, and the
languages of the Pacific contained forms and structures that were new to lan-
guage scholars. Description, not prescription, became the goal of those who
were seeking to write grammars for these previously unrecorded languages.
The data from which these grammars were constructed were actual language
as it was spoken in a particular place at a particular time. In the process of de-
scribing these languages, linguists revolutionized the study of English as well.
They began to analyze the English language as it was actually spoken with all
its ain'ts, double negatives, and split infinitives. By the 1930s, a strong tradi-
tion of descriptive linguistics stood in opposition to the traditional prescriptive
approach to English grammar.
In 1957, linguist Noam Chomsky published Syntactic Structures, a book that
launched another revolution in the study of grammar. Chomsky called his ap-
proach generative grammar and his goal was to provide the structural de-
scriptions necessary to generate all the grammatical sentences and only the
grammatical sentences in a given language. Chomsky's approach went well be-
yond description; he hoped to formalize the system of unconscious rules that
we all exploit in speaking our native languages. Chomsky's work has had
a profound impact on the study of syntax and today there are a number of
formal theoretical models which owe some debt to Chomsky's generative
grammars.
In the push to create formal syntactic models, however, one important di-
mension of language was lost. Generative models tend to examine individual
sentences in isolation and often these sentences are created by the syntactician.
But language is primarily a social tool; its function is communication among
human beings and rarely do human beings utter single, isolated sentences in
4 Introduction
the absence of a hearer. In the late 1970s :and 1980s, functional grammars were
developed in order to explore the rules that govern language use in a com-
municative context. Functional grammarians often focus on discourse, i.e.,
chunks of language larger than the indiyidual sentence (conversations, narra-
tives, letters, etc.).
To contemporary linguists, whatever their theoretical orientation, a gram-
mar is, at the very least, a systematic description of the structure of a language.
Their goal is to explain the relationships among parts of the sentence, to un-
derstand how form and meaning are related, and in some cases to describe
how sentences flow into larger pieces of discourse. A sentence like I ain't got
no cookies is as worthy of study as I don't have any cookies; the dialect of an Ap-
palachian coal miner is as worthy of analysis as that of a member of Britain's
royal family.
Grammaticality (Acceptability) Judgments
Linguists study what speakers actually do, not what some rule-maker says they
should do. Linguists carry out such studies by (1) examining actual spoken
conversations and written texts and (2) using their own judgments and those
of others as to what is acceptable or grammatical (I use the two terms inter-
changeably) This textbook employs both techniques. It is filled with examples
of actual language use, most of which are from written texts but some of which
are fragments of recorded conversations; it also exploits grammaticality judg-
ments, for the most part my own and those of my friends, family, and col-
leagues. A sentence will be considered acceptable or grammatical if it might
reasonably be uttered by a native or fluent speaker of English under ordinary
circumstances. Thus, even a sentence like I don't want no trouble is an accept-
able utterance to any English speaker who routinely uses double negative con-
structions, and 1 might could help you is perfectly grammatical for many Amer-
ican Southerners. However, no native English speaker would say We shot herself
or Addie couldn't have being mad. Sentences that are grammatical in one histor-
ical period may not be grammatical in another. A character in a seventeenth
century play might say "Go you to London?" but no modern English speaker
would say this even though we all understand what it means.
The standard convention for indicating that a sentence is ungrammatical
is a preceding asterisk.
*We shot herself

* Addie couldn't have being mad.
*Go you to London?
*Down barn the burned night last.
If a sentence is marginally acceptable, i.e., it might be used by speakers

under limited circumstances, I have marked it with two preceding question
marks ??.
Historical Periods 5
??She has been going to finish that project for years.

??Into the cave the hikers didn't venture.
If a sentence is merely odd, I have marked it with one question mark.
?This land is possessed by the Jones family.

?She was waving me goodbye.
There is no hard and fast rule for making such grammaticality judgments.
Grammaticality is a continuum. Addie couldn't have being mad is completely un-
interpretable; Down barn the burned night last can be interpreted only by rear-
ranging all the words; Go you to London? is immediately understandable but
we also know that no modern speaker of English would say this. Into the cave
the hiker's didn't venture sounds very strange but it might be possible in a highly
literary context. "She was waving me goodbye" sounds a bit odd but is in fact
a line from an old Chuck Berry song (Berry, 1959).
Clearly, making grammaticality judgments is a tricky business. Every lin-
guist depends heavily on his/her own dialect and intuitions in making such
judgments. There may be a few sentences in this textbook that I have marked
?? or even * that you may find completely acceptable. Conversely, you may
find some of the sentences I consider grammatical to be very strange. Don't
worry about these small differences of opinion. Overall, you will find that gram-
maticality judgments are a valuable, even an essential, tool in the study of
syntax.2
Historical Periods
Sometimes knowing the historical origins of a grammatical form or construc-

tion helps in understanding it. On occasion, I will provide you with a brief his-
tory of the syntactic construction under discussion. When I refer to Old Eng-
lish, I am speaking of the language spoken in Anglo-Saxon England from the
sixth century to about 1100. Old English looks far more like modern Icelandic
than it does modern English.
Du ure feeder, J)e eart on heofonum, sy Jîn nama gehalgod.
Cume {3in rice. Sy J)m willa on eorfân swaswa on heofonum.
Syle us todaeg urene daeghwamlican hlaf. And forgyf us ure gyltas swaswa
we forgyfaj) >aem \>e wi\y us agylta|}. (Hussey, 1995, p. 1)
Both the grammatical structure and the spelling conventions of Old Eng-
lish raise impediments to the modern reader. The symbol h is pronounced like
the th in thigh. The symbol ae is pronounced like the a in cat (at least as cat is
pronounced in my midwestern American dialect). The lines over some vowels
6 Introduction
indicate that these vowels were long. (These lines are a modern convention and
don't actually appear in the original Old English texts.)
Middle English was spoken from 1100-1500. This period begins shortly
after the Norman invasion of England in 1066. Language contact with Norman
French speakers accelerated some significant linguistic changes that were al-
ready underway in English and precipitated others. Middle English is some-
what more accessible to the modern speaker. Here is the same passage in Mid-
dle English and those of you familiar with Christian liturgy will probably
recognize it now.
Oure fadir {)at art in heuenys, halewid be Jdi name. Di kyngdom come to. Be
J)i wille don as in heuene and in er{)e. 3ive to us Jîs day oure breed ouer of>er
substaunse. And for3iue to us oure dettes, as we for3iuen to oure dettouris.
(Hussey, pp. 1-2)
(In Middle English u is used to stand for the v sound as well as the u sound
and 3 represents the sound of the g in give.)
The Early Modern English period spans 1500-1800. While the English of
this period still contains a few constructions and forms that are unfamiliar to
modern speakers, the language is almost completely accessible. The version of
the Lord's Prayer which was routinely used by most Christian congregations
until the middle of the twentieth century was actually written in 1611.
Our Father which art in heaven, hallowed be thy name. Thy kingdom come.
Thy will be done in earth, as it is in heaven. Give us this day our daily bread.
And forgive us our debts, as we forgive our debtors. (Hussey, p. 2)
It is the linguistic conservatism of religious liturgy that has made forms like
art, thy, goest, and maketh familiar to many modern English speakers.
Something that prescriptive grammarians fail to recognize is that language
changes. It is an utterly natural phenomenon and no amount of intervention
on the part of English teachers and newspaper columnists can change that.
Many of the "oddities" of modern English syntax are remnants of old forms
and systems that have changed more slowly than other parts of the grammar.
Some of the constructions we will explore in this book are still in an active state
of flux and this creates an interesting challenge for the grammarian.
Edited English
In the popular imagination the term grammar is often associated with writing.
But writing is merely an attempt to capture speech; it is a secondary, not a pri-
mary phenomenon. All human beings are biologically equipped for language.
Except for the most profoundly retarded individuals, any child who hears hu-
man language will acquire it. (Deaf children who are exposed to sign language
acquire it just as hearing children acquire spoken language, and while some
It's All in Your Head 1
autistic children do not speak, they typically understand.) Writing, on the other
hand, is a learned activity, a cultural artifact. While all societies have spoken
language, some still lack writing systems. Linguists do recognize that in liter-
ate societies there are aesthetic standards and accepted techniques for writing
just as there are standards and techniques for painting and sculpture. In the
case of English, the rules for formal writing are often called edited English.
This book will address issues of edited English only on those occasions when
there are interesting syntactic issues involved.
It's All in Your Head
Remember that when you study English syntax, you are not studying some ex-
otic phenomenon in nature; you are in effect studying yourself. You have used
most if not all of the syntactic structures discussed in this book. If you are a
native speaker of English, you learned these forms and constructions without
even being aware that you were doing it. If you are a native or fluent non-
native speaker, you undoubtedly construct English sentences automatically,
with little premeditation. The study of syntax allows us to make conscious a
complex range of activities that fluent speakers engage in unconsciously Just
as we don't need to know how neurons fire in order to feel pain, we don't need
to know what a modal auxiliary is in order to use one in a sentence.
Syntax is intrinsically interesting stuff. The world is full of linguistic data
classroom lectures, a conversation between teenagers on the phone, the labels
on shampoo bottles, e-mail messages, comic strips, talk shows, etc. Test the gen-
eralizations contained in this textbook against your own real world experience.
Your data may lead you to conclusions that are different from mine. At that
point you cease to be a student of syntax and become a syntactician in your
own right.
1
Basic Sentence Structure
Linguists often divide their enterprise into more or less separate fields of study:
a) phonologysounds
b) morphologytheshape of words and affixes
c) syntaxtheways words are combined into larger structures including
sentences
d) semanticsmeaning
e) pragmaticslanguagein a social context
f) discoursechunksof language larger than a sentence
This textbook will focus primarily on syntax, semantics, and discourse, with
brief forays into morphology and pragmatics. As you will see, it's not always
easy to separate these different levels of analysis. Structure and meaning are
always inextricably bound; The Chihuahua ate the cockroach means something
very different from The cockroach ate the Chihuahua, even though the two sen-
tences contain exactly the same words. Father is cooking probably means that
father is cooking food, but in the unlikely event that father has fallen into the
hands of cannibals, Father is cooking means something quite different and re-
quires a different grammatical analysis. The social context in which a sentence
is uttered will affect its form and its interpretation. A student who is seeking
a favor from a professor is far more likely to say "Can you give me an exten-
sion?" than "Give me an extension." And only the most socially inept hearer
will interpret "Can you pass the ketchup?" as a question requiring nothing
more than a "yes" or "no" answer.
Before we explore the structure of English sentences in detail, it is impor-
tant to understand the overall structure of the simple sentence. In this chapter
we will examine the internal structure of some short, simple sentences. What
these sentences will dramatically illustrate is that English speakers exploit a
very small number of basic sentence-making structures. As you will see
throughout this textbook, these basic structures are used over and over again
to create increasingly long and complex utterances.
It takes a fairly small inventory of words and phrases to generate a signif-
icant number of sentences. The 27 sentences listed below can all be produced
9
10 Basic Sentence Structure
by rearranging just 10 words or phrases. Some sentences omit words or phrases,

but in no case have words or phrases beyond these ten been included.
Words and phrases

the bear, Goldy, my porridge, ate, eaten, gave, given, was, to, by
Goldy ate. Goldy gave the bear my porridge.

Goldy ate my porridge. Goldy gave my porridge to the bear.
The bear ate. The bear was given my porridge.
The bear ate my porridge. My porridge was given to the bear.
My porridge was eaten. The bear gave Goldy my porridge.
My porridge was eaten The bear gave my porridge to
by Goldy. Goldy.
My porridge was eaten by Goldy was given my porridge.
the bear.
The bear ate Goldy. My porridge was given to Goldy.
Goldy was eaten. My porridge was given to Goldy
by the bear.
Goldy was eaten by the My porridge was given to the bear
bear. by Goldy.
Goldy ate the bear. Goldy was given the bear.
The bear was eaten. The bear was given to Goldy.
The bear was eaten by Goldy. The bear was given Goldy.
Goldy was given to the bear.
Although many of these sentences are closely related, careful scrutiny

should convince you that no two are identical in form. And this is the key to
the efficiency of languagethe same words can be combined into different
structures and different words can be put into the same structures. Theoreti-
cally, the speakers of any language can produce an infinite number of sentences
with a finite number of words and structures.
Authors of syntax textbooks face one significant problem. The structure of
any language is immensely complex; every structure seems to be connected to
every other structure. Grammar is a bit like cooked spaghetti; when you pick
up one strand, you find that ten others are wrapped around it. I will try hard
The Subject
to address issues one at a time so that you are not forced to grapple with struc-
tures to which you have not been properly introduced. But sometimes, espe-
cially in these early stages, it will be necessary to allude to structures that we
have not yet discussed in any detail. But each of these structures will be re-
visited later and any lingering questions you might have should be cleared up
at that point.
The Subject
The difference between the subject and predicate is probably the first fact of
English grammar that any school child learns, and it is a significant fact. The
very terms "subject" and "predicate" provide some clue as to the distinction
being made. The grammatical subject of the sentence is often the conversational
subject, i.e., the person or thing that the sentence is about. The predicate often
makes a comment about that subject, i.e., it "predicates."
In most languages a sentence does not require a word or phrase that func-
tions as subject; a Spanish speaker, for example, can say "No hablo Ingles" ("I
don't speak English"). This English translation is misleading, however, because
where English requires the pronoun 7, Spanish does not; the meaning of I is
simply encoded in the verb hablo. This option is not available in English, be-
cause, with the exception of the imperative (Sit down), subjects must be ex-
pressed. For this reason English is often called a subject dominant language.
According to one researcher, there are only seven languages in the world in
which the main verb is required to have a subject and English is one of them
(Gilligan [1987], cited in Lambrecht, 1994, p. 191).
SYNTAX OF THE SUBJECT

The distinction between the subject and predicate is the basic division
within the sentence. Grammarians have been aware of this distinction for mil-
lennia and in modern times a number of different graphic devices have been
employed to capture this division. Early twentieth century school grammars
drew a line between the subject and the predicate.
Children|love animals.
The generative grammars of the 1970s exploited tree diagrams in which

the subject (called the NP for noun phrase) branches left and the predicate
(called VP for verb phrase) branches right. S stands for sentence. The follow-
ing graphic says that every sentence contains an NP and a VP, in other words,
a subject and a predicate.
NP VP
I / \
I V NP
I I I
Children love animals
The construction grammars of the 1990s use the term predicate and exploit
boxes to illustrate the division between the subject and the predicate.
Predication
Children love animals
Each of these graphic devices underscores the same insightthatall Eng-

lish sentences can be divided into two basic structures (subject and predicate)
and the subject is (typically) first.
But what do subjects look like; what shape do they take? A simple subject
is always a noun phrase and a noun phrase is a proper name, a pronoun, a
noun, or a noun plus its modifiers. We will discuss all of these forms in detail
in Chapter 2, but for now let me give you a brief and simplified introduction.
The basic structure of a noun phrase
noun rice music boys hatred

noun + a book this bike that idiot the dog
modifiers some books these bikes those idiots two dogs
proper Jane Smith Chicago George Washington
name Lassie Maxine the Mississippi River
pronouns I/me he/him they/them it
you she/her we/us
Pronouns differ from other noun phrases in that they are used only after
the noun to which they refer, i.e., the referent, has already been introduced into
the narrative or conversation.
1 can't eat clams. They give me a rash.

I like Danny Glover. He is a fine actor.
The dog is upset. She doesn't want to go to the kennel.
The Subject 13
In many European languages (e.g., Russian, Greek, and Lithuanian), the

subject receives a special suffix to mark its subject (or nominative) status. Mod-
ern English subjects carry no special endings, but they are usually the first
structure in the sentence.
Subject Predicate
Josephine danced all night.

Your kids ate all the candy.
The flood destroyed their new condo.
Skill is essential.
It isn't important.
She offered me her new bike.
Putting the predicate first in any one of these sentences produces an ungram-
matical utterance*danced all night Josephine; *Ate all the candy your kids, *lsn't
important it.
A subject is a far simpler structure than a predicate. In a simple sentence,
a subject is a single structure, while a predicate can have internal structure, i.e.,
structures within structures.
subject predicate
The child slept
subject predicate
subject predicate
The child threw Marty the ball
subject predicate
The child threw Marty the ball during the game
English subjects have a profound effect on other grammatical categories in

the sentence. In some instances the subject controls the form of the verb. If a sub-
ject is singular (and third person) and the verb is in the present tense, that verb
must carry a special singular marker {-sj as in Sue smokes and My brother lies.
The subject also has a special role in the creation of questions that are typ-
ically answered "yes" or "no." Notice what happens when the following state-
ments are turned into yes/no questions. (In these examples the verbs are in
boldface and the subject is double underlined.)
Lars can attend the party. Can Lars attend the party?
Kate is repairing your Is Kate repairing your
computer. computer?
Your teacher was fired. Was your teacher fired?
Erin has finished her Has Erin finished her
homework. homework?
In each case, when the question is produced, the first verb (i.e., the auxiliary
verb) is moved to a position in front of the subject, leaving the second verb be-
hind. As a result, the subject of the question is surrounded by verbs. Of course
native or fluent speakers of English never have to think about all this in con-
structing a question; they unconsciously identify the subject and place the aux-
iliary verb in front of it.
The subject also controls the structure of so-called tag questions, those lit-
tle questions speakers put at the end of a statement in order to seek confirma-
tionBen likes Carla, doesn't he? Sue left, didn't she? Note that he reflects the
male status of the subject Ben, and she reflects the female status of Sue. Speak-
ers of English couldn't perform any of these operations unless they could in-
tuitively identify the subject of the sentence.
Number agreement and the creation of a question or tag question are true
diagnostics for subjecthood. Only subjects stand in these relationships to the
verb. While word order is not a definitive diagnostic, it is extremely useful. All
of the graphic devices displayed above indicate a subject followed by a pred-
icate. These graphics reflect prototypical word order. While there are certainly
exceptions, e.g., A Corvette he wants now, the first NP in an English sentence is
typically the subject. When speakers choose to put an NP other than the sub-
ject first in the sentence it is almost always because they want to signal some-
thing special like surprise or annoyance.
All of the constructions discussed in this section on the syntax of the subject
will be taken up in detail later on, but th<ese simplified examples should give you
some sense of how important the grammatical category subject is in English.
SEMANTIC ROLES OF THE SUBJECT

It is of course the semantic component of the subject that is most salient to
speakers. Even small children intuitively recognize some sort of division be-
tween a "doer" and an "action." In Jack yelled, Bonnie studied all night, and The
child put the candy in her pocket, Jack, Bonnie, and the child are all "doers" en-
gaging in some activity. This division between the doer and the action is often
what people point to when they distinguish between the subject and the pred-
icate. But to define the subject as a doer and the predicate as an action would
be misleading. In the following sentences, the subject is in no way doing any-
thingSusanis tall; The wall looked dirty; My mother was mugged last night. If the
subject is not necessarily a doer, what is it?
Subjects play a number of different semantic roles in English and "doer of
the action" is only one of them. (These roles are also called thematic or theta
roles in some syntactic models.) I've identified below some of the most com-
mon semantic roles played by subjects in English sentences. While this list is
not exhaustive, it will give you a good sense of the semantic variety.
Agent Subjects
The agent subject is the classic doer of the action. An agent subject is an
animate being that acts deliberately, with intent. Most speakers consider the
agent the most typical subject. If you ask someone to construct a sentence out
of thin air, it is likely that s/he will utter one with an agent subject. All of the
agentive subjects below are engaging in willful, deliberate action:
(a) (b)
Catherine's boss fired her. The little boy yelled.

Fred threw the frisbee. Those kids are whispering.
Joan built a birdhouse. My niece smiled.
My sisters washed the car. Mom sat down.
The dog tore up the newspaper. The choir sang.
The mare devoured her oats. The bulldog growled.
The agents in column (a) are acting on someone or something, i.e., the direct
object, while the agents in column (b) are not acting on anyone or anything
else. In other words, an agent subject can occur with or without a direct object.
(Direct objects will be discussed shortly.)
Whether or not amoebas, slugs, and other lower creatures actually have
agency is probably a biological question and not a linguistic one. They certainly
don't do things deliberately but they do engage in some of the same activities
that higher creatures docrawling,eating, swimming, etc. It is probably rea-
sonable to treat them as agents even though they are acting instinctively rather
than deliberately.
Of course we often anthropomorphize machines and treat them as agents,
even though they are technically inanimateTheATM machine refuses to return
my card; My computer ate my term paper; The engine threw a rod.
Causer Subjects
A causer is either an animate being who acts without volition or an inan-
imate entity. We distinguish causers from agents because the semantics of the
two roles are quite different. A sentence like Rob tripped Roy is potentially am-
biguous; if Rob tripped Roy just to see Roy fall, Rob is an agent, but if Rob tripped
Roy accidentally, then Rob is a causer.
All the sentences below contain animate causer subjects.
Mavis inadvertently touched the wet paint.

Benjamin accidently cut his finger.
Susanna bumped her head.
Sometimes animate causers inadvertently affect another person's psycho-

logical state.
The clown (accidentally) frightened my daughter.

Betsy hurt Rene's feelings inadvertently.
Michael Jordan amazes me.
Nan depresses her mother.
Michael Jordan certainly doesn't know that he amazes me, but he has that ef-
fect, nevertheless. Nan may depress her mother because her mother is worried
about her lifestyle, in which case Nan might be totally unaware of the effect
she is having.
It's not always easy to tell whether an animate subject is an agent or a
causer. Out of context, we don't know whether the following subjects are act-
ing deliberately or not.
Butch disgusts everyone.

The child amused the adults.
Professor Smith intimidates her students.
Of course inanimate entities lack intention or volition by their very nature.

Causers can be things like rocks, forces like tornadoes, or abstract qualities like
love.
Hail cracked our windshield.

Oil stained the carpet.
A hurricane damaged the village.
The Subject 17
The wind broke the window.

The revolution terrified the king.
Determination saved the family.
Hate destroyed her.
Unlike agents, causers always act on something or somebody else; in other

words, they are always followed by a direct object.
Instrument Subjects
An instrument subject, as the label implies, is an inanimate entity which
acts on someone or something else because it is being used as an instru-
ment. In a sentence like The key opened the safe, we can assume that some
unnamed agent is wielding the key because keys don't operate by them-
selves; in The tweezers removed the splinter; an unspecified agent is using the
tweezers.
Sometimes an instrument subject allows a speaker to avoid taking re-
sponsibility. A child might say "My ball broke your window" rather than "I
broke your window with my ball." Here the ball is the instrument used by the
child in the breaking of the window. On the other hand, in The hail broke your
window, the hail is clearly a causer, not an instrument.
Instrument subjects are fairly unusual in English. We most often find in-
struments in (adverbial) prepositional phrasesMeredithopened the safe with a
key; The nurse removed the splinter with the tweezers; I broke the window with
my ball. I will discuss these constructions at some length in Chapter 4.
Experiencer Subjects
Experiencer subjects are always animate, usually human. An experiencer
experiences a sensory perception or a psychological state. In other words, the
experiencer is not doing anything but is instead experiencing something
through the senses or the mental faculties. The verbs that co-occur with ex-
periencer subjects relate to consciousness; they are verbs that reflect "private"
internal states.
Each of our five senses allows for an agent subject and an experiencer sub-
ject. When an agent engages in a sensory activity, the agent actively employs
the sense in question. An experiencer, however, has a sensory experience that
was unsought. An agent looks at or listens to something on purpose. An ex-
periencer sees because an event passes before the eyes and hears because a
sound occurs within earshot. When Mary tastes the sauce, she does so by putting
her spoon in the bowl and then to her lips. But when Mary tastes mold on the
bread, her taste buds simply register a sensation; she has taken no direct action
to engage that sense.
Sensory verb with agent subject Sensory verb with experiencer subject
Joan looked at the scar. Joan saw some blood.

[She examined it carefully.] [She didn't want to see it.]
Alex listened to the argument. Alex heard the argument. [He
[He put his ear to the wall.] couldn't help it; they were screaming.]
Maria smelled the tulips. Maria smelled smoke. [It wafted in
[She leaned over to do so.] through the open window.]
Tony tasted the wine. Tony could taste pepper in the soup.
[He put the glass to his lips.] [Too much had been added.]
Margaret felt the cloth. Margaret felt some pain.
[She ran her fingers over it.] [It came on her suddenly.]
A sentence like Gene smelled the perfume is ambiguous out of context.

As you can see, sometimes the semantic difference between an experiencer
subject and an agent subject is reflected in the verb and sometimes it's not. In
the case of look at versus see and listen'to versus hear, this semantic difference
is lexicalized; in other words, the difference in meaning is signaled by differ-
ent words. In the case of agentive smell and experiencer smell, the semantic dif-
ference is not lexicalized; the verbs take the same form.
Mental state verbs, more often called psych-verbs, also take experiencer
subjects. These subjects are not really engaging in action. Normally when an
agent acts, the direct object is directly affected by that action. But none of the
experiencer subjects below has a direct effect upon the direct object.
Joan wants a raise. Susan loves stamp collecting.

Brad thinks about food constantly. Ted adores Sally.
Mary can't tolerate liver. I believe them.
Rich doesn't believe in love. Eric is dreaming.
She admires her mother. Sheila trusts her son.
The fact that Ted adores Sally and that Sheila trusts her son might theoretically
affect both Sally and the son in many ways, but the sentences above are silent
on that issue. In fact, Sally may not even know that Ted exists and Sheila's son
may be totally unaware of her feelings.
Later we will examine experiencers that are functioning as direct objects
and prepositional phrases.
The Subject 19
Patient Subjects (and Patient Direct Objects)

I'll approach the issue of patient subjects indirectly, by first previewing an-
other categorythe direct object. It is probably apparent to you that a noun
phrase which follows a verb is often affected by the action of the verb. A noun
phrase which follows the verb and is affected by the action of that verb is typ-
ically a direct object. Direct objects are structures inside predicates.
subject predicate
In Jack dropped the vase, Keisha opened the door, and The insects killed the
plants, the vase, the plants, and the door are the affected parties; they are also
direct objects. In each of these sentences, an agent or causer subject has caused
something to happen to the direct object. An event can also be expressed by
eliminating the agent/causer and making the affected party the subject of the
sentence. In The vase fell, the vase is not doing anything but rather is being
acted upon by another unnamed forcesomebody dropped it, the wind
knocked it over, somebody kicked the table it was sitting on, etc. In The plants
died, something killed the plantsinsects, frost, the lawn mower, old age. In
The door opened, someone or something caused this to happenKeisha, the
wind, a ghost. The traditional semantic label for an affected subject or an af-
fected direct object is patient. (This label derives from the adjective patient
which historically described one who "bears or endures.") A patient is never
volitional; a patient never exercises control; a patient is an entity to which things
happen. You will find that most patient subjects co-occur with verbs that de-
scribe a change of stateThe water boiled; The chair broke; The water heater ex-
ploded; Rosa fell; The mirror shattered.
In the examples below, you will find that none of the sentences with pa-
tient subjects contain direct objects.
Patient direct objects Patient subjects
He laid the book on the table. The book lay on the table.
The intruder opened the door. The door opened.
Maria broke the vase. The vase broke.
Dad thickened the sauce. The sauce thickened.
We emptied the pool. The pool emptied.
The soldier detonated the bomb. The bomb exploded.
Patient direct objects (cont.) Patient subjects (cont.)
The earthquake shook the house. The house collapsed.

The frost froze my garden. My garden froze.
Alan darkens his hair. His hair darkened.
Tom hung the clothes outside. The clothes hung on the line.
The baby bounced the ball. The ball bounced.
Semantically, a sentence like Lance jumped or The woman rolled down the hill
is ambiguous out of context. Lance may be a agent subject who deliberately
jumps or a patient subject who jumps involuntarily because something startles
him. Similarly The woman rolled down the hill can be interpreted as having an
agent subject (she rolled on purpose) or a patient subject (something tripped
her and she rolled). Usually when a sentence contains an animate subject which
acts involuntarily, the agent/instrument can be found elsewhere in the dis-
course, e.g., Lance jumped because someone set off a firecracker.
There can be only one patient in a simple sentence and if there is a direct
object, it, not the subject, will carry that semantic role. In Susan tripped the pro-
fessor, Susan must be an agent or a causer. Patient subjects occur only in in-
transitive or passive constructions. (Intransitivity will be explained shortly and
the passive will be explained in Chapter 3.) In the sentence Susan tripped there
is no direct object; Susan is clearly the affected party and thus a patient.
In his mystery novel The Little Sister, Raymond Chandler (1971) uses a series
of patient subjects to underscore the fact that the hero has been knocked to the
floor and cannot see his assailant, although he can hear the results of her activ-
ities. "The door opened. A key rattled. The door closed. The key turned" (p. 54).
Described and Located Subjects

Some subjects are simply being characterized or described by the infor-
mation in the predicate. These subjects always co-occur with copulas, verbs
that have little independent meaning but relate the information in the predi-
cate back to the subject. (Copulas will be discussed in detail later.)
Michael is tall. [Tall describes Michael]

Marty seems pleasant. [Pleasant describes Marty]
This food is French. [French characterizes the food]
The bread was stale. [Stale describes the bread]
Other subjects are simply located in space. In the following sentences the
location is double underlined.
The Subject 21
Samson is in his doghouse.

The pots are in the bottom cupboard.
Tomi is on the porch.
The Centrust Building stands on Miami Avenue}
Empty It
The normal function of the pronoun it is to refer to something that has al-
ready been mentioned in the discourseNatalie bought a new car. It is a red
convertible. Whenever a pronoun refers back to an item that has already been
introduced into the discourse, the pronoun is making anaphoric reference. (The
Greek prefix ana- means "back or backwards.") There are, however, contexts in
which it does not have anaphoric reference.
Many languages have odd ways of commenting on the weather or the am-
bient environment and English is no exception. In the sentences It is raining
and It's sunny out today, the subject it doesn't refer to any previously introduced
noun; in fact, it doesn't really refer to anything at all. But except for the im-
perative construction, all English sentences demand subjects and it is accept-
ably neutral in those cases where there isn't a semantically meaningful subject.
It is hot!
It's foggy in Seattle.
It is cold in Alaska.
It was smoky in that restaurant.
Empty it is sometimes called expletive it, a rather unfortunate traditional label.
Cataphoric It
When a complex clause functions as the semantic subject of a sentence, a
speaker will often put that clause at the end of the sentence and replace it with
the pronoun it. In this case it is not semantically empty; its semantic content is
the subsequent clause.
That my daughter had lied bothered me. / It bothered me that my

daughter had lied.
That Megan zvould win was predictable. / It was predictable that Megan
would win.
That Sam was mad was obvious. / It was obvious that Sam ivas mad.
This it is called cataphoric because it refers to something that comes after;

the Greek prefix cata- means "away." We'll discuss cataphoric it in detail in
Chapter 5. For now, simply be aware that subject it can have three very dif-
ferent functionsanaphoricreference, cataphoric reference, and empty place-

holder.
Some Other Semantic Roles

Subjects play other semantic roles in the sentence and linguists don't al-
ways agree on how far to go in categorizing these. For example, some of the
empty it subjects above can also be paraphrased with subjects that express
place.
Seattle is foggy.
Alaska is cold.
This bar is smoky.
These are usually called locative subjects because they simply name a loca-
tion. (Don't confuse locative subjects with located subjects.)
Subjects that express time are sometimes categorized semantically as tem-
poral subjects.
Wednesday is the baby's birthday.

Tomorrow is our anniversary.
Weekends are lonely.
Subjects like these have an adverbial quality and can in fact be paraphrased
with adverb constructionsItis rainy in Seattle; The baby's birthday is on Wednes-
day. (We will discuss adverbs in Chapter 4.) Some grammarians (e.g., Quirk,
Greenbaum, Leech, and Svartvik, 1972, p. 42) also establish an event category
for subjectsTheparty is at 9 p.m; The concert is over.
It isn't clear just how far we should go in creating semantic categories for
subjects or any other grammatical construction. Meaning is a continuum and
we could go on forever creating ever finer semantic distinctions, but such an
exercise has limited utility. You will find that different grammarians sometimes
employ different labels and grammarians don't always agree on just what
should be included in a given category, but the roles agent, instrument, expe-
riencer, and patient are quite standard. The semantic categories discussed above
can encompass a large number of English sentences and, as you will see later,
most of these categories have important grammatical implications.
Summary of subject semantic roles
Agent subject Tom threw his socks on the floor.

My dog ate my term paper.
The Subject 23
Summary of subject semantic roles (cont.)
Causer subject Walter stubbed his toe.

The water damaged the furniture.
Instrument subject The key opened the door.
The chain saw felled the tree.
Experiencer subject Benny wants a new sports car.
I smell smoke.
Patient subject Our pipes froze last night.
The chair broke.
Described subject That hairdo is hideous.
The room grew dark.
Located subject Marlene is in the yard.
Terry was on the boat.
Empty it It is cold outside.
Cataphoric it It is sad that Juliet can't date Romeo.
DISCOURSE FUNCTIONS OF THE SUBJECT

For many decades modern syntacticians explored individual sentences in
isolation, rarely if ever examining them in a larger context. But language is
most often used in chunks, whether in a conversation, a monologue, or a writ-
ten text. Furthermore, language is a social tool. We string sentences together to
chat with others, to give orders, and to elicit information. We engage in ban-
ter, write letters and e-mail messages, give lectures, tell jokes, and yell at our
kids. All of this is discourse and discourse can have a profound effect on the
structure of a given sentence. To put it another way, we often manipulate struc-
tures to serve our discourse goals.
One of the important functions of the subject is to reflect the topic (or
theme) of a discourse. The topic is what the discourse is about. Topics repre-
sent given information (sometimes called old information). Given informa-
tion, as the term suggests, refers to information that the speaker assumes the
hearer already knows. If you and I are discussing Malcolm and I say "He dri-
ves me crazy," there is no confusion; but if I suddenly walk up to you on the
street and yell, "He drives me crazy," you will probably conclude that I'm crazy.
In a few languages, the topic of a sentence actually takes a special form or car-
ries a special marker. English has no such special forms but the topic is often
(but not always) expressed by the subject of the sentence.
A topic is not the topic until it is introduced into the discourse, and the
first mention of a potential topic often occurs in the predicate. Once something
has been introduced, it becomes "topicalized" and typically occupies subject
position. In the following examples, first mentions are double underlined and
topics are in boldface.
I met the ambassador from Viet Nam yesterday. He was very charming.
[first mention] [topic]
Consider this fictional passage from a Ross Macdonald novel (1996). It con-
cerns promotional photographs of an aspiring young actress. (Underlining and
boldface added.)
Four of them were pictures of Kitty. . . .She stood and gazed romantically out
to sea. She reclined erotically on a chaise lounge. She posed dry on the div-
ing board. Kitty had been a beautiful girl, but all four pictures were spoiled
by her awkward staginess. (p. 85)
Once Kitty is introduced to us in the predicate of the first sentence, she

becomes the topic of the discourse and occupies the subject position in
subsequent sentences. The predicate in each of these sentences is the com-
ment on the topic. In the first three sentences the comment tells us what
Kitty did and in the last sentence the comment tells us what Kitty looked
like.
Here is a another passage, this one from a Robert Parker thriller (1996).
(Underlining and boldface added.)
"Here's Woody". . . . Woody was sitting on a bench, at a chest press machine

catching his breath. He had on rainbow striped spandex shorts and a spaghetti
strap black tank top. His thick blond hair was perfectly cut. . . . He was tanned
so evenly that he must have worked on it very carefully. He was lean and mus-
cular. His teeth were expensively capped. And he had a small diamond in his
left ear lobe. (p. 143)
Once Woody is presented to us in the first sentence, he becomes the topic of

the discourse and he or some part of his body is the subject of every subse-
quent sentence.
In both these fictional passages you will notice that once a character has
been introduced, the subsequent mentions are made by means of pronouns
like she, he, and his. As was noted early in this chapter, this is one of the pri-
mary functions of personal pronouns. They provide a convenient shorthand
for referring to individuals who have already been introduced into the dis-
course. It is no accident that we often find pronouns in subject position, since
subject position is also topic position. We'll discuss pronouns at length in
Chapter 2.
Because subjects often express the topic of a discourse, it should not sur-
ransitive Verbs and irect Objects 25
prise you that human subjects are more common than nonhuman subjects. We
are egocentric creatures and we like to talk about ourselves. In conversation,
1 and you are the most frequent topic/subjects. But different kinds of topics
(and thus subjects) emerge in different kinds of discourse. Locative subjects
are not very common as a rule but they occur frequently in travel brochures
and guide booksMiamiis humid most of the year; The Riviera is crowded in Au-
gust. Temporal subjects crop up frequently in a conversation in which a group
of people are trying to schedule a meetingTuesday is bad; Thursday looks good
though.
The Predicate
The predicate is typically the structure that follows the subject. If the subject is
an agent, causer, or instrument, the predicate will express the action carried
out by that subject; if the subject is something which is being described, the
predicate will provide the description; if the subject is a patient, the predicate
will indicate what happened to the subject. For most speakers the notion of a
predicate that is separate from the subject is fairly intuitive.
The English predicate must contain a verb; it can contain other structures
a direct object, an indirect object, various complement structures, and adverbs
but it must contain a verb. While most imperative utterances omit the subject
(Sit down; Drink your milk), there are no English sentences in which the verb is
omitted. In many ways the verb controls what happens grammatically in a sen-
tence. Certain verbs require or at least allow a direct object; other verbs require
two objects, a direct objects plus an indirect object; some verbs can be followed
by adjectives; others must be followed by adverbs. For example, the verb like
must be followed by a direct objectDianalikes the woods. The verb put must
be followed by both a direct object and an adverb of locationSheput the book
on the shelf; *She put the book and *She put on the shelf are both ungrammatical
sentences. On the other hand, the verb laugh can stand alone in the predicate
Elaine laughed.
Verbs also constrain the semantic roles of subjects; some verbs require agen-
tive or causer subjectsShepunched a hole in the door; The flood damaged the golf
course; others require experiencer subjectsSheheard the siren; Tom smelled smoke.
A discussion of verbs cannot be separated from a discussion of what can be
found in the rest of the sentence.
Transitive Verbs and Direct Objects
The direct object is a structure contained within the predicate. It is typically the
noun phrase that follows the verb, although indirect objects and subject com-
plements can also occupy this position, as you will see shortly.
subject predicate
The kids devoured the liver

direct object
subject predicate
The spider scared Miss Muffet

direct object
Most speakers would probably regard a subject + verb + direct object sen-
tence as the prototypical English sentence. Verbs that can be followed by di-
rect objects are considered transitive because, in most cases, an action taken by
the subject is transmitted to the object. (The Latin prefix trans- means "across.")
As a rule, only transitive verbs can be followed by direct objects. As you saw
above, a direct object is a noun phrase that follows a verb and is often (but not
always) affected by the action of verb.
Lisa wrecked her bike.

The fire damaged the bedroom.
Bob washed the dishes.
Eugene read a novel
y The baby likes those cookies.
The direct object has a special role in the construction of passive sentences.
Without even knowing what a passive sentence is, any relatively fluent Eng-
lish speaker can readily return an active sentence into a passive sentence after
hearing just a few illustrative examples.
(a) (b)
Bruce ate the pizza. The pizza was eaten by Bruce.
The snails destroyed my My garden was destroyed by the
garden. snails.
Flossie slugged Bert. Bert was slugged by Flossie.
Gloria sang the anthem. The anthem was sung by Gloria.
Successful completion of this exercise depends on an individual's ability to

identify the direct object of each of the sentences in column (a). That direct ob-
ject then becomes the subject of the corresponding sentence in column (b). Of
course, fluent speakers do all of this unconsciously
SEMANTIC ROLES OF THE DIRECT OBJECT

Like subjects, direct objects reflect various semantic roles. Traditional school
grammars often describe the direct object as the "receiver of the action," and,
loosely speaking, that is one of its primary roles. But the direct object reflects
a variety of other semantic relationships as well. In each of the following sen-
tences the direct object the monster has a different relationship with the verb,
Dr. Frankenstein slapped the monster

Dr. Frankenstein created the monster
Dr. Frankenstein scared the monster.
The semantic roles of direct objects are less varied than those of subjects
and lines between semantic types are often muddier. Nevertheless, the semantic
distinctions among direct objects are important in understanding the overall
semantics of the sentence.
Patient Direct Objects

You were first introduced to patient direct objects in the section on sub-
jects. Patients are always affected by the action of the verb (to a greater or lesser
degree). In fact, direct objects are so named because they are in a sense the di-
rect target or object of the verb's action.
Jill smashed my car.

Dorothy threw her coat on the floor.
Timothy folded the clothes.
The plaintiff destroyed the evidence.
Maezel lifted the box.
As you saw earlier, subjects can also take the semantic role of patient. Re-
member that in a given simple sentence there can be only one patient role. If
the sentence contains a direct object, it, not the subject, will be the patient.
Patient will also be our default (garbage can) category. We will consider
any direct object that cannot be comfortably placed in another semantic cate-
gory a patient. This means that even relatively unaffected direct objects as in
Kim read the novel will be considered patients. The one exception to this will be
the direct objects of psych-verbs, as you will see in the next section.
Experiencer Direct Objects

You've already seen that the subjects of psych-verbs (mental state verbs)
are experiencersIlike pizza; Stephanie wants a new computer. Direct objects can
be experiencers as well if the verb causes the direct object to achieve a new
psychological state. It doesn't matter whether the subject is an agent (volitional

and animate) or a causer (nonvolitional and animate or inanimate). In a sense,
experiencer is a subcategory of patient in that the direct object is affected by
the action of the verb in a very particular way.
Annie annoyed her siblings. [It doesn't matter whether she did it
deliberately or not.]
Dad calmed the baby.
Lester frightened me.
That novel bothered my students.
The vandalism saddened everyone.
A direct object can be an experiencer only when the subject is not. There
can be only one experiencer in a simple sentence. When the subject of a verb
is an experiencer, the direct object is relatively unaffected by the action of the
verb.
I love movies.
Libby believed their lies.
Captain Ahab fears that whale.
We abhor violence.
Carmen craves chocolate.
1 smell smoke.
The movies are indifferent to the fact that I like them and lies are unaffected
by the fact that Libby believes them. The whale may be affected in some way
by the fact that Ahab fears him, but there is nothing in the sentence that indi-
cates this. In a sentence like Captain Ahab harpooned the whale, the affectedness
is communicated directly.
Created Direct Objects

Occasionally a transitive verb actually creates a direct object, rather than
affecting an already existing entity. In a sentence like Bell invented the telephone
or My daughter built a tree house, the direct object is actually brought into ex-
istence by the action of the verb. Such direct objects are created direct objects.
The difference between a patient direct object and a created direct object ex-
plains the ambiguity in a sentence like Maria paints barns. If Maria paints pic-
tures of barns, the direct object is created; if she paints barn walls, the direct
object is a patient.
Patient direct object Created direct object
Agatha lost my novel. Agatha has written a novel.

Margaret tore her blouse. Margaret made a blouse.
Lynn is painting the ceiling. Lynn is painting a landscape.
The kids broke the statue. The kids are carving a statue.
Teddy fixed the bike. Teddy fixed lunch.
One can of course quibble about the status of some direct objects. If Martha
sang a Jimmy Buffet song, did she create something or affect something already
in existence? If Ali baked a cake, did he create something or merely cook a pre-
existing entity? These are clearly gray areas. But the fact that not all direct ob-
jects can be neatly categorized doesn't diminish the value of these semantic
distinctions.
Locative Direct Objects

Sometimes noun phrases expressing location are used as direct objects.
Sir Edmund climbed Mt. Everest.

Diana swam the English Channel.
I have hiked the Grand Canyon.
As you will see in Chapter 4, location expressions are usually prepositional

phrases functioning as adverbsSirEdmund climbed up Mt. Everest; I have hiked
in the Grand Canyon. What makes locative direct objects interesting is that they
express a quality of completeness which is lacking in the prepositional phrases.
Sir Edmund climbed Mt. Everest suggests that Sir Edmund climbed all the way
up to the top and I have hiked the Grand Canyon suggests that I have walked its
entire length. I will take up this issue again in Chapter 4.
Some Other Semantic Roles

In some highly idiomatic expressions, empty it occurs as a direct object. In
utterances like Let's call it a day, Sue has it made, and They are living it up, it has
no anaphoric or cataphoric referent. Such expressions are rare, however.
Occasionally a normally intransitive weather verb will take an objectIt
was hailing golf balls; It was raining buckets. These constructions, too, are very
idiomatic.
Summary of Direct Object Semantic Roles
Patient direct object The kids are smashing the furniture.

Becky fixed my car.
Experiencer direct object Isabella scared me.
That movie disgusted my parents.
Created direct object That firm manufactures computers.
My aunt made a pie.
Locative direct object Michelle swam Lake Powell.
He walks the streets [when he is
depressed].
Empty it direct object Maggie is living it up.
Other semantic categories for direct objects have been suggested, but this set
should give you an adequate sense of the semantic variation.
COVERT DIRECT OBJECTS

The term transitive really refers to a verb's potential. Any verb that can po-
tentially take a direct object can be considered transitive. Transitive verbs can
sometimes occur without an overt direct object, although there is almost al-
ways an unexpressed, covert direct object, one that is somehow understood. (I
will routinely use the term covert for a structure that is not explicitly articu-
lated but can be determined by the sentence grammar or the discourse con-
text.) In Fred ate the presumption is that he ate food, not rat poison; in Martha
is studying the presumption is that she is studying some academic subject, not
her navel; and in The children are reading, the presumption is that the kids are
reading books or magazines, not shopping lists.
The verbs bake, hunt, and iron can all occur with unexpressed but commonly
understood direct objects. When someone hunts something other than wild
game, a direct object is required and for typically follows the verbWayne is
hunting versus Wayne is hunting for his shoes. When drink occurs without a di-
rect object, it usually implies the consumption of alcoholTina drinks. Curi-
ously, transitive verbs that are closely related semantically often behave dif-
ferently in terms of their need to express an overt direct object. Unlike eat, the
verbs devour and gobble require an overt direct object; *Fred devoured and *The
child gobbled are ungrammatical.
"LIGHT" TRANSITIVE VERBS

There are a few transitive verbs in English that carry little information and
depend on the rest of the predicate to provide meaning. Like light beer, these
verbs have little content, but they are, nevertheless, quite productive, i.e., they
appear in a variety of constructions. The verb do is an especially interesting ex-
ample of this. In sentences like Lana did her homework, Alan did the dishes, and
My sister does my taxes, the verb to do has meaning only in the context of the
direct object. In fact, to do constitutes a kind of shorthand in these contexts; in
the first sentence, it includes all the activities that might be involved in work-
ing on homework; in the second sentence it probably involves the acts of both
washing and drying, and in the third it includes a variety of accounting activ-
ities. Such expressions tend to be fairly idiomatic. One has to know that when
a woman "does her nails," she is filing and painting them and when a couple
"does the tango," they are dancing. We do the dishes when we wash and dry
them but we don't *do the clothes under the same circumstances. Speakers can
use do to create novel expressions. The expression Let's do lunch has become a
part of the lexicon, even though many speakers only use it facetiously.
Take and have also occur in contexts in which the verb depends on the di-
rect object for meaning.
The baby took a nap. Judy had a nap.

Asher is taking a walk. They had a fight.
He took his leave. We had dinner at eight.
She is taking a shower They had a chat.
Let's take a swim. They are having a meeting.
Nan took a drink of water. The child had a good cry.
He took a glance at the note. Michael had a smoke.
Holy field took a swing at Tyson. Maxine had a look at the results.
In British and Australian English the have construction is even more produc-
tive than in American English, e.g., He is having a lie-down or She is having a
read. (For a detailed discussion of have in such constructions, see Wierzbicka,
1988c.)
Each of the verb plus direct object constructions cited above can be para-
phrased to some extent by a single verbThebaby napped; Asher is walking; They
are fighting; They chatted. The single-verb paraphrases, however, lack a seman-
tic dimension shared by the transitive sentences; in each case the transitive ver-
sion suggests that the event is time-bounded, that it has a clear-cut beginning
and end. Michael had a smoke suggests one cigarette, while Michael smoked does
not. Having a chat is a single event, while chatting is an ongoing activity. This
is underscored by the fact that we can easily say Pete and Lynn chatted for hours,
but ??Pete and Lynn had a chat for hours is odd. The presence of the article a in
most of these direct object constructions undoubtedly contributes to the sense

that these are single, time-bounded events.
The take and have constructions discussed above represent a only a subset
of the possibilities. There are many complications. In some cases, the use of
have suggests that the subject of the sentence is not an agent. For example, if I
say that Doug is shaving, you will assume that Doug is doing the job himself;
however, if I say that Doug is having a shave, you will probably assume that the
barber is doing the shaving. Similarly, Jane is having a shampoo and Timmy is
having a haircut both relegate the subject to nonagent status.
DEGREES OF TRANSITIVITY
Transitive verbs co-occur with agent, instrument, causer, and experiencer
subjects, but not with patient subjects and empty it. The traditional definition
of transitivity requires that any verb that takes a direct object be considered tran-
sitive. However, linguists Paul Hopper and Sandra Thompson (1980) have ar-
gued that transitivity is a continuum and that the degree of transitivity includes
a number of factors, including the //agentiveness,/ of the subject and the "af~
fectedness" of the direct object. All of the sentences below are technically tran-
sitive but the degree of transitivity diminishes with each successive sentence.
Cameron smashed the truck.

Nikki read a comic book.
The baby likes cookies.
In the first example Cameron is an agent and the truck is a highly affected
patient. In the second sentence Nikki is an agent but a comic book is a relatively
unaffected patient. In the third sentence the baby is an experiencer and cookies
is a totally unaffected patient. The fact there are degrees of transitivity will have
implications in Chapter 3 when we discuss the passive construction. As you
will see then, completely unaffected direct objects are the least likely to become
subjects of passives, e.g., ??Cookies are liked by the baby, and highly affected pa-
tients are the most likely to become the subjects of passives, e.g., The truck was
smashed by Cameron.
Intransitive Verbs
The intransitive verb is not followed by a direct object (or an indirect object),
although it is often followed by adverbs: that express time or place.
Lisa fell. Mindy is fishing.

Intransitive Verbs 33
Tom is sleeping. All the relatives sat in the parlor.

They traveled for days. Scott sneezed.
Some verbs that are normally intransitive will take a direct object if that direct
object restates the verbShedreamed a wonderful dream; He slept the sleep of the
dead; They talk the talk. Such direct objects are called cognate direct objects, since
the verb and the object derive from the same root word. Such constructions are
somewhat unusual and it's still legitimate to consider sleep, dream, and talk in-
transitive verbs. Even a sentence like She talked a blue streak does not change
the fact that talk is typically intransitive. The direct objects in Les sang a song
and They did the deed are also cognates, since they are simply a variation of the
verb, i.e., song derives from sing and deed derives from do.
There are a few intransitive verbs that can take a direct object, if that ob-
ject is very narrowly construed. Run (meaning to move the legs rapidly) is nor-
mally intransitive, but it can take the noun race as an objectFlorenceran a race.
Not surprisingly then, run can also take as its direct object any noun phrase
that refers to a particular race or type of raceFlorenceran a marathon/the 500
meter/the Bay to Breakers. Similarly, sing takes as its object any noun phrase that
refers to a particular type of songMatt sang a ballad/a blues number!a spiri-
tual/an aria.
Categories like transitive and intransitive are important because whether
or not a verb is transitive will have implications, not only for the rest of pred-
icate, but for the subject as well. Except for the case of passives, patient sub-
jects always have intransitive verbs, because patient subjects are not acting on
someone or something else but are themselves being acted upon. Agent sub-
jects on the other hand can co-occur with either transitive or intransitive verbs
Mary threw the ball; Mary yelled. Instrument subjects and causers will always
take transitive verbs because, in order to carry out these roles, they must be
acting on something else.
Often a transitive verb with an agentive subject will have an identical in-
transitive counterpart that of necessity takes a patient subject.
Yoko emptied the bathtub. The bathtub emptied.

The alarm cleared the room. The room cleared.
Hester dimmed the lights. The lights dimmed.
The cook thickened the soup. The soup thickened.
Orson opened the door. The door opened.
A few very old transitive verbs have a separate intransitive form which is
related to the transitive form but is not identical to ittofell/to fall; to set/to sit;
to lay/to lie. These verb forms pose problems even for native English speakers.
In comparing the forms in the following chart, ignore the |-s} ending on the
present tense verb forms.
Transitive Intransitive
Present tense Present tense

Marsha lays the book on the table. The book lies on the table.
Merle sets the glass on the shelf. The glass sits on the shelf.
The woodsman fells the tree. The tree falls.
Past tense Past tense
Marsha laid the book on the table. The book lay on the table.
Merle set the glass on a shelf. The glass sat on the shelf.
The woodsman felled the tree. The tree fell.
Note that the past tense of intransitive fall is identical to the present tense of
transitive fell. The present and past tense forms of transitive set are identical,
while intransitive sit has a distinct past tense form. The past tense of intransi-
tive lie is lay, making it identical to the present tense of transitive lay. It's no
wonder that many people don't know whether to say "I'm going to lay down"
or "I'm going to lie down" and for many speakers the distinction between lay
and lie has simply disappeared.
Ditransitive Verbs and Indirect Objects
There is a relatively small set of verbs in English that can be followed by two
objects; these two objects traditionally have been called the indirect object and
the direct object, although some grammarians simply call them objecti and ob-
ject2- I will use the traditional terminology. The direct object and the indirect
object are both structures within the predicate.
subject predicate
gave Marian my dictionary

indirect direct object
object
subject predicate
subject predicate
Gene sold a friend his condo

indirect direct
object object
Ditransitive verbs (di- is the Greek root for two) always involve a trans-
ference of possession of the direct object to a recipient, the indirect object. The
transference is often literalIhanded Mike the report, although sometimes the
transference is figurative or metaphoricalSheread me a fairy tale. Occasionally
the transference is pendingIoffered her chicken soup. Semantically, the indirect
object carries only the recipient semantic role. In a few cases that role is a neg-
ative one, i.e., the fact that the indirect object does not receive is underscored
The boss denied her a raise; They spared my aunt unnecessary pain; She refused the
beggar a meal.
Literal Metaphorical Transfer

transference transference pending
I gave Joanie the I read the kids a Max offered the kids
book. story. candy.
She handed me the She told her My sister owes me
shovel. employees a lie. $500.
I loaned my friend Opera gives me a I guaranteed Lara
money. headache. a raise.
He passed Max the Mary taught the I promised Sue a
potatoes. newcomers English. bicycle.
We fed the dogs I showed her my I wrote her a
salami. computer. letter.
Mark sold her his The rain brought He baked his dad
bike. us relief. a cake.
I brought Tania a She asked the teacher I bought the kids
sandwich. a question. a gift.
Vi served the She sent Jake her The boss assigned
patrons lunch. best wishes. me an office.
The child slipped The politicians fed I granted her an
her friend a note. us lies. interview.
Bill took his wife They extended me
some lunch. credit.
Negative transference
The agency denied They refused the They spared him

us aid. patient water. the details.
(There is sometimes a fine line between transference categories. Your judgments

may not match mine in every case. This is not a problem.)
Note that in the examples above, all the recipients (i.e., indirect ob-
jects) are animate, in most cases human. This isn't surprising since these
constructions all involve a transfer of possession (actual or potential) and
inanimate entities don't "possess" in the way living things do. Sometimes,
however, institutions or places are treated as collections of people1faxed
the White House my letter; I owe the University a lot of money; The Marlins
gave Miami their best. There are a few contexts in which we appear to use
give with truly inanimate recipientsIgave the furnace a kick; I gave my com-
puter a whack. But in these constructions there is no real transference; in
fact the direct object expresses the action and the verb itself is "light."
These sentences can be paraphrased as 1 kicked the furnace and I whacked
my computer.
While all ditransitive verbs express transfer or potential transfer of pos-
session, there is tremendous variation in just how that transfer is effected.
You can bring/give/ throw/slip/serve or feed Sally a sandwich and with each verb
the nature of the transfer changes. Similarly, you can hand/send/e-mail ox fax
Stuart a letter. Bring entails motion toward the speaker, while take entails
motion away from the speakerBringme a glass of water versus Take Richard
this sandwich.
Many ditransitive verbs are very old. Give, feed, bring, teach, tell, sell, ask,
and take all date back to Old English. But we do occasionally create new ones,
e.g., Azra faxed me the report; We telexed Trish the proposal; They UPSed us the
package.
Grammatically, a recipient can occupy one of two positions. It can appear
after the verb but before the direct object1gave my brother some money, or it
can appear after the direct object as a prepositional phraseIgave some money
to my brother. I will call the first type an NP (noun phrase) indirect object and
the second type a PP (prepositional phrase) indirect object. Instead of mark-
ing the indirect object with a suffix, which is the strategy exploited by many
other European languages, English signals indirect object status with word or-
der or with a preposition. When an indirect object occurs as a prepositional
phrase, the preposition is usually toI gave the book to Joanie; I read a story to
the kids and sometimes for 1 made a shirt for my son; I fixed lunch for my girl-
friend.
subject predicate
I handed Fred the sandwich

object
subject predicate
I handed the sandwich to Fred

direct object indirect
object
subject predicate
She made Susan a present

object
subject predicate
The preposition for is used in cases where the subject has created some-
thing to give the indirect object.
Ron baked a cake for Mary.

I knitted a sweater for Bill
Giovanni cooked dinner for the family.
My cousin fixed a bottle for the baby.
All of these sentences can be paraphrased by placing the indirect object directly
after the verbRonbaked Mary a cake, I knitted Bill a sweater, etc. When indi-
rect objects co-occur with created direct objects, transference is always pend-
ing. In Ron baked a cake for Mary, we do not know whether the intended recip-
ient actually came into possession of the cake.
Write is one ditransitive verb that creates a direct object, yet exploits to as the
preposition in the indirect object constructionSuzywrote a letter to Santa Claus.
While created direct objects almost always require for rather than to in a
PP indirect object, not all for indirect objects co-occur with created direct ob-
jects. In each of the sentences below, the indirect object can be expressed as a
for prepositional phrase, but the direct object is a patient.
I saved Jill a seat. I saved a seat for Jill.

Betty poured Bert some milk. Betty poured some milk for Bert.
She ordered Talia some software. She ordered some software for Talia.
I found you a sweater. I found a sweater for you.
Mickey fried Minnie an egg. Mickey fried an egg for Minnie.
There are a few indirect objects that can be expressed by of prepositional

phrases, e.g., Vivian asked the Dean a question versus Vivian asked a question of
the Dean.
Most truly ditransitive verbs require both a direct object and an indirect
object for grammaticality. While I handed Paulette the shovel is a perfectly
grammatical sentence, *I handed Paulette and *J handed the shovel are un-
grammatical. However, in many cases the indirect object need not be ex-
plicitly stated. Many ditransitive verbs can occur without an overt, explic-
itly stated indirect object. In each of the following sentences there is a covert
indirect object which can be determined by looking at the discourse context.
In the following examples, the discourse context appears in nonitalicized
brackets, while the covert indirect object is indicated by empty brackets
within the sentence itself.
[My boss wanted a reference.] The Dean wrote [] a letter.

[Donald needed a mechanic.] I offered [] my services.
[Alicia went to the Red Cross.] She gave [ ] blood.
[I wanted some potato chips.] Melissa passed [ ] the bag.
In each of the above examples the covert indirect object is "recoverable"

from the discourse context, e.g., The Dean wrote my boss a letter; I offered Don-
ald my services. Since a recipient is always animate (usually human), it is not
surprising that indirect objects are sometimes a covert, indefinite someone or
everyone. In Ana sold her house, we may not know or care who the specific buyer
was but we do know that there was one. In That child tells lies we understand
that the child in question tells lies to everyone.
It is rare for an indirect object to occur without an overt direct object. *Anne
gave the kids is an unacceptable sentence because it does not specify what the
kids received. The direct object can be omitted only in those few cases where
there is a conventionally understood, covert direct object. This direct object is
rarely if ever indefinite. In George read to the kids, both speaker and hearer as-
sume that George is reading a story or a poem to the kids, not the tax code or
the telephone directory. In Carrie wrote to her boyfriend, we assume that Carrie
is writing a letter, not a prescription or an examination. In I give to the United
Way, most of us know that the covert direct object is money. However, an indi-
vidual who did not recognize United Way as a charitable organization might
have trouble processing this sentence. In cases in which the direct object is omit-
ted, the indirect object is usually expressed as a prepositional phrase rather
than an NP; *George read the kids and *I give the United Way are ungrammatical,
although many speakers can say Carrie wrote her boyfriend.
DEGREES OF DITRANSITIVITY
It is somewhat misleading to label all the verbs discussed in this section as
ditransitive. As you saw above, some verbs are truly ditransitive, i.e., they re-
quire either an overt or covert indirect object. But fundamentally monotransi-
tive verbs sometimes take on a ditransitive role. While kick can be ditransitive
Rachel kicked Carole the ball, there is no evidence that kick requires a recipient;
Rachel kicked the ball is perfectly grammatical. Verbs of "ballistic motion" like
throw, toss, and kick are in general monotransitive, but they can take indirect -
objects. (Monotransitive means that the verb requires only a direct object; the
Greek root mono- means "single.") Verbs that can express their indirect objects
as for prepositional phrases are also fundamentally monotransitive. A speaker
can say I baked a cake or I built a birdhouse without suggesting that there is some
unexpressed recipient.
Monotransitive Ditransitive
Klaus tossed the bag into the trash Klaus tossed Frances the bag.
can.
Hillary threw the ball over the wall. Hillary threw George the ball.
Igor slid the box down the hall. Igor slid Irene the box.
I made an afghan. I made my uncle an afghan.
My grandad knits sweaters. My grandad knits me sweaters.
NOT ALL RECIPIENTS ALTERNATE

All of the recipients discussed above can alternate between an NP indirect
object construction and a PP indirect object construction. But there are a few
indirect objects that become problematic when paraphrased as prepositional
phrases. While I promised Luis a job is fine for all speakers, 71 promised a job to
Luis is odd for some. We refused the kids service and We charged them a fee are
fine but ?We refused service to the kids and ??We charged a fee to them sound odd,
if not downright ungrammatical. There are a number of indirect objects that
resist appearing as prepositional phrases, including most "negative" recipients.
I wished my opponent luck. ?1 wished luck to my opponent.

The Dean accorded Al a hearing. *The Dean accorded a hearing to Al.
They refused the refugees aid. ?They refused aid to the refugees.
I spared Meg the details. *I spared the details to Meg.
We charged the vendor a lot. ??We charged a lot to the vendor.
There are also a significant number of recipients that can be comfortably

expressed only by means of a prepositional phrase. (Some grammarians insist
that structures like these are not true indirect objects.)
She donated some money to ?? She donated the museum

the museum. some money.
Jackie whispered the answer ??Jackie whispered Raimund
to Raimund. the answer.
Al contributed some money *Al contributed the poor
to the poor. some money.
Penny returned the bicycle *Penny returned Kyle the
to Kyle. bicycle.
The boy surrendered the gun *The boy surrendered the
to the police. police the gun.
The shop delivered the lamps ??The shop delivered my
to my mother mother the lamps.
1 explained the problem to *I explained the Dean the problem.
the Dean.
The variability of these alternation patterns creates problems for both first and
second language learners. Non-native speakers of English and native-speaking
children often produce sentences like *He explained me the answer.
The problem here is that the grammatical category indirect object is not an
altogether coherent one in Modern English grammar. The confusion goes back
to the medieval period. In Old English, the recipient of the direct object was
usually in the dative case. This means that the indirect object noun carried a
set of suffixes that clearly distinguished it from the direct object. In addition,
the position of the indirect object in the sentence was fairly predictable; pro-
noun indirect objects almost always preceded the direct object and noun indi-
rect objects usually did. In 1066, the Norman French invaded England and, at
least among the members of the ruling class, there was a great deal of language
contact between French and English speakers. This contact affected English in
a variety of ways. For one thing, French nouns had no dative case; French ex-
ploited the preposition a ("to") in indirect object constructions and English
speakers gradually adopted this strategy without abandoning the old dative
forms. Eventually the special dative endings disappeared2 but Old English
word order persisted; in other words, the indirect object continued to precede
the direct object. But when the recipient was marked with a preposition, it re-
flected French word order, i.e., it followed the direct object.
Not surprisingly, most of the verbs that take only prepositional indirect ob-
jects came into the language after the Norman invasion, e.g., donate, report, ex-
plain, and most of the verbs that take NP indirect objects date back to Old Eng-
lish, e.g., give, feed, sell, bring, tell, buy. Often verbs that are semantically related
will have different indirect object constructions. Give, donate, and contribute
share many semantic features, yet, only give takes an NP indirect object and
has Anglo Saxon roots. Contribute and donate came into the language in the six-
teenth and nineteenth centuries, respectively. This does not mean, however,
that all verbs that entered the language after the Norman invasion take only
prepositional indirect objects. Consider She guaranteed Nick a spot, He bequeathed
us a fortune, and Carmela faxed Alex a memo. Both guarantee and bequeath are
French loan words and fax is obviously a very recent creation derived from the
noun facsimile. Conversely, there are a few very old verbs that require that the
"recipient" appear in a prepositional phrase. Say, which dates back to Old Eng-
lish, has always required that the recipient follow the preposition to I said
something to Jerome.
Because of these complications, grammarians don't always agree on how
to characterize the semantic category recipient grammatically. Some consider
only those recipients that occur directly after the verb to be indirect objects,
e.g., I gave Clarice some candy. Others categorize as an indirect object any re-
cipient that can even potentially occur as NP after the verb, e.g., I handed the
book to Sean, which can be paraphrased as I handed Sean the book. Still others
accept as indirect objects even those prepositional recipients that never appear
as NPs, e.g., I surrendered the gun to the police.
DISCOURSE FUNCTIONS OF THE INDIRECT OBJECT

Most grammarians subscribe to the no-synonymy rule in language. There
is a general assumption among linguists that no true synonyms exist among
words or structures. Why then do we have two ways to express recipients in
English? While I threiu Signe the ball seems on the surface to mean the same thing
as I threiu the ball to Signe, these two sentences are not quite synonymous. Speak-
ers who find I threw the ball to Signe but she couldn't catch it a perfectly acceptable
sentence often balk at ?I threw Signe the ball but she couldn't catch it. A number of
grammarians have pointed out that with certain verbs an NP indirect object re-
flects successful completion of the transfer while a PP indirect object is silent on
the issue. (For example, see Lakoff and Johnson, 1980, p. 130.) Thus, I taught my
students Swedish indicates the students actually learned Swedish, while I taught
Swedish to my students expresses only the attempt. The explanation for this phe-
nomenon is to be found in a general tendency in grammarthecloser an object
is to the verb, the more likely it is to be affected by the action of that verb. Thus,
when the indirect object follows the verb directly, the sense of a successful trans-
fer is stronger than when the indirect object appears later in the sentence.
Another piece of evidence in support of the no-synonymy rule is found in
discourse. We have already discussed the fact that topics are usually first in-
troduced in the predicate. A corollary to this generalization is that the newest
information in the sentence goes after all the given information. Where we find
the indirect object often depends on whether the recipient is new or given in-
formation. If the indirect object represents new information in a discourse and
the direct object represents given information, the indirect object will appear
after the direct object in a prepositional phrase. For example, assume that you're
engaged in a conversation with friends. You have already established that
Marcy owns a motorcycle and isn't riding it today. Someone says "She loaned
it to Jack." Jack is the new information here; she (Marcy) and it (the motorcy-
cle) have already been mentioned. As newly introduced information, Jack fol-
lows the pronoun it; 111 loaned Jack it sounds very strange. On the other hand,
if the direct object is the new information, it will appear after the indirect ob-
ject. Assume that your friends are wondering how Candace obtained her new
stereo. You clear up the mystery with "I gave her the money" I and her (Can-
dace) are given information and the money is new information. As new infor-
mation, the money follows the given information.
We see the same phenomenon in question and answer sequences. In re-
sponse to "What did you do with the report?" a secretary might say, "I handed
it to the boss." Here the report is given information (it was mentioned in the
preceding question) so it precedes the boss who hasn't been mentioned yet. If
the question had been "What did you hand the boss?" the answer might be "I
handed her the report." Here the boss is the given information, so her precedes
the report, which is new information. And of course when an indirect object pre-
cedes a direct object, it always appears in NP, not prepositional, form. We've
already discussed the fact that personal pronouns always encode given infor-
mation. Not surprisingly then, when an Indirect object is pronoun and the di-
rect object is a full noun phrase, the indirect object (given information) pre-
cedes the direct object (new information.)
In the following chart, given information is single underlined and new in-
formation is double underlined.
I loaned it to Jack. I loaned him the car.

Eileen gave it to the boss. Eileen gave her the report.
I bought them for Debbie. I bought her some marbles.
He sold it to my parents. He sold them a policy
Note that it is the final structure in each sentence that encodes new infor-
mation; note, too, that the new information is expressed by a full noun phrase,
not a pronoun. In column (a), the last structures are all indirect objects; in col-
umn (b), the last structures are all direct objects. Pronouns can occur in sen-
tence final position as prepositional indirect objectsI loaned the car to him; I
gave the report to her. But while such sentences are perfectly grammatical, they
are less common in discourse than sentences in which a pronoun indirect ob-
ject precedes the direct object. The following passages from Raymond Chan-
dler's novel The Little Sister reflect the typical position of a pronoun indirect
object. (Boldface added.)
They gave me his phone number at home. (p. 229)

"I paid you twenty dollars, iMr. Marlowe/' she said coldly, (p. 39)
Then she comes in and takes the twenty away from me gives me a kiss. (p. 89)
I handed him . . . the registration card. (p. 50)
Sentence final indirect object pronouns occur most often when a speaker
wishes to articulate some sort of contrast and the pronoun is stressedIbought
a car for them, not for him. However, direct object pronouns seldom appear last
in the sentence; while I handed Karen the book and I handed her the book are fine,
?I handed Karen it and II handed her it are somewhat less acceptable. (In British
English a sentence like I gave it him is perfectly grammatical, but in this case
the preposition to has been omitted in the indirect object construction.)
BENEFACTIVES
There is another construction containing the preposition for which is sim-
ilar but not identical to an indirect object. Consider the following sentences.
Leah raked the yard for the Jorge changed the sheets for
neighbors. the guests.
I mailed a package for Helen. Fritz hung the picture for
his father.
Kirby cleaned the car for Bert. 1 trimmed the trees for Yvette.
In none of these sentences can the object of the preposition for be moved
to occupy the position before the direct object. *Kirby cleaned Bert the car and
*Fritz hung his father the picture are absolutely ungrammatical. I mailed Helen a
package is grammatical but it means something quite different from the origi-
nal sentence. In a similar vein, Martha wrote a letter to her boss means something
very different from Martha wrote a letter for her boss.
In each of these cases the for prepositional phrase represents, not a recipi-
ent indirect object, but a benefactive; (ben- is the Latin root for "good"). In other
words, Leah raked the yard on the neighbors' behalf. In a benefactive construction,
the beneficiary doesn't receive the direct object, but rather benefits from some
action involving the direct object. Only ditransitive verbs can take indirect ob-
jects and only verbs that take a created direct object and few other verb types
can take an indirect object of the for variety. Benefactives, however, can follow
any number of transitive verbs. In fact, almost any transitive sentence with an
agentive subject can be turned into a benefactive. Benefactive is a semantic la-
bel; there is no separate grammatical label for such constructions.
Occasionally speakers make threats using a benefactive constructionI'll
break your arm for you [if you don't let go of me]. (These are sometimes called male-
factives, mal- being the Latin root for "bad/')
Recipients Benefactives
Lourdes fixed lunch for the kids. Lourdes fixed the computer
for Jay.
Stuart made a sandwich for Joyce. He made the bed for my
mother.
I built a birdhouse for Samantha. I painted the birdhouse for
Samantha.
I crocheted a scarf for Shirley. I mended a scarf for Shirley.
Teresa drew a tree for Trevor. Teresa trimmed the tree for
Trevor.
She wrote a script for the actor. She edited a script for the actor.
I got the book for Deb. I destroyed the book for Deb.
Copulas and Subject Complements
A copula (also called a linking verb) is neither transitive nor intransitive; it

represents a separate syntactic category. Be, seem, and become are just a few of
the copulas in English.
A copula can never stand alone in the predicate; it must be followed by
another structure. One cannot say *Betty seems, *Those buildings are, or *That man
became. Linguists routinely use the term complement to refer to any structure
that is required in a predicate for grammaticality. The obligatory structure af-
ter a copula is called a subject complement. When the subject complement is
an NP, it is a predicate nominative (or predicate nominal). Since predicate
nominatives are NPs that follow verbs in the predicate, they look at great deal
like direct objects.
subject predicate subject predicate
The difference here is that a copula does not transfer an action to a direct ob-
ject the way a transitive verb does. Unlike a direct object, a predicate nomina-
tive NP refers to the same entity as the subject NP. In the sentence I am a teacher,
I and a teacher are noun phrases that refer to the same individual. If a speaker
uses a transitive verb, e.g., I love a teacher, the hearer will assume that I and a
teacher refer to different people.
Subject complements can also be adjectives. When an adjective follows a
copula, it refers back to the subject of the sentence. Irt Some politicians are cor-
rupt, the adjective corrupt, which occurs in the predicate, describes the subject
some politicians. Such adjectives are called predicate adjectives, but despite this
label they never modify nouns in the predicate.
subject predicate
Be is the only copula that can take an adverb of location as its comple-
mentStuis in the basement; Tilly is on the golf course. *Stu seems in the basement
is ungrammatical. Other copulas can co-occur with an adverb of location only
when the adverb is preceded by a predicate adjective or predicate nominative
Tommy seems unhappy in that school. As you will see shortly, copulas involving
sensory perception can take as a subject complement a prepositional phrase
headed by the preposition likeThis liquid smells like turpentine; That cloth looks
like silk.
There are a very limited number of copulas in English and they fall into
just a few general semantic categories.
SENSORY COPULAS
oeachEach sensory perception has a copula associated with it. (Remember that
sense also has a verb form that takes an agent subject and one that takes
an experiencer subject.) Interestingly, in the case of copulas, the sensory per-
ception is not that of the subject of the sentence, but rather that of the speaker.
These copulas must be followed by an adjective, a prepositional phrase with
the preposition like, or, on rare occasions, a noun phrase.
The record sounds scratched. / That animal sounds like an elk.

Margie looks terrible. / She looks a mess. / That cloth looks like silk.
Your cabin smells musty. / This room smells like a barn.
This meat tastes rancid. / This squid tastes like rubber.
This cloth feels rough. / This lump feels like a cyst.
You can say This room smells without an overt adjective following the cop-
ula, but your hearer will presume the adjective bad. If you want to suggest any
other quality, you must include an adjective.
We have already seen that certain transitive sensory verbs have experiencer
subjects, e.g., Roger smelled smoke. In the examples listed above, the experiencer
of the sensory perception is unexpressed but is assumed to be that of the
speakerThat record sounds scratched [to me]. However, it's possible to over-
ride the presumption that the sensory perception is that of the speaker by spec-
ifying someone elseThe room smelled musty to Richard; The meat tasted rancid
to the cook; Becky sounded sick to her mother. In these cases the experiencer is
contained in a prepositional phrase. Miriam has the same semantic role in each
of the following sentencesMiriam coidd taste the spices in the soup; The soup
tasted spicy to Miriam. While transitive verbs can have experiencer subjects,
copulas cannot; when the verb is a copula, the experiencer must be expressed
by an overt or covert prepositional phrase.
STATIVE COPULAS
There are two copulas, seem and appear, each of which suggests that a sub-
ject has a particular quality or is in a particular statejoyceseems happy; Tom
appears satisfied. These copulas underscore the fact that the state is apparent,
but not necessarily real. Here, too, the perception is assumed to be that of the
speakerJoyce seems happy [to me], unless that assumption is explicitly can-
celedJoyceseems happy to Bill. Don't confuse copula appear with intransitive
appear, which has a very different meaningAghost appeared suddenly before us.
Seem and appear are usually followed by adjectives, although seem can also be
followed by the preposition likeShe seems like a nice person; This seems like the
only alternative. (The construction seems to be, as in She seems to be nice will be
discussed in Chapter 3.)
Copula remain is closely related to intransitive verb remain. In a sentence
like ]orgen remained angry, the copula indicates that a state persists. In a sen-
tence like Jeff remained in the room, the intransitive verb indicates that subject
persists in a particular location.
CHANGE OF STATE COPULAS

Some copulas suggest a change in the state of the subject. Most change of
state copulas are followed by adjectives which express the result of the change.
Become can be followed by an adjective or an noun phrase.
The milk turned sour yesterday. My husband is going bald.

Michelle became an architect. My grandparents grew old last year.
She became irate. Henry gets angry easily.
Turn constrains its predicate adjective more than other resultative copulas do.
Since it usually suggests a relatively rapid change of state, sentences like *He
turned tall or *The baby turned fat are unacceptable.
While copula turn cannot be followed by a noun phrase, turn into c a n
The frog turned into a princeJ~She turned into a lovely woman. Since the second NP
in each of these sentences has the same referent as the subject, it makes sense
to treat turn into as a two-word copula. (Multiword verbs will be taken up in
some detail in Chapter 3.)
(jg) COPULA BE
The most ubiquitous copula is be. Be in its various forms is the only cop-
ula that need not be followed by an adjective or a noun phrase. However, if
there is no adjective or noun phrase in the predicate, be must be followed by
an adverb of location.
I am angry. Mary was in the garden.

Gene is an engineer Her shoes were on the floor.
Those buildings are ugly. 1 am at the store.
Occasionally be is used to mean arrive and in these cases, be can co-occur

with adverbs of time, e.g., Becky was an hour late; Maxwell was on time.
Unlike the other copulas, be has little semantic content of its own. When it
is followed by an adjective, it acts as a signpost, directing the hearer to the qual-
ity described by the adjective; when it is followed by a noun phrase, it acts al-
most as an equal sign (Gene = engineer); and when it is followed by an adverb,
it acts as a locator. When be is followed by an adjective, it normally communi-
cates a stateThe Sears Tower is tall; Donald Trump is rich; Rosalind is kind. It re-
sembles seem and appear in this regard.
RESTRICTED COPULASSTATIVE AND CHANGE OF STATE

There is a small class of highly restricted copulas that co-occur with a very
limited number of subject complements.
The problems loomed large.

The children fell silent/asleep/ill.
The task proved difficult!impossible/insurmountable.
The kids ran wild.
These verbs are homophonous with other intransitive or transitive verbs, i.e.,
they are pronounced in the same way. But the meanings of the copulas are
rather different from those of their transitive or intransitive counterparts.
Clearly, copula fall does not mean to tppple but to become, and like become it
communicates a change of state. But fall often has negative or ominous over-
tones. He fell sick is fine but *Hefell well is impossible. Downward motion is fre-
quently used in English to suggest negative states or eventsShefell into de-
spair; His spirits sank; 1 feel downand copula fall often exploits this same
metaphor.
Intransitive loom can refer to physical objects or abstractionsAfreighter
loomed in the fog; Disaster loomedbut copula loom is usually associated with ab-
stractions and is almost always followed by large. Copula run does not neces-
sarily mean "run" in a literal sense, but rather suggests lack of supervision. The
children ran wild is closer to The children were wild than The children ran wildly.
Copula prove is closely related to its transitive counterpart. In the transitive sen-
tence The prosecution proved Jeffrey guilty, prove indicates that the prosecutors
somehow demonstrated Jeffrey's guilt, while in The job proved impossible, some-
thing demonstrates that the job is impossible.
Sensory copulas Stative copulas Change of state copulas
The wind sounds Maggie seems content. It turned cold last

loud. night.
This tastes awful. Your mom appears Wally got mad.
upset.
The task looked The world is flat. She became an
impossible to Joseph. attorney.
This plaster feels (Restrictive) They grew old.
cracked.
The fish smelled This problem looms The prince turned
rotten to the large. into a frog.
customer.
The disease proved (Restrictive)
incurable.
The passengers fell ill.
The copula in a sentence dictates the semantics of the subject complement.

The subject complement following a stative copula will reflect a stateThebaby
is fat; This milk smells sour. A subject complement that follows a change of state
copula expresses the resultant stateThe baby became fat; The milk turned sour.
Complex Transitive Verbs and Object Complements 49
Subject complementstative Subject complementresultative
Helena sounds angry. Helena grew angry.

Vera was a doctor. Vera became a doctor.
That music seems loud. The music got loud.
The weather looks bad. The weather turned bad.
Complex Transitive Verbs and Object Complements
There is a small set of verbs in English that can be followed by both a direct
object and an object complement. Object complements are adjectives or noun
phrases that describe or refer back to the direct object. The relationship of an
object complement to the direct object is very much like the relationship of a
subject complement to the subject.
subject predicate
I consider him immoral

direct object
object complement
subject predicate
consider him an idiot

direct object
object complement
Like subject complements, object complements can be stative or resulta-

tive. Those that are stative describe an existing state (or at least a state that the
subject of the sentence presumes to exist)Giselafound the conversation dull;
Wayne considered my candidate a loser. In sentences containing resultative object,
complements, the subject actually causes the direct object to undergo a change,
the result of which is then reflected in the object complementPierrepainted
his room purple; They appointed Sarah treasurer.
Resultative object complements always co-occur with agent, instrument, or
causer subjectsTracy's agent made her a star; The back hoe made the job easier;
Becky makes Sidney mad. Stative object complements typically occur with either
agentive or experiencer subjects1called his paintings ugly; I consider his paint-
ings ugly.
Object complementsstative Object complementsresultative
Dale called her boss a fool. Annie colored the sky orange.
The kids considered Lena They spoil their kids rotten.
crabby.
I like my coffee black. She made Lionel a supervisor.
He wanted his steak rare. He tied the rope tighter.
I prefer my eggs sunny side up. They elected her president.
She found the concert tedious. My sister named her baby
Hrothgar.
The boss rated her performance They christened the ship
excellent. the Titanic.
They deemed the school suitable. The citizens proclaimed him king.
The detective proved Dick I now pronounce you husband
innocent. and wife.
She hammered the metal flat.
DEGREES OF COMPLEX TRANSITIVITY

Many of the verbs listed above are truly complex transitive in that they re-
quire either an overt or covert object complement to maintain their original
meaning. *The citizens proclaimed him *I now pronounce you, *They deemed the
school, and *The detective proved Dick all require object complements to restore
grammaticality Consider means something very different in The kids considered
Lena and The kids considered Lena crabby; found means something different in She
found the concert and She found the concert tedious. In each of these examples, the
object complement is required to retain the original meaning of the complex
transitive verb. In sentences like They christened the ship, They elected her, and
The teacher appointed Sarah, there must be a covert object complement that can
be understood from the context.
On the other hand, some of the verbs in the chart above are basically mono-
transitive verbs that can be used in complex transitive constructions. They spoil
their kids and He tied the rope are perfectly grammatical without object comple-
ments. This pattern is especially common when the object complement de-
scribes a resultHewiped the table.cleflji; She drained the glass dry; We painted the
barn green; He beat his opponent bloody. The object complement can be omitted
in any one of these sentences without doing violence to meaning or grammar.
On a scale with monotransitive verbs at one end and complex transitive verbs
Marked and Unmarked Word Order 51
at the other, these verbs fall in the middle, behaving like monotransitive verbs
in some contexts and complex transitive verbs in others.
True complex transitive verbs (those that require an object complement)
tend to fall into a few general semantic categories:
appoint verbsjcrown,elect, ordain, proclaim, designate}

dub verbs{anoint,baptize, call, christen, crown, dub, label, pronounce}
declare verbs[find, judge, prove, think, declare, brand, rate, deem)
(These categories are based on Levin [1993, p. 47], although she does not use
the term complex transitive.)
Since both complex transitive verbs and ditransitive verbs allow the verb
to be followed by two noun phrases, there is potential for ambiguity. A num-
ber of classic bad jokes exploit this potential:
"Make me a milkshake/' "Zap, you're a milkshake!"

"Call me a cab." "Okay. You're a cab."
Marked and Unmarked Word Order
This chapter has been devoted to basic sentence types. Most of the sentences
discussed above can be reduced to a few basic patterns:
Transitive Subject + Verb + Direct Object

Intransitive Subject -f- Verb
Ditransitive Subject + Verb + Indirect Object + Direct Object
Copula Subject + Verb + Subject Complement
Complex Subject + Verb + Direct Object + Object Complement
Transitive
Note the consistency of word order in these sentences. The subject always
precedes the verb; the direct object follows the verb unless there is an inter-
vening indirect object. The vast majority of sentences in English reflect this
word order. Linguists call this word order "unmarked." There is nothing weird
about it, nothing about it that might attract a hearer's attention.
But sometimes speakers deliberately alter this standard word order to do
something special in the discourse. In other words, they "mark" their utterance
by employing nonstandard word order. Markedness plays an important role
in language in general. An unmarked structure is one that is usual or typical.
A marked structure, on the other hand, is noteworthy. Edwin L. Battistella
(1990) provides this real world example of markedness.
The unmarked style of dress for everyday affairs . . . is casual dress. To adopt
a formal style of dress for everyday affairsto go to the supermarket in a
tuxedo or to teach a class in an evening gown, for examplewouldbe unusual
behavior (the marked case) that would cause one to be singled out against the
background of unmarked casualness. (p. 5)
Since markedness stands in contrast to our normal expectations, a sentence

that exhibits marked word order signals to a hearer that this sentence is doing
something special in the discourse. As we have already seen, prototypical sen-
tences with normal word order are often used to make comments about top-
ics. But English is full of structures that do not make comments about topics.
We use language to solicit information, to exclaim about surprising events, to
point things out, to command.
Can you speak Urdu ?

Here comes trouble!
There is a strange man sitting in my bathtub.
Be quiet.
Significantly, none of these sentences has "normal" subject + verb + object

word order. Every one is marked in some way.
As you work your way through this textbook, keep this notion of marked-
ness in mind. While many of the sentences we encounter will have unmarked
word order, some will not, and those are the ones that pose the most interest-
ing problems for students of grammar. This issue of markedness will come up
time and time again.
Summing Up
As you can see from the above discussion, it is sometimes difficult to separate
structure from meaning. While we can define subject in grammatical terms, it
is clear that there are a number of semantic roles that are closely associated
with this grammatical category. We can also talk about the transitive verb in
strictly grammatical terms, e.g., takes a direct object, but certain semantic fall-
out is inevitable, e.g., transitive verbs never have patient subjects. Form and
meaning are inextricably bound.
We can identify a very limited number of basic sentence structures for Eng-
lish and these structures provide the basis for most English sentences, no mat-
ter how complex. The five basic sentence types listed above provide the scaf-
folding. In Chapter 2, you will explore the internal workings of the noun phrase.
In Chapter 3, you will see how the basic verb types can be expanded through
the use of aspect, passive voice, auxiliaries, and mood markers. In Chapter 4,
Summing Up 53
you will see how these basic sentence patterns can be expanded by a variety
of adjective and adverb constructions. In Chapter 5, you will learn how each
of the basic grammatical categories described abovesubject,direct object, in-
direct object, subject complement, and object complementcanbe expressed
by a number of different, sometimes highly complex clause constructions. But
the basic structure is always there, holding up the edifice.
2
The Noun Phrase
In the last section we examined the overall structure of the basic English sen-
tence. Apart from the verb, most of the structures discussed in that chapter
were noun phrases (NPs). As you saw, noun phrases typically function as sub-
jects, direct objects, indirect objects, subject complements, and object comple-
ments. (NPs also function as the objects of prepositions, but this will be taken
up later.) In Chapter 1, I defined a noun phrase very simply as a pronoun or a
noun plus its modifiers. But this definition glosses over some important ques-
tions, the biggest of which is "What exactly is a noun?"
This is not an altogether easy question to answer and there are a number
of ways we might go about it. The first is to identify a noun in terms of its
characteristic endings. In many languages nouns can be identified exclusively
in terms of their inflections. An inflection is any prefix or suffix that carries
grammatical information. Modern languages like Lithuanian and Russian and
ancient languages like Classical Latin and Sanskrit use inflections to indicate
the grammatical function of a noun (i.e., subjects take one set of endings, di-
rect objects another, and indirect objects yet another). These endings also re-
flect singular or plural status. Old English nouns also carried this kind of in-
formation, although most of these endings were lost by Chaucer's time in the
late fourteenth century.
Take a look at the endings for the Old English word for stone.
Grammatical function Singular Plural
Subject (nominative case) stan s tanas

Possessive (genitive case) stanes stana
Indirect object (dative case) stane stanum
Direct object (accusative case) stan stana s
As you can see, nouns performing different grammatical functions had different
55
56 The Noun Phrase
endings; only subjects and direct objects share the same forms. Note, too, that the
plural forms were different from one another, e.g., a plural subject looks different
from a plural indirect object, which looks different from a plural possessive.
In a language like Old English, form and function are inseparable. The form
of a noun dictates its grammatical function; the grammatical function of a noun
is reflected in its form. But this isn't true in modern English. With the excep-
tion of the possessive, you can't tell the function of a noun by its grammatical
form, since only the singular possessive {-s} ending and the plural subject/ob-
ject {-s} ending have survived into Modern English. But our modern posses-
sive and plural endings do help us identify nouns as a general category.
When new nouns enter the language, we routinely inflect them with the
plural {-s} endinggeeks,snafus, modems, etc. When an old noun takes on a new
function, confusion can arise. English speakers are still unsure about the plural
of computer mouse-, computer types usually opt for mice, but lay people some-
times exploit mouses.
While not all nouns can be pluralized (e.g., music, rice, furniture), most can.
Some very old English nouns are pluralized by internal vowel change
goose/geese, man/men, tooth/teeth or by an {-en} suffixchildren,oxen; but these
plural forms are no longer productive. This means that contemporary speak-
ers don't create new plurals by changing the vowel or adding {-en}. In a small
number of cases, the plural of a noun is identical to the singulardeer,sheep,
and these forms, too, are very old.
We can also attempt to identify nouns in terms of their meaning. For many
decades linguists rejected the old "a noun is a person, place, or thing" defini-
tion, arguing that it was too subjective and too limited. And there are certainly
problems with this characterization; it excludes abstractions like theology and
responsibility and references to internal mental states like thought and belief. But
in fact this old saw, repeated by generations of schoolchildren, contains more
than a grain of truth; nouns most often do refer to entities that have physical
reality. Consider this paragraph from Pigs in Heaven by Barbara Kingsolver
(1994). All of the nouns (excluding pronouns) are in boldface. (Boldface added.)
At a table nearby, a wife and husband are having a fight. They have on match-
ing outfits, jeans and fringed shirts that cowboys might wear, or people in a
cowboy-related industry. The woman has colorless flippy hair molded together
with hairspray so that it all comes along when she turns her head. The man
looks very old. (p. 132)
Out of the 15 nouns highlighted, 13 refer to concrete entities. Only fight and in-
dustry can't be characterized as people or things.
This pattern is widespread. One of the primary uses of nouns in everyday
discourse is to code "thing-like" entities. Our world is filled with people, crea-
tures, and objects and we use nouns to talk about them. It is no accident that
the first words toddlers learn are those that refer to physical things in their en-
vironmentmommy,cup, juice, doggie. This is not to say that words like hatred,
joy, and respect are not nouns; they certainly are. But more often than not the
The Determiner 57
nouns we use in everyday discourse refer to entities that have physical reality.
Significantly the more thing-like a noun's referent is, the more likely it is that
the noun can accept the characteristic noun inflections, especially the plural
marker. A table, a pencil, and a wagon have clear-cut physical reality and each
of these nouns can be pluralized. Music, respect, and insanity, however, are not
thing-like and they cannot be pluralized. This reflects only a tendency in Eng-
lish, not a hard and fast rule. There are nouns that refer to non-things that read-
ily pluralize thoughts, beliefs, ideas and there are concrete nouns that don't
oil rice, gold. The point here is that nouns tend to share a common semantics;
they often do refer to things (animate and inanimate) that have a physical re-
ality. The more thing-like a referent is, the more likely it is that its noun will
take nominal inflectional endings. (See Langacker [1987], Givon [1979], and
Hopper and Thompson [1984, 1985].)
Unfortunately, inflectional endings aren't a foolproof way of identifying
nouns. Some English nouns can't be pluralized and some rarely if ever carry
a possessive ending. Furthermore, there are many languages like Chinese and
Vietnamese in which nouns carry no affixes whatsoever. Semantic criteria are
problematic, too. But there is another way of determining noun status and we
spent most of Chapter 1 discussing it, albeit indirectly Nouns participate in
structures that have specific grammatical functions in a sentence.
An idiot scratched my car last night. Subject

They arrested an idiot in the parking lot. Direct object
She offered an idiot her car. Indirect object
She is an idiot. Subject complement
Tom considers his boss an idiot. Object complement
In a simple sentence, the head (i.e., central element) of any structure, which
can function as a subject, direct object, or indirect object, will be a noun. (Sub-
ject and object complements aren't really diagnostic, since adjectives can also
take on these functions.)
The Determiner
Nouns rarely stand alone; they are usually accompanied by modifiers. But since
the noun stands at the head of the noun phrase, it dictates which modifiers
may be used and it carries a heavy semantic load. If a noun phrase is stripped
of all its modifiers, it still has meaning:
All the beautiful trees were destroyed Trees were destroyed.
But if a noun phrase is stripped of its noun head, it will probably be impossi-
ble to interpret.
58 The Noun Phrase
All the beautiful trees were destroyed *All the beautiful were destroyed.
The most common noun modifiers in English are the determiners. While
an adjective is never required for grammaticality in an NP, determiners often
are. *Child put book on shelf is an understandable English sentence, but no na-
tive speaker would ever say it in normal conversation.
The determiner is a grammatical category that includes a number of rather
different kinds of words, all of which date back to Old English. The determin-
ers constitute a closed class; i.e., a class of words that will not admit new mem-
bers. Articles, possessive (genitive), and demonstrative forms are all consid-
ered determiners. These words constitute a single grammatical category
because they always occupy the same position in the NP; they always precede
both the noun and any adjectives. Furthermore, the noun can be modified by
only one item from this class. While this book, our house, and the motorcycle are
all acceptable NPs, an English speaker cannot say *the this book or *our a house.
The words in the determiner category are mutually exclusive. Whereas pos-
sessive determiners and the can precede either singular or plural nouns, a, this,
that, and stressed some modify only singular nouns, and unstressed some, these,
and those modify only plural nouns.
Determiners that modify Determiners that modify

singular nouns plural nouns
a house some houses

the potato the potatoes
this child these children
that plate those plates
his/her/its/their son his/her/ its/their sons
my / our cap my/ our caps
your doctor your doctors
some kid
The determiner category is fairly rich in meaning. These little function

words communicate a great deal of fairly complex information. We'll examine
the semantics and the discourse uses of determiners below.
ARTICLES
You are probably familiar with the category article, and you may have been
taught that a is an indefinite article and the a definite article. But what do
The Determiner 59
these terms mean? It turns out that they are very misleading. Most students
assume that the term "indefinite" means that the article and subsequent noun
don't refer to anyone or anything in particular. But that is seldom the case. In
There is a snake in my bathroom, the speaker is referring to a very specific rep-
tile; in I know a felloiv who always wears six ties, the speaker is referring to a
particular man with particular taste in clothes. There are, however, times when
the article a does not have specific reference, as in A robbery is committed every-
day in this neighborhood or I hate a crabby clerk. The grammatical context will
usually reveal if the reference is specific or nonspecific.
Article a with specific reference Article a with nonspecific reference
(a) Becky is dating a nice doctor. (b) Becky is looking for a nice doctor.
(c) She is slicing a juicy mango. (d) I enjoy a juicy mango.
(e) I see a red Porsche. (f) I want a red Porsche.
(g) I witnessed a bad crash. (h) I fear a bad crash.
In sentence (a) we assume that Becky is dating a particular nice doctor but
in (b) it seems that Becky is looking for any nice doctor. In (c) and (e) the speaker
is referring to specific entities and in (g) to a specific event. In (d) any juicy
mango will do, as will any red Porsche in (f). In (h) the speaker fears some-
thing that can't have specific reference because it has not occurred yet. An ut-
terance like "I was searching for a sweater" is potentially ambiguous. If the
speaker continues with "and I found it," the NP a sweater has specific refer-
ence; the speaker found the one s/he was looking for. But if the speaker con-
tinues with "and I found one," the NP has nonspecific reference; the speaker
found some sweater or other (Lambrecht, 1994, p. 80).
What then is the function of the article al Its primary function is simply to
introduce a noun phrase into the discourse. Not surprisingly then, a is one of
the ways speakers introduce new information into a discourse. Once a noun
phrase is introduced with a, a speaker (or writer) can use the or an appropri-
ate pronoun to refer to this entity.
Melinda bought a new house last week. The house is white with green trim.
A little brown puppy wandered into our yard last night. It was obviously
lost.
There is a new student in my class. She seems rather shy.
Some is usually considered the plural indefinite articleSomepuppies wan-

dered into our yard. In this context, the discourse function of some is identical to
that of a. As you will see later, however, some is also used with non-count nouns,
many of which never have a plural ending. Here, too, it is used to introduce a
noun into discourse but it does not suggest plurality in any wayIspilled some
milk; Let's listen to some music.
Stressed some can be used with singular nouns when a speaker wishes to
underscore the fact that the identity of the noun is unimportantSomesopho-
60 The Noun Phrase
more got hurt during football practice; My older sister is dating some boy. In both
these cases, the noun modified by some has specific reference, but the identity
of the referent is irrelevant to the speaker. Stressed some also serves to express
annoyance or contemptSomeidiot left gum on this seat.
In most cases, the cannot be used unless the person or object has already
been introduced into the discourse. In other words, the article the typically
refers back to something. This is another case of anaphoric reference. You
would find it baffling if, out of the blue, a friend said "The woman stole your
calculator." You would undoubtedly respond, "What woman?"
The article the can be used without first introducing the item into discourse
if there is only one such item in the immediate world of the speakers and they
share knowledge of its existence. We refer to the sun and the moon because we
all recognize their existence and there is only one of each in our sky. Future
space settlers living on Jupiter won't be able to refer to the moon. In a given
household, family members will put on the kettle, open the refrigerator, and read
the paper while lying in the hammock, because, as a rule, there is only one such
item in the house. If the family includes one infant, "The baby is crying" is an
appropriate observation, but if there are quintuplets, it is not. If you routinely
go to the same grocery store and financial institution, you probably refer to
them as the store and the bank. On the other hand, if you are shopping for a
mortgage, you may go a bank that you don't usually patronize. The use of the
signals that the referent should be identifiable to the hearer as well as the
speaker.
Sometimes the discourse itself will contain the information that allows the
hearer to identify the referent of the noun, even though the noun itself hasn't
been used. In the case of We could see Mt. Everest in the distance; the peak was
covered with snow, the hearer is expected to deduce that mountains have peaks.
By introducing Mt. Everest into the discourse, the speaker has indirectly in-
troduced its peak as well. If an acquaintance says "My wife was hit by a car
last night," he could go on to say, "The driver was arrested." The driver is in-
troduced into the discourse by inference; we assume that moving cars have dri-
vers.
In general, singular nouns cannot occur without a determiner. *Dog is in
the garden and *House is brick are ungrammatical. There are, however, some ex-
ceptions to this rule. Singular nouns that refer to abstract institutions rather
than physical structures can occur without determinersI am going to school
now; She was sent to prison for three years; He has left for church; Olympia is at-
tending college. Which school, prison, church, or college is immaterial. British
and Canadian speakers exploit this construction even more often than Ameri-
cans do; for example they go to hospital and attend university. On the other hand,
when any English speaker wishes to refer to a particular building, determin-
ers are requiredWe drove by the school; That prison needs repair; My temple
is on this street.
When a singular noun refers to the means by which an act is carried out,
it, too, occurs without a determiner. In Sally went by car or My parents travel by
train, the speaker is referring, not to a specific vehicle, but to an abstraction,
The Determiner 61
i.e., a means of transportation. We also send things by mail and make things by
machine. Even the noun bed exhibits this behavior. We go to bed but we buy a
bed and make the bed. In the first example, bed is an abstraction, not an entity;
in fact, we can go to bed on the floor or on the couch. Note, too, that when
such nouns are used in this abstract way, they cannot be pluralized. *1 am go-
ing to beds and *My parents travel by trains are both ungrammatical. You will
find that there are a number of abstract nouns that do not co-occur with the or
the plural marker*He is in the trouble; *The sincerity shows; *lsn't loves wonder-
ful?
Earlier, I noted the fact that nouns that refer to concrete entities are more
likely to carry nominal inflectional endings (possessive and plural) than nouns
that are abstract. We see the same pattern with articles. When words like school
train, and machine refer to concrete entities, they occur with the appropriate ar-
ticle. But when those same words are used to refer to an abstract institution as
opposed to a particular place, a means of transportation rather than a particu-
lar vehicle, or a means rather than a particular piece of equipment, the article
is often omitted. Like inflectional endings, articles tend to attach themselves to
nouns that refer to physical entities. But remember that this is only a tendency,
not a hard and fast rule.
DEMONSTRATIVES (AND DEIXIS)

Demonstratives represent another type of determiner. The demonstrative
determiners and the article the all derive from the same Old English part of
speech. It seems quite likely that the original function of this form was demon-
strative and that the definite article eventually evolved from this usage. The
function of demonstratives is to point items outthis book, that child, these
boots, those trees. Demonstratives reflect a quality called deixis. Normally a
word's meaning does not depend on who utters the word or on when or where
it was uttered. However, deictic forms change reference when circumstances
change. Some pronouns and some adverbs share the quality of deixis with
demonstratives. If I say I, I am referring to a different person than you are when
you say I. This is person deixis. If I say "Mable is arriving tomorrow" on a
Tuesday, you know that tomorrow refers to Wednesday But if I utter the same
words on Saturday, tomorrow refers to Sunday. This is temporal (time) deixis.
The spot where I am standing is here and, from my point of view, where you
are standing is there. But if I go to where you are standing, that spot becomes
here to me and the spot I have vacated becomes there. This is spatial (place)
deixis.
Demonstratives typically reflect spatial deixis. When I am pointing out
someone or something close to me, I choose this as my determiner; if the per-
son or thing is not so close, I choose that. To me, the book I am holding is this
book, while the one you're holding is that book. But of course to you, the book
you are holding is this book, while mine is that book. The plural forms these and
those work in exactly the same way Some languages have three or more dif-
ferent deictic forms to express relative distance. Japanese for example has one
62 The Noun Phrase
form for "near the speaker," one for "near the hearer," and one for "distant
from both" (Crystal, 1997b, p. 99).
Because deictic determiners locate entities in space, they are often used in
conjunction with physical gestures, e.g., a pointing motion or a turn of the
headThis desk is mine; That car over there is Sid's; The robber ran that way. If I
pick up a kitten and say "This cat is my favorite," I give the kitten proximity
by singling it out from the others. We often use deictics when we are demon-
strating how to do somethingYouadjust the fuel mixture this way or when we
critique another's actionsDon'ttry to remove the cork that way. In these cases
the deictic refers to a series of actions and in general speakers will use this to
refer to their own actions and that to refer to the actions of another.
Demonstratives also express temporal deixis. We often use this/these to re-
fer to recent events or ideas and that/those to refer to those more remote in time.
Your current vacation is this vacation, while last year's is that vacation; your most
recent proposal is this proposal, while the one you made an hour ago is that pro-
posal. The item that is most proximate in time or space will co-occur with this
and these.
It is often the case, however, that demonstrative determiners are more
anaphoric than deicticI'vesigned up for an advanced linguistics course next term.
This class is going to keep me very busy. An anaphoric demonstrative will some-
times refer back, not to an individual NP, but to a series of actions or events.
We see this pattern in the following passage from Kinky Friedman's novel God
Bless John Wayne (1996).
I made some coffee, putting a small bit of eggshell in with the grinds as was
the habit of my old pal Tom Baker. This little ritual . . . enriched the flavor of
the coffee, (p. 114)
INDEFINITE THIS
English speakers sometimes use this and these in non-deictic, non-anaphoric
ways. When someone says, "This guy walked up to me and slugged me," s/he
is simply using this to introduce the noun into discourse. When this is used in
this fairly specialized way, it is called indefinite this. (This is another case in
which "indefinite" is used inappropriately) Indefinite this has roughly the same
function as the indefinite article, except that it always has specific reference; a sen-
tence like *Marcy wants to marry this Australian, any Australian is ungrammatical.
Indefinite this seems to be a relatively new phenomenon. There is no known
record of it occurring before the 1930s (Ward, 1983, p. 94) and it is still very
rare in written discourse. It crops up a lot in casual conversation, however. The
following is from an actual interview with a 12-year-old boy.
. . . these two girls, they were like playing hide-n-go-seek, [and] this little boy
[and] this girl, they . . . came (Ward, p. 96).
This speaker uses both this and these to introduce new NPs into the dis-
course. A speaker is especially likely to use indefinite this or these (as opposed
\
The Determiner 63
to a or some) in cases where the speaker intends to continue speaking about the
referent of the NP at some length (Prince, 1981).
QUANTIFYING DETERMINERS
Most determiners express quantity, whatever their other functions in the
discourse. While a and some are used to introduce entities into discourse, they
also express the quantities "one" and "more than one," respectively. This and
these express deictic relationships but at the same time encode number. But
there are some determiners whose sole function is to express quantity.
Each, every, and no indicate how many individuals in a particular set are rel-
evant to the discourseHortensegave each child a pencil; They expelled every stu-
dent; No contraband was found on the ship. Each and every have specific reference.
Loosely speaking, you should be able to identify the children who received pen-
cils and the students who were expelled. No, of course, does not have specific
reference; it's impossible to refer to something that does not exist. Any is used
when a speaker wants to underscore nonspecific referenceGeoff will go to any
movie; Those kids will eat any kind of fruit. Because any has nonspecific reference,
it is often used in questions and negativesDoyou know any mechanics? I haven't
seen any dolphins; I don't want any coffee; Did the miners find any gold?
Either and neither are interesting determiners because the quantity they ex-
press has historically reflected the number two. Either, in cooperation with the
conjunction or, often refers to one out of two; neither in cooperation with nor
refers to none out of twoYou can have either tea or coffee; Neither Charles nor
Maggie was there. Many speakers do, however, use these forms to express num-
bers larger than twoEitherBill, Cathy, or Bertha will finish the project.
GENITIVE DETERMINERS
The forms my, our, his, her, ii , ^
miners called genitives. (Up until now I have used the more familiar label "pos-
sessive" for these determiners, but this term is misleading, as you will see
shortly.) Like the other determiners, these constitute a closed class of small func-
tion words. These forms are considered determiners only when they precede
a noun head1dislike his brother; Our pizza is here. The forms that follow cop-
ulas as subject complements (mine, ours, his, hers, theirs) are not considered de-
terminers, since they do not precede nounsThe book is mine; This hammer is
hers; That car is his. His is the only form that can be found in both positions;
in the other cases the genitive determiner is turned into a genitive subject com-
plement by marking it with a genitive (-s), e.g., their becomes theirs and her be-
comes hers. Genitives will be discussed in some detail later.
My, your, and our are deictic determiners. My always refers to the speaker,
our refers to the speaker and someone else, and your always refers to the
hearer(s). The third person genitives, on the other hand, have anaphoric refer-
ence. They cannot be used unless the entity to which they refer has already
been introduced into the discourse. (In the following examples the genitive de-
terminer appears in boldface and its referent is double underlined.)
64 The Noun Phrase
Dorothy is upset because her children are moving back into the house.
I really dislike Ned. His insincerity bothers me.
This typewriter is missing one of its keys.
INTERROGATIVE DETERMINERS
Like other question words in English, interrogative determiners typically
begin with the letters wh in written textsWhich child ate all the candy? Whose
car was stolen? What subjects do you teach? In each case the wh word stands for
one of the determiners discussed above.
1 choose this book. Which book do you choose?

This is my cat. Whose cat is that?
1 know the time. What time is it?
Which and what have slightly different uses. If the possible noun referents
are constrained in some way, which is the appropriate determiner. For exam-
ple, if you and your sister are looking at five cars on a showroom floor, you
might ask "Which car should we buy?" In other words, which is used when the
options are clear. When the options are not constrained, what is the appropri-
ate determiner.
Which dress shoidd I wear? What kind of shoes should 1 buy?

Which folder did you bring? Wliat projects have you started lately?
Which book did she borrow? What books have you read this year?
Which child is yours? What sort of person would do that?
Whose functions as a genitive and an interrogative determiner simultaneously.

Like all interrogative wh words, the interrogative determiner appears first
in the sentence. This will be discussed in more detail later.
Summary of determiners
Articles I own a tractor.

Some windows were broken.
The house is dirty.
Some woman took my parking place.
Demonstratives I don't like this movie.
Hand me that hammer.
Predeterminers and Postdeterminers 65
Summary of determiners (cont.)
These cookies are delicious.

I can't stand those people.
Quantifiers No dogs are allowed.
I gave each student a grade.
Every photograph was scratched.
Did you find any chocolate?
Genitives Whose hat are you wearing?
Our loss is your gain.
Interrogatives Which bicycle do you want?
Whose coat did you borrow?
What color do you prefer?
P r e d e t e r m i n e r s and Postdeterminers
Occasionally determiners will be preceded by predeterminers. All the words

in this category express quantityall,both, all multiples, and all fractions.
All the players left the field.

Half the students missed the bus.
Both my daughters like science.
This was one third the cost.
This car will give you twice the power.
The determiner can sometimes be omitted in such constructionsBothkids like

science; All jurors must report now.
Technically, all, half and both are predeterminers only if they directly pre-
cede the determiner or the noun. Constructions containing the preposition of
as in all of the players or both of my daughters don't contain predeterminers; in
these cases all and both are considered pronouns, which are then modified by
prepositional phrases. However, despite the difference in structure, it is clear
that the phrases all the players and all of the players are virtually synonymous.
This is one of the few instances in English when different grammatical forms
seem to yield the same meaning.
Some predeterminers can move into the verb phrase. Compare All the kids
have had the measles and The kids have all had the measles. Here all still modifies
kids even though it no longer precedes it. Both can behave in exactly the same
66 The Noun Phrase
wayBoth my nephews are attending MIT; My nephews are both attending MIT.
This phenomenon is sometimes called quantifier float, since the predeterminer,
which normally occurs before the subject noun head, can "float" to the right
of the subject or to the right of an auxiliary verb (if there is one).
t
There is also a group of words that can follow the determiner but must
precede all adjectives. Not surprisingly, these are called postdeterminers. Like
predeterminers, all postdeterminers are quantifying terms. Cardinal and ordi-
nal numerals fall into this category.
Those five administrators are in trouble.

The two women on the horse were yelling.
He just made his second big mistake.
Every tenth person will be chosen.
Cardinal numbers often occur without a preceding determinerThere are two

buzzards on the roof; Sixteen candidates are running for mayor.
Cardinal and ordinal numbers express specific quantities, while postde-
terminers like many, little, and few express nonspecific quantities
Her many friends deserted her.

Yd like a little butter.
The program has a few bugs.
Be sure to distinguish between postdeterminer little, which is clearly a

quantifying term, and adjective little which refers to sizealittle butter versus
a little girl Postdeterminers little and few express rather different meanings, de-
pending on whether or not they are preceded by a determiner. Joe has little faith
in the system reduces the amount of faith to almost zero, while Joe has a little
faith in the system projects a more optimistic outlook. Few behaves in exactly the
same way Oscar has few friends suggests a sadder state of affairs than Oscar has
a few friends.
A cartoon by Dan Piraro (1997) exploits this difference between adjective
little and postdeterminer little. The single frame shows a young girl sitting at
table set for dinner. She is asking someone to pass the mint jelly and the cap-
tion reads, "Tired of it following her to school each day, Mary had a little lamb."
Genitives 67
Summary of predeterminers Summary of postdeterminers
All the furniture was damaged. The one room in the basement
was flooded.
I dislike both those patterns. My second choice is vanilla.
Half her clothes were stolen. I know the five people in that car.
This is one third the cost. A few people showed up.
She put in five times the effort. I'm having a little trouble with
my printer.
The fact that determiners, predeterminers, and postdeterminers are said to

modify the noun in some way does not mean that they are peripheral. Tradi-
tional school grammars often treat modifiers as somewhat extraneous items.
This has led many English teachers to promulgate the notion of the "simple"
subject or the "simple" direct object, i.e., the noun without any of its modifiers.
This is extremely misleading. All the words in a structure are important; in fact,
overlooking modifiers can have serious consequences. Certainly No children are
allowed means something very different from Children are allowed. All the kids
can come means something very different from Half the kids can come. When we
study NPs that are complex clauses, the notion of the simple subject or simple
object becomes even more ludicrous.
Determiners, predeterminers, and postdeterminers are an extremely het-
erogeneous group semantically and you have undoubtedly noticed that there
are quantifying terms in all three categories. It is not always easy to pigeon-
hole these items. But while the boundaries between these categories are muddy
at times, together this collection of little function words provides a tremendous
amount of crucial linguistic information.
Genitives
You were briefly introduced to genitives in the determiner section. Genitives

take various shapes. They can be determinersher computer, their cabin, our
opinion; they can be proper nounsRosemary's baby, Nixon's pardon, Ms.
Trilling's book; or they can be full noun phrasesthe office manager's desk, a
child's toy, the tall guy's shoes.
Genitives often have internal grammatical structure. With the exception of
genitive determiners, genitives are noun phrases and each can contain its own
determiner, just like any other noun phrase. In a phrase like This boy's father,
this modifies boy not father; the genitive construction modifying father is actu-
ally the phrase this boy's. In a child's furniture, a clearly modifies child, since fur-
68 The Noun Phrase
niture does not occur with the indefinite article a. The entire phrase a child's
modifies furniture.
a child's furniture
A genitive phrase can contain another genitive phrase and that phrase can
contain another genitive phrase, and so on. In My aunt's boyfriend's mother's car,
the genitive phrase modifying car is My aunt's boyfriend's mother's; the genitive
phrase modifying mother is My aunt's boyfriend; and the genitive phrase modi-
fying boyfriend is my aunt. The genitive modifying aunt is the determiner my.
Here we have structure embedded within structure embedded within struc-
ture:
My aunt's boyfriend's mother's car
Each of these genitive phrases can be paraphrased by a single genitive deter-

minerhercar, his mother, her boyfriend, my aunt.
GENITIVE SEMANTIC TYPES

You may have been taught to call constructions like those discussed above
"possessives," but this label is often incorrect. Only a fraction of genitive con-
structions actually express a possessive relationship.
I will use the term possessive genitive only for those constructions that do
indeed describe a possession relationship. These can be paraphrased loosely
with the verb have or own.
Possessive Genitives
The child's bicycle was smashed to bits. [The child had a bicycle.]
Weifang's pencil fell on the floor. [Weifang had a pencil.]
Their yacht won't fit in this harbor. [They own a yacht.]
A bully stole my kids' cookies at recess. [My kids had cookies.]
Hamish's hair is black. [Hamish has hair.]
My mother is a surgeon. [I have a mother.]
In some languages (e.g., Chinese and Hawaiian), something that is seen as

permanently possessed by the possessor receives a special genitive marker. In
Genitives 69
these languages body parts and kinship terms are among the nouns that are
marked for inalienable possession. ("Inalienable" simply means that posses-
sion cannot be surrendered or transferred to someone else.) English makes no
formal distinction between alienable and inalienable possession, although the
semantic difference does have an effect on reflexive and passive constructions,
as you will see later.
In the following sentences the relationship between the genitive and the
noun is not one of ownership or possession.
Susan's application was denied.

Madonna's performance was outstanding.
Picasso's last painting was stolen from its owner.
Susan did not possess an application; she engaged in an activity by ap-

plying. It is even possible that no physical application form was involved.
Madonna did not possess a performance; she performed. Picasso did not own
the painting; he created it. Such genitives are called subject genitives because
the relationship of the genitive word to the noun it modifies is rather like the
relationship of a subject to its predicate.
Subject genitives
The police didn't believe Mary's story. [Mary told a story.]

Hemingway's novels are exciting. [Hemingway wrote the novels.]
The government was surprised by [He defected.]
his defection.
Carol resented the child's refusal. [The child refused.]
The Dean's lecture was boring. [The Dean lectured.]
Mozart's quartets are magnificent. [Mozart composed quartets.]
A sentence like Marge's new novel is on the table is potentially ambiguous. Is this
a novel Marge owns or one she wrote? The answer of course depends on the
real world context.
In some genitive constructions, the relationship of the genitive word to
the noun it modifies is like the relationship of a direct object to its verb. In
Max's promotion made him happy, Max is not doing anything or possessing any-
thing. Here the implication is that someone has promoted Max. The relation-
ship of Max to promotion is that of direct object to its verb. Max's is an object
genitive.
70 The Noun Phrase
-V-
Object genitives
The city's destruction was total. [Something destroyed the city.]

She was upset by that neighbor's [Somebody murdered that
murder. neighbor.]
Freddie's eviction shocked everyone. [Someone evicted Freddie.]
I was surprised by Nixon's pardon. [Someone pardoned Nixon]
(In paraphrasing a genitive, be sure to avoid the passive construction. Since the
affected party, not the agent, is the subject of a passive, a passive paraphrase
will give you the wrong result. If, for example, I paraphrase the city's destruction
as the city was destroyed by something, the city becomes the subject of the para-
phrase, not its object. But the city's is an object genitive, not a subject genitive.)
Sometimes a genitive can be ambiguous. A phrase like Sylvia's photograph
is ambiguous in three ways; Sylvia's might be possessive genitive (she owns
the photo), a subject genitive (she took the photo), or an object genitive (some-
one photographed her). The sentence Liz had heard about Jane's betrayal has two
potential meanings. If Jane betrayed someone, the genitive is a subject geni-
tive; if someone betrayed Jane, the genitive is an object genitive. The sentence
can be "disambiguated" if the genitive construction also includes a preposi-
tional phrase that acts as a patient, as in Liz had heard about Jane's betrayal of her
friends. This is a clear example of how the grammar of a structure and its se-
mantics can diverge. Grammatically Jane's betrayal of her friends is an NP con-
taining the noun head betrayal which is modified by the genitive Jane's and the
prepositional phrase of her friends. Semantically, however, Jane('s) is acting like
an agent subject, betrayal is acting like a verb, and of her friends is acting like a
patient direct object. Similarly, if Jane is the one being betrayed, the sentence
can be disambiguated by including an agentLizhad heard about Jane's betrayal
by her boss. (Although you are accustomed to thinking of agents as subjects
and of patients as subjects or objects, agents and patients do occur in preposi-
tional phrases. You will see more of this in Chapter 4.)
Nouns that are modified by subject and object genitives are often, but not
always, deverbal nouns, i.e., nouns derived from verbs. Betrayal, refusal, evic-
tion, and destruction are all created from verbs by the addition of a suffix; the
nouns murder and pardon derive from identical verb forms. Each of these nouns
still carries some verbal force and it's not surprising that their genitive modi-
fiers behave rather like subjects and objects.
Genitive nouns are not always marked by {-s}. In Old English, most geni-
tives were marked with inflectional suffixes but after the Norman invasion that
pattern changed somewhat. French genitives have always been prepositional
constructions, e.g., la maison de Marie ("the house of Marie"), and as a result
of the language contact between French and English after the eleventh century,
Genitives 71
Modern English uses both the inflection and the preposition to mark genitive
relationships.
Entities fairly high on the animacy scale, people and higher order creatures,
require an inflected possessive genitiveTeresa's book, the dog's dish, the bird's
perch. Inanimate nouns typically take an of genitivetheshape of the rock, the
color of that hat, the top of the table. There are, however, many contexts in
which the use of an inflected genitive with an inanimate noun is perfectly ac-
ceptableThebuilding's design was very functional. The of genitive is almost never
used to modify a human possessor. *The coat of Jesse and *the office of Marilyn
are ungrammatical, but Spanish and French speakers who are learning English
as a second language often make this very mistake because such prepositional
constructions are required in the Romance languages.
The of genitive is called a periphrastic genitive. The term periphrastic is
used to describe a construction that uses extra words rather than an inflectional
suffix to communicate grammatical information. Periphrastic is a grammatical
term; it has nothing to do with the semantics of the genitive construction. A
genitive of any semantic type can theoretically be a periphrastic genitive. As
you will see later, English has a number of non-genitive, periphrastic con-
structions as well. (In a nontechnical context, the term periphrastic refers to any
kind of circumlocution.)
While the periphrastic form of the genitive can be used with any seman-
tic type, it is most often used when the noun being modified is inanimate. For
this reason some genitives are more likely to be periphrastic than others. Gen-
itives that reflect part/whole relationships and measurements are frequently
periphrastic.
When a periphrastic genitive expresses a part / whole relationship, the noun
phrase being modified is the part and the NP within the prepositional phrase refers
to the wholethelegs of the table, the side of the cabinet. Of course, inflected geni-
tives can express part/whole relationships, too, and here the inflected noun (or
genitive pronoun) refers to the wholethebook's cover, a car's interior, the dog's tail.
the top of the table the dog's tail

[part] [whole] [whole] [part]
Body parts like the dog's tail are sometimes considered part/whole genitives and
sometimes (inalienable) possessive genitives. Either analysis can be supported.
Part/whole genitives
The roof of the house blew off during the big storm.
That woman scratched the hood of my car with her keys.
The tree's branches swayed in the wind.
My car's battery is dead. / Its battery is dead.
72 The Noun Phrase
Genitives of measure have an interesting history. In Old English, the plural

genitive marker was not {-s} as it is in Modern English, but rather a vowel, usu-
ally -a. (Revisit the Old English word for stone at the beginning of this chap-
ter.) Sometime later, vowel suffixes were lost in English and so the plural gen-
itive had no ending at all. Eventually most plural genitives took on the (-s)
genitive marker. However, in many regions of the United States, you can still
hear speakers say "He lives three mile down the road" or "That ceiling is ten
foot tall." And we all use the old genitive of measure in expressions like "I'm
five foot four." The lack of a plural marker on mile and foot is a remnant of this
ancient form. We see the same phenomenon in a nine inch stick and a two hour
lecture; *a nine inches stick is completely ungrammatical.
In genitives of measure, the measurement term is the noun head and the
entity being measured always takes inflectional or periphrastic genitive form.
the length of this room the baby's length

[measurement term] [entity being measured] [entity being measured] [measurement term]
Genitives of measure
None of my students knows the circumference of the earth.

The length of the trial surprised the jurors.
She calculated the weight of the shipment.
I was intimidated by the man's size.
Do you know Sally's weight?
There are genitive types that have not been discussed here, many of which
are hard to characterize semantically. Consider the semantics of a winter's day,
a girl's school, for pity's sake, an hour's run. None of these fits comfortably in the
categories described above. For example, a winter's day and an hour's run can
be best paraphrased with adverbsaday in winter, run for an hour. As you can
see, the semantics of genitives is very complex. Nevertheless, this brief dis-
cussion should give you a good sense of the richness of the category
Summary of genitive semantic types
Possessive Carol's suit was wrinkled.

The child's face was sunburned.
Subject Frank Lloyd Wright's homes are priceless now.
The boy's lie outraged his mother.
Genitives 73
Summary of genitive semantic types (cont.)
Object Daphne's promotion pleased everyone.

Victoria was upset about the rejection of her proposal.
Part/whole The book's cover was torn.
The roof of the barn blew off.
Measure The weight of the cargo was calculated.
DOUBLE GENITIVES
English speakers sometimes exploit double genitive constructions, con-
structions in which the genitive is marked both inflectionally and periphrasti-
cally. In I am reading a novel of Austen's, Austen is marked by {-s} and at the
same time occurs in an o/prepositional phrase. In other words, Austen is marked
genitive twice.
a novel of Austen 's
Such constructions are highly constrained in terms of form. The noun head
is usually indefinite, i.e., preceded by the article a. The genitive NP (i.e., the
NP carrying the {-s} suffix) must have highly specific reference; it often con-
tains a pronoun or a proper noun.
A friend of Bill's is coming over later.

An idea of yours has been adopted by the boss.
An admirer of my mother's sent her a dozen roses.
*The friend of Bill's is coming over is ungrammatical as is *A friend of a guy's is

coming over.
Normally, double genitives are used when a speaker wishes to refer to one
of a class of individuals. Expressions like a friend of mine, a fan of Reba's, or a
student of hers are perfectly acceptable, but ?a husband of mine and ?a car of Reba's
are odd. The size of the category seems to be a constraining factor here. An in-
dividual might have lots of friends, fans, and students, but a woman typically
has only one husband and most of us have only one or two cars. Anna
Wierzbicka has also argued that the double genitive "is particularly suited to
collective categories, where all members can be viewed as equidistanced with
respect to the person who provides the point of reference" (Wierzbicka, 1997,
p. 43). In other words, the members of the category are undifferentiated. Speak-
ers of English avoid sentences like A child of mine gave me that necklace (even if
the speaker has many children), precisely because children are not undifferen-
tiated in the way that shirts or fans are.
74 The Noun Phrase
Surprisingly, demonstrative determiners can appear in the noun head of a

double genitive construction.
I can't stand those cats of Susan's.

That music of Stan's is simply awful.
This idea of theirs is great.
In these sentences the NP is highly definite; the speaker knows that the hearer
is familiar at some level with the cats, the music, and the idea. Constructions
like these are often used emphatically. I can't stand those cats of Susan's sounds
much stronger than I can't stand Susan's cats. In fact, even a noun like child can
be used in an emphatic double genitiveThatchild of mine will drive me insane!
(The noun head in a double genitive construction can sometimes be preceded
by the definite article the when the genitive is followed by a restrictive relative
clause The friend of mine who gave me this dress wants it back. Relative clauses
will be explained in Chapter 5.)
GROUP GENITIVE
In Old and Middle English the genitive marker was always attached to the
noun head being made genitive. The Queen of England's robe would have been
the Queen's robe of England. In the modern version England carries the genitive
marker, even though it is not England's robe. The Chaucer story which mod-
ern readers know as The Wife of Bath's Tale was in Chaucer's manuscript The
Wyfes Tale of Bath. In the seventeenth century, a group genitive developed
whereby the entire noun phrase receives the genitive marker[the Queen of
England]'s robe. Today, complex constructions are often marked with the geni-
tive, especially in casual speech.
the dentist who lives around the corner 's car
A periphrastic paraphrase makes it clear exactly which part of the structure is

receiving the genitive markerThis is the car of the dentist who lives around
the corner.
Humorist Dave Barry (1997) pokes fun at this construction in his newspa-
per column, "Mr. Language on the butchered apostrophe." (Underlining
added.)
Q: Recently, did your research assistant Judi Smith make a grammatically in-
teresting statement regarding where her friend, Vickie, parks at The Miami Her-
ald?
A: Yes. She said, quote: "She comes and parks in whoever's not here's space
that day."
Proper Nouns 75
Q: Can that sentence be diagramed?

A: Not without powerful pharmaceuticals, (p. 7)
While group genitives may not be acceptable in most forms of edited Eng-
lish, they are quite common in informal discourse.
Generic Reference
Normally the article a refers to one entity but in a sentence like A manta ray is
a dangerous creature, the speaker is using the indefinite article to refer to the en-
tire class of manta rays. The definite article the typically refers to specific enti-
ties in discourse, but in The bear is an omnivore, the speaker is referring to the
species as a whole, not a specific animal. In these sentences the articles the and
a have generic reference.
Plural nouns without determiners can also have generic referenceBoys
will be boys; Cobras are beautiful; Italians are very hospitable. When a determiner
is added, such NPs typically cease to have generic reference and the resulting
sentence often sounds odd The cobras are beautiful; ?The boys will be boys; ?The
Italians are very hospitable.
Not surprisingly, the predeterminer all can also be used to refer to all the
members of a class but only when it occurs without a determinerAllcamels
spit; All two-year-olds are defiant. When a determiner is added, the generic ref-
erence is canceledAll the camels spit; All the two-year-olds are defiant.
As you can see, there are four distinct strategies for communicating generic
referenceplurality, the indefinite article, the definite article, and the prede-
terminer all. Not all of these strategies work in all situations. We can say The
Bachman's warbler may be extinct and Bachmans warblers may be extinct but not
*A Bachman's warbler may be extinct.
Proper Nouns
Nouns allow us to talk about the people, things, and events in our world. Some
things are especially familiar to us, notably the people and places we see every
day, and it is not surprising that humans have always assigned special labels
to these, i.e., names.
Linguists typically use the term proper noun for "names." This term is
somewhat problematic, however, because we use it rather differently than do
English teachers or other nonlinguists. Traditional grammar books routinely
defined a proper noun as a word or words that refer to a specific person, place,
or thing. But it is possible to refer to something very specific without ever us-
ing a proper noun, e.g., the woman with blue hair who is standing on a chair in the
back row. Many students define proper nouns in terms of capitalization, but of
course we don't speak in capital letters and capitalization rules change from
76 The Noun Phrase
generation to generation and from language to language. In modern German,

for example, all nouns are capitalized. Prior to the twentieth century, English-
speaking writers routinely capitalized nouns that were not names. William Byrd
II, a highly educated early eighteenth-century American writer, capitalized Pipe,
Eyes, Expectations, Vegetable, Gunpowder, Irony, and Tongue. The Declaration of In-
dependence, written by Thomas Jefferson and edited by the Continental Con-
gress, declares that
all men are created equal, that they are endowed by their Creator with certain
unalienable Rights, that among these are Life, Liberty, and the pursuit of Hap-
piness. (Grob and Beck, 1963, p. 187)
The nineteenth-century romantic poet Percy Bysshe Shelley capitalized Silence,

Earth, Poet, Spirit, and Death. Capitalization is merely an editorial convention
and such conventions change fairly quickly.
Clearly, we need a more precise definition for the term proper noun. Lin-
guists characterize proper nouns in two ways. The first is semantic. Linguists
are fond of saying that proper nouns have unique reference. But what does this
mean? There are tens of thousands of Maria Garcias in the world and as many
John Smiths, so how can such names have unique reference?
Proper nouns have unique reference only in those cases in which both
speaker and hearer are familiar with the referent at some level. You wouldn't
approach a stranger and immediately begin talking about Henrietta and Ralph
without any indication of who these people were. Proper names have unique
reference only in a particular setting. Alice Walker, for example, has unique ref-
erence in the canon of American literature but not in the English-speaking world
at large. There are many Ronald Reagans in the world but in the context of mod-
ern American history this name refers to a single individual.
If a speaker wishes to use a proper name that is unfamiliar to the hearer,
s/he will typically introduce it into the discourse by explaining the reference
in some way All of the passages below are from Patricia Cornwall's novel From
Potter's Field (1995). In each passage the proper noun is double underlined and
the information that identifies that proper noun is single underlined. (Under-
lining added.)
All of Gault's victims were sitting, heads bowed, hands in their laps. . . . The
one exception was a woman prison guard named Helen, (pp. 23-24)
. . . we were greeted by a woman in her fifties with dark hair, a wise face, and
tired eyes. . . . She introduced herself as Commander Frances Penn of the New
York Transit Police, (p. 25)
Later, I drove Lucy and Janet to work with me and left them at the office with
Fielding, my deputy chief, (p. 252)
Before using a proper noun, a speaker must assess the knowledge of the
hearer. An American can freely use the proper noun Bill Clinton without elab-
Proper Nouns 11
oration but the name Janos Kadar would probably require some explaining.
(Kadar was the premier of Hungary from 1956-58 and 1961-65.) Upon hear-
ing Paris, most of us think of the capital of France, but someone living in Honey
Grove, Texas, would be more likely to think of the town just up the road. Celia
Cruz is a household word among salsa fans in Miami but it would probably
draw blank looks on the south side of Chicago, where blues men like B.B. King
and Buddy Guy are cultural icons.
The context in which a proper noun will have unique reference depends
on many factors. Occasionally, an individual is so famous within a culture that
just the first name is adequateMichelangelo, Evita, Judas. Jesus generally has
unique reference in Protestant northern Europe but not in Catholic Hispanic
culture. Usually a first name works in an extremely limited contextafamily,
a club, a small group of friends. When there was only one John in an Anglo-
Saxon village, no other designation was necessary. When a second John moved
to the village, the first might have become John the brewer and the second John
the baker, ultimately John Brewer and John Baker. Scores of English surnames
derive from tradesShoemaker, Smith, Weaver, Webster (a female weaver),
Brewster (a female brewer), Wright, Miller, Cook, Cooper, Fowler. Middle
names and designations like John Brewer, Jr. or John Brewer III enhanced the
social utility of proper names. In the United States, probably the only desig-
nation that carries true unique reference these days is one's social security
number.
In essence, a proper noun is a special shorthand. Instead of referring to
someone as the thirty-seventh president of the United States, I can simply say
"Richard Nixon." The phrase "the thirty-seventh president of the United States"
also has unique reference, but it is a cumbersome and arcane way to refer to
an individual. Similarly, I could refer to New Orleans, Louisiana, by providing
its longitude and latitude, but while this would identity it uniquely, it would
seriously impede communication.
Linguists also categorize proper nouns in terms of their grammatical char-
acteristics. Common nouns may or may not occur with a determiner, depend-
ing on the grammatical context. Proper nouns, however, are invariable in this
regard. If a proper noun occurs with a determiner (almost always the article
the), it will always occur with that determiner. If it occurs without a determiner,
it will never take a determiner. Thus, we always refer to the Hague, the Nether-
lands, the Midlands, or the Midwest, but never to *the Chicago or *the Nigeria. Sim-
ilarly, if a proper noun ends in a plural {-s}, it will always do so; there is no
contrasting singular form. We say the Netherlands but never *the Netherland.
Most proper nouns, especially names of people, are invariably singular in form.
One of the reasons that determiner the doesn't co-occur with proper nouns
in English is that the definite article is used to express the fact that both speaker
and hearer are familiar with the referent in question. The very use of a proper
noun assumes that the referent is uniquely identifiable to both the speaker and
the hearer. (The fact that some proper nouns invariably include the as part of
the "name" is a different matter.) Be aware, though, that some languages like
Greek do use the definite article with proper nouns, even the names of people.
78 The Noun Phrase
There is one class of proper nouns in English in which the article the is in-
variably included as part of the name. These are proper noun phrases, the heads
of which are common nouns in other contextstheBrooklyn Bridge, the Empire
State Building, the Snake River, the Love Boat, the Red Sea, the Rolling Stones. Be-
cause the common nouns bridge, building, river, boat, sea, and stone do co-occur
with the, it seems natural to include the article, even when these words appear
in proper noun phrases. This creates an interesting contradiction in written
texts. In these phrases the is invariably part of the proper noun, yet editing con-
vention dictates that the not be capitalized. (There are common noun heads that
occur with the in some proper nouns and not in otherstheBay of Fundy ver-
sus Biscayne Bay.)
In some cases the is part of the proper noun simply by virtue of a naming
convention. Ship names for example often include the articlethe Titanic, the
Queen Mary. In the United States, the acronyms of broadcasting companies do
not contain the articleNBC, CBS, PBS, while in Great Britain they dothe
BBC.
Obviously, there are occasions when we do say things like the Miami of my
childhood, all the Susans in the class, or the two Georges in the family. But here Mi-
ami, Susan, and George have lost their proper noun status. They do not have
unique reference in these contexts and that is why we find determiners and
plural markers occurring with these forms. (While Miami, Susan, and George
are not technically proper nouns here, they are of course still capitalized in
written texts.)
N o n - C o u n t Nouns
While the ability to pluralize is one of the distinguishing characteristics of nouns

as a class, not all nouns have contrasting singular and plural forms. Phrases
like *two rices, *six sands, and * three measles are ungrammatical. Nouns that can-
not be directly preceded by cardinal numbers are called non-count nouns.
(Many grammar books use the term mass noun but this term is a bit mislead-
ing because some of the nouns in this category don't refer to "masses/7)
Many non-count nouns are concrete, i.e., they refer to things that have a
physical reality. In order to count a concrete, non-count noun, a speaker must
choose a partitive, which will usually be; a container or a measurement of some
kindfour pounds of rice; six buckets of sand; three yards of silk; a carton of
milk. There are actually a limited number of partitives; some are very general
and can be used with a wide variety of non-count nouns, while others can be
used with only a few. Most partitives of weight and measurement are quite
flexible. We can have two pounds of anything that can be weighedsalt,flour,
oats, oregano, mercury, etc. We can have four gallons of anything that is liquid
or suitably viscouswater,ketchup, gas, oil, milk, molasses. Some partitives
are much more limited. Only a few things are counted in bars (soap, gold, choco-
late), lumps (sugar, coal), or sticks (gum, butter, dynamite). Only paper is
counted in reams and only bread is counted in loaves.
Non-Count Nouns 79
Because concrete, non-count nouns cannot be counted without partitives,

they don't co-occur with numerals or the article a, which entails the meaning
one*a gold, *two dynamites. A speaker can use a non-count noun with a nu-
meral or the article a only when a partitive is conventionally understood. When
you ask a waiter for "two coffees," he understands that you mean two cups of
coffee, not two pounds or two urns. If you ask a bartender for a beer, she will
assume that you want a single serving (a can, a bottle, or a mug); she won't
bring you a keg. The partitive can also be omitted if the speaker is referring to
types. If I tell you that my deli sells fourteen cheeses, you know that I mean
fourteen types of cheese; if your cousin says that her local pub has twenty im-
ported beers on tap, you know she means brands of beer.
Although abstract non-count nouns do not refer to concrete entities, they
sometimes occur with partitives, too. These partitives are usually rather spe-
cializedascore of music, two works of art, three games of chess.
CATEGORIZING NON-COUNT NOUNS

It is not always possible to explain why a given noun is non-count rather
than count. Sometimes a noun that is non-count in one language will be liter-
ally translated by a noun that is countable in another language. The key does
not lie in the distinction between abstract and concrete nouns. There are a num-
ber of abstract non-count nouns, e.g., music, sincerity, greed, but there are also
some abstract count nouns, e.g., plans, ideas, wishes, and convictions. Further-
more, many concrete entities are expressed by non-count nounspliers,trousers,
sand, linens, milk, furniture.
But the assignment of nouns to the non-count category is not altogether
arbitrary. Anna Wierzbicka (1988b) has noted that in English some non-count
nouns can be divided into certain fairly coherent semantic categories. She notes
that many non-count nouns are "arbitrarily divisible." If you physically divide
water into any number of parts, each of those parts is the same and each is still
water. On the other hand, if you divide a chair into parts, the parts are differ-
ent in form and soon the entity is no longer a chair. If you divide the chair of-
ten enough, even the parts will become unrecognizable. Many non-count nouns
are arbitrarily divisible, including liquids, gasses, and substances composed of
very small particles like salt and sand. These are the kinds of non-count nouns
that might reasonably be called "mass nouns."
Foodstuffs represent an interesting subset of the "arbitrarily divisible" cat-
egory. There are many cases in which food on the hoof or on the vine is a count
noun while the same food on the plate is expressed by an identical non-count
noun. I have five pumpkins and two watermelons in my garden but I am eating
some pumpkin and some watermelon. Mary owns three lambs but she had lamb for
dinner. Pumpkins, watermelons, and lambs are discreet, identifiable entities in
nature. However, when they are cooked, they lose their discrete boundaries.
Furthermore, most of us would never eat a whole pumpkin or a whole water-
melon at one sitting, but we regularly consume entire peas, olives, and straw-
berries, all of which are count nouns, even when they appear on a plate. You
80 The Noun. Phrase
may eat four radishes which are small and discrete, but you consume some horse-
radish, because the root from which it is made loses its boundaries when it is
ground up.
Wierzbicka has noted a second major non-count category that includes
words like furniture, crockery, linens, silverware, jewelry. Each of these nouns rep-
resents a category of disparate items. Furniture includes chairs, beds, dressers,
tables, lamps; silverware includes knives, forks, and spoons; and jewelry in-
cludes bracelets, necklaces, rings, etc. While knives, spoons, and forks have dif-
ferent configurations, they are all implements used for eating. Rings, necklaces,
and bracelets look very different, but they are all used to decorate the body
Plates and bowls have very different shapes, but both are designed to hold
food. In each of the above examples, the non-count noun represents a category
of physically different items, all of which have roughly the same function. It is
interesting to note that while the inclusive category is non-count, the subcate-
gories are count nouns
jewelryone ring, six bracelets, two necklaces

silverwareone fork, two spoons, six knives
linens two sheets, one table cloth, four towels
crockerytwelve bowls, three plates, five cups
With the exception of linens, all of the non-count nouns we have looked at
so far have been invariably singular in form and have occurred with singular
verbs. There are, however, a number of non-count nouns that appear to be in-
variably plural in that they always end in j-s}. In some cases the nature of the
object explains its plural form, but in others the marking of a non-count as
plural instead of singular seems very arbitrary
Linguists have long noted the existence of dual object plurals, an espe-
cially interesting category of non-count nouns. Dual object plurals always re-
fer to items that contain two identical halves, which are mirror images of each
other; the two halves must be connected. Virtually all pant-type items fall in
this categorypants, shorts, jeans, Levis, trousers, slacks, knickers, jams, baggies,
panties, pedal pushers, etc. Sweat pants are often called sweats. Most eyewear falls
in this categoryglasses,spectacles, shades, goggles, binoculars, etc. Certain cate-
gories of tools also constitute dual object pluralspliers,scissors, tweezers, pin-
cers, forceps, bellows, tongs, etc. Scales used to be a dual object plural because his-
torically scales were two pans hanging from a central post. Of course scales
have changed a great deal in the last century and now scale is for most speak-
ers a count noun with both a singular and plural form. Dual object plurals are
always counted using the partitive pair of and always co-occur with a plural
verbTwopairs of pants are lying on the bed. (There is a misconception, spread
by some reference books, that non-count nouns are always singular in form.)
The names of games are typically non-count nounsgolf, tennis, chess, base-
ball, hockey, poker. Very old games are often non-count nouns that appear to be
Non-Count Nouns 81
plural in formbilliards,checkers, darts, c^r^s, dominoes, craps, marbles. The im-

plements used to play these games are sometimes the same word in count noun
form. This is not altogether surprising, since the games are abstract sets of rules,
while the implements used to play these games are of necessity concrete ob-
jects. Thus three darts are required for playing darts and fifty-two cards are
usually needed to play cards. Games are typically counted with the partitive
game of although some sports exploit special partitives, especially when the
game itself is divided into partstworounds of golf a hand of cards, two sets of
tennis.
Some diseases are also plural, non-count nounsmeasles,shingles, mumps.
A mump was originally a grimace and a measle was a blood blister in the orig-
inal Dutch. While the {-s} in acronyms like AIDS and SIDS stands for "syn-
drome," the fact that so many diseases end in {-s} makes this a natural con-
struction. In order to count such diseases, we typically use the partitive case of
However, unlike the dual object plurals, both the game non-count nouns
and the disease non-count nouns often take a singular verb even when they
carry the {-s} suffixCheckersis my favorite board game; Measles makes you really
sick. For some speakers, however, the plural marker is compelling and you will
hear people say "Darts are a lot of fun" or "Mumps are dangerous in an adult."
A few non-count nouns have countable homophones. (Homophones are
words that are pronounced in the same way but have distinctly different mean-
ings.) Iron, the non-count noun referring to ore, is different from iron the count
noun referring to an implement used to press clothes. Paper, the sheet (non-
count), is different from paper the essay (countable). As Wierzbicka (1998b, p.
509) points out, chocolate is a count noun only when it refers to small, bite-sized
bits of candy.
Not all non-count nouns fall neatly into the semantic categories discussed
above. The blues, the news, and the tropics are all hard to categorize.
As you will see in the following chart, non-count nouns never occur with
the indefinite article a. They occur with demonstrative determiners, genitive
determiners, and the definite article the and they often occur without any de-
terminers whatsoever.
Summary of non-count nouns
Non-count Non-count nouns Non-count nouns

nouns with ending in {-s} with ending in {-s} with
singular verbs singular verbs plural verbs
The milk is sour. Checkers bores my Your glasses have

dad. orange lenses.
Beer makes me sick.
Billiards requires The binoculars are
Gasoline is cheap.
skill. over here.
82 The Noun Phrase
Summary of non-count nouns (cont.)
Oil rises to the top. Darts is my favorite His pants are

game. plaid.
The sand was hot.
Mumps makes your My jeans are on
Salt gets hard. glands swell. the bed.
Paper costs a lot. Rickets is caused by The pliers are on
Iron is a strong a lack of vitamin D. the bench.
metal.
Shingles is hard to The tweezers look
Chocolate is fattening. cure. broken.
This dirt is heavy. [Some speakers use These linens are dirty.
plural verbs with
Their jewelry is ugly. The dregs taste
some or all of
disgusting.
Badminton is strenuous. these nouns.]
Collective Nouns
Collective nouns are often confused with non-count nouns, but they have very
different characteristics. Collective nouns are countable. They are unique
among count nouns, however, because they refer to a collective entity with in-
dividual membersarmy, team, faculty, jury, band, clergy, class, gang. Because
collective nouns refer to a collection of individual entities, they sometimes oc-
cur with a singular verb and sometimes with a plural verb, depending on the
intention of the speaker. When a speaker wishes to focus on the group itself,
the collective noun is usually used with a singular verbMy team is playing
well this week; The band is playing off-key. However, if a speaker wants to focus
on the individual members of the collectivity, s/he might choose a plural verb
The faculty are angry about their raises; The jury are talking among themselves.
The following examples are cited by Roger Schwarzchild in his book Plu-
ralities (1996). You can see that in each case the collective noun has been inter-
preted as plural and this fact affects the grammar elsewhere in the sentence.
(Italics added in the last example only.)
The choir knelt and covered their faces, (p. 172)

The committee congratulated themselves, (p. 172)
Every debate team . . . gets disqualified because they attack each other instead
of attacking their opponents, (p. 173)
British speakers are especially likely to use plural verbs with collective
nouns and they do so in contexts that sometimes sound strange to Americans
The World Bank are considering the problem; The BBC are covering that event.
Pronouns 83
Pronouns
Pronouns represent the simplest NPs. Unlike nouns, pronouns are almost never
preceded by determiners or adjectives, although after listening to you describe
an upcoming trip to Alaska, a friend may say enviously, "Lucky you." Pro-
nouns take many different shapes and have a variety of functions in English.
They are most often used as a kind of shorthand to refer to items that have al-
ready been introduced into the discourse or conversation. Pronouns can also
be used to refer to unknown entities or to underscore the fact that no relevant
entity exists. The uses of pronouns in discourse are actually quite complex.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS
Personal pronouns are the most common pronouns in English. Informal
discourse is always full of them. The pronouns that we use to refer to ourselves
are called first personJ, we. We use second person pronouns to refer to those
with whom we are speakingyou.Third person pronouns refer to others and,
unlike other pronouns in English, they reflect gender (or lack thereof) in the
singularhe/she/it,they. In Old English the grammatical function of a noun or
a pronoun dictated its form; a noun or pronoun functioning as an object would
carry a different ending or have a different form than one functioning as a sub-
ject. Nouns gradually lost these distinctions and the modern personal and in-
terrogative pronouns are the only words left in English in which a distinction
between a subject form and an object form has survived.
Forms of personal pronouns
First Person Second Person Third Person

Singular Plural Singular Plural Singular Plural
Subject I we you you she/he/it they
Object me us you you her/him/it them
Genitive my/mine our(s) your(s) your(s) her(s)/his/its their(s)
The forms my, our, your, her, and their are determiners as well as personal pro-
nouns.
Third person personal pronouns have anaphoric reference. Once a person
(or entity) has been introduced into a discourse with a full NP, a speaker can
use a third person pronoun to refer to that person, often for a long period of
time. This passage is from the thriller Hard Aground by James Hall (1993). In it
the character Alvarez imagines what his employer, a Florida State Senator, is
84 The Noun Phrase
doing at the moment. The full NPs are double underlined and the anaphoric
pronouns are in boldface. (Underlining and boldface added.)
The senator finishes her chicken cordon bleu, she goes up to the podium, looks
out at this bunch of lawyers and bankers . . . and then starts in giving them
her full load of free-enterprise horseshit for fifteen minutes. . . . That was her
job as near as Alvarez could tell. Twice a month another of these fat cat clubs
would invite her to lecture after the cordon bleu lunch, just so she could tell
'em it was all right what they were doing. . . . Near the end of her speech she'd
tell a joke or two, something downhome she'd heard. . . . And then right at
the end she'd tell them just like she always did that it was up to them. . . .
She'd wave her hand at whatever applause she got. . . . And then she'd shake
a few hands, pat a few good old boys on the back, and she'd work her way
to the back of the room . . . and she'd wind up outside on the sidewalk. . . .
That was when the guy Alvarez had paid twenty bucks to . . . would come up
to her wearing Alvarez's white captain's hat.. . . And he'd tell the senator what
Alvarez had paid him twenty to say. (pp. 311-12)
Hall begins with a full NP the senator and then uses 18 personal pronouns in a
row before the full NP is finally restated again. Often when a full NP is used
after a series of personal pronouns, it is because the speaker wishes to signal
that this part of the story or conversation is over. Using the full NP again is
one way of indicating closure (Fox, 1987, p. 40). This is the case in this passage;
Alvarez has finished his story about the senator.
We see the same phenomenon in conversation involving two or more par-
ticipants. Either party can use a personal pronoun once an entity has been in-
troduced into the discourse. The following exchange took place between a
woman and her young son, who is somewhat obsessed by airplanes. The
mother has just explained that a steward is not the same as Stewart, a family
friend (Cloran, 1995). (Underlining and boldface added.)
Mother: That's right. Stewart is loanne's Dad.

Stephen: Is he a printer?
Mother: Yes, he is a printer.
Stephen: Is he a captain?
Mother: No, he doesn't go in an aeroplane.
Stephen: Well why?
Mother: Because he's a printer. He works in a place where they print mag
azines and things.
Stephen: Does he work in a plane where they print things?
Mother: He works in a place, not a plane, (p. 369)
Pronouns 85
Once Stewart has been introduced into the discourse, he becomes the subject
and topic of every subsequent sentence. Every instance of he has anaphoric ref-
erence.
If a conversation or narrative contains two female or two male characters,
the situation becomes more complicated. Here is a passage from Goosefoot by
Patrick McGinley (1982). (Underlining and boldface added.)
Monica was thrilled at the prospect of helping to cook for a man of private
means who was himself a capable cook.. . . She questioned Patricia about how
long she had know him and told her that she was so secretive about him that
their relationship must be very serious, (p. 71)
The referent of the first instance of she can only be Monica. But once Patricia
is introduced, we are faced with two potential female referents. In this case the
narrator expects us to choose the most recent noun as the referent; the last three
pronouns refer to Patricia.
However, a referent can be someone / thing other than the most recent noun
if the context makes the connection clear. In the following passage from Michael
Dibdin's Dead Lagoon (1996), both Saoner and Zen are men, but it is quite clear
from the context that the pronouns refer to Saoner, not to Zen.
Tommaso Saoner scurried out of the other entrance and ran straight into Zen.
At first he made to turn back, then changed his mind and strode past without
a word or a flicker of expression, (p. 276)
Personal pronoun it can refer back to an inanimate or even a non-human

animate entityIbought a new computer yesterday; it cost $1000; That new puppy
is a pain; it just peed on the kitchen floor. It can also be used to refer back to a
complex situation or a series of events. Here is another passage from Dead La-
goon.
The regime you serve is morally and financially bankrupt. It's exactly the same
as working for the KGB after the collapse of the Soviet Union, (p. 260)
Here it refers to everything that is entailed in working for a morally and fi-
nancially bankrupt regime.
Personal pronouns don't have specific reference if their antecedents don't
have specific reference. In Sony a wants to marry a tall man; he must be handsome,
neither a tall man nor he has specific reference. However, in Sony a wants to marry
a banker; he lives in Boston, both the pronoun and its antecedent refer to a spe-
cific individual.
While the definite article and the demonstrative determiner both have
anaphoric reference, the most frequently used "anaphors" in subject position
are pronouns. Using data from oral English, Talmy Givon (1995, p. 51) has cal-
culated that the text frequency of anaphoric subject pronouns is 74.5%, while
86 The Noun Phrase
that of definite NPs is only 25.6%. Even though we have a number of strate-
gies for making anaphoric reference, we most often choose personal pronouns.
The third person personal pronoun must agree with the noun it refers to
in gender and number, e.g., Robert/he, the architects/they, Esther/she, etc. This cre-
ates problems when the noun does not have specific reference or the individ-
ual's gender is unknown to the speakerSusanwants a new dentist and she?/he?
must be willing to use laughing gas; A student has taken my grade book and she?/he?
must be apprehended. A few die-hard traditionalists insist that he should be used
as a "gender neutral" pronoun in such contexts, but this is patently absurd.
Speakers often cope with this dilemma by employing they as a singular pro-
nounAstudent has taken my grade book; they must be apprehended. Edited Eng-
lish usually demands a more elaborate solution. Some publications (and teach-
ers) accept the hyphenated pronoun used in this books/he, him/her; others
insist that the writer recast the sentence to avoid the dilemma altogether; and
a few still demand he in such circumstances.
The first and second person pronouns are deictic rather than anaphoric.
Whoever is speaking uses I; the person to whom the speaker is speaking is al-
ways addressed as you. The referents of J and you change when the speaker
and hearer change. We is deictic as well, although any member of a group can
use the word we to refer to the same collection of individuals. While fiction and
other kinds of written narratives frequently exploit third person pronouns, peo-
ple engaged in actual conversations tend to use a lot of first and second per-
son pronouns. After examining a corpus of spoken conversation, one researcher
calculated that 1 is the most frequently used word in personal discourse and
you is the sixth most frequently used (Dahl, 1979, quoted in Miller, 1996, p. 126).
Another scholar, who examined eight conversations taken from a large corpus
of spoken English, found that in 51% of her data the topic was one of the speak-
ers (I, you) or a group including one of the speakers or both (we, you) (Fries,
1995, p. 331). We obviously spend a lot of time talking with others about our-
selves.
During Shakespeare's time, English lost the distinction between singular
and plural forms in the second person. In Old and Middle English various
forms of thou/thee/thine were used for singular reference, while various forms
of ye/you/your were used in the plural. As happened in other European courts,
the monarch's use of the royal we led speakers to address him or her in the sec-
ond person plural, ye rather than thou. Gradually the use of the second person
plural instead of the singular became a sign of respect. The object form you
supplanted the subject form ye, and eventually the singular form disappeared
completely in all dialects except that used by Quakers, some of whom still use
thee. (The refusal of the early Quakers to use the second person plural form
was a political act for which they were persecuted.)
As a result of all of these social pressures, there is an unfortunate gap in
our second person pronoun system, i.e., there is no distinction in form between
singular and plural. But speakers have come up with many creative ways to
fashion a distinct second person plural form. In the Southern United States you
all, usually pronounced "y'all," is ubiquitous; in New York and Chicago one
Pronouns 87
hears yous and in western Pennsylvania you uns is widespread. You guys is a
very common strategy for speakers in all regions of the United States (although
it, too, raises gender issues). My husband and I were once addressed by a server
in Kentucky as "Y'all guys." Among some speakers of British English, you lot
is a common second person plural. An English mother might say to her rowdy
children, "You lot, get over here!"
The importance of personal pronouns in discourse cannot be overstated.
The vast majority of subjects in English are pronouns, not nouns. This is be-
cause topics usually appear in subject position, and pronouns are always top-
ical, i.e., they always express given information.
REFLEXIVE PRONOUNS
In English if two NPs refer to the same entity (i.e., are co-referential) and
are used in the same simple sentence, in the second instance the NP must be
a reflexive pronoun and it must reflect that same gender and number as the
first NP. The first co-referential NP is usually the subject.
Henry hates himself.

The kids scared themselves.
Barb talks to herself.
I cut myself.
We fooled ourselves.
The reflexive allows us to distinguish among possible referents with the same
number and gender. Clearly the direct object in Henry hates him refers to a dif-
ferent male than the direct object in Henry hates himself In most dialects of Eng-
lish, the reflexive never occurs in subject position.
There are syntactic constraints on reflexive pronouns. Only personal pro-
nouns take the reflexive {-self} form and, as a rule, reflexive objects (which may
be direct objects, indirect objects, or objects of prepositions) are animate when
the first NP is the subject. This is not surprising because it is usually animate
beings that act or reflect upon themselves. The subject is usually an agent or
an experiencer in a sentence containing a reflexive pronoun.
Guillermo argued with himself

Marsha doesn't trust herself
My mother gave herself a present.
Torn believes in himself
June considers herself a success.
Sometimes a nonvolitional causer occurs as the subject in such a sentence.

88 The Noun Phrase
Penelope accidentally hurt herself.

Daniel scared himself
The baby burned herself
Although the first co-referential NP in a reflexive construction is usually a

subject, it need not beJeremiah offered Esther a picture of herself; We talked to
Trudy about herself. Inanimate reflexives are uncommon but they do existShe
turned my argument in upon itself Inanimate reflexives are particularly likely
when we endow inanimate subjects with animate qualitiesThe water heater
blew itself up; My car destroyed itself; That book sells itself The following sentence
appeared in a motorcycle owners magazine: "[Bearings] virtually never tighten
themselves" (Glaves, 1997, p. 16).
Some normally transitive verbs occur intransitively when the direct object
is a covert reflexive pronoun. Tom shaved means that Tom shaved himself, while
Tom shaved him means Tom shaved someone else. We see the same phenome-
non with certain other grooming verbsWendy bathed; The kids dressed; Ray-
mond washed.
There are a few verbs which take only reflexive objects.
The children behaved themselves.

The witness perjured herself
My brother has bettered himself.
Arlene prides herself on her advanced degrees.
Behave can occur with a covert, unexpressed object, but this, too, always
refers back to the subject. While we can say, "The children behaved" (meaning
the children behaved well), we can never say "The children behaved their
cousins." An individual can never perjure, pride, or better someone else, although
it is possible to best another individual or groupThe Chicago Bulls bested the
Nezo York Knicks.
Reflexives don't normally occur with copulas and, when they do, the
copula does not express mere existence. When a speaker utters a sentence
like Hamlet is not himself today, s/he is really indicating that Hamlet is be-
having strangely, not that he actually exists as something other than him-
self.
Reflexives can also be used to mean "alone" or "on one's own." In these
constructions the reflexive is often preceded by the preposition by.
I'll fix it myself.

The building stood by itself in afield.
The baby tied his shoes by himself.
Pronouns 89
The difference between a straight reflexive pronoun and one which means
"alone" is underscored by this wonderfully ambiguous classified ad.
"Are you tired of cleaning yourself? Let me do it."
Sometimes reflexives are used redundantly to emphasize the preceding

noun or pronoun.
I myself have never smoked.

I handed her the gold itself
I've never actually talked to the President himself
Constructions like these work best in larger stretches of discourseTomsmokes

like a chimney, but I myself have never smoked; She was expecting only a certificate
but I handed her the gold itself.
Possessive Reflexives
If you hear a sentence like Mary destroyed her toys out of context, it is im-
possible to determine whether genitive her refers to Mary or to another female.
But the modifier own can be used be used in conjunction with a genitive de-
terminer to produce a genitive reflexive.
Mary destroyed her own toys.

Benjamin wants his own bed.
Laurie threw out her own tax records.
There are a few cases in which a genitive determiner expressing inalienable

possession will always be interpreted as referring back to the subject. These
typically involve movements made with a part of the body (Levin, 1993, p.
108).
David craned his neck.

The bodybuilder flexed her muscles.
The teacher pursed her lips.
The dog wagged his tail.
The guest smacked her lips.
*David craned Anastasia's neck and *Fido wagged Fluffy's tail are impossible sen-
tences.
90 The Noun Phrase
RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS
Like most reflexive pronouns, reciprocal pronoun phrases typically have
the same referent as the subject; the difference is that the subject to which a
reciprocal pronoun refers must include more than one entity Thus, the subject
NP must be plural or there must be two or more coordinated NPs. The action
in such constructions is reciprocal; each individual subject has the same rela-
tionship to the other subjects in the construction.
My children fight with each other.

Jack and Jill hate one another.
We babysit for each other's children.
They gave one another gifts.
Like reflexives, reciprocal pronouns are almost always animate.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS
When the demonstratives (this, that, these, those) are used alone without a
noun head, they are considered demonstrative pronouns. They behave very
much like demonstrative determiners (i.e., they express spatial and sometimes
temporal deixis), except that the noun to which they refer is not part of the
NPThis is moldy; I don't want that. Demonstrative pronouns are often ac-
companied by gestures, e.g., a child might point while saying "This is my
room." The context will usually make the referent of the demonstrative clear.
A demonstrative pronoun can also be anaphoric, in which case it often
refers back to an entire propositionIlisten to opera all the time. This drives my
family nuts. Anaphoric demonstratives can also be used to refer back to an event
or even a series of events, as you can see in this passage from Tony Hillerman's
novel Sacred Clowns (1993). (Boldface added.)
"[He parked] in front, walked in, went to the open mike, said he wanted to
broadcast an announcement. Was told to wait until the end of the record.
Waited. Was given signal. Then he made his statement, walked out. Drove
away. Right?"
"Right," Yazzie said. "That's what happened." (p. 186)
You will find that in general anaphoric this is used for a current situation,
whereas anaphoric that refers to a past event. So even when demonstrative pro-
nouns are used anaphorically, they retain some of their deictic properties.
The events referred to by demonstrative pronouns need not be expressed
linguistically. If a student belches loudly in class, the teacher might respond
with "That was really rude." A professor who catches a student cheating on
an exam might threaten, "IT1 expel you for this." In these examples anaphora
is much stronger than deixis.
Pronouns 91
QUANTIFYING PRONOUNS
The forms that were included in the predeterminer and postdeterminer cat-
egories can also stand alone as pronounsAllwere crying; Both were stubborn;
Four remained. The plural indefinite article some can also stand alone as a pro-
nounIwill give you some. In each of these cases the discourse context should
make the referent clear.
Everyone, everything, nothing, and nobody are also quantifying pronouns
Everyone likes her; He ate everything; Nobody attended the meeting. Someone and
something can also be included in this category although their primary semantic
characteristic is indefiniteness, as you will see below. There are adverb quanti-
fiers as well, e.g., everywhere, anytime, etc.; these will be discussed in Chapter 4.
INDEFINITE PRONOUNS
We often need to speak about persons, things, or events whose identity or
character is unknown to us. The indefinite pronouns allow us to do just that.
But once again, the term indefinite is misleading. It means that the referent is
not specified, but it does not mean that the referent is nonspecific. Indefinite
someone and something can have either specific or nonspecific reference, de-
pending on the context. Upon being asked out, a young woman might respond
with "I'm dating someone/' Here the speaker obviously knows the identity of
the person she is dating but doesn't wish to divulge it. After breaking down
on a country road, you might say to your companions, "Surely, someone will
come along and help us." In this case someone has nonspecific reference. In the
following examples the nature of the reference is indicated.
Someone will call the police, Ym sure. [nonspecific]

You'll find somebody to take to the prom. [nonspecific]
Something exploded in the garage. [specific]
Someone is walking on the deck. [specific]
Anyone and anything never have specific reference The baby will eat any-
thing; Hell talk to anyone.
'/tC Because they Udon't
HOC tucy .VJ1L L have
JLLC*^0referents,
f f c these
OCO indefinites
are most often used in negatives and questions.
negatives and questions.
Did anyone hear you ?

My children won't read anything.
Has anybody told you about the new rules?
Gertrude won't loan her plane to anyone.
If you enter your apartment and you hear footsteps in the upstairs hall, you
might yell, "Is someone here?" Your expectation is that the answer will be pos-
92 The Noun Phrase
itive. If your friend's house appears dark and empty you might yell "Is any-
body here?" with the expectation that no one will answer.
Nobody and nothing are negative indefinites; no referents exist for these pro-
nouns.
Nobody came.
Nothing bothers her.
I know nothing about the stolen files.
I saw no one in the library.
Since nobody and nothing already contain a negative form as part of the pro-
noun, neither form occurs with the negative particle in formal edited English,
although sentences like I didn't see nothing are quite common in conversational
discourse.
It should be obvious that all the indefinite pronouns were once nouns or
numerals preceded by a quantifiersome + body, no + thing, every + one. No-
body was written as two separate words until the eighteenth century and it is
only a constraint on our pronunciation of double vowels that prevents us from
writing *noone for no one today. Since it behaves exactly like nobody, weTl treat
no one as a pronoun also.
Someone, something, no one, and nothing can also be classified as quantify-
ing pronouns; this is not incompatible with being indefinite. As you will see in
Chapter 5, there are adverb indefinites as well as pronoun indefinitessome-
time, somewhere, somehow, anywhere.
Indefinite Pronouns and Gender

Indefinite pronouns are neutral in terms of gender and this creates prob-
lems when an indefinite pronoun is the antecedent of a personal pronoun. Con-
sider the sentence If anyone calls tell him?/her? that I'm out. Since the speaker
can't possibly know the identity of anyone, it is impossible to assign gender.
What form then should be chosen for the subsequent personal pronoun? As you
have already seen, most English speakers use they/them/their as gender neutral
pronouns, even in contexts in which the antecedent appears to be singular.
If anyone calls, tell them I'm out.

Everyone must pack their own lunch.
I saw someone in the shadows and they were watching me.
Anyone who thinks they can fix this is a fool.
Traditional grammars argue that anyone, someone, and everyone are singular
pronouns because they end in "one." It is true that these pronouns take singu-
lar verbs. But in most of the examples above, the number implied by the indef-
Noun Phrases in Discourse 93
mite is actually iride term mate. In If anyone calls . . . , the number could be any-
where from zero to any reasonable finite number; in Everyone must pack their own
lunch, there is a presumption that there is more than one potential limchpacker;
only in I saw someone in the shadows does the indefinite pronoun clearly refer to
a single individual. For this reason, speakers seem especially willing to use they
when the antecedent is anyone or everyone. Certain quantifying determiners pose
exactly the same problem and speakers often employ exactly the same solution
Every student must pack their own lunch. Each child will bring their birth certificate.
(Although the noun head is singular in both these cases, every presupposes more
than one student and each more than one child.) Edited English usually requires
the solutions discussed in the personal pronoun section.
INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS
When a speaker wishes to learn the identity of someone or something, s/he
typically uses an interrogative pronoun to solicit that information. Interroga-
tive pronouns always begin with the letters wh in written texts, thus they are
often called wh words. The interrogative pronoun, regardless of its grammat-
ical function, is almost always the first word in the sentence. The one excep-
tion is in those cases where the interrogative is the object of a preposition, in
which case some speakers place the preposition before the interrogative pro-
noun.
Who left the door open? [Who is a subject]

What is Matilda eating? [What is a direct object]
Who did you loan your car to? [Who is an indirect object]
To whom did you loan your car? [To whom is an indirect object]
What did Maggie call Cedric? [What is an object complement]
What is his name? [What is a subject complement]
If you have problems identifying the grammatical function of an interrog-

ative pronoun, simply recast the question as a statement with questioning in-
tonationMatildais eating what? Maggie called Cedric what? Normal word order
should make the grammatical function of the wh word clear.
There are adverb interrogatives as wellwhere,when, why, and how. We will
discuss interrogative constructions in detail in Chapter 3. Wh forms also func-
tion as relative pronouns and these forms will be discussed in Chapter 5.
N o u n Phrases in Discourse
We've already discussed the fact that noun phrases allow us to "deploy" peo-
ple and things in conversation. But of course conversation is a two-way street
and the kind of NP we choose in discourse will depend on how much we think
94 The Noun Phrase
our hearer knows. If we assume that the referent is not accessible to our hearer,
we may use an NP containing the article a to introduce the referent into dis-
course or we might use a proper name with an accompanying explanation.
1 bought a bicycle last week.

Last night 1 met Derek Walcott, a famous poet.
If the referent is identifiable to the hearer because it has already been in-
troduced into the conversation or if it is one of those things that is uniquely
identifiable even though it may be new to the conversation, the article the or a
proper noun can be used.
The bike is a lemon.

Mr. Walcott invited me to his next reading.
1 can see the moon.
If the referent is not only identifiable to the hearer but has been talked about
enough to become familiar, we might choose a demonstrative determiner.
I really hate that bike.

That man is a fabulous writer.
If the referent of the NP is the current center of attention, we most often

choose a personal pronoun.
It won't go over two miles an hour.

He has published both poems and plays.
The following chart is based very loosely on Grundel, Hedberg, and

Zacharski (1993).
Referent Referent is now Referent is Referent is

introduced identifiable to identifiable and current center of
to hearer hearer familiar to hearer attention
I met a The poor guy This guy didn't He looked

homeless man was looking even have a extremely
yesterday. for food. coat on. cold.
Sue married a Buzz has a This man I don't like
boxer named terrible is truly to be near
Buzz. temper. mean. him.
Summing Up 95
Summing Up
NPs are the actors and the influenced in human discourse. Without NPs there
would be no agents, no patients, no experiencers, no recipients. It is no acci-
dent that the first words that babies acquire are nouns. Our world is full of
things with physical reality and nouns allow us to refer to those things. But
while NPs often refer to entities, they can also refer to abstractions and even
propositions. The grammatical roles they playsubject,direct object, indirect
object, subject complement, and object complementplaceNPs into a complex
relationship with the verb phrase. This relationship will be explored in the next
chapter.
t W f f ^ - 1 1 3
\23 -i3o
\51 ~\bH
The Verb Phrase _ af^

f13-l5t> If
The verb phrase is the heart of the sentence. As I have already noted, every
English sentence must contain at least one verb. In some languages (e.g., Hun-
garian and Swahili), subject and object pronouns are routinely incorporated
into the verb form itself, so sentences can occur without any overt NPs what-
soever, but the verb is never optional. Verbs carry a great deal of information;
they describe actions, events, and states and place these in a time frame; they
tell us whether actions or events have been completed or are ongoing; they tell
us whether a state is current or resultative; they allow us to command, to re-
quest, to speculate, to wish, and to predict. And, as you will see, this is only a
fraction of things that verbs can do.
The English verb phrase (abbreviated VP) is a complicated affair. So far in
this text we have dealt primarily with sentences containing simple one-word
verb phrases. Sentences like these, however, are not very common in discourse.
Multiword VPs like the following are more typical.
You shouldn't be eating that junk.

Are you going to be able to help me later?
She might have been insulted by that remark.
Be aware that the term verb phrase can have two distinct meanings in lin-
guistics. In generative grammars, it refers to the entire predicate, excluding aux-
iliaries. Here, however, I am using the term to refer to the "main" verb and its
auxiliaries, excluding the rest of the predicate.
I talked about verbs at some length in Chapter 1, but didn't attempt to de-
fine the term. When I discussed nouns, I was able to describe them in terms of
inflectional endings, grammatical functions, and (very loosely) meaning. In
many ways the verb is harder to characterize. Like the noun, it can be identi-
fied to some extent in terms of inflectional suffixes. These inflections will be
examined at some length in the sections on tense, aspect, voice, and modality.
And like nouns, verbs can be characterized to some degree in terms of mean-
ing.
Just as nouns refer to the actors and things in our world, verbs allow us to
97
98 The Phrase
express states, events, and actions involving these actors and things. This en-
compasses a very broad range of meanings, but all verbs share one character-
istictheyencode information about time. Nouns are relatively time stable. We
don't think of time as an important factor in understanding what is meant by
chair, rock, or dog. But verbs carry a great deal of implicit information about
time. Some verbs describe actions that are by their very nature constrained in
terms of timeErinjumped over the wall; Marvin broke the window; The guests ar-
rived at 9:00 P.M. It's difficult, if not impossible, to prolong the acts of jumping
over a wall, breaking a window, and arriving. It takes a split second to blink,
to slap, or to sneeze. On the other hand, many verbs are relatively unconstrained
in terms of time. One can swim, talk, or sleep indefinitely. It always takes much
longer to build a house than to raze one.
Some verbs indicate that an action has begun or has endedHe began to
scream; The baby stopped crying; It started to rain. Others underscore the fact
that a situation persists over timeBill Gates is very rich; A statue of Amelia
Earhart stands in the town square; Ammonia smells bad. Still others express the
fact that a state has changed over timeThe tree grew tall; The weather turned
cold.
Regardless of the intrinsic meaning of a verb, a speaker can always ma-
nipulate the time frame it expresses by the use of tense and aspect.
Tense
Tense is an often misused technical term. When linguists speak of tense, they
are referring to a particular set of inflectional affixes that communicate infor-
mation about the time frame in which something exists or occurs. Tense is de-
ictic. Present time stands at the center of all tense systems; events that took
place before present time are marked in one way; events that are ongoing at
the present or somehow include the present are marked in another, and events
that have not yet taken place may be marked with yet a different form. Some
languages, like English, mark only two tensespresentand past; others have
a future tense marker as well. There are even languages like Inuit (Eskimo) that
have more than one past tense, each marking a different degree of remoteness
(Bybee, 1994, pp. 98-99).
In English, tense is usually but not always communicated by the use of suf-
fixes. The {-s} suffix in walks is a present tense inflection, while the {-ed} suffix
in walked and the vowel change in rang are both considered past tense mark-
ers. But Old English had a far more elaborate present and past tense system
than Modern English. Old English tense markers also reflected the number of
the subject, i.e., singular or plural. Below are the present tense forms for the
Old English word "to judge," the source of Modern English deem. Deman is the
infinitive form. The Old English letter \> (often called thorn because it looks like
one) stands for the th sound in thin.
Tense 99
Person Singular Plural
First person deme (I) judge dema{} (we) judge

Second person demest (you, sing.) judge dema]} (you, plural) judge
Third person demeh (s/he, it) judges demah (they) judge
Some of these singular endings persisted into the seventeenth century, at

which time the third person singular -ep was replaced by {-s} and all the other
endings disappeared. Much modern English liturgical language is based on the
King James version of the Christian Bible, a translation published in 1611 un-
der the auspices of King James of England. Although the Jewish Scriptures are
the source of the Old Testament of the Christian faith, the first English trans-
lation of this body of literature by Jewish scholars didn't appear until the nine-
teenth century. The standard American version of the Jewish Scriptures was
published in 1915 and, despite its relative modernity, it features most of the
late sixteenth century forms found in the King James version. Old English verb
suffixes can be found in many well-known religious passages like "whither
thou goest I will go" (Ruth 1:16) and "He maketh me to lie down in green pas-
tures" (Psalms 23:2). A 1935 English translation of the Koran by Marmaduke
Pickthall (1992), an English convert to Islam, also exploits language that is over
three centuries old, e.g., "Allah knoweth: ye know not" (p. 55). Our familiar-
ity with archaic English forms stems from the linguistic conservatism of litur-
gical language.
By the eighteenth century, all the present tense endings had been lost ex-
cept the third person singular {-s}, as in The baby cries at night. In Modern Eng-
lish the other present tense forms are all identical to the infinitiveI cry, you
cry, we cry, they cry, and to cry. The only reason linguists continue to call these
uninflected forms the present tense is because there is still that one surviving
suffix in the conjugation. In some dialects, even the third person singular j-s)
suffix has disappeared. The loss of {-s} is especially evident in the case of the
verb do when it combines with the negative. Speakers who would never delete
the {-s} on another third person present tense verb sometimes delete the {-s} in
doesn'tHe don't live here anymore.
The past tense in Old English was also highly inflected. Although the mark-
ers that distinguished first, second, and third person have disappeared in Mod-
ern English, all persons still carry a distinct past tense marker, except in those
rare cases in which the verb has no distinct past tense form whatsoever. The
vast majority of verbs mark the past tense with an {-ed} suffix. There are a few
verbs the infinitives of which end in the sounds [n] or [nd] that exploit -t as a
past tense marker in both spelling and pronunciationbend/bent,send/sent, and
for some speakers lend/lent and burn/burnt (A few of these are quite archaic,
100 The Phrase
like rend/rent meaning "to tear apart"). There are other verbs, however, that end
in [nd] and take the typical {-ed} past tense markerfended, mended, tended.
Some verbs exploit a vowel change to communicate past tensesing/sang,
ride/rode, swim/swam, throw/threiu, fall/fell, swear/swore, etc. There are a few verbs
in which the past tense contains both a vowel change and a suffix. This suffix,
which is usually pronounced and spelled -t and occasionally -d, is simply a
variation of the {-ed} endingthink/thought,buy/bought, seek/sought, teach/taught,
sell/sold, and for some speakers dreamt. The past tense forms of go and be are
suppletive. This means that the past tense forms are historically unrelated to
the present tense forms and they look completely different. In just a few cases,
the past tense is identical to all present tense forms except the third person sin-
gular, e.g.cut,put, quit, shut, cost, split. Small children who have mastered the
dominant {-ed} pattern often over-generalize, producing sentences like *I cut-
ted my finger and *I putted my toys away.
When new verbs enter the language, they are almost always given an {-ed}
past tense endingboogied,faxed, dissed.
Various forms taken by past tense verbs
{ed} ending walked, jumped, waited, cried, washed, loved

{t} ending bent, lent, sent
vowel change sang, sank, ran, swam, fell, threw, slid, found
vowel change + sought, bought, taught, wept, kept, slept, crept
{t} ending
no change cut, put, split, cost, shut, quit
suppletive form went, was/were
If you are not clear about the past tense form of a given verb, simply fill in the
blank of this frame: I yesterday. Any verb form that naturally fills that
spot will be a past tense form.
The first verb in the verb phrase will always carry tense: no other verb can
do so. This may seem very counter-intuitive at times, but, as you will see later,
this is simply a matter of form, not meaning. In each of the sentences below,
the verb in boldface carries tense.
Janice loves Fruit Loops.

Janice does not like Fruit Loops.
Janice threw her Fruit Loops on the floor.
Janice was eating her Fruit Loops.
Tense 101
Janice had eaten her Fruit Loops.

Janice may eat those Fruit Loops.
Janice should not be eating Fruit Loops.
Non-native speakers sometimes overlook this fact about English grammar and
produce sentences like *He didn't wanted any juice in which both did and wanted
carry the past tense marker.
TENSE A N D M E A N I N G
It is relatively easy to identify the tense of a verb in English. But what do

these forms communicate; what do they mean? Over the centuries, the time
frames associated with tense markers have broadened and sometimes the terms
past and present are somewhat misleading. As you will soon see, past tense
markers are occasionally used in non-past contexts and present tense markers
can be used to manipulate the time frame in a variety of ways.
Past Tense
As you would expect, simple past tense (sometimes called the preterit)
does indeed communicate past time and this is its primary function. It is used
in conjunction with events that are over and done withIplayed volleyball yes-
terday; Stephen ate his breakfast early; Marsha walked the dog at noon.
But past time goes on indefinitely. You might find it odd if I were to an-
nounce without preamble, "I broke a guy's arm" Your natural reaction would
be to ask "When did you do that?" And in fact when we use a past tense verb,
we usually limit the time frame in some way. If I say "General Colin Powell
visited our university last year," the phrase last year tells you when in past time
the event occurred. In other words, it constrains the time frame. (We will dis-
cuss adverbs of time in some detail in Chapter 4.) In the absence of an adverb
that expresses time, the broader discourse context usually constrains the time
frame. If a group of students in history are discussing the American Civil War
and one says, "Atlanta burned for days," everyone understands (at least
roughly) the time frame in which this event occurred.
In the following passage from E. Annie Proulx's novel Shipping News (1993),
there is more than one past time frame. The first is explicitly established by the
date 1909 and some of the sentences reflect that time frame, but it is clear from
the narrative that three of the sentences refer to past times later than 1909; these
later time frames are marked by italics. (Italics added.)
"This is in 1909. They gave him a little tin trunk with some clothes. . . . He told
us about that trip many times. There were three hundred and fourteen children,
boys and girls on that ship, all of them signed on to help farmers. He said many
of them were only three or four years old. They had no idea what was happening
to them. . . . IH]e kept in touch with some of the survivors he'd made friends with
on the Aramania." (p. 167)
102 The Phrase
This passage moves back and forth between 1909 and later past time frames,
but the context indicates the switches quite clearly with "He told us," "He said,"
and "He kept in touch with some of the survivors. . . ."
Occasionally, a speaker will use the past tense form of a verb, not to com-
municate past time, but to appear more polite or obsequious. A student who
is seeking an extension on a term paper might say, "I wanted to ask you for a
favor." This sentence is virtually synonymous with "I want to ask you for a fa-
vor," but the past tense verb signals greater politeness. Later we will see the
same phenomenon operating with modal auxiliaries.
Present Tense
Present tense is far harder to characterize semantically than past tense. In
fact "present" is a misleading term in English and some linguists prefer the
term "non-past" for this form. The simple present tense (i.e., a present tense
verb without any auxiliaries) is rarely used in conjunction with an event that
is ongoing in present time. A fluent English speaker would never announce, "I
go to bed now." However, non-native speakers in whose languages the present
tense can be used to communicate an ongoing activity, often use the English
present tense in just this way
If the English present tense is not normally used to communicate ongoing
activities in the present, what are its functions? One of its primary uses is to
express habitual activities, activities that began at some point in the past, con-
tinue into the present, and will presumably continue into the future.
My cousin attends the University of Hawaii.

Tracy works at the zoo.
My brothers go to school by bus.
The present tense is also used to express universal truths and permanent
states.
Hot air rises.

Tiuo and two equals four.
Lourdes is tall.
The Statue of Liberty stands in the harbor.
When a speaker wishes to refer to a scheduled, future event, the simple

present tense can be used along with a word or a phrase that expresses time.
The train arrives at noon.

The concert starts after the reception.
Tense
We leave on Tuesday.
The Halloween party is Wednesday.
The simple present cannot, however, be used for an unscheduled event. *It
rains tomorrow is ungrammatical.
To heighten the drama of a tale, storytellers often use the simple present
tense to relate past events. This is called the historical or narrative present.
Jack climbs up the beanstalk and creeps into the giant's castle. He hides be-
hind a huge chair. The giant stomps into the room.
In her autobiographical account of her work with a death row inmate in

Dead Man Walking (1994), Sister Helen Prejean casts her entire narrative in the
present tense. (Boldface added.)
When Chava Colon from the Prison Coalition asks me one January day in 1982
to become a pen pal to a death-row inmate, I say, Sure. The invitation seems
to fit with my work in St. Thomas, a New Orleans housing project. . . . Death
is rampant herefrom guns, disease, addiction. Medical care scarcely exists,
(p. 3)
Prejean's use of the present tense to narrate past events heightens the imme-
diacy of her encounters with the inmate and the prison system.
Performatives are highly constrained constructions in which speech is ac-
tion. In uttering a particular sentence, the speaker actually carries out some
sort of act. This term was first coined and described by English philosopher J.
L. Austin (1962). If a marriage license has been signed and a judge utters the
words "I now pronounce you husband and wife," the couple is legally mar-
ried. On the other hand, if I say, "I will now pronounce this word in French,"
I have not performed any kind of act just by uttering this sentence. Performa-
tives are one context in which the simple present tense is actually used to com-
municate present time. There are a limited number of performatives in English
and they all have the same shapea first person subject, followed by a pre-
sent tense verb. Many have legal, procedural, or religious ramifications, and
they all have social implications.
I move that this meeting be adjourned.

I sentence you to life in prison.
1 christen you Hortense.
I bet you five dollars that the Bulls will win.
I warn you not to touch me.
I beg you to leave.
104 The Phrase
We forbid you to attend the Phish concert.

We apologize.
There is another very specialized context in which the simple present can
be used to describe an event which is ongoing in the present. Sportscasters and
individuals who are demonstrating some sort of process often use the com-
mentary present to lend immediacy to itheir words. A track announcer calling
a horse race always begins with "They're at the gate. (Pause) They're off." A
radio sportscaster might say "Marino carries the ball to the twenty-yard line."
Television chefs use the simple present tense constantly, as in "I put the mush-
rooms in the stock and stir slowly" The following magazine ad exploits the
commentary present to generate excitement (.Motorcyclist, April, 1997). (Bold-
face added.)
The green flag drops. Fifty finely tuned Formula USA racing machines accel-
erate to life. . . . The crowd erupts into whoops of approval and within sec-
onds all 50 FUSA bikes are thundering around the circuit. One rider emerges
at the front the pack. (p. 96)
While only two of the semantic categories discussed above use the simple
present to communicate ongoing present activity, all but one of them involve pre-
sent time in some way. In the case of the habitual and permanent states, the ac-
tivity or state is one that began in the past, includes the present, and presum-
ably will be continued in the future. While Joan arrives tomorrow refers to a future
event, this event was planned in the past (before the sentence was uttered); thus,
the plan encompasses past and present time. Both the commentary present and
the performative refer to events that literally occur in present time. So, except for
the historical present, all of the present tense constructions discussed above ac-
tually incorporate present time in some way (Comrie, 1985, p. 38).
Summary of the uses of the present tense
Habitual action I visit my aunt each week.

State The Empire State Building is tall.
Universal truth Hot air rises.
Planned future event Jenny leaves for college tomorrow.
Commentary Mighty Casey strikes out.
Performative I call this meeting to order.
Historical I walk up to this guy and I say . . .
Tense
What About Future Time?

Many languages, including Chinese and Burmese, have no tense system at
all. This does not mean that speakers of these languages cannot talk about past,
present, and future events. It simply means that the time frame is communi-
cated, not by different forms of the same verb (e.g., a root word and its affixes),
but by additional words in the sentence.
The strategies that English speakers employ to communicate future time
is a good example of this phenomenon. Unlike Spanish or Greek, English has
never had a future tense. There is no suffix that the English speaker can attach
to a verb to make it future. To communicate future time, English speakers must
employ one or more of a variety of periphrastic constructions, i.e., they must
employ extra words. Most English speakers think of will as the primary tool
for communicating future time, but it is only one of many. As you will see in
the sentences below, the future time frame is often expressed wholly or in part
by future time expressions like tomorrow and later. The phrase be going to is fre-
quently used to express future events or states. Those elements that commu-
nicate future time appear in boldface.
It will rain tomorrow.

The baby is going to fall.
The train arrives at 9:00 tonight.
They are coming later.
Yves is to arrive at noon.
Auxiliary verbs often express future time implicitly and I will take up this
issue again when I discuss modality.
FINITE AND NON-FINITE VERBS

Verb phrases that carry tense are called finite. The main verb phrase of the
sentence is always finite and, as you will see in Chapter 5, some subordinate
clauses also contain finite verbs.
In the following sentences the verb phrases in boldface are finite. Remem-
ber that it is the first verb that actually carries the tense.
Lewis and Clark explored the West.

George is chopping down the cherry tree.
1 have forgotten your name.
Heathcliff knows that Cathy is seeing another guy.
Verb phrases that do not carry tense are called non-finite. Infinitives, pre-
sent participles, and past participles are all non-finite constructions and they
106 The Verb Phrase
can occur without tensed verbs in subordinate clauses. (In fact, the word in-
finitive literally means "not finite.") We will discuss this in detail in Chapter 5,
but here are a few examples of non-finite verb phrases (in boldface).
I don't want Inga to borrow my book.

Running headlong down the hill, the little boy tripped over a log.
I dislike Manny having quit his job.
Broken in a fight, the window offered little protection from the wind.
Aspect
Aspect is difficult to define simply. The term derives from a Latin word which
means "gaze" or "view." While aspect refers to time in various ways, it goes
beyond communicating information about the linear time frame (past, present,
future). Modern grammarians disagree about what kinds of constructions
should be called aspect, and over the centuries many different forms have been
considered aspectual, including those that express continuous actions, repeated
(iterativejactions, habitual actions, beginning (ingressive) actions, and finish-
ing (egressive) actions. Aspect has been defined in many different ways.
Bernard Comrie, who has written a seminal book on the subject, defines it as
"different ways of viewing the internal temporal constituency of a situation"
(1976, p. 3). Like most definitions of aspect, this is somewhat opaque. To com-
plicate matters further, aspect systems are far more varied in form than tense
systems. Most linguists use the term tense to label inflectional forms only. Thus,
the suffix {-ed} in walked is a tense marker but the auxiliary will in will walk is
not. But these same linguists are willing to label as aspect markers both in-
flectional and periphrastic forms; thus, across languages there is a tremendous
variation in those forms that are considered aspectual.
There are also some serious terminological problems in the study of aspect.
Different languages have different labeling systems, sometimes using the same
term for very different constructions. If you are familiar with other European
languages, you have probably encountered the terms perfect or perfective and
imperfect. The term imperfect is not used in English syntax at all, but in many
European languages it refers to a verbal affix that communicates ongoing, con-
tinuous action and habitual action. Romance languages have an imperfect form,
but it is used only with past time events. In English we communicate ongoing
action by the so-called progressiveMary is swimming, but since this con-
struction does not also communicate habitual action, the label imperfect is not
used.
While the term perfect is used in English grammar, be aware that it means
something different here than it does in the grammars of most other European
languages. In general, the terms perfect and perfective refer to an action that is
seen as an unanalyzed whole, an action that is over and done with, complete.
Aspect 107
Not surprisingly, it is usually used for events that occurred in the past. Eng-
lish does not have a separate construction to express this meaning, but many
simple past tense utterances fulfill this criteriaJudithfixed the clock; The kids
built a fort. Don't be intimidated by this foray into the terminological swamp.
The point is that the term perfect, which will be explained at some length be-
low, means something different in English grammar than it does in other con-
texts.
English has two aspects. Grammarians have traditionally called these the
progressive and the perfect. Like the terms present tense and past tense, the terms
progressive and perfect refer to specific forms of the verb. If a verb does not have
the required form, it does not have aspect. As you will see, aspect in English
is marked by a combination of inflectional suffixes and auxiliary verbs (i.e., pe-
riphrastic constructions).
PROGRESSIVE ASPECT
The progressive in English is always constructed in the same way. It re-
quires the appropriate form of the verb be, followed by a present participle.1
The present participle in English is always the {-ing} form of the verb. (Present
participle is simply the traditional name for this verb form; it is quite distinct
from present tense.) All verbs except modal auxiliaries and some semiauxiliaries
have a present participle form. The progressive is a hybrid construction, part
periphrastic (the auxiliary be) and part inflected (the |-ing}).
My daughter is study ing German.
In the following sentences, the component parts of the progressive are in bold-
face.
Pete is drinking cola.

Ling was studying last night.
The twins are screaming for their bottles.
We were skating in the park.
I am attending Reed College now.
This, not the simple present tense, is what speakers typically use when they
want to refer to an event that is occurring in present time.
Meaning of the Progressive

The progressive is usually used to communicate an ongoing and incom-
plete event. If you walk into your apartment and your roommates say, "We are
studying," you will assume that you have interrupted them. When the pro-
gressive is used with the present tense form of the auxiliary be, the hearer as-
108 The Verb Phrase
sumes that the activity is in progress. Speakers would normally contract the
auxiliaries that appear in the following examples, e.g., I'm cleaning out my
dresser, but for the time being I will use the full auxiliary to ensure that the
component parts of each structure are perfectly clear.
1 am cleaning out my dresser. [I'm not done yet.]

She is building a garage. [It's not completed yet.]
They are fixing dinner. [Preparations are still underway]
Kevin is coughing. [He is still in the midst of coughing.]
The sentences above reflect present tense and progressive aspect. Technically
there is no tense called "present progressive." When grammarians use phrases
like present progressive, they are exploiting a terminological shorthand; it is un-
derstood that two different grammatical systems are reflected in the label.
In English there is a marked contrast between the semantics of the simple
present tense and the present progressive. As you saw above, the simple pre-
sent very rarely communicates an action or event that is ongoing in present
time. This is not true in all languages, however. While Spanish has a progres-
sive construction that is similar to the one in English, the simple present tense
in Spanish can also be used to describe an action or event that is ongoing in
the present. Many languages use the simple present to express an ongoing event
and, as a result, non-native speakers of English often produce sentences like I
study and I eat dinner now.
When the auxiliary be of the progressive is in the past tense form, the hearer
assumes that a past event was ongoing and incomplete at the time in question
or when the event was interrupted or terminated.
I was reading last night at nine o'clock.

We were hiding the money [when Fred came into the room].
She was driving down 1-95 [when her tire came loose].
Dynamic and Stative Verbs

Not all verbs take the progressive. In general the progressive suggests ac-
tivity and verbs that co-occur with it are called dynamic. Verbs that express
states don't readily co-occur with the progressive. This is largely because states
are by their very nature ongoing and don't require additional grammatical in-
formation to indicate that fact. Psych-verbs (mental state verbs), however, do
vary somewhat in their co-occurrence with the progressive. *I am knowing al-
gebra and *She is believing in God are ungrammatical sentences for most speak-
ers. When we use the verb think to express an opinion or belief, we typically
avoid the progressive. ??I am thinking that capital punishment is wrong is pecu-
liar. On the other hand, when we use think to describe an activity in which we
are currently engaged, it can readily co-occur with the progressiveIam think-
Aspect 109
ing about dessert. The verb understand takes the progressive only when a recent
change of state is suggestedIam understanding statistics better these days. Verbs
expressing wants and desires vary in their ability to co-occur with the pro-
gressive. *I am desiring spaghetti is ungrammatical but I am craving spaghetti is
acceptable.
Verbs communicating ownership or possession are also stative and don't
take the progressive. *I am having a pickup truck and *Angie is owning a sailboat
are ungrammatical for all English speakers. Sometimes the semantic difference
between a stative and dynamic verb is great. Clearly I have a baby and J am hav-
ing a baby reflect two entirely different circumstances.
The verb have can also be used to communicate the state of one's health.
When a medical condition is long-term, it is treated linguistically as a state and
have does not co-occur with the progressive; *I am having Parkinson's disease and
*He is having cancer are ungrammatical. However, a temporary condition is
sometimes communicated by using the progressive. I am having an asthma at-
tack is fine, while *I have an asthma attack is not. On the other hand, 1 have the
hiccoughs and I have a headache are perfectly acceptable. There is no simple "rule"
for determining which short-term medical conditions co-occur with progres-
sive have and which don't.
As you saw in Chapter 1, the verb have is sometimes semantically empty,
while the direct object specifies the nature of the activity. Dynamic have oc-
curs in sentences like We are having dinner, They are having an argument, and
Theresa is having a bath. These sentences can be paraphrased by turning the
direct object NP into a verbWe are dining, They are arguing, Theresa is
bathing.
Sensory verbs with experiencer subjects seldom take the progressive. *1 am
hearing them argue is a very odd sentence. I am smelling smoke is marginally ac-
ceptable but 1 smell smoke is fine. When experiencer subjects of sensory verbs
do co-occur with the progressive, there is sometimes the presumption that some
sort of pathological sensory perception existsI am seeing stars; I am hearing
things. Feel is the one exception to this generalization. I am feeling some pain sug-
gests no sensory pathology.
Copulas that express relatively permanent states don't co-occur with the
progressive. You are unlikely to hear *Azra is seeming sad and *You are appear-
ing angry. Sensory copulas can co-occur with the progressive if the speaker is
talking about a temporary or recently achieved stateGene is looking healthy
these days; My stereo is sounding bad. Copula be, however, can be used in two
different ways. When it describes a relatively permanent state, it does not co-
occur with the progressive. It would be in ungrammatical to say *Michael Jor-
dan is being tall or *Louisa's eyes are being brown. However, be can also be used
to describe temporary states and in doing so can readily co-occur with the pro-
gressiveThechildren are being noisy; Millie is being obnoxious. When be is used
in this way, it suggests current behavior. If a speaker wanted to indicate that
Millie was a chronically obnoxious person, s/he would eliminate the progres-
siveMillieis obnoxious.
Copulas that suggest changes of state can readily co-occur with the pro-
I 10 The Verb Phrase
gressive. Samantha is getting tall, Tom is becoming crabby, and The weather is turn-
ing cold are all perfectly acceptable sentences.
The difference between the simple present tense and the present progres-
sive often signals the difference between a temporary condition and a perma-
nent one. If I tell you that Linda lives in Tucson, I am suggesting that she is set-
tled there, but if I say that Linda is living in Tucson, I am indicating that her
residence may not be permanent. He attends AA meetings indicates a truly ha-
bitual activity, while He is attending AA meetings suggests that the activity may
be short term.
Punctual Verbs
English contains a set of verbs called punctual. These verbs all refer to a
single event that is by its very nature over quickly. Blink, cough, knock, flash, hit,
pinch, slap, and stab are events that end in a split second. But when these verbs
occur in the progressive, they communicate repeated activity. The light flashed
could mean that the light went on and off once, but The light was flashing can
only mean that it went on and off repeatedly. Lyle is pinching his little sister in-
dicates that he has pinched her more than once.
Since the progressive is typically used to talk about ongoing activities, its
use with punctual verbs makes sense. Given the very nature of punctual verbs,
the only way they can be made to express an activity of any duration is with
the progressive.
PERFECT ASPECT
Like the progressive, the perfect is a combination of a separate auxiliary
verb and an inflectional morpheme, usually a suffix. The perfect always takes
the same shapethe appropriate form of the auxiliary have followed by the
past participle form of the following verb. (Past participle is the conventional
term for this form; it is only indirectly related to past tense.)
The most common past participle suffix in English is f-ed), but {-en} and
vowel changes also mark this form. Occasionally a verb will have no past par-
ticiple form; such verbs have no separate past tense form either, e.g., cut, put,
In most cases the past participle looks just like the past tense. This is true for
all those verbs that form the past participle with {-ed}, those that express past
tense with a vowel change plus a {t}endingsought,kept, and those few cases
in which the same vowel appears in both the past tense and the past partici-
ple (but not in the present tense)read,fed, led.
Various forms taken by past participles
(ed) ending walked, turned, nestled, mingled, carried, washed

{en} ending written, fallen, given, ridden, gone, thrown, been
Aspect
Various forms taken by past participles (cont.)
vowel change rung, sung, drunk, stung, swum, sunk, fed

no change cost, quit, cut, shut, put
vowel change + sought, bought, taught, slept, kept, wept, crept
{t} ending
In the following sentences the component parts of the perfect are in boldface.
We have finished our lunch.

You have offended my uncle.
The dog has eaten my homework.
He has written two novels.
They have gone home.
She has swum in that creek.
I have sung that song often.
I have taught here for 25 years.
Marie has put the tools in the drawer.
I had written three chapters ivhen my computer broke.
Sylvia had washed the car.
If you are unclear about the past participle form of a particular verb, sim-
ply use it in the following frame. The verb form that naturally follows have will
be the past participle.
I have .
Meaning of the Perfect

The term perfect derives from an old meaning of the adjective perfect, "some-
thing that is thoroughly made or fully accomplished, finished." In most lan-
guages the perfect form of the verb communicates exactly that, an event that
is completed, but as you have already seen, this is not the case in English.
The semantics of the English perfect is quite complex but many of its uses
are closely related. In very general terms, the present perfect (i.e., sentences in
which the auxiliary have is in the present tense) expresses a relationship be-
tween two time points, one in the past and one that includes the present.
Often the present perfect is used when an event or series of events began
in the past but continues up to and possibly through the present moment. Josh
has washed four loads of clothes suggests that Josh is not yet finished with the
The Verb Phrase
task; in contrast, Josh washed four loads of clothes indicates that the job is over.
Alicia has read three chapters of Moby Dick suggests that Alicia will keep reading,
but Alicia read three chapters of Moby Dick hints that she is done reading and
doesn't intend to finish the novel. Roland has lived here five years indicates that
Roland still lives here, while Roland lived here five years means that he is no
longer at this address. A sentence like William Shakespeare has written 37 plays
is inappropriate, since Shakespeare won't be writing any more plays.
Sometimes the present perfect is used to discuss an event that is techni-
cally over but which has generated a result that is still relevant. This is called
the perfect of current relevanceIhave cut my finger [and I'm bleeding all over
the floor]; Josh has washed four loads of clothes [and he's tiredj; I have studied hard
[and expect to get an A on the exam]. The various uses of the perfect discussed
here are not necessarily mutually exclusive arid you will find that the notion
of current relevance infuses many of them.
The present perfect can also be used to indicate that the subject of the sen-
tence has had an experience at least once in the past leading up to the present
moment. I have been to Russia does not specify when the speaker was there; the
sentence simply indicates the event took place any time in the past right up to
the present moment. We often used this experiential perfect in questions and
negative utterancesHave you ever been to Egypt? Has your daughter had the
measles? I've never eaten sweetbreads.
The present perfect is sometimes used to discuss events that have occurred
in the recent pastSummervacation has ended; Mike has arrived; Eva has left the
room. While these events have already taken place, the perfect underscores the
fact these events occurred recently, e.g., summer vacation ended only days ago.
Because this use of the perfect encompasses only the recent past, sentences like
World War II has ended and The Watergate scandal has shocked the nation are un-
acceptable in most contemporary contexts.
The past perfect (constructions in which the verb have is in the past tense)
behaves very much like the present perfect, except that the entire event and
any result take place in past time. In the sentence I have read three pages of the
report, the reading begins in the past and continues up to the present moment;
in I had read three pages of the report [when Jerry walked in], the reading starts in
the past and continues up until another moment in the past. In other words,
the present perfect reflects a past event that somehow bumps up against the
present, while the past perfect communicates a past event which bumps up
against another, more recent past event.
Novels and short stories are often written in the past tense. In this context,
events that precede those being described in the story line are usually related
in past perfect. The following passage occurs in Tony Hillerman's Sacred Clowns
(1993). (Boldface added.)
Four figures had emerged on a roof across the plaza The sacred clowns of
Pueblo people. Chee had first seen similar clowns perform at a Hopi ceremo-
nial at Moenkopi when he was a child Two of them now stood at the para-
pet of the building, (p. 15)
Aspect 113
Here past perfect communicates past time within the past.

When the perfect and progressive constructions are combined, the have of
the perfect always precedes the be of the progressive.
Simone has
Note that the component parts of the perfect are not contiguous nor are the
component parts of the progressive. In the following examples the component
parts of the perfect construction are in capital letters and the component parts
of the progressive construction are double underlined.
Those children HAVE hgEN throwing rocks at dogs.

Dave HAS MEN sleeping all day.
We HAVE beEN studying organic chemistry.
Note, too, that in each of these sentences the word been participates in both the
perfect and progressive constructions; it carries the {-en} of the perfect and the
be of the progressive. In each sentence the first auxiliary carries the tense for
the entire verb phrase. Been, throwing, sleeping, and studying are not marked for
tense. In all of the sentences above the {-ing} of the progressive attaches to the
main verb; that will no longer be the case when a passive construction is added,
as you will see shortly.
When the perfect and progressive are combined, the meaning is basically
a combination of their respective meanings as discussed above. In Dave has been
sleeping all day, the speaker indicates that Dave began sleeping in the past and
that this is an incomplete, ongoing activity that includes the present. Tense and
aspect work together semantically, but they are completely separate grammat-
ical systems.
Summary of the uses of the present perfect
State or activity begins in past, I have painted three walls

continues into present [and I have one more to go].
Past event with current I have spilled some juice
relevance [now it's staining the floor].
Experience at any point Have you ever driven a
in the past sports car?
Event of the recent past Susan has arrived.
I 1 The Verb Phrase
Tefise and Aspect in Discourse
In natural language, sentences don't occur in isolated bursts but rather follow
one another in (more or less) coherent discourse. Tense and aspect work to-
gether in some interesting ways to forge connections between predicates and
between separate sentences. Often a series of past tense "action" verbs are
processed as representing activities that occur in the order in which they are
m mtioned, i.e., the actions are temporally sequenced. This is especially obvi-
01 s when two predicates are joined (coordinated) with and.
She tripped and plunged down the stairs.

He sipped some coffee and put his cup on the table.
Trish opened the car door and got in.
I The above examples seem a little fraudulent, however, because the second
predicate follows logically from the first; in each case the reverse order would
be odd given the nature of the physical world, e.g., ?He put his cup on the table
and sipped some coffee. But even in cases where there is no predictable order of
actions, we find the same phenomenon.
Mort ate dinner and took a nap.

Sue smiled and took the boy's hand.
He shrugged and walked over to the bar.
Although the two events captured in each of these sentences could easily occur
in the opposite order, we assume that the order of the telling is the order in which
the events occurred. Jane stopped the car and got out conjures up a very different
image from ]ane got out and stopped the car. There can be significant time gaps be-
tween events that are ordered in this wayHegot married and had six children.
Not all coordinated past tense action verb phrases express this kind of tem-
poral sequencing, however. Actions like taking a boy's hand, walking over to
the bar, and getting out of the car take place over very short periods of time.
But when the actions in both predicates continue over a longer period, they
may be interpreted as intermingledWeate pizza and drank soda all evening; The
kids tapped their feet and whispered during the service; I coughed and sneezed all night.
In these cases the predicates aren't temporally ordered.
Action verbs in separate but contiguous sentences can also be interpreted
as representing a temporal sequence of events. This passage is from Sara Paret-
sky's short story collection Windy City Blues (1995). Only the main verb(s) in
each sentence will be considered. (Boldface added.)
They frog-marched me down the hall to the closet before untying my hands.
1 knelt to work on the lock. As it clicked free Vico grabbed the door and yanked
Tense and Aspect in Discourse
it open. I fell forward into the wires. Grabbing a large armful, I pulled with
all my strength, (p. 73)
There is a clear-cut temporal sequence here; the order of the main verbs rep-
resents the order in which the actions occur.
However, when verbs express states or habitual actions, there is no real
temporal ordering. Consider the following passage, also from Windy City
Blues.
Cinda Goodrich and I were jogging acquaintances. A professional photogra-

pher, she kept the same erratic hours as a private investigator; we often met
along Belmont Harbor in the late mornings, (p. 296)
Here a stative verb were is followed by two habitual verbs. The circumstances
that are described in this passage persist over time and their ordering is un-
specified.
The progressive has an interesting effect on the way we interpret events
temporally. As you saw above, progressive events are ongoing, incomplete.
When a progressive verb follows a past tense verb, we usually interpret the ac-
tion of the first verb as being included within the time frame of the second
(Dowty, 1986, pp. 53-54). In I sat down next to Sammie; he was crying, the hearer
is likely to assume that Sammie was crying before I sat down next to him. We
see the same pattern when the second verb is stativeIlooked over at Beth. She
was bored. In each of the following sets of sentences, the second predicate over-
laps the first in terms of time frame.
I heard a loud thump. Someone was climbing the trellis outside my window.
Esther looked outside. It was raining.
Moira called me up last night. She was mad.
The boys entered the locker room. It was very humid in there.
You might imagine the time frame for the last example as looking something
like this:
(Time Frame)
[It w a s v e r y h u m i d in t h e r e ]
[The boys entered the locker room.]
By combining the simple past tense with progressive and stative predicates,
English speakers can talk about situations or events inside other situations or
events.
116 The Verb Phrase
Passive Voice
Voice is a very different phenomenon from aspect. Where tense and aspect
work together to place an event or state within a time frame, voice provides a
strategy for focusing on different participants in an event.
English contains two so-called voicestheactive and the passive. Active
sentences are unmarked; in other words, if a sentence is not specifically marked
passive, it is technically active. All of the examples in this chapter thus far have
been active sentences.
Like the perfect and the progressive, passive sentences have a distinctive
structure. Most passive sentences contain the auxiliary be followed by a verb
in past participle form. (As you will see later, some passives contain the aux-
iliary get.)
Jack was push ed by JUL
Some passives include a prepositional phrase containing the preposition by

Guido was fired by the Board of Directors, but this is not required. In the fol-
lowing sentences, the component parts of the passive are in boldface.
The dog was saved by its owner.

The trees were damaged by high winds.
He is offended by crude language.
Amy was promoted last week.
The village was destroyed.
Most speakers of English have no difficultly turning an active sentence into

a corresponding passive form. The cat chased the rat becomes The rat was chased
by the cat; Goldilocks ate the porridge becomes The porridge was eaten by Goldilocks.
In these sentences the direct object of the active sentence becomes the subject
of the passive sentence, while the old subject appears at (or near) the end of
the sentence preceded by the preposition by. This suggests that only transitive
verbs participate in passive constructions and this is usually, but not always,
the case. Sentences like This bed was slept in by George Washington do exist in
English but they aren't common.
TRANSITIVE VERBS THAT DON'T (READILY) PASSIVIZE

While almost all passive sentences contain transitive verbs, not all transi-
tive verbs can participate in passive constructions. As was indicated in Chap-
ter 1, some sentences are more transitive than others, depending in part on the
relative agentiveness of the subject and the degree to which the direct object is
Passive Voice
affected by the action of the verb. The degree of transitivity a sentence exhibits
affects its ability to passivize.
Transitive verbs with agent and causer subjects passivize easily, largely be-
cause they have affected direct objects.
Gerald broke the VCR. / The VCR was broken by Gerald.

Those roots destroyed my plumbing. / My plumbing was destroyed by those
roots.
The dogs frightened the children. / The children were frightened by the
dogs.
Sensory verbs with experiencer subjects can passivize, but such passives some-
times sound a bit strained.
The employees heard the explosion. / The explosion was heard by the em-
ployees.
The guests smelled smoke. / ?Smoke was smelled by the guests.
Three students saw the accident. / The accident was seen by three students.
Psych-verbs with experiencer subjects resist passivization.
Martha wants this book. / *This book is wanted by Martha.

Manny hated the movie. / ?The movie was hated by Manny.
Orson enjoys romances. / ??Romances are enjoyed by Orson.
You will find that both sensory and psych-verbs are somewhat more accept-
able in the passive if the NP in the by prepositional phrase is indefinite, e.g.,
The movie was hated by everybody; Tiny Tim was loved by all; The accident was
seen by everyone. But in general, sentences with experiencer subjects don't make
good passives. This is in large part because their direct objects are relatively
unaffected by the action of the verb.
There is a small category of stative verbs called reciprocal verbs. Sentences
containing these verbs are unusual semantically because the subject and direct
object have the same relationship to one another. If Sophia resembles Alexander
then Alexander resembles Sophia; if House means maison then Maison means house.
Neither of these sentences contains an agent nor an affected patient. It is not
surprising then that reciprocal verbs do not take the passive*Sophia is resem-
bled by Alexander. English contains two verbs to marry; one is reciprocal and one
is not. In A Roman Catholic priest married the young couple, the verb is clearly not
reciprocal and this sentence can be turned into a passiveTheyoung couple was
married by a Roman Catholic priest. In Othello married Desdemona, however, the
verb is reciprocal and the passive is impossible for most speakers. Reciprocal
The Verb Phrase
verbs do not co-occur with the passive because in the passive there is typically
an agent (or instrument) and an affected party. That dichotomy simply does-
n't exist with reciprocal verbs.
Possession verbs are always stative but some passivize and some do not.
Have (meaning possess) always rejects the passive and, as a result, construc-
tions expressing inalienable possession never passivize*Abeard is had by Toby;
*Tivo cousins are had by Zia. Possess is marginally acceptable in the passive
?That land is possessed by the Jones family. Own, however, passivijzes readily
This corporation is owned by a billionaire; That cabin is owned by a recluse.
GET PASSIVE
Increasingly, English speakers are using a passive construction that exploits

some form of get as its auxiliary Written examples of the so-called get passive
date back to the middle of the eighteenth century and it is undoubtedly older
than that in the spoken language (Givon and Yang, 1994). The get passive is es-
pecially common in colloquial speech. It is most often used when the subject
of the sentence suffers adversely as a result of the action. One study has shown
that in spoken English about 80% of get passives reflect an adverse effect upon
the subject, as opposed to only 40% of be passives. (These data are from an un-
published 1986 study by R. Herold, cited in Givon and Yang.)
My dog got bitten by a snake.

They got mugged by some teenagers.
The unruly students got punished.
My wife got fired.
The following passages are from The Bone People, a novel by New Zealan-
der Keri Hulme (1986). (Boldface added.)
"YouTl probably get sued by the shop owners, or their insurance people. He's
smashed in nearly all the glass fronts along Whitau street/' (p. 306)
"He's too young to prosecute, loe, but it's about time something got done."
(p. 306)
But she hadn't been hit there. She hadn't got hurt at all. (p. 187)
Even the passive got done suggests an adverse result; the speaker is recom-
mending that disciplinary action be taken against a young vandal.
Even when a subject does not suffer adversely, the get passive usually sug-
gests that the subject has been truly affected by the action. Bill got promoted last
week and The hikers got rescued are acceptable sentences but ??Tina got seen is
very odd unless Tina was doing something surreptitiously. (Tina was seen is fine
in any context, however.)
Passive Voice
In a few cases the get passive is preferable to the be passive. For most speak-
ers, Crystal got married last week is more natural than Crystal was married last
lueek.
It is not always easy to tell a passive construction from a copula plus a sub-
ject complement. This is because past participle forms often function as adjec-
tivesthebroken window, a stolen necklace, unfinished business, a tattered coat,
bleached hair, etc. When a construction like They were married is considered out
of context, it is impossible to determine whether married is functioning as a
predicate adjective noting a married state or as part of a passive construction
that is describing an activity. Usually the discourse context will make things
clear, e.g., They were married, but they acted like boyfriend and girlfriend versus They
were married in a beautiful garden.
Because the subject of the passive is usually the direct object of the corre-
sponding active, the passive subject is typically a patient. But there are excep-
tions to this pattern. When the verb is ditransitive, two objects are available,
either of which could theoretically become the subject of a corresponding pas-
sive. Thus, Scott loaned Michelle a bike yields two passivesAbike was loaned to
Michelle by Scott and Michelle was loaned a bike by Scott. (Note that when the di-
rect object becomes the subject of the passive, the indirect object must occur in
a prepositional phrase.) But indirect objects that can be paraphrased as for
prepositional phrases do not become the subjects of passives. Jerry baked Elly a
cake and Jerry baked a cake for Elly yield a passive that most speakers find un-
acceptable*EUywas baked a cake by Jerry. Similarly, Mary built the kids a sand-
box yields the infelicitous *The kids were built a sandbox by Mary.
When the active sentence contains no object, i.e., the verb is intransitive,
the object of a preposition can sometimes become the subject of a correspond-
ing passive, e.g., Someone slept in this bed last night. / This bed was slept in by some-
one last night.
PASSIVES WITH NO CORRESPONDING ACTIVE

There seem to be a few passives that have no corresponding active.
Bugsy is reputed to be a gangster.

James is rumored to be a CIA agent.
A sentence like My uncle is wanted by the police is also interesting in this regard.
While we can say The police want my uncle, this active does not carry quite the
same meaning as its passive counterpart. In fact wanted has taken on a life of
its own, even appearing as a descriptive adjective on "wanted" posters.
THE PASSIVE IN DISCOURSE

When you consider two sentences like The cat chased the rat and The rat was
chased by the cat, there seems to be little if any difference in meaning. Both con-
120 The Verb Phrase
tain the agent the cat, the affected party the rat, and the action chased. Given the
no synonymy rule, why does English have two related constructions that ap-
pear to communicate the same meaning?
There are a number of different discourse reasons for the existence of the
passive. One important function of the passive is maintaining the topic of a
discourse. As you have already seen, once an entity has been introduced as a
topic, a speaker will try to keep that topic in subject position. Consider the fol-
lowing narrative.
My daughter Alice works in a bank. Last week she was called to the supervisor's of-
fice because a customer had complained about her behavior. Alice was not allozoed to
defend herself She was suspended for a week without pay. Of course she was shocked
by this callous treatment.
Alice is obviously the topic of this little story Once Alice is introduced in the
first sentence, the passive is used to maintain Alice as the subject (and thus
topic) of the next four sentences.
Related to the issue of topic is the egocentrism of human beings. Humans
like to talk about themselves and other humans. We are likely to make a hu-
man the subject of a sentence even when there is no topic to be maintained. A
man was hit by a bus is a more natural utterance than A bus hit a man. The pas-
sive allows us to make this human the subject of the sentence even though he
is not an agent.
Agentless Passives
While agents are usually subjects, they can appear in prepositional phrases
as well. If a passive contains an agent, causer, or instrument, that role will ex-
pressed by the NP in a by prepositional phraseTimmy was saved by his dog.
But, in fact, most English passives contain no such prepositional phrase. These
constructions are called agentless passives, since the agent/ causer/instrument
is unspecifiedMycar was vandalized. (From now on I will simply refer to an
agent, causer, or instrument in the passive as the agent.) A number of linguists
have studied passives in written texts and media broadcasts and have found
that between 80% and 85% of English passives are agentless. Since most pas-
sives are agentless, we can conclude that speakers typically use the passive to
omit the agent.
Often the agent is omitted simply because it is unknown.
My cousin was mugged yesterday.

The car door was scratched last night.
My great-grandfather was wounded in the Civil War.
The agent is also omitted when it is irrelevant to the speaker, indefinite, or

obvious from the rest of the discourse. When the doctor's husband says, "She
Passive Voice 121
was called to the hospital at midnight/7 who called is irrelevant, even if caller's
identity is known. When Miamians say "Yuca can be bought at any Cuban gro-
cery," the omitted agent is the nonspecific indefinite "by anyone." Often the
agent is obvious from the rest of the sentence or discourseAnelephant fell on
her and she was killed instantly; He stepped in front of the train and was
crushed.
The agentless passive has other related functions as well. Sometimes the
agent is known but deliberately omitted in order to avoid assigning or taking
responsibilityAn important file was misplaced; The clothes were left in the dryer
The Watergate scandal produced the weak admission that "Mistakes were
made."
For scientific and technical writers, who are required by editorial conven-
tion to suppress the first and second person pronouns, the agentless passive is
an important linguistic tool. The following passages are from a highly techni-
cal computer science article (Lui and Layland, 1973). (Boldface added.)
The deadline of a request is defined to be the time of the next request, (p. 49)
None of the computation requested . . . was carried out before T. (p. 57)
Some of these tasks are executed in response to events, (p. 47)
When an agent or causer does occur in a passive, it is almost always new

information. Such constructions often appear as answers to questions.
What happened to your avocado tree? Oh, it was damaged by the wind.
Because by prepositional phrases in passives usually carry new informa-

tion, we very rarely find pronouns acting as agents in passives. (Remember
that pronouns always express given information.) Sentences like ?Cynthia was
hurt by me and ?The city was destroyed by it are odd precisely because we don't
expect given information in these positions.
The passive, especially the agentless passive, is ubiquitous in English. It is
an extremely useful syntactic tool. I am, therefore, baffled by teachers and ed-
itors who insist that writers should not use the passive and am annoyed by
computer grammar-checkers that mark passive constructions as errors. College
students most often write nonfiction essays, and Givon (1993b, p. 53) has
demonstrated that, among professional writers, this type of essay contains even
more passives than fiction writing or newspaper reporting. Nevertheless, the
academy sometimes discourages the use of the passive in just this context.
I suspect that this anti-passive bias stems in part from undergraduate stu-
dent writing in which the full passive (including the by prepositional phrase)
is used in a stilted fashion. Including a first person agent in an English passive
is always awkward, since the agent is almost always new information, but
novice writers often generate infelicitous sentences like ?The computations were
made by me. However, if over 80% of our spoken passives are agentless, it is
reasonable to assume that a significant number of our written passives will be
122 The Verb Phrase
agentless as well. Proscribing the passive altogether in student or professional

writing simply generates bad prose.
Constructions That Are Active in Form and Passive in Meaning

There are some active constructions in English that behave very much like
passives. In one type the agent is omitted altogetherCottonwashes well; Tan-
gerines peel nicely; These shirts iron easily. Note that in these sentences the sub-
jects are patients, not agents, despite the normally transitive verbs. Clearly, cot-
ton cannot wash anything, nor can shirts iron. Although these sentences do not
have the verb morphology required of passives, they resemble passive sen-
tences in some interesting ways. Unlike normal active sentences, some of the
sentences above can be turned into passives by retaining the original NP in
subject positionTheseshirts can be ironed easily. Unlike the subjects of normal
transitive, active sentences, the subjects of these sentences are affected by the
action of the verb. These constructions are sometimes called pseudo-passives.
English speakers also use a generic they as a subject in cases in which the
agent is unknown, unimportant, or conceptually complexThey'repaving over
Paradise; They buried my grandfather last week; They're repairing the old train sta-
tion. In each of these cases no NP specifying they has been previously intro-
duced into the discourse; thus, they does not have anaphoric reference. Non-
anaphoric they constructions and agentless passives have similar functions in
that they both allow us to talk about events without specifying an agent. Re-
member, however, that a true passive must be passive in form.
WORD ORDER AND THE PASSIVE

The passive frequently co-occurs with the perfect and somewhat less fre-
quently with the progressive. While the conventional passive construction very
rarely occurs with both the perfect and progressive, get passives appear more
frequently in this contextWe have been getting burglarized every Friday night; I
have been getting stopped by the police [whenever 1 go out].
The passive always comes last in the VP and, as a result, its past partici-
ple always attaches to the last verb.
In the following sentences, the component parts of the perfect are capital-
ized, the component parts of the progressive are double underlined, and the
component parts of the passive are in bold.
Jimmy is being tormented by his little sister.

I HAVE beEN promoted.
The machines are being repaired by a professional.
Primary Auxiliaries and the Lexical Verb 123
Remember that the first verb always carries the tense. If there is a perfect
construction, it precedes the progressive and/or passive constructions; if there
is a progressive, it precedes the passive. In other words, the order is always
perfect + progressive + passive.
Primary Auxiliaries and the Lexical Verb
The have of the perfect, the be of the progressive, and the be of the passive are
called primary auxiliaries. These auxiliaries have no meaning apart from their
participation in these constructions.
In a sentence, auxiliary verbs are always followed by a lexical verb. There
are a very small number of auxiliary verbs in English, but lexical verbs num-
ber in the thousands. The Collins English Dictionary lists 14,190 different verbs
(Miller and Fellbaum, 1992, p. 214) and all but a few of these are lexical.
Primary auxiliaries have no independent semantic content, and, as you will
see later, modal auxiliaries express a somewhat limited range of meanings. Lex-
ical verbs, however, communicate an extraordinary number of meanings as a
class, and individual verbs tend to be semantically complex as well. A single
verb form may have five or six different but related meanings. Consider a verb
like run.
Margot ran to the store. The engine is running.

The kids ran him ragged. The baby's nose is running.
The canoeist ran the rapids. My uncle runs a grocery store.
The doctor is running late. Gore is running for President.
A group of verbs that is unrelated in terms of form may be very closely re-
lated semantically. All of the following verbs refer to walking; they differ only
in the style of gait they describestroll, amble, saunter, shuffle, stagger, stride,
strut, tiptoe, march, limp, stomp. Verbs can refer to a tremendous variety of speak-
ing stylestalk,whisper, chatter, whine, mumble, yell, babble, as well as many ways
of interacting verbally with another personconverse, argue, gossip, gab, quib-
ble, rap, chat, yak, debate.
The lexical verb is always the last verb in the verb phrase. If there is only
one verb in the verb phrase, it is a lexical verb. You are probably accustomed
to calling the lexical verb the "main" verb. This is risky, however, because, as
you will see later, every clause in a sentence has a lexical verb, but the sentence
itself has only one main verb. In the following sentences, the verbs in boldface
are lexical.
Bert has been working for hours.

Sandy has two bicycles.
124 The Verb Phrase
Michelle has been hired by a prestigious firm.

Billy has had the measles.
Donna is being tormented by her boss.
My uncle is being polite.
I am a social worker.
Boris loves Shakespeare.
Remember that auxiliary be and auxiliary have are completely different from
lexical be and have; thus, two haves or two bes can occur in the same utterance
Mick is being obnoxious; Mary Jane has had trouble with her car.
Many of the sentences cited as examples above are actually somewhat ar-
tificial. In informal speech, most primary auxiliaries are contracted. This means
that in terms of pronunciation the auxiliary is reduced to its final consonant
and is attached to the subject.
Auxiliary Contracted form
am I'm being eaten by mosquitoes.

is Dudley's leaving the party now.
are They're eating all your pretzels.
was [no contracted form]
were [no contracted form]
has She's finished her project.
have We've seen that movie
had They'd been there before.
In the following transcription of actual speech, the speaker is describing a

short film clip s/he has just seen. Each primary auxiliary is contracted. (Bold-
face added; all but the final ellipses are in the original.)
He's very deliberately . . . plucking the . . the um . . . the pears off the tree,
. . . and . . . you know you hear this . . . a sh:arp little crunch as . . he pulls
each one off, and he's doing it. . very slowly, and putting them in . . . [breath]
. . . his apron. . . . [H]e'd never make it as a fruitpicker. (Tannen, 1984b, p. 35)
Lexical verb be can be contracted in exactly the same ways that primary
auxiliary be canShe'sa lawyer; We're angry. Americans rarely contract lexical
verb have, but British speakers often do soI'veno money today; They've no hope
whatsoever.
Multi-Word Lexical Verbs
Before I launch into a discussion of multi-word lexical verbs, let me briefly ex-
plain prepositions. Prepositions constitute a class of short function words that
combine with NPs to make prepositional phrases like I put the book on the table
and The baby threw my hat in the toilet. Many prepositions express location or
directionin,on, at, to, through, over, under, above, around, etc. Typically a prepo-
sition is followed by an NP that functions as its objectSamput the coius in the
barn. Prepositions typically occur in modifying phrases, i.e., adverb phrases
and adjective phrases.
Over time, some prepositions have become semantically attached to pre-
ceding verbs, creating new multi-word verbs with new meanings. When the
preposition becomes figuratively attached in this way, it is called a verb parti-
cle and the entire construction is called a multi-word verb (or sometimes a
phrasal verb). Some multi-word verbs have one particle and some have two.
The police tracked down the killer.

Nina gave back the book.
The baby threw up her lunch.
Art chewed out his employees.
Brian gave up on his son.
These plans don't conform to our standards.
Grace looks down on her relatives.
The newspaper hinted at scandal.
Ted broke in on their conversation.
In a sentence like Donna turned out the light, the lexical verb is turned out and
the direct object is the light. In Charlotte called on Emily, called on is the lexical
verb and Emily is the direct object.
Some multi-word verbs are very old. Give up as in She gave up her title ap-
pears in print as early as the twelfth century; put on (He put on his clothes) and
blow out (She blew out the candle) date back to the fourteenth century. Throw out
developed in the sixteenth century and give in meaning "to yield" in the sev-
enteenth. As contemporary as it sounds, fork over as in May forked over the money
dates back to the nineteenth century. The creation of multi-word verbs contin-
ues unabatedJimmygrossed out his friends; Anne ripped off her employer; Han-
nah blew off her homexuork.
Verb particles derive from prepositions and in some multi-word verbs, the
126 The Verb Phrase
particle retains a great deal of its original prepositional meaning. Out is used
quite literally in The dentist took out three teeth and Susan has put out the cat,
and a bit less literally in Mark has thrown out your comic books. The particle out
is often added to verbs to denote removalyank versus yank out, pull versus
pull out, pry versus pry out, tear versus tear out. But out has lost its prepositional
meaning in I can't figure out this problem and I found out her secret. Even when
a particle loses its literal prepositional meaning, however, it is often possible
to see a metaphorical connection between the original preposition and the cur-
rent particle. While the preposition down literally indicates a direction, down is
often used in expressions to suggest the result of a social or psychological de-
clinedownand out, down in the dumps. In these contexts down always has a
negative connotation. In George is always putting down his partner, put down
means to denigrate or insult. In They turned down my request, turn down means
to reject. Clearly, these constructions are metaphorically linked to others in
which down has taken on a strongly negative meaning. Many verb particles ex-
ploit this kind of metaphor.
Some verb particles have specialized meanings. While the particle up in He
picked up the baby retains the directional meaning of preposition up, up means
something very different in She cleaned up the room. Here particle up means
"completely or thoroughly/7 A number of verbs exploit up in this waysweep
up, wash up, burn up, tie up, close up, rip up, fix up, cover up, use up, etc. Some-
thing that is used up has been used to the point of exhaustion; something that
has burned may or not be totally consumed, but something that has burned up
most assuredly is. As you saw above, many languages exploit the perfect to in-
dicate that an event or action is complete; in English the particle up performs
much the same function.
MOVABLE PARTICLES
There are two distinct types of multi-word verbs. In the first type the verb
particle can move to a position after the direct object. Any preposition-like word
that can move in this fashion is a verb particle.
Melinda threzv qut the paper
The particles that are most likely to be movable are out, up, down, over, and off,
although others do move on occasion.
He drove out everyone else.I He drove everyone else out.

Azar put out the light. / Azar put the light out.
They blew up the dam./ They blew the dam up.
They gave up the hostage./ They gave the hostage up.
Teresa swept up the debris./ Teresa swept the debris up.

You screwed up my wiring. / You screwed my wiring up.
They burned down the house./ They burned the house down.
Dan put down the baby./ Dan put the baby down.
They tracked down the killer./ They tracked the killer down.
She looked over the exams./ She looked the exams over.
Paul forked over the money./Paul forked the money over.
They ripped off their friend./ They ripped their friend off.
He took off his clothes./ He took his clothes off.
You must break in a new car./ You must break a new car in.
Pronouns have an interesting effect on movable particles. When the direct

object of a multi-word verb is a pronoun, the particle must appear after the di-
rect object. Linda threw out the paper is fine but *Linda threw out it is ungram-
matical for most speakers. In this case, the particle must be movedLindathrew
it out. You will recall that we witnessed this same phenomenon in ditransitive
constructions with pronoun direct objects. Since pronouns typically express
given information and since new information usually appears last in the sen-
tence, pronouns resist occupying final position.
UNMOVABLE PARTICLES
In the second type of multi-word verb, the particle does not move. In these
cases, it is not always easy to distinguish a verb plus particle construction from
a verb plus prepositional phrase construction. Usually in a verb phrase con-
taining an unmovable particle, the particle has little in common semantically
with the preposition from which it derives. In Angela called on her grandparents,
on has lost its spatial meaning. (Clearly, Angela did not stand on top of her
grandparents and call.) Unmovable particles are usually more stressed in
speech than movable particles but the difference is very subtle. See if you can
perceive a stress difference in She threiv on her clothes versus She called on her
grandmother. The most common unmovable particles are on, of to, for, and at.
Michaela insisted on imported beer.

I don't approve of your behavior.
Eve commented on Adam's good manners.
They must conform to our standards.
I object to your inference.
Judith applied for a post abroad.
128 The Verb Phrase
The reported hinted at scandal

The candidate called for a referendum.
That leather gives off an unpleasant odor. (Off may be movable for some
speakers.)
Turn into is a multi-word copulaTheprince turned into afrog; My little girl
has turned into a teenager. Turn into can be paraphrased with become, although
turn into usually suggests a more dramatic transformation.
There are some multi-word verbs containing two particles. Multiple parti-
cles never move.
They will not put up with her arrogance.

I want to catch up on my reading.
The operator broke in on my telephone call.
His girlfriend walked out on him.
My roommate looks down on everyone.
Children look up to professional athletes.
We ran out of milk.
Istvan looks out for his brother.
The kids must cut down on expenses.
Sometimes the same verb plus particle construction will have different
meanings in different contexts. Rip off can mean to remove completelyShe
ripped off the sleeves, and it can also mean steal or steal from She ripped off that
stereo; She ripped off her brother. Transitive give up means to relinquish some-
thingHegave up his inheritance, while intransitive give up means to surrender
or ceaseThefugitive gave up; I couldn't open the child-proof container so 1 gave up.
Transitive take off means to removeThe child took off his shirt, while intransi-
tive take off means to leave or become airborneThekids took off; The plane took
off
IDENTIFYING MULTI-WORD VERBS

Because multi-word verbs derive from old prepositional phrase construc-
tions, it is not always easy to distinguish a verb plus particle from a verfe plus
prepositional phrase. A movable particle is, of course, a definitive diagnostic.
If the preposition-like word moves to a position after the following NP, it is a
particle.
Paraphrasing is also a useful diagnostic tool. Verb plus particle construc-
tions can often (but not always) be replaced by a single-word lexical verb.
conform to meet hint at suggest

put out extinguish give in yield
call on visit give up relinquish
call up telephone break in on interrupt
throw up vomit look down on disdain
give back return look up to admire
put down denigrate put up with tolerate
take off remove/leave
(It is interesting to note that most multi-word verbs contain Old English verb
heads, e.g., give, blow, throw, rip, but their single word counterparts are often
words borrowed from French or Latin, e.g., extinguish, visit, vomit, relinquish.
This is some measure of just how "native" verb particle constructions are.)
If a given verb routinely occurs with a given preposition-like form, it is
reasonable to treat that form as a particle. Apply frequently co-occurs with for,
approve frequently co-occurs with of and object almost always co-occurs with
to. If a verb that is normally transitive is followed directly by a preposition-like
word (instead of an NP), that word is probably a particle, as in give up and give
in, throw up and throw out, put away and put up with. In addition, there are some
verb heads that participate in a great many different multi-word constructions.
blow blow up, blow out, blow down, blow over, blow off
throw throw out, throw up, throiu down, throw in
(e.g., The boxer threw in the towel)
look look up, look up to, look over, look down on, look in on
give give up, give in, give away, give off, give out
put put out, put up with, put down, put in
(e.g., The canoeists put in at the bridge.)
burn burn up, burn out, burn down, burn through
call call up, call on, call for, call in (e.g., He called in his
pledge or She called in the chips.)
While some of these verbs can be followed by prepositions as well as particles,

the presence of one of them in a construction suggests that you should employ
another test for verb particle status.
In some cases, however, it is not at all clear how a construction should be
categorized. Should talk to be considered a multi-word verb or a verb plus
preposition? Talk often co-occurs with to but it can also be accompanied by with,
about, or nothing at all. Talk to cannot be readily replaced by a single verb para-
130 The Verb Phrase
phrase and the to is not movable. On the other hand, to has lost much of its
spatial meaning in this construction. When to occurs as a full-fledged preposi-
tion it usually expresses a physical goalIdais going to Prague; Sandra is going
to the store. In The CEO talked to her staff, that sense of goal is significantly di-
minished. The evolution of preposition to particle represents a continuum and
talk to seems to fall somewhere near the middle.
The classic verb particle conundrum is this:
Why does a match burn out, a building burn down, and paper
burn up?
Modality
Examples in grammar books do not constitute a representative sample of ac-

tual human speech. Textbook examples tend to reflect statements of factThe
little girl threw the ball over the wall; The cat chased the rat; Ella gave the dog a bone.
But we do so much more than that with language; we speculate, we hedge, we
predict, we suggest, we order, we demand, we hope, we want, etc.
The abstract term modality is used to refer to these kinds of meanings in
language. Modality has nothing to do with form; many different kinds of con-
structions can be used to express modality, including lexical verbs, modal aux-
iliaries, semi-auxiliaries, adverbs, the imperative mood, and the subjunctive
mood. Modality in English sentences is usually divided into two general
typesepistemicand deontic.
EPISTEMIC MODALITY IN GENERAL

The term epistemic is related to the word epistemology (theories of knowing).
Epistemic modality encompasses all the ways in which speakers indicate their
degree of commitment to the truth of a given proposition. It allows speakers
to indicate that they are certain about something, unsure about it, or deem it
impossible. (Some grammarians use the terms "possibility" and "necessity" to
describe these meanings.) English has a whole range of strategies for commu-
nicating this kind of information.
Sometimes we use nonlinguistic cues to communicate epistemic modality.
If you tell someone that your sister is a financial planner, but you use quota-
tion marks in the air as you say "financial planner," your hearer will know that
you don't see your sister as the real thing. Sarcasm in the voice has a similar
effect. What seems to be a positive statement of fact, "She's very efficient," can
become an indictment when said sarcastically.
We often preface assertions with expressions like I think/believe/as-
sume/guess/suppose/hear that Joan is taking the job. Here the speaker is unwill-
ing to make the unqualified assertion Joan is taking the job; instead, s/he is hedg-
ing. By prefacing the assertion with an expression like I hear that.. ., the speaker
Modality 131
makes someone else the source of the information; by using I assume, I guess,
or I suppose, s/he indicates that this proposition is a deduction and not a known
fact. I think and I believe reveal that the proposition is personal opinion. In each
of these sentences, epistemic modality is being expressed by the lexical verb.
In expressions like I am sure/positive/certain that Joan will take the job and It is
likely/possible/conceivable/doubtful that Joan will take the job, the predicate adjec-
tive expresses epistemic modality.
Sentence modifiers can also express epistemic modality. These construc-
tions will be discussed more fully Chapter 4.
Maybe it will rain tomorrow.

Supposedly, he composed it himself.
Allegedly, she has robbed four banks.
In his book Mood and Modality, F. R. Palmer (1986, p. 67) describes modal-
ity in the Tuyuca language of Brazil and Columbia. Tuyuca speakers mark their
verbs to indicate what kind of evidence exists for the assertion they are mak-
ing. A verb can be marked to indicate visual evidence (the speaker saw the
event being described), aural evidence (the speaker heard the event but didn't
see it), indirect physical evidence (the speaker saw physical signs that the event
took place), second-hand account (someone told the speaker the event took
place), or a reasonable assumption (the speaker assumes the event took place).
We can do all of this in English, of course, but our strategies are far wordier.
DEONTIC MODALITY IN GENERAL

Like the term epistemic, deontic is a semantic label. It derives from the Greek
word deontology which refers to "the science of duty." And like epistemic modal-
ity, deontic modality goes beyond the simple proposition. Deontic modality in-
volves language and potential action; when speakers order, promise, or place
an obligation on someone, they usually exploit linguistic forms that express de-
ontic modality. (Deontic modality is sometimes called root modality because,
historically, the epistemic meanings derive from the deontic.)
Directives represent one important type of deontic modality. A directive is
any utterance in which a speaker tries to get someone else to behave in a par-
ticular way. Directives take many forms, as the examples below indicate.
I want you to get your feet off the coffee table.

You should help Deanna fix that tire.
These errors must be corrected.
I insist that you leave.
Sit down, shut up, and eat your spinach.
132 The Verb Phrase
Don't be late.
Please have some more pie.
You might call me when the shipment arrives.
STOP
No smoking.
Any expression of volition also encodes deontic modality. Volition includes

wanting, willingness, intention, and wishing. Sentences that express promises
and threats are also volitional.
Adam wants to taste tripe.

I promise to take you to the zoo.
I will wash the dishes later.
My daughter insists on dating that idiot.
I am going to repair the roof next week.
I wish to leave.
Ill punish you if you do that again.
As a rule, in an active sentence deontic meanings attach only to animate,

usually human, subjects. Epistemic modality can coexist with any kind of
subject.
A common way to express modality of any sort is through the use of modal
and semi-auxiliaries.
MODAL AUXILIARIES
Modal auxiliaries represent a very special class of verbs in English. These
odd verbs predate even Old English; their peculiarities are the result of lin-
guistic events in the ancient Germanic languages (ca. 500 B.C.). All the other
major modern Germanic languages (Dutch, Swedish, Danish, Norwegian, and
German) have these same auxiliaries. In contrast to the primary auxiliaries be
and have, modal auxiliaries are semantically rich and inflectionally impover-
ished. Modal auxiliaries carry no third person present {-s} ending (*Bruce cans
go now is absolutely ungrammatical) and they have no past participle forms,
no present participle forms, and no infinitive forms.
Most modals do have distinct past tense forms, however. While you may
find this counter-intuitive, the past tense of can is could, the past tense of will
is would, the past tense of shall is should, and the past tense of may is might. Re-
member that tense is simply a matter of form, not meaning. The {-d} or |-t) end-
ing on these words is simply a manifestation of the typical {-ed} past tense in-
flection, and all of these forms date back to Old English. Must was an Old
English past tense form; the corresponding present tense mot- was lost during
Modality 133
Middle English times. Ought was the past tense form of the Old English verb
meaning to own from which Modern English owe is derived. Ought to is the only
two-word modal auxiliary.
Present tense form Past tense form
will would
can could
shall should
may might
[no form exists] must
[no form exists] ought to
Will and would are the only modals that are routinely contracted in speech
I'll come over later; I'd have been here sooner [if my car hadn't broken down].
Modal Auxiliaries and Epistemic Modality

Among the most common sources of epistemic modality in English are the
modal auxiliaries can, could, should, will, may, might, must, and ought to. Taken
as a group, these modal auxiliaries express a whole range of epistemic modal-
ity. When Cory's wife says "That might be Cory at the door," she is express-
ing doubt. When she says "That should be Cory at the door," she communi-
cates greater certainty; maybe Cory always gets home at this time. When she
says, "That must be Cory at the door," she is indicating that the evidence is
overwhelming; maybe no one else has a key. Epistemic modals express mean-
ings that range from slight possibility to absolute certainty.
It might rain tomorrow.

Angelo may come to the party.
We ought to be in Cleveland by 10 P.M.
The office should be open by now.
Kerry must have taken the folder home.
The airport can't be closed!
That will be Zulah at the door.
Epistemic can usually occurs only in questions, negatives, or passives; *Th.at

can be Zulah and */ can be midnight are ungrammatical for most speakers. Will
expresses very strong epistemic modality, to the point that it predicts. Would
134 The Verb Phrase
occasionally occurs in epistemic occurrences. If someone asks you who the best
plumber in town is you might reply "Oh, that would be my Uncle Walter."
Shall is never used epistemically.
Modal Auxiliaries and Deontic Modality

Most of the modal auxiliaries discussed above can also express meanings
that are decidedly non-epistemic. There is a marked difference in the meaning
of must in That must be Cory and You must clean your room. In the second sen-
tence the speaker is expressing deontic modality
Modal Auxiliaries Used in Directives. The directive is an important subcat-

egory of deontic modality. As you saw above, the term directive refers to all of
the strategies that speakers use to direct the behavior of someone else. Modal
auxiliaries are especially important in this regard; they can be used to order,
insist, reprimand, lay an obligation, make a suggestion, and give permission.
The same modal can appear in different types of directives.
You will put that candy down! [an order]

You must pay for your food. [strong obligation]
She should help her sister. [obligation]
Your partner should see this first. [suggestion]
He ought to be ashamed. [obligation]
The employer shall provide medical benefits. [contractual
obligation]
You might call me when the package arrives. [suggestion]
You might have let me know about this problem. [reprimand]
You could have told me in advance. [reprimand]
The kids can have some ice cream. [permission]
You may not take drum lessons. [permission]
Can you pass the potatoes? [request]
(While prescriptive grammarians argue that only may can be used for permis-
sion, can has supplanted may, even in the speech of highly educated speakers.)
American speakers rarely use shall in routine conversation or writing. It
is a bit more common in British English. Like should, shall originally meant "to
be obligated," and this meaning persisted well into Modern English times.
This use is ubiquitous in the King James version of the Bible and as a result
many contemporary English speakers are familiar with this older meaning of
shall.
Modality 135
Thou shalt not kill.

Thou shalt not commit adultery.
Thou shalt not steal. (Exodus 20:13-15)
While this deontic use of shall has faded in most conversational contexts, it is
still widely used in legal and contract language and it indicates that the sub-
ject of the sentence has an absolute obligation to act (or not act), e.g., The de-
fendant shall pay the plaintiff the sum of $37,000.
While the modals should, must, and ought to can express both epistemic and
deontic modality, they are most often used to express deontic modality. A study
of the use of modals in British and Australian speech and writing and Ameri-
can writing revealed that the deontic uses of these auxiliaries far outnumber
the epistemic uses (Collins, 1991). A particularly dramatic statistic shows Amer-
ican writers using should deontically 73% of the time and epistemically 5% of
the time (p. 161). The remaining instances of should reflected other uses.
There is an interesting semantic parallel between modals in their epistemic
and deontic modes. Those modals that express the strongest sense of obliga-
tion in deontic mode are also the modals that express the strongest likelihood
in epistemic mode (Bybee, 1994, p. 195).
You must leave by noon. / That must be Mom at the door.

You should leave by noon. / That shoidd be Mom at the door.
You might mail me the results. / That might be Mom at the door.
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Volition and Commitment. Speakers also

direct their own behavior by expressing willingness and making promises. The
modal auxiliary will actually derives from an Old English lexical verb wille,
which literally meant "to want." In some dialects wille was pronounced and
spelled wolle, which is the source of the [o] sound in Modern English won't.
Originally will was used only to express volition; it was not a future marker in
any way. But wants are always projected into the future; if you want some-
thing, you don't yet have it. For this reason, over many centuries will also took
on the role of predicting. But even in Modern English will is more often used
to express volition than simple future time. This is especially obvious in neg-
atives. Compare It won't rain tomorrow with We asked Martha to help us but she
won't. In the first example won't (will not) simply expresses a prediction, but in
the second example it expresses a refusal. In a sentence like I'll clean up the mess,
the speaker is not really predicting that s/he will clean but is expressing a will-
ingness to do the job.
Stressed will can be used to express very strong volition on the part of the
subject of the sentenceMydaughter will play in the street even though I punish
her. (In other words, she insists on doing it.) Directive will also expresses strong
volition but it is the volition of the speaker that is at issue, not that of the sub-
jectYouwill finish your homework!
136 The Verb Phrase
We routinely use modal auxiliary will to make commitments, promises, and

threats. A threat is, after all, simply a promise to do something hurtful. Com-
mitments and promises are always projected into the future, but here, too, pre-
diction is not the primary meaning of will. I'll probably be late is an epistemic
prediction, but 1 won't be late is a promise. When a modal expresses willing-
ness, it often reflects a willingness to do something at the moment of speak-
ingI'll diy the dishes for you. A promise typically expresses willingness to do
something in the future; your niece might say "I'll do the dishes later; I
promise," but she wouldn't say "I'll dry the dishes for you, I promise," as she
picks up the dishtowel.
Modal auxiliaries expressing volition
Strong volition He will play with matches [even though I punish him].
You will clean your room [or you'll be grounded].
Willingness & I'll carry those groceries for you.
unwillingness She won't help me mow the lawn.
I'll bring you some ice cream after work.
Promises I'll take you to the zoo tomorrow.
We'll fix your computer when we get the parts.
Threats I'll break your arm [if you touch me].
I'll scream [if you come any closer].
Dare and Need. Dare and need are modal auxiliaries for some speakers and
not for others. Even those who can use them as modals, use them only in neg-
ative and interrogative constructions.
She dare not utter a sound.

Dare Jack tell his boss the truth?
Need you play that music so loud?
Marsha needn't be told.
Note the lack of a third person {-s} inflection in those sentences in which dare
or need has a third person subject. This is strong evidence that these forms are
modal auxiliaries. The modals dare and need are loosely deontic. A construction
like Felice needs to rent her apartment does not contain a modal auxiliary (note
Modality 137
the third person {-s} ending on need), although need still has deontic force in
this context.
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Ability

Not all modal auxiliaries are epistemic or deontic. Since ability is not nec-
essarily an expression of behavior, it is usually treated as a separate semantic
category. Can and could are of course the modals that perform this function.
Andre can speak Ukrainian.

1 can run a marathon.
Ricki can't roller skate.
I could skate when I was young.
There are some constraints on could in terms of expressing ability, but we will
discuss these later.
Can and could are sometimes used in questions to make a polite request. If
I ask, "Can you pass the potatoes?" I'm not really asking you to assess your
potato-passing skills. I am simply using can here to express politeness. The use
of can or could in a question strikes hearers as much softer than a bald imper-
ative like "Pass the potatoes."
Modal Auxiliaries Used to Express Habitual Actions

As you saw in the section on aspect, the habitual is expressed by an im-
perfect form in many languages. English has no such form, so habitual actions
must be expressed in other ways. You've already seen the present tense in this
roleJakeattends the University of Michigan. Occasionally will is used to express
present time habitual activitiesFirsthell fill his pockets with bread crumbs; then
he'll go to the park and feed the pigeons. The modal would expresses habitual ac-
tion but only in past timeEachSunday she would visit her family in the city; He
would always end his day with a glass of sherry. Habitual represents a separate se-
mantic category, so when will and would express habituality, they are neither
epistemic nor deontic.
It is important to remember that each modal auxiliary can potentially ex-
press a variety of meanings. It is also important to remember that, while there
are a number of modals, there are only a few general semantic categories into
which these modals fall. As you have seen, most modals can be used to direct
or influence the behavior of others in some way and every modal except shall,
need, and dare can express some degree of epistemic modality.
Modals and Word Order

Modals always appear first in the VPPedro might have been detained;
Claudia should have finished the project. Some grammarians maintain that there
can be only one modal auxiliary in a VP. While this may be a rule of edited
138 The Verb Phrase
English, individuals living in the southeastern United States routinely use two
or more modals in a VP. The following sentence, which contains three modal
auxiliaries in a row plus a semi-auxiliary, was uttered by a speaker from south-
eastern North Carolina: "If she might should ought to have to go to the hos-
pital, she's worried about what she'll do with her children."2 The expression
might could is extremely common in the South, even among highly educated
individuals. I might could help you with that expresses both epistemic and de-
ontic modality; it is possible that I will have the ability. As you will see later,
some speakers use a second modal to negate ought toYou shouldn't ought to
do that. This usage is fairly common, although highly informal.
Summary of modal auxiliaries
Epistemic modals Deontic modals
It will rain tomorrow. He will play with matches.

That must be Dad's car. I will fix that for you.
It can't be snowing! [It's June.] You should help your sister.
She should be home by now. You ought to wash your car.
They ought to be done by now. You can/may attend the party.
They may enjoy the play. You might call me tomorrow.
Marcella might be on time. The plaintiff shall honor the contract.
Need Jake be here?
Ability and habitual modals
She dare not tell them.
I can't speak Twi.
Each day she would work out.
SEMI-AUXILIARIES
Modal auxiliaries are very ancient forms and constitute a closed class. More
recently, English has admitted into the language a class of "semi-auxiliaries"
constructions that behave very much like modals semantically but that do not
share the same grammatical form. Semi-auxiliaries are always lexically com-
plex; they are composed of two or three words and usually end in to. With one
exception, semi-auxiliaries take the third person j-s} in the present tense and
have participle and infinitive forms. As a class, semi-auxiliaries express both
epistemic and deontic modality. In the following sentences, the semi-auxiliaries
are in boldface.
Modality 139
Wilbur is going to be late. I'll be able to come.

Yesim is sure to succeed. That helicopter is about to crash.
Your old boyfriend is bound to You have got to leave.
be there.
Helge is supposed to dust Dad seems to be upset.
the furniture.
Tobias has to finish that project.
Reginald appears to be crying.
She is certain to fall.
Maxine is unlikely to pass.
Dahlia is to arrive at noon.
You were supposed to clean
your room.
Semi-auxiliaries are highly problematic. They behave inconsistently and
somewhat idiosyncratically. One reason for this is that they are relative new-
comers. Many semi-auxiliaries have been borrowed from other languages ei-
ther directly or indirectly. Have to, have got to, and had better all use native lex-
ical items, but while be going to contains native English words, the actual
construction is modeled on the French ]e vais ('T go; I am going"). The words
able, certain, and sure were borrowed from the French, and seem and likely were
borrowed from the Norse (Scandinavians). Some of these words entered into
semi-auxiliary constructions early on. Seem to and had to appear in texts by 1300
and be sure to by 1400. But appear to and be able to don't materialize until the
sixteenth century. (For a discussion of the history of these constructions, see T.
Th. Visser, Vol. 4, 1978.)
Because they are lexically complex and because they are relatively new con-
structions, semi-auxiliaries are still in a state of flux. Even highly educated na-
tive speakers are sometimes stymied when they attempt to exploit a semi-aux-
iliary in a particular sentence.
Epistemic Semi-Auxiliaries
Be going to is a widely used semi-auxiliary that has both epistemic and
deontic meanings. Epistemic be going to is used to predict events, very much
like epistemic willIt is going to snow tomorrow; That chair is going to crack. If
an event is imminent, a speaker will choose be going to rather than willTm
going to be sick; That car is going to crash. Look out! The baby is going to fall is
perfectly natural, while ??Look out! The baby will fall is very odd. Be going to
is usually uttered with the contracted form of be followed by a form that is
often pronounced gonnaHe's gonna be late. Although traditional grammar
books cite will as the auxiliary that expresses future, be going to actually pro-
jects a stronger sense of futurity than will does. A construction that expresses
a weak sense of future will be accompanied by an adverb that specifies the
time frame. The progressive, for example, can express future time only when
140 The Verb Phrase
it is accompanied by an adverb that delineates the time frame1am leaving

tomorrow. A researcher who employed this adverb test discovered that be go-
ing to has a higher "inherent futuric value" than will. In other words, be go-
ing to was less likely than will to be accompanied by an adverb of time (Mindt,
1991, pp. 183-86).
English has a whole set of semi-auxiliaries that express varying degrees of
certainty.
It is going to rain tomorrow.

Sylvia was bound to hurt herself.
They were certain to be late.
Pat is sure to love the present.
James is (un)likely to buy the house.
The culprit has (got) to be your sister.
Seem to and appear to are also semi-auxiliaries that express degrees of cer-
tainty or, more accurately, uncertainty. These semi-auxiliaries share the same
meanings as their homophones copula seem and copula appear. But seem to and
appear to are semi-auxiliaries and they can co-occur with any kind of lexical
verb, including some copulas.
Harold seems to be unhappy.

This milk seems to be getting sour.
Your brother appears to be sleeping.
Helen appears to hate her job.
Tran Le seems to have recovered.
Deontic Semi-Auxiliaries
Semi-auxiliaries express roughly the same range of deontic meanings that
we found among modals. Although semi-auxiliaries and modal auxiliaries look
very different and have very different histories, combined they represent a rel-
atively unified semantic system.
Semi-Auxiliaries Used to Express Obligation. Have to and have got to are used
deontically in directives and other contexts in which obligation is being ex-
pressed.
You have to clean the garage today.
You have got to talk louder.
Kyle has to move his car.
Modality 141
Had better is an oddly constructed semi-auxiliary that is used in softer di-

rectivesYouhad better leave now. The contracted form, as in You'd better leave,
is often further contracted to You better leave. Some speakers can use the su-
perlative form of better as in You'd best finish your lunch.
Be to can be used in a directiveYou are to clean your room immediately! It
is also used to communicate a scheduled eventAdrienne is to arrive at noon.
In this second usage it resembles the simple presentAdriennearrives at noon.
The difference is that the semi-auxiliary places a hint of obligation on the sub-
ject of the scheduled event. Adrienne is not only scheduled to arrive at noon,
she has some obligation to do so. This is why inanimate subjects sound odd
with be to constructions?The bus is to arrive at noon.
Be supposed to is another semi-auxiliary that lays an obligation, although
that obligation is not necessarily imposed by the speaker.
Betsy is supposed to file these reports.

You were supposed to be here by 10 A.M.
We are supposed to mail our tax returns by April 15.
Be sure to and be certain to are often used to reinforce deontic modality in

imperativesBesure to lock the door. (Imperatives will be explained shortly.)
Semi-Auxiliaries Used to Express Volition, Commitment, and Threats. Be going

to can be used deontically as well as epistemically. In 1 am going to finish the pro-
ject later, the speaker is making a promise or a commitment, not a prediction.
A woman who is standing on a narrow ledge might yell, "I am going to fall"
(epistemic) or "I am going to jump" (volitional deontic). A speaker who yells
"I'm going to call the police if you don't leave" is using the semi-auxiliary de-
ontically to make a threat.
Semi-Auxiliary Used to Express Ability

Just as there'is a set of modal auxiliaries that express ability, there is a semi-
auxiliary that carries this meaningMbolais able to read Latin; My daughter is
able to swim. Like can and could, be able to expresses physical abilitySheis able
to run a mile in five minutes, a mental or intellectual abilityBobis able to mul-
tiply large numbers in his head, or a simple lack of constraints1am able to help
you now. Be able to is often used in conjunction with modal auxiliary will to in-
dicate a future lack of constraintsIwill be able to help you with the laundry later
The Habitual Semi-Auxiliary

Used to is the habitual semi-auxiliary. It has only one function in English,
to refer to habitual activities or states that existed in past time but have ceased
to exist. Used to is never used to refer to a single event*He used to die. This
semi-auxiliary represents the past time equivalent of the present habitual con-
structionIride horses; I used to ride horses.
142 The Verb Phrase
Semi-Auxiliaries and Discourse

Despite the fact that semi-auxiliaries are extremely common in English, tra-
ditional grammars often ignore them altogether. This is unfortunate. Semi-aux-
iliaries provide crucial information about modality A non-native speaker who
fails to master the uses of the ubiquitous be going to construction will never
sound casually fluent. Elmore Leonard is a novelist who is famous for his nat-
ural dialogue. His characters make constant use of be going to (gonna) in his
novel Out of Sight (1996).
"You're not gonna give up the life you have." (p. 270)
"Listen, these guys, they're gonna be out here any minute looking for me." (p. 293)
"Are you gonna leave your tie on." (p. 266)
"You're gonna kill me anyway." (p. 254)
Semi-Auxiliaries and Word Order

Semi-auxiliaries always appear after modals, if there are any, and before
the lexical verbWilson will be able to fix it. They have a complicated rela-
tionship with perfect and progressive constructions, as you will see below.
While only speakers of certain dialects can employ multiple modals in the same
VP, all English speakers use multiple semi-auxiliaries.
Semi-Auxiliaries and Aspect

Because semi-auxiliaries have internal structure, some of them can carry
aspect. Consider the following sentences.
Doris has to have fixed the car. [have to + perfect]

Ned has got to be working on his report. [has got to + progressive]
In these sentences, the aspectual construction follows the semi-auxiliary. In the

sentences below, however, the semi-auxiliary actually participates in the as-
pectual construction.
Doris has had to fix the car. [has had to is the perfect form of has to]
Ned is having to work on his report, [is having to is the progressive form
of have to]
The location of aspect can have a significant impact on meaning. In Doris

Modality 143
has to have fixed the car, the semi-auxiliary is epistemic, while in Doris has had to
fix the car the semi-auxiliary is deontic.
Not all semi-auxiliaries exhibit this kind of flexibility in terms of aspect. Be
able to can participate in a perfect constructionScotthas been able to speak Ger-
man for years, but it cannot precede a perfect construction*Scottis able to have
spoken German for years. Be going to precedes perfect constructionsShe'sgoing
to have completed the project by then, but it does not, as a rule, participate in the
perfect??Shehas been going to finish it for years.
Summary of semi-auxiliaries
Epistemic semi-auxiliaries Deontic semi-auxiliaries
It's going to rain tomorrow. I am going to arrest you.

Ginny is about to leave. You have to be quiet.
That has (got) to be Dad at the door. You've got to mow the lawn.
Tom is bound to hurt himself. You had better wash your hair.
The baby is sure to fall. You'd best leave now.
Kids are certain to hate it. We were supposed to help her.
He is (un)likely to be late.
Ability and habitual semi-auxiliaries
Sherry seems to be content.
Janine is able to splice rope.
They appear to be angry.
Esther used to be wealthy.
AUXILIARIES,TIME, AND TENSE

While most modal auxiliaries have a distinct past tense form, this form is
not always used to communicate past time. Stressed would can be used to com-
municate strong volition in the past1 told him not to cross the street alone,
but he would do it. (This usage may sound archaic to many of you.) Similarly,
would can be used to express past willingness or intentionIinvited her but she
wouldn't come. But there are times when would is almost synonymous with will.
Would you help me? is just slightly more polite or more obsequious than Will
you help me? and it in no way suggests past time. Exactly the same situation
pertains in Can you help me? versus Could you help me?
Occasionally epistemic would is used for expressing future time in the past,
especially in highly literary contextsShe would marry zoithin the year and in
dependent clausesShe hoped that he would be better soon. But the past tense
forms of be going to are more commonly used for predicting in the past. This
is especially true in past tense narratives.
144 The Verb Phrase
The lamp was going to fall, [but I caught it J

It was going to snow later.
I knew that she was going to be angry.
As you have already seen, would is sometimes used to express a habitual ac-
tion in the pastEveryday she would go' to the gym.
Could communicates past, long-term ability7could sing when I was young.
Could can also refer to the subject's ability in a single situation or event, but
only in a negative sentenceIcouldn't find you last night; She couldn't fix my car-
buretor yesterday. Inexplicably, could can't be used to refer to a single past act in
a positive sentence. *I could find you last night and *She could fix my carburetor
yesterday are both ungrammatical. The semi-auxiliary be able to is perfectly ac-
ceptable in such sentencesShewas able to fix my carburetor yesterday.
Should, which is technically the past tense of shall, almost never communi-
cates past time. You should clean your room clearly lays a future obligation. Only
in an exclamation like Wlw should I see but my old boyfriend! does should refer to
the past. Might is technically the past tense of may but, as you have already
seen, the deontic meanings of may and might are different. Might never com-
municates past time; You might call me when the shipment arrives is clearly a sug-
gestion projected into the future. While both ought to and must are past tense
forms in Old English, neither of these verbs can communicate past time in mod-
ern English.
While many past tense modals are incapable of expressing past time on
their own, most of them can do so when they are combined with the perfect.
Using the Perfect to Express Past Modality

The following deontic modals must co-occur with the perfect in order to
communicate past time.
You should have cleaned [an (unfulfilled) past obligation]

your room.
I would have fixed that for you. [willingness in the past]
You might have called me. [reprimand regarding a past omission]
Marilyn ought to have told you. [an (unfulfilled) past obligation]
Chandra could have done it. [past ability not acted upon]
In some cases, however, a semi-auxiliary is required to communicate past

time. While must means strong obligation when it stands alone, it loses that
meaning when combined with the perfect. The deontic modality of Thomas must
clean his room becomes epistemic when the perfect is addedThomasmust have
cleaned his room [there aren't any pizza boxes under the bed]. To communicate strong
obligation in the past, a speaker can use the past tense of have toThomas had
to clean his room last night, although this construction implies that the obliga-
Modality 145
tion was met, i.e., Thomas did indeed clean his room. The past tense of be to
can be used to express an unfulfilled obligation. Thomas was to clean his room
last night suggests either that Thomas failed to do so or that the speaker does
not know the outcome.
Most epistemic modals require the perfect to place an event in past time
She might have lied; He may have stolen the jewels; They couldn't have cheated; It
can't have been Jim; My cousin should have arrived by now. (Note that some of these
modals are past tense and others are present tense.)
Most semi-auxiliaries can communicate past time alone but a few require
the perfect. Deontic has to can simply be put in the past tenseIhad to leave,
while epistemic has to can be used with the perfectShehas to have been there
or without itShe had to be there. (This last example is more likely in casual
speech than in formal discourse and it is potentially ambiguous.) Despite the
fact that had in had better is technically a past tense form, had better requires the
perfect to communicate past timeHe had better have finished that assignment.
(Some speakers may find this sentence marginally acceptable.) Those semi-
auxiliaries that begin with be require only that be carry past tense Bill was go-
ing to take us to the zoo, but he got sick; Nora was able to finish the painting; Olga
was certain to fail.
Modals and semi-auxiliaries requiring the perfect to communicate past time
Deontic Epistemic
can That can't have been my car.
could That couldn't have been Brenna.
would I would have helped but . . . He would have survived if . . .
should She shouldn't have knocked It shouldn't have been
me down. that cold in June.
may It may have rained yesterday.
might You might have informed me It might have snowed
that you'd be late. last night.
must She must have hidden
the keys.
ought to You ought to have told him. They ought to have arrived
by now.
had better You had better have finished [had better is never epistemic]
that.
has to Bonnie has to have finished
by now.
146 The Verb Phrase
MOOD AND MODALITY

In all of the examples above, modality has been expressed by auxiliaries.
This strategy for communicating modality is periphrastic, i.e., extra words are
required. Mood markers, however, communicate modality by inflectional end-
ings or special verb forms. The term "mood" simply refers to a particular way
of expressing modality. (The words mood and modality are etymologically re-
lated.) Unlike Latin or classical Greek, Old English did not have an elaborate
system of mood markers. There are even fewer left in Modern English and
some of these are very weak.
Imperative Mood
The imperative is a very distinctive kind of directive. In Old English the
imperative required special forms of the verb. The only surviving remnant of
these special imperative forms in English is the verb be. Assume for the mo-
ment that the subject of an imperative is you. In a nonimperative (i.e., indica-
tive) sentence, the appropriate verb form for you is are. But in an imperative,
the verb takes the infinitive be, the lone survivor of the Old English imperative
form. Other imperative verbs look exactly like their second person indicative
forms.
Be a good boy. / You are always a good boy.

Eat your spinach. / You always eat your spinach.
Fortunately, the imperative has other grammatical features that make it very
distinctive. The most notable one is the absence of an overt subjectSitdown;
Be quiet; Give me some milk. This is the only case in English in which a subject
is not required in the main clause of a sentence. We all "know" that the sub-
ject of the imperative is an understood you, but how do we know it? The fol-
lowing sets of sentences supply the evidence.
Yogi closed the door, didn't he? Sharon helped herself.

She closed the door, didn't she? They helped themselves.
They closed the door, didn't they? Harry helped himself.
Close the door won't you? Help yourself
Simon held his breath.

We all held our breath.
Susanna held her breath.
Hold your breath.
The imperative has no tense distinctions; the verbs always take the same
Modality 147
form. The imperative almost never co-occurs with the perfect and only occa-
sionally with the progressiveBe cleaning your room when I get back. The pas-
sive often occurs in negative imperativesDon't be alarmed by Noah's appear-
ance; Don't be upset by her remarks and occasionally in affirmative
imperativesBeassured that this procedure is correct; Be forewarned that the road
is impassable. Affirmative passive imperatives are usually quite formal in tone.
Normally the word not or its contracted form n't can follow any form of be
in English, including the lexical verbMiguelis not angry; Ken isn't leaving. But
in an imperative a semantically empty do must be added, and not follows do
Do not be angry; Don't be surprised by Ruth's attitude. In the seventeenth century,
John Donne could write "Death, be not proud" but today we would say, "Death,
do not be proud." (Death is not a subject in these sentences; the speaker is sim-
ply addressing death.) Negative imperatives have odd forms in a number of
languages.
The auxiliary do is also used in persuasive affirmative imperativesDohave
some more candy; Do sit down. Semantically these constructions are offers rather
than orders, but they are still considered imperatives.
First Person Imperative. English has a special first person plural impera-
tive that always employs the form let's or in very formal, often liturgical con-
texts, let us. This imperative form is semantically weaker than the second per-
son imperative; let's constructions typically sound like suggestions rather than
orders and they direct the speaker as well as the hearer.
Let's eat Thai food tonight.

Let's go over to Joe's house.
Let us pray.
The first person imperative does not require empty do in creating a negative.
The not simply follows let's (or us in more formal discourse).
Let's not wake up the baby.

Let's not get crazy.
Let us not fall into bad practices.
You will on occasion hear speakers who insert do into the first person negative
imperativeLet'sdon't invite your cousin.
Imperatives with Overt Subjects. While the prototypical imperative is sub-

jectless, there are imperative constructions with overt subjects. In You be quiet,
the verb is clearly not in its normal indicative form are, and this utterance is
considered an imperative by grammarians. You sit here is ambiguous out of con-
text. It might be an imperative or it might express a habitual action; You (usu-
ally) sit here.
148 The Verb Phrase
There are also a very limited number of third person imperatives; they re-
quire a subject pronoun with indefinite reference.
Somebody close the window.

Nobody move!
Somebody hide the beer.
(If these were indicative sentences, the verb would contain a third person sin-
gular {-s} ending.)
The first person imperative can also contain an overt subject as long as the
subject includes both the speaker and the hearer(s).
Let's everyone keep calm.

Let's all of us agree to keep this a secret.
Let's you and I paint the kitchen this weekend.
The Imperative in Discourse. While the imperative occurs in all types of dis-
course, it is especially common in situations in which a speaker or writer is
giving explicit instructions or directions. Not surprisingly, it is ubiquitous in
cookbooks. This recipe for making mushroom lasagna is typical (Martin et al.,
1991) (Boldface added.)
Puree farmer's cheese, ricotta, egg whites and Parmesan. Blend in chives, pars-
ley and pepper by hand. In a large pot of lightly salted boiling water, cook
lasagna noodles until just tender. . . . Remove noodles with a slotted spoon,
(p. 95)
Instruction labels usually feature a string of imperatives. The following di-

rections accompany an inhaler for asthmatics. (Boldface added.)
Breath out as fully as you comfortably can. Hold the inhaler in the upright po-
sition and put the mouthpiece in your mouth. Close your lips around the
mouthpiece, keeping your tongue below it. (Instructions for a Vanceril in-
haler.)
In conversational situations, a speaker who has social power will use more
and stronger imperatives than one who does not. Teachers often use the im-
perative with studentsTurn to page twenty three; Take out a sheet of paper; Pipe
down; Get rid of that chewing gum, but most students are wary of using the im-
perative with teachers. Children hear imperatives from their parents con-
stantlyPick up your toys; Take out the garbage; Stop bothering your brother, but
kids respond in kind at their peril.
To some extent politeness moderates our uses of the imperative, even
among equals. If I covet your Godiva chocolates, I am more likely to say "Can
Modality 149
I have some?" than "Give me some." In general, the more indirect the direc-
tive, the more polite the utterance. Probably the most polite directives are those
that combine a past tense auxiliary with a questionCouldyou loan me five dol-
lars:? There are, however, a few polite, formulaic expressions that always take
the standard imperative form (Brown and Levinson, 1987, pp. 96-98).
Excuse me.
Forgive me.
Have a nice day.
Have a good time.
Pardon our dust. (A sign that always seems to accompany commercial
remodeling projects.)
Subjunctive Mood
Like the term imperative, the term subjunctive refers to a particular verb
form. In Old English, special verb forms existed to communicate non-facts, e.g.,
wants, hopes, and hypothetical situations. The subjunctive is somewhat weak
in Modern English, but there are speakers who use it routinely. In many cases,
the subjunctive is a form learned in school or through reading, so it is educated
speakers who use it most. The modern subjunctive expresses a variety of de-
ontic meanings
Mandative Subjunctive. So far we have examined three different ways of

issuing directivesmodals,semi-auxiliaries, and the imperative. The subjunc-
tive can also be used as a directive. The term mandative derives from the Latin
root for mandate, "a command or order." The mandative subjunctive is a very
distinct kind of directive and it always takes the same form.
1 suggest [that he leave].
I beg [that he return the money].
I demanded [that she give me her files].
We asked [that Marsha tell the truth].
Beth moved [that the meeting be adjourned].
I insist [that you be quiet].
I require [that term papers be turned in on time].
In each of these sentences, the main verb makes some sort of demand, from
very mild (ask/suggest) to very strong (demand/insist). In each case, the direct
object of the main verb is a clause (the structure in brackets). Note that when
the subject of the clause is third person, its verb does not take third person
{-s} ending and be is in its infinitive form. These atypical verb forms are the
150 The Verb Phrase
vestiges of the Old English subjunctive system. The same meanings can be
communicated by a verb in present tenseWe insist that Marsha tells the truth
or by a modal auxiliaryWe insist that Marsha must tell the truth. Technically,
however, these are not subjunctive utterances because they lack subjunctive
verb forms. All of these sentences are directives, however.
Volitional Subjunctive. Just as there are volitional modals, there are voli-
tional subjunctive constructions. These, too, exploit unusual verb formsIwish
1 were a bird; Joseph wishes he were a cowboy. The use of were with first and third
singular subjects is also a remnant of the old subjunctive system. I wish 1 was
a bird expresses exactly the same meaning, but technically was is not a sub-
junctive form. The subjunctive is gradually disappearing in English and even
highly educated speakers sometimes use non-subjunctive forms in such utter-
ances.
Formulaic Subjunctive. English has a small set of phrases and sayings that
are so old that they still contain uniquely marked subjunctive verbs. These ut-
terances are learned as whole pieces, often as part of religious liturgy. The ex-
pression God bless you contains a third person subject and an uninflected verb.
This sentences is communicating, not a statement of fact, i.e., God blesses you,
but rather a wish on the part of the speaker, i.e., I hope that God blesses you. Some
remnants of the formulaic subjunctive in Judeo-Christian liturgy are:
The Lord make his face to shine upon thee ....

Thy kingdom come, thy will be done ....
There are formulaic subjunctives that are less tied to liturgy, but most still have
a religious cast.
God save the Queen.

Heaven forbid.
God be with you.
God help him.
Be that as it may.
Long live the King.
Summary of modality markers
Construction Epistemic modality Deontic modality
Lexical verb I think that Mary I wish to leave now.

is coming.
The Verb Phrase and Scope of Negation 151
Summary of modality markers (cont.)
Modal auxiliary Sue might be there. He should fix that furnace.

Semi-auxiliary The baby is going You have to leave now.
to fall!
Imperative mood Eat your liver.
Somebody open that
door.
Subjunctive mood I demand that she leave.
God bless you.
The Verb Phrase and Scope of Negation
As English speakers, our primary tool for negation is the negative particle not.
Not always follows the first auxiliary in the verb phrase. In most cases not is
contracted n't and attached to that auxiliaryEdiuinacan't attend the party; She
isn't working now. So ubiquitous are contracted negatives, that speakers usually
sound stilted or even non-native when they use the full negative particle not.
The one notable exception to this pattern is am not; here am is contracted to the
subject and not remains uncontractedI'm not leaving. Will changes pronunci-
ation when not is contracted to it; will not becomes won't. Shan't and mayn't are
old contracted forms that are rarely heard today.
The first auxiliary in an English sentence has a special role not available to
other verbs in the verb phrase. The first auxiliary is manipulated in negatives,
questions, and tag questions and for this reason it is called an operator3 (Quirk
et al., 1972).
Not always follows the operator in a negative construction. The following
sentences illustrate the role of operator in positioning not and n't.
Bernard wasn't lying.

Merle has not arrived yet.
David can't swim.
You shouldn't drink so much.
Ariel doesn't eat green peppers.
Don't leave.
For most American speakers, be is the only lexical verb that can become an
operatorjasmine isn't an administrator; Irving wasn't upset. A few Americans
and most British speakers can make lexical have an operatorlan hasn't any
money; They hadn't a scrap of evidence.
152 The Verb Phrase
If there is no lexical be or no auxiliary to act as the operator in a negative

construction, semantically empty do occupies this position, as in Carol doesn't
eat meat or Ozzie didn't finish his dinner. (This is the same do you saw in nega-
tive imperativesDon't be silly.) The insertion of this extra word is called do
periphrasis. (Periphrasis is simply the noun form of periphrastic.) Because do is
semantically empty it is considered a primary auxiliary along with be and have.
When a verb phrase contains negation, only certain parts of the sentence
are negated by the negative particle not or its contracted form n't. These por-
tions of the sentence are said to be within the scope of negation. Usually only
those elements in the sentence after not are negated. The difference in mean-
ing between Donna is definitely not going and Donna is not definitely going is a
difference in the scope of negation. In the first sentence definitely occurs before
not and is outside the scope of negation, i.e., It is definite that Donna is not go-
ing. In the second sentence definitely occurs after not and is within the scope of
negation, i.e., It is not definite that Donna is going. One of the reasons that the
negative particle always follows the subject in a statement is that the subject is
typically a topic and it would be strange for a speaker to negate the topic of
the discourse (Lambrecht, 1994, p. 153).
SCOPE OF NEGATION AND AUXILIARIES

In perfect, progressive, and passive sentences, as well as those containing
periphrastic do, the primary auxiliary carries no meaning on its own, so whether
or not the auxiliary is semantically negated is moot; it means nothing to negate
a word that has no semantic content in the first place. But when the VP con-
tains a modal, the situation becomes more complicated. Despite the fact that
modals always precede not or its contracted form n't, some are included within
the scope of negation, i.e., the meaning of the modal is negated.
Jenny can!may not attend [Jenny is not permitted to

the concert. attend.]
That can't be Julie at the door. [It is not possible that it's Julie.]
Sam won't come to our party. [Sam is not willing to come.]
I can't help you. [I am not able to help you.]
In the following sentences, however, the modal is not within the scope of
negation. Only the meaning of the lexical verb is negated.
Tom may/might not pass the exam. [It is possible that Tom does
not pass the exam.]
I won't tell your mother. [I promise to not tell.]
Jan should/must not cheat on [She is obligated to not cheat.]
her taxes.
Contracted n't can be used when must has a deontic reading but not when it
has an epistemic reading. Jan mustn't cheat on her taxes is fine but *Jan mustn't
have paid the phone bill is ungrammatical.
Since the negative particle typically follows the first auxiliary in the verb
phrase, the multi-word auxiliaries pose some interesting problems. Most speak-
ers are unsure of where to put not in negating modal ought to. Does it go after
ought to You ought to not do that or before the to You ought not to do that. (Some
speakers omit to in this last construction.) The dilemma can be solved by adding
another auxiliary, which then becomes the operator?Youshouldn't ought to do
that, but many speakers find this construction questionable and simply avoid
using ought to with a negative.
If the first word of the semi-auxiliary is some form of be, not follows it rou-
tinelyLaurieis not going fix it; I'm not sure that Hakeem is right. Be going to usu-
ally falls within the scope of negation in both epistemic and deontic readings.
It's not going to rain tomorrow. [It is not possible that it will rain.]
I am not going to wash the [I am not willing to wash
dishes for you. the dishes.]
When be going to expresses a promise, however, it is not included in the scope

of negation.
I'm not going to hurt you. [I promise to not hurt you.]
Semi-auxiliaries that contain have reflect certain inconsistencies. Negative

had better has some interesting characteristics. If the not is contracted, it attaches
to had You hadn't better eat that. (Of course, n't is routinely contracted to had
in other constructions as well.) If not is uncontracted, it follows betterYou had
better not eat that. In both cases the scope of negation does not include the semi-
auxiliary; both sentences mean "you are obligated to not do that."
As we've already seen, have to requires do periphrasis for negationYou
don't have to sing. Here the semi-auxiliary is included in the scope of negation
"You are not obligated to sing."
Different speakers exploit different strategies in negative constructions with
used to. Some exploit do periphrasisHe didn't used to be mean; and others use
used to as an operatorHe used to not be mean.
The Verb Phrase and Questions
Questions almost always involve a variation on normal word order, i.e., they
are highly marked. Very rarely do we ask questions by simply using rising
question intonation at the end of a sentenceMikeis fixing dinner ? In fact, this
kind of question sometimes suggests incredulity rather than information seek-
ing: "Mike is fixing dinner? Wow, he never cooks." Questions that exploit only
154 The Verb Phrase
intonation are called echo questions because they often repeat information pro-
vided by a previous speaker.
YES/NO QUESTIONS
Questions soliciting a yes or no answer typically require that the operator
precede the subjectIs Danielle running that marathon? Can Istvan speak Hun-
garian? Periphrastic do becomes the operator if there is no other auxiliary in the
VPDoes Lena drink ouzo? Did Patrick give you the file? Any statement can be
turned into a yes/no question by this operation.
Lincoln has finished his project. / Has Lincoln finished his project?
Nancy is reading the paper. / Is Nancy reading the paper?
The kids have been eating popcorn. / Have the kids been eating popcorn?
Jackie should have gone. / Should Jackie have gone?
Malka can help. / Can Malka help?
Felipe crashed. / Did Felipe crash?
Here, too, lexical be always acts as its own operatorIsAmos an electrician? Are
those kids your grandchildren? Some American and most British speakers can
make lexical have an operator, especially in sentences containing the indefinite
quantifier anyHave you any money? Has Ian any prospects?
As you have already seen, n't is usually contracted to the previous auxil-
iary. When that auxiliary moves in a question, n't moves with i t Hassan isn't
playing volleyball; Isn't Hassan playing volleyball? However, uncontracted not does
not moveIsHassan not playing volleyball?and is usually stressed. In a sen-
tence like this, the speaker is questioning a strongly held assumption; s/he had
believed that Hassan was playing volleyball and now something has happened
to challenge that belief.
INFORMATION SEEKING QUESTIONS (WH QUESTIONS)

Information seeking questions, also called wh questions, always contain an
information seeking wordwho,what, where, when, why, whose, which, or how,
and this form is usually first in the sentence. These are typically called wh
words, even though how is not spelled with wh. The word order in a wh ques-
tion is always the same.
Who is sleeping in my bed?

What are you eating?
Where are the children playing?
When will you return?
Why did he lie?
Whose book did you borrow?

Which piece of meat do you want?
How is the project going?
In each case the operator precedes the subject and the wh word precedes the
operator. Note that in the first example the wh word is the subject, so it auto-
matically precedes the operator.
It is always possible to paraphrase a wh question using noninterrogative
word orderWhatis Harry doing? becomes Harry is doing what? These two con-
structions are rarely used in the same discourse context; a speaker who uses
such a wh echo question is typically asking for a reiteration or clarification of
something that has already been said. However, you will find that an echo
question paraphrase is a useful strategy in determining the grammatical func-
tion of the wh word.
The wh words in questions have a variety of grammatical functions. The
pronoun forms who and what are NPs and can occupy any NP position. In each
of the following examples the grammatical function of the wh pronoun is in-
dicated in brackets.
Who ate all the potato chips? [subject]

What did she say? [direct object]
What have they named the baby? [object complement]
What is that thing? [predicate nominative]
Who did you hand the money to? [indirect object]
To whom did you hand the money? [indirect object]
The interrogative words when, where, why, and how all function as adverbs
in wh questions. I will discuss these in Chapter 4.
There is a small inventory of interrogative wh words that function as de-
terminers within NPs.
1 want this book. / Which book do you want? [often means which of a
known or specified set]
I learned a lesson. / What lesson have you learned? [which of an unspec-
ified set]
They are driving her car. / Whose car should we drive? [genitive]
TAG QUESTIONS
The operator is also exploited in the creation of tag questions. Tag ques-
tions follow statements and they seek affirmation of the proposition contained
in the statement.
156 The Verb Phrase
That politician is lying, isn't she?

Janie has been a problem, hasn't she?
Ted won't cheat, will he?
Gene can't do the tango, can he?
Those kids are sweet, aren't they?
Ricki took your toys, didn't she?
Frieda didn't get that job, did she?
The creation of a tag question in English is a very elaborate operation. To

construct a tag question for the sentence Lara is moving to Sweden, the speaker
has to be able to identify the pronominal form of the subject and the first aux-
iliary in the VP; these appear in reverse order in the tag question. Then the
speaker must determine whether the sentence is affirmative or negative and
construct a tag that is the oppositeLarais moving to Sweden, isn't she?; Lara is-
n't moving to Sweden, is she? A positive tag is used when a speaker seeks to con-
firm a negative proposition, i.e., s/he believes that Lara is not moving and
wants confirmation. A negative tag is used when a speaker wants to confirm
a positive proposition, e.g., Lara is moving to Sweden.
English speaking children learn how to construct tag questions fairly late
in their linguistic development; when they are young, they resort to a much
simpler alternativeYou'retaking me to the zoo tomorrow, right? In fact, in many
languages tag questions are created by the addition of a single word, as in Span-
ishLourdesva a Argentina, verdad? [Lourdes is going to Argentina, true?].
There is also a positive tag in English, i.e., one in which both the sentence
and the tag are in the affirmativeLarais moving to Sweden, is she. Positive tags
are not real questions. They tend to reiterate something that has been said be-
fore and they often have a sarcastic, threatening, or otherwise negative tone
You borrowed my car, did you; He's dating my sister, is he.
Like most questions in English, tag questions are highly marked construc-
tions.
MULTI-WORD AUXILIARIES AS OPERATORS IN QUESTIONS AND TAGS

All modal auxiliaries except ought to function comfortably as operators. Be-
cause ought to is a two-word modal, it creates problems. Some speakers are
comfortable with Ought you to be doing that? and others are not. Ought to al-
most never appears in tag questions. As you saw earlier, ought to poses prob-
lems in negative constructions as well.
Most semi-auxiliaries contain their own operators. When be is the first word
in a semi-auxiliary (and the semi-auxiliary is the first auxiliary in the VP), the
be becomes the operator and separates from the rest of the semi-auxiliary in a
question.
Is Susan likely to finish this project?

Are you going to attend?
Was Jamie able to register last semester?
Am I supposed to take out the garbage?
The be also becomes the operator in a tag question.
Scott is going to attend, isn't he?

We're sure to be chosen, aren't we?
The have in have got to can function as an operator in a questionHaveyou

got to play that music so loud? Some speakers can use have as an operator in a
tag questionIhave got to clean my room, haven't I? but most use doI have got
to clean my room, don't I? The had in had better functions as an operator in yes/no
questions only when the construction is negativeHadn'tyou better clean your
room? There is no way to construct a positive question with had better. Had can
also be found as the operator in negative tagsYouhad better clean your room,
hadn't you? But positive tags with had sound strange?Youhadn't better eat that,
had you ?
Do periphrasis is always required with have toDo you have to leave now?
Don't you have to finish your homework? You have tofinish your homework, don't
you?
Used to poses a problem. The only way to construct a question or tag with
this semi-auxiliary is to exploit do periphrasisDidyou used to attend Purdue?
You used to attend Purdue, didn't you?
There is considerable variation in how speakers handle the problem of
choosing an operator in the case of a multi-word auxiliary. This is a symptom
of a grammatical system in a state of flux.
HISTORICAL DEVELOPMENT OF THE OPERATOR

The widespread use of auxiliaries as operators is a fairly late development
in English grammar. Old and Middle English speakers and writers typically
made the lexical verb the operator (although auxiliaries sometimes did occupy
this position). The following questions are posed by an Anglo-Saxon school-
master to his students (Moore and Knott, 1955). This work was probably writ-
ten in the tenth century. (The Old English letter ae is pronounced like the vowel
in bad (standard American pronunciation) and the Old English letter \> is pro-
nounced like the th in thin.)
Hwaet sasgst ]du, yr>ling (p. 263) [What say thou, farmer?]
Canst t>u aenig J)ing (p. 263). [Know thou anything?]
Hwaer cy{3st \m Jîn fixas (p. 265). [Where sell thou thy fishes?]
158 The Verb Phrase
Shakespeare (1564-1616) is a transitional figure who sometimes uses the lexi-

cal verb as the operator and sometimes employs do periphrasis. Compare the
following lines:
"Do you not hope your children shall be kings?" Macbeth, Act I, Sc. iii, line 18
"What say'st thou, my dear nurse?" Romeo and Juliet, Act II, Sc. iv, line 207
By the eighteenth century, the operator is normally an auxiliary in all discourse

contexts except poetry.
Exclamations
Not all sentences in which the subject and operator are inverted are questions.
Am 1 furious!
Is Zack ever hungry!
Did Marilyn ever chew me out at work today.
Wow. Has Nigel gained weight!
In each of these sentences the marked word order signals an exclamation.

Wh words can also be used to mark exclamatory utterances. In the fol-
lowing sentences the wh word modifies the following NP, but there is no sub-
ject/operator inversion.
What a marvelous person he is.

What an idiot that director is!
What an amazing performance that was.
What a good time I had last night.
One interesting feature of these constructions is the fact that the initial struc-
ture cannot be moved into the predicate unless what is omitted*He is what a
marvelous person; *That director is what an idiot.
Existential There Constructions
There is another commonly used English construction that violates standard

word order. When English speakers want to point something out or introduce
something new into the discourse, they often exploit a special construction
called existential there. (This is sometimes termed expletive there.)
There's an elephant in my office.

Existential There Constructions 159
There are fourteen people sitting in your bathtub.

There is a real problem brewing in the accounting department.
There's some mold on my bread.
There are some threads on your sweater.
There arose an incredible outcry.
There exists no antidote to this poison.
This is a very odd construction. For one thing, there does not have its usual
location meaning. In fact, all but two of these sentences contain another clear-
cut expression of location (in each case a prepositional phrase). As you will see
in Chapter 4, words and phrases that describe location are usually adverbs. But
in the sentences above, there is not an adverb; it is in fact the subject of these
sentences. This may seem counterintuitive but a couple of simple syntactic tests
will demonstrate it.
Most declarative English sentences can take a tag question in which the
pronominal form of the subject is repeated in the tag. Note what happens when
an existential there sentence receives a tag.
There are fourteen people in your bathtub, aren't there?

There's some mold on my bread, isn't there?
There is a problem in the accounting department, isn't there?
The very fact that there appears as the subject of the tag question is strong ev-
idence that it is also the subject of the sentence.
Another test exploits the operator. As you saw above, a statement can be
turned into a yes/no question by moving the first auxiliary or the lexical verb
be to a position in front of the subject. Look at what happens when existential
there sentences are turned into questions.
There are some frogs swimming in Carolyn's pool / Are there some frogs
swimming in Carolyn's pool?
There is a stain on your shirt. / Is there a stain on your shirt?
Existential there sentences contain odd VPs. In There are some strangers
walking up the path, the auxiliary verb is separated from the lexical verb by an
NP even though this is not an interrogative sentence. Existential there con-
structions have a number of other unusual features as well. Since there is not a
conventional noun or pronoun, it has no number, i.e., it has no separate sin-
gular and plural forms. English subjects agree with their verbs in number
Mary goes to the beach every weekend; Her kids go to the mountains. But in exis-
tential there constructions, the verb often agrees in number with the noun phrase
that follows itThere is a child in the room; There are children in the room.
160 The Verb Phrase
In fact many existential there sentences can be paraphrased (more or less) with
this noun phrase in subject position, e.g., There are some guests in the garden. /
Some guests are in the garden. Some syntacticians argue that existential there sen-
tences have two subjectsthere,which acts as subject in most grammatical op-
erations, and the noun phrase following the verb, which controls subject/verb
agreement.
However, in casual conversation, even highly educated speakers of Eng-
lish often use a singular verb with a plural noun phrase in existential there con-
structions. This is especially common when the verb is contracted onto there.
There are fourteen people sitting in your bathtub easily becomes There's fourteen
people sitting in your bathtub. Similarly, it is not uncommon to hear a sentence
like There's been four earthquakes in Santa Rosa this year. The {-s} here is short for
has, the singular form of the auxiliary.
The VPs in existential there sentences usually contain the copula be, which
typically means "to exist" or "to be located" in this context. Intransitive verbs
of existence and appearance can also appear in these constructions but such
sentences tend to sound formal or archaic.
There's a crack in the window. [A crack exists in the

window.]
There are ants all over my sandwich. [Ants are located all my
sandwich.]
There's no room for your stuff [No room exists for your
stuff.]
There developed a problem in the ignition. [A problem developed.]
There appeared a bright light in the sky. [A bright light appeared.]
There exist many solutions to this problem. [Many solutions exist.]
There arose a great cry from the crowd. [A great cry arose.]
In existential there sentences, the noun phrase following the verb is almost
always indefinite, In other words the noun will never be preceded by the and
will never be a proper noun. There is a man on the porch is fine but *There is the
man on the porch is ungrammatical unless there is reanalyzed as a redundant ad-
verb of location, i.e, There is the man, on the porch.
Many languages have such "pointing out" constructions and they are of-
ten syntactically unusual. Existential there constructions are ubiquitous in Eng-
lish. The following passage is from Walter Mosley's novel Gone Fishin' (1997).
(Boldface added.)
The road wasn't paved or landscaped. On either side there were dense shrubs
and bushes. . . . There are stretches of land that have hardly anything grow-
ing, but even then it's no simple story. Texas is made up of every kind of soil;
Narrative Discourse and the Verb Phrase 161
there's red clay and gray sod and fertile brown. . . . But there's no such thing
as a desert town near the gulf. (pp. 22-23)
N a r r a t i v e Discourse and t h e V e r b Phrase
As you have already seen, a speaker's choice of tense, aspect, and voice will
depend a great deal on real world circumstancesisthe event over and done
with, is it ongoing, does it have current relevance, is the agent known, etc. The
nature of a discourse will also influence the form of its VPs.
In an action sequence of the sort found in crime novels, the actual events
are often encoded in transitive and intransitive verbs with highly agentive sub-
jects. This is called foregrounding because such constructions serve to push
the action to the forefront. The following passages are from James Lee Burke's
novel Burning Angel (1995). (Boldface added.)
He dropped his ring of keys in his pocket and called out to a man sweeping
the wood floors in front. . . . Then he spat his chewing gum neatly into a trash
bag and clanged through a metal door into the back alley, (p. 65)
I took two paper bags from the kitchen pantry, put a clean shirt in one of them,
stopped by the bait shop, then drove up the dirt road through the tunnel of
oak trees and over the drawbridge, (p. 84)
Background information and descriptions typically employ stative verbs,

copulas, and agentless passives.
[Moleen Bertrand] was over six feet and could not be called a soft man, but
at the same time there was no muscular tone or definition to his body. . . . He
had been born to an exclusionary world of wealth and private schools. . . . He
was Phi Beta Kappa at Springhill and a major in the air force toward the end
of the Viet Nam War. He made the Law Revieiv at Tulane and became a senior
partner at his firm in less than five years. He was also a champion skeet shooter,
(p. 20)
An aluminum boat with an outboard engine was tied with a chain to a cypress
knee on the bank, and beyond it a shack was set back in the willows on pil-
ings. The screens were webbed with rust, dead insects, and dirt, and the tin
roof had long ago taken on the colors of a woods in winter. The base of the
pilings glistened with a sheen like petroleum waste from the pools of stagnant
water they sat in. (p. 393)
Different kinds of discourse will tend to use foregrounding and back-

grounding differently. Most adult fiction is a mix of the two techniques. Sto-
ries for small children, however, are very heavy on foregrounding. Little kids
respond well to action and children's literature is full of highly transitive verbs
162 The Verb Phrase
and agentive subjects, as in the following passages from Richard Scarry's Huckle
Cat's Busiest Day Ever! (1992).
Huckle and Lowly run to the bathroom. They wash their faces. They brush
their teeth. Huckle combs his hair. Then they make their beds. They dress, and
run to breakfast, (p. 2)
Mother Cat drives the Cat family car through the streets of Busytown. Huckle
and Lowly see many sights. Trucks are making deliveries of things. Shops are
opening their doors. Garbage workers pick up the garbage. Postman Pig de-
livers letters. Sergeant Murphy directs traffic, (pp. 5-6)
In this passage even the inanimate noun shops is treated as an agent. The only
stative verb used here by Scarry is see.,
Sportswriters also exploit foregrounding heavily. The following passage is
from the Denver Post sports section (May 6, 1997). (Boldface added.)
Hundley crushed two home runs, went 4 for 4 and knocked in five runs, and
Bobby Jones scattered six singles as New York whipped the Rockies 6-1. (p.
1-D)
These are highly transitive verbs and the subjects are all very agentive. Even
the normally intransitive went takes a direct object here.
Histories and biographies, on the other hand, often include long sections
of background information, like this passage from Undaunted Courage: Meri-
wether Lewis, Thomas Jefferson, and the Opening of the American West (Ambrose,
1996). Note that most of the finite verbs are either copulas or stative verbs.
(Boldface added.)
When Thomas Jefferson took the Oath of Office as the third president of the
United States on March 4,1801, the nation contained 5,308,483 persons. Nearly
one out of five was a Negro slave. Although the boundaries stretched from the
Atlantic to the Mississippi River, from the Great Lakes nearly to the Gulf of
Mexico . . . only a relatively small area was occupied. Two-thirds of the peo-
ple lived within fifty miles of tidewater. Only four roads crossed the Ap-
palachian Mountains, (p. 51)
Even normally dynamic verbs like crossed and stretched are stative here.
Since epistemic modality usually expresses the doubts and certainties of
the speaker/writer, it is most often used in conversation and first person nar-
rative. The following passages from Prejean's autobiographical book Dead Man
Walking (1994) illustrate both contexts. The narrative is written in the first per-
son but it includes accounts of conversations with others, as in the first two ex-
amples below. (Boldface added.)
Summing Up 163
When I go up to him, he says in a whisper, "I think it was Mrs. Harvey's pa-
triotic speech about America there at the end that did me in. I think I was win-
nin' before that little part of her speech." I am amazed at his naivete. He thought
he had a chance, (p. 168)
Marsellus is angry. "No way. . . . He knew the real score. He may have said
that to you to save face, but he was the one who worked out the deal with the
woman." (p. 172)
It must have been a terrible ordeal to know all the wheeling and dealing go-
ing on. (p. 173)
In contexts like these, epistemic modality is entirely appropriate. But a schol-

arly article or an instruction manual that was filled with epistemic construc-
tions would not inspire confidence.
We've already seen that cookbooks and directions for product use are heavy
on imperative constructions. Textbooks and manuals exploit the imperative and
a variety of other deontic devices as well. The following passages are from the
Inside Windows 95 manual (Boyce et al., 1995). (Boldface added.)
To remove a device, choose the System object in the Control Panel, then click
on the Device Manager tab. (p. 124)
. . . you should avoid copying objects to the Startup folder to make them start
automatically, (p. 178)
You might have to download fonts to the printer . . . before you can print the
document, (p. 234)
In this situation, you need to rename your Config.sys. (p. 99)
While most of the constructions discussed in this chapter can theoretically

crop up anywhere, you will find that often the nature of the discourse will af-
fect, however loosely, the kinds of verb constructions that a speaker/writer
chooses.
Summing Up
As you can see, the English verb phrase is complex both grammatically and
semantically. The verb phrase is in essence the command center of the sentence.
Verbs dictate the semantic roles of subjects, direct objects, indirect objects, etc.
They dictate whether or not a sentence will even contain a direct object, an in-
direct object, a subject complement, or an object complement. Most expressions
of modality are contained in the verb phrase. The verb phrase is important in
establishing the time frame of an utterance and the status of event (complete,
in process, currently relevant, etc.).
164 The Verb Phrase
Some of the most knotty problems in English syntax revolve around the
verb phrase. There are still many disagreements about the nature of semi-aux-
iliaries; their treatment in this book reflects only one approach. Some verbs are
followed by clauses that are difficult to categorize. (I will touch upon this in
Chapter 5.) The terminology traditionally used to describe elements in the VP
is often problematic.
Nevertheless, you should now have a clearer understanding, not only of
the VP itself, but of how it relates to the various NPs in the sentence. Once you
have acquired some mastery of the structure and semantics of the noun phrase
and the verb phrase, even the most complex English sentences yield to analy-
sis.
4
Modification
If English sentences contained only determiners, nouns, and verbs, they would
be colorless indeed. Many parts of speech can be modified in some way. In tra-
ditional grammar, modification relationships are usually subsumed under the
categories adjective and adverb. Adjectives are typically described as words
or phrases that modify nouns, while adverbs are often defined as structures
that modify adjectives, verbs, and other adverbs. But there are modification re-
lationships that cannot be comfortably included in these two categories. Fur-
thermore, modification is a complex and problematic phenomenon and not all
modification relationships are the same.
Modification of t h e N o u n and t h e N o u n Phrase
Grammatical categories like subject and direct object are internally complex.
Not only does the typical noun phrase contain a noun and some sort of deter-
miner, but it often contains adjective constructions as well. The adjective usu-
ally appears between the determiner and the noun. Unlike the categories de-
terminer, predeterminer, and postdeterminer, the category adjective is an open
class. There are thousands of adjectives in English and speakers invent new
onesascuzzy guy, a spacy teenager and readily assign new meanings to old
onesahairy problem, a gay friend, a gnarly surfboard.
Adjectives are not altogether easy to characterize, however. Words from
many grammatical classes can modify nouns. There is of course the prototyp-
ical adjective, a word that can take the comparative form (sweeter, smarter, big-
ger) and the superlative form (sweetest, smartest, biggest). These {-er} and {-est}
suffixes are inflectional endings; the adjectives that can take these suffixes usu-
ally date back to Old English, although even neologisms (new words) like
scuzzy sometimes carry themHe'sthe scuzziest guy I've ever seen. Multi-syllabic
adjectives borrowed from French during the Middle English period typically
require periphrastic comparative and superlative formsmoreintelligent, more
beautiful, most difficult. Borrowed adjectives of a single syllable are sometimes
inflected, howeverlarger,finest, nicer, closest.
There are a few adjectives in English in which the root form is different
165
166 Modification
from the comparative and superlative forms, e.g., goodfbetter/best; bad/worse/

worst; little/less/least. A11 of these suppletive forms axe very old.
Many of the words that modify nouns are not prototypical adjectives. Verb
participles readily take on this function. When a noun is modified by a present
participle, there is a sense that the state being described is ongoing; a galloping
horse is in the process of galloping and a screaming child is in the process of
screaming. Present participle adjectives are relatively common.
The laughing clown delighted the baby.

The coughing patient contaminated the whole office.
He walked into the raging river.
The fire fighters doused the smoldering ashes.
The ringing bells awaken us every Sunday.
Some {-ing} adjectives are very idiosyncratic. The following present participle
forms rarely occur with nouns other than the ones indicated here (Fillmore and
Kay, 1995, p. 4-4).
Jane's cousins are blithering idiots.

They were consenting adults.
He was excused due to mitigating circumstances.
Adjectives formed from past participles are ubiquitous in English.
I threw out the wilted gardenia.

The athlete soaked her swollen foot.
That wrecked car must be moved.
The wounded soldier was airlifted to the hospital.
Cynthia raked up the fallen leaves.
When a noun is modified by a past participle, there is a sense that the state
being described is resultant. Broken glass has already been broken, while break-
ing glass (as in the sound of breaking glass) is in the process of being broken; a
stolen necklace has already been filched and a scratched cornea has already been
damaged. When I'm driving on mountain roads, I find the sign that warns of
"Falling rocks" far more ominous than the one that says "Fallen rocks," even
though I know that fallen rocks are a direct result of falling rocks. You can see
the meanings of the progressive and perfect reflected in these participial ad-
jective forms.
There are a number past participles that can function as adjectives only
when they contain the prefix (un-jtheunread manuscript; an unsold car; an tin-
Modification of the Noun and Noun Phrase 167
sung hero. Without the prefix, none of these participles can modify nouns (*a
read manuscript, *a sold car, *a sung hero), unless the participle itself is modified
in some waya seldom read manuscript; an easily sold product. (Constructions
like these will be taken up in detail later.)
Even words that are usually noun heads can modify other nounsapaper
airplane, the senior trip, apple cider, the county jail, a stone wall. While these
words are functioning as adjectives, they rarely take inflected or periphrastic
comparative and superlative forms; *a more apple cider and *the paperest airplane
are impossible. These are called denominal adjectives. (The term denominal in-
dicates that a word has lost its nominal status; it can be used to refer to any
noun form that takes on a non-nominal grammatical function.)
Adjectives can sometimes be identified by their derivational suffixes, i.e.,
the endings that derive adjectives from other parts of speech.
Noun to adjective Verb to adjective

hunger hungry to select > selective
metal metallic to inflate inflatable
beauty beautiful to harm > harmless
fool >foolish to tip > tippy
nation national to watch watchful
danger > dangerous
scholar > scholarly
irony > ironic
ice icy
Most derived adjectives can take comparative and superlative formshungri-

est, more scholarly, most dangerous.
All the modifiers discussed so far can be considered adjectives because they
express some attribute or quality held by the following noun, but the under-
lying semantic relationships vary a great deal. Consider the following adjec-
tive plus noun constructions and their paraphrases:
a tall woman [a woman who is tall]

a crying baby [a baby who is crying]
a brick building [a building made of brick]
a country road [a road in the country]
a cracked mirror [a mirror that is cracked]
the class picnic [the picnic for the class]
168 Modification
a Thanksgiving feast [a feast held on Thanksgiving]

a spring day [a day in spring]
Shaker furniture [furniture made by or in the style of
the Shakers]
a personal computer [a computer designed for individual use]
a personal attack [an attack on an individual]
advance payment [payment made in advance of services]
English is very rich in adjectives. For any general attribute you might name,
there are likely to be a great number of adjectives that can express some aspect
of that attribute. Usually the real world context will dictate the choice of ad-
jective. Think about the extensive inventory of adjectives that express "wet-
ness"wet,moist, damp, sopping, swampy, soaked, humid, dank, water-logged, rainy,
foggy, sweaty. Obviously many of these adjectives are quite constrained in terms
of context; humid, rainy, and foggy are typically limited to weather, dank is used
to describe a damp environment and it usually entails "unpleasant," while
sweaty is used to refer to moisture excreted by some mammals. The variety is
impressive, nevertheless.
It's hard to imagine English discourse without adjectives. The passage that
follows describes a Lap man in traditional dress (Beach, 1993). Despite its
brevity, this passage contains 12 adjectives. (Boldface added.)
He wore a faded blue Saami costume decorated with strips of red and yellow
and a matching hat with a huge topknot of red yarn. This was the traditional
dress of the Karesuando district, I later learned. Even with his odd hat he was
not very tall. His posture was stooped, and he walked with an elastic gait. He
was an old man. (p. 10)
Even the driest academic texts exploit adjectives constantly Here is a para-
graph from an advanced computer graphics text (Glassner, 1995). (Boldface
added.)
The conceptual side of computer graphics often deals with continuous-time

(CT) or analytic signals. These have a symbolic representation that enables us
to evaluate them for any parameter value. . . . An analytic signal need not be
smooth (i.e., differentiable everywhere), or continuous (i.e., unbroken), (p.
128)
This highly technical passage contains 10 adjectives in just a few lines.

In English, adjectives most often occupy one of three positions. They oc-
cur prenominally (i.e., before the noun), after the copula (i.e., as predicate ad-
jectives), or after a complex transitive verb and a direct object (i.e., as object
complements). However, sometimes an adjective will follow a noun or a pro-
noun in the absence of a complex transitive verb. These are postnominal ad-
jectives.
This is a risky business. Prenominal adjective

This business seems risky. Predicate adjective
She considers this business risky. Object complement adjective
Something risky is being planned. Postnominal adjective
Most adjectives can readily occupy both prenominal and predicate adjec-
tive position, although there are exceptions as you will see below. The adjec-
tives that can occupy object complement position are severely limited by the
semantics of complex transitive verbs, and postnominal adjectives are also
highly constrained.
PRENOMINAL ADJECTIVES
A prenominal adjective can modify virtually any noun, regardless of its po-
sition in the sentence. In a sentence like This is a risky business, risky is not a
predicate adjective, even though it appears in the predicate. Risky precedes and
modifies the noun business and the entire NP, a risky business, is a predicate
nominative. Similarly, an adjective which precedes a direct object noun (as in
I hate a risky business) is not an object complement. This term is reserved for ad-
jectives that follow the noun head of the direct object; furthermore, object com-
plements usually occur with complex transitive verbs.
Prenominal adjectives are sometimes called attributive. This terminology
is somewhat misleading, however, because adjectives in other positions also
attribute some quality to the noun head they modify.
While most adjectives can occur in both prenominal and predicate adjec-
tive position, a few are limited to one position or the other. The adjectives that
are limited to prenominal position fall into four general categories:
1) most denominal adjectives

2) a few adjectives derived from nominal forms by means of derivational
suffixes
3) present participles functioning as adjectives
4) non-inherent adjectives
5) relationship adjectives
As you saw above, some noun forms can function as prenominal adjec-
tivesthefreshman class, the city park, county jail, the garden gate. Many of these
sound ungrammatical or at best odd in predicate adjective position*theclass
was freshman, *the park was city, ??the jail was county, *the gate was garden. Crim-
inal court means something very different from The court was criminal. I sus-
pect the reason for this discrepancy lies in the grammatical differences be-
170 Modification
tween predicate adjectives and predicate nominatives. When something that

looks like a noun follows a copula, we process it as a predicate nominative,
not a predicate adjective. While a predicate adjective describes the subject NP,
a predicate nominative must have the same referent as the subject NP, a sig-
nificantly different function. A sentence like Billy is a criminal can be charac-
terized as Billy = a criminal, but the park = city is not a reasonable paraphrase
of the city park.
There are some nouns that have, over the centuries, taken on real adjective
status. In a sentence like The building is stone, stone is a descriptor, not a co-
referential NP. Nouns that name the materials out of which things are made
often take on this descriptive function and they can appear in both prenomi-
nal and predicate adjective position.
This is a brick wall. / The wall is brick.

This is a cardboard table. / The table is cardboard.
This is a paper hat. / The hat is paper.
That is a tin can. / That can is tin.
Even adjectives that have been derived from nouns via derivational mor-
phology occasionally resist predicate adjective position. We speak of atomic sci-
entists but no one would say *Those scientists are atomic; Jack the Ripper was de-
scribed as a serial killer but no journalist would have written that "The killer
was serial." The phrase presidential assistant means something quite different
from the assistant was presidential. On the other hand, many other adjectives de-
rived from nouns are perfectly comfortable in predicate adjective position
The baby is hungry; This book is scholarly; That sport is dangerous.
Complex expressions can sometimes be used as prenominal adjectives, es-
pecially in informal conversation.
Roger is an early-to-bed guy.

Linda was a take-charge executive.
My daughter is in her l-canrt-stand-adults phase.
It was a take-no-prisoners situation.
As you saw above, adjectives derived from past participles readily occupy
predicate adjective positionThemirror is cracked; That chair is broken. Since past
participle adjectives encode states, they can also follow copulas other than be
That chair looks broken; This lens seems cracked; That C.D. sounds scratched. How-
ever, adjectives derived from present participles behave quite differently, due
to the semantic differences between past and present participles. As you have
already seen, the condition described by a past participle is a resultant state; a
cracked mirror has already been cracked. A present participle, however, describes
an ongoing condition; a babbling baby is still in the process of babbling. As a re-
suit, any present participle that directly follows be will simply be interpreted
as a component part of the progressiveThe baby is babbling. Present partici-
ples never follow other copulas either*That baby seems babbling; *That boy
sounds screaming; *It appears snowing.
Noninherent adjectives constitute a special class that can only be used
prenominally. In most cases an adjective names some quality held by the noun
being modified. Noninherent adjectives, however, do not actually describe the
following noun, but rather another, related noun. In a sentence like Terence is
a big fool, the speaker is not describing the stature of Terence, but rather the ex-
tent of his foolishness. An expression like my old friend refers to the length of the
friendship, not to the age of the friend; even a child can have an old friend. At-
tila is a poor loser means that Attila is poor at losing, not that he is short of funds
and a wooden actor is one whose acting is wooden, not a marionette. When a
noninherent adjective is moved to predicate adjective position, its meaning
changes and it loses its noninherent status. The meaning of old in my old room-
mate is quite different from that of old in My roommate is old.
Former, previous, and late are also prenominal adjectives that don't appear
in predicate adjective position.
Martha's former boss is now in jail / ^Martha's boss is former.

Jackson's late uncle left him millions. / *Jackson's uncle is late (i.e., deceased).
The previous tenant left a mess. / *The tenant was previous.
Each of these adjectives refers to a relationship that no longer exists; Martha's

boss is no longer her boss, the tenant no longer lives there, and Jackson's un-
cle is dead.
You will find that two or more adjectives that derive from different parts
of speech sometimes resist being coordinated with and. While a scientist may
be tall and handsome, he cannot be *tall and atomic. A horse might be strong and
beautiful but we would never speak of the *beautiful and galloping horse. Fur-
thermore, not all adjectives derived from nouns can be coordinated. Rugby
might be described as a bloody and dangerous sport but not a *bloody and national
sport. Relationship adjectives and noninherent adjectives seldom coordinate
with other types. *Martha's former and rich boss is coming to dinner, and *My old
and brilliant roommate is visiting next week are ungrammatical, although An old
and dear friend is visiting is fine. Past participle adjectives are quite flexible and
can be coordinated with many other adjective typesThewitty and talented Bette
Midler is being honored tonight; He is a quiet and reserved man; It was an exciting
and animated performance. This is a measure of how thoroughly some past par-
ticiples have taken on adjective status.
PREDICATE ADJECTIVES
As you saw in Chapter 1, predicate adjectives always follow copulas and
constitute one type of subject complement.
172 Modification
Those exam questions were tricky.

Calvin seems honest.
looks pale.
There is a set of adjectives all of which begin with a- (asleep, afraid, ablaze, afloat,
alive, ashamed, etc.) that readily occur in predicate adjective position but do not
occur prenominally. Phrases like *the afraid child, *the asleep baby, and *the afloat
raft are ungrammatical. Afraid and ashamed both derive from the past partici-
ple forms of now archaic verbs, while asleep, ablaze, afloat, and alive derive from
very old prepositional phrase constructionsonsleep, on blaze, on float, and on
life. It is certainly not surprising that adjectives derived from prepositional
phrases cannot occur prenominally, since prepositional phrases themselves
never occur in prenominal position*the on fire house, *the in the box cookies.
Well, meaning "healthy/7 does not, as a rule, occur prenominally, although "well
baby clinics" exist in some communities.
There are other constraints on predicate adjectives. Some can co-occur with
both stative and dynamic verbs and others cannot. As you saw in Chapter 3,
adjectives that describe relatively permanent states do not follow the progres-
sive. *Nate is being tall is unacceptable under most circumstances, but Nate is
being noisy is fine. Normally an English speaker would not say *Danica is being
musical or *James is being thin, since being thin and being musical are long-term
qualities. Adjectives which describe relatively permanent states are called sta-
tive. Thus, a sentence like Jessica is smart contains both a stative copula and a
stative predicate adjective.
Of course some adjectives can be used to describe both permanent and
short-term states. As we have already seen in Chapter 3, a short-term state can
be communicated by the use of the progressiveYoursister is being obnoxious;
Those boys are being mean.
Unlike prenominal adjectives, predicate adjectives are rarely stacked. That
old, tan couch is mine is fine but *That couch is tan, old is unacceptable unless
there is a significant pause between tan and old.
POSTNOMINAL ADJECTIVES AND ADJECTIVE PHRASES

On rare occasions a lexical adjective follows a noun in the NP.
Some of the people present voted against the amendment.

The person responsible was never found.
All of the individuals concerned were there.
Adjectives in this position are called postnominal. While adjectives seldom

follow full nouns, they often follow indefinite pronouns, despite the fact that
adjectives rarely precede pronouns of any sort.
Nobody new has joined the sorority.

Something strange has occurred.
Someone tall snatched the oranges from the tree.
Nothing bad happened at the meeting.
Somebody important is attending the reunion.
Prepositional phrases frequently function as postnominal modifiers, usu-

ally following full NPs.
The little girl in the blue dress is my niece.

Do you know the kid with the freckles?
The house across the street burned down last night.
In each of these sentences the prepositional phrase helps the hearer identify
the referent of the NP. A sentence like The little girl is my niece is not especially
informative if the room is filled with little girls, and a speaker who hears The
house burned down last night will have no idea which house. In the section on
determiners, I discussed the fact that the typically has anaphoric reference; it
is used with entities that have already been introduced into the discourse. How-
ever, in the sentences above, the has cataphoric reference. The prepositional
phrase tells the hearer which entity is being referred to; in the blue dress, with
the freckles, and across the street restrict the possible referents to one (presum-
ably). As you will see in Chapter 5, restrictive relative clauses have much the
same function.
OBJECT COMPLEMENT ADJECTIVES

Those adjectives that make bad subject complements tend to make bad ob-
ject complements as well. Denominal adjectives rarely appear in this position
*I consider that park city; *They deemed the class freshman; *They made the gate gar-
den. Past participles are fine as object complementsThe insurance company
considered the building damaged, but present participles are not*Thejockey con-
sidered the horse galloping. In 1 considered the fool big, big loses its noninherent sta-
tus and *I considered my boss former is totally unacceptable.
On the other hand, adjectives that make good subject complements (but
don't occur prenominally) also make good object complements.
The pyromaniac set the building ablaze.

The Captain set the life raft afloat.
A package of Fig New tons kept the victim alive.
The new medicine made the child well.
174 Modification
A prenominal adjective is in no way sensitive to the verb in the sentence.

Many predicate adjectives are relatively indifferent to their copulasMorgan
is/became/seems/ appears angry, but a sensory copula must be followed by a pred-
icate adjective that reflects the sense in question. A compact disc can sound
scratched but not red; a surface can feel rough but not noisy. While become can
take almost any subject complement, turn usually suggests a relatively rapid
change of stateThemilk turned sour, The weather turned cold. *My grandparents
turned old, and *My family has turned poor are ungrammatical, but, surprisingly,
Bob has turned grey is fine.
Object complement adjectives are highly sensitive to their verbs. Complex
transitive paint requires that the object complement adjective indicate some sort
of colorWe painted the dining room purple, A verb like prove requires that the
adjective name a quality that can in fact be provenTheattorney proved his client
innocent. Similarly, deem must be followed by a quality that requires judgement;
We deemed the candidate suitable is fine but *We deemed the candidate tall is unac-
ceptable.
Whether an adjective occupies prenominal or object complement position
can have a profound effect on the meaning of a sentence.
(a) I considered the interminable debate.

(b) I considered the debate interminable.
In example (a), considered means "to think about" or "mull over"; it's a dynamic
verb in this context. But in (b), the object complement forces us to reinterpret
considered as a stative verb meaning loosely "to judge."
INTENSIFYING AND DOWNTONING ADJECTIVES

In phrases like an utter fool, a complete disaster, a total failure, an absolute
idiot, and a real mess, the prenominal adjectives do not carry much meaning of
their own; instead they intensify the meaning of the noun. When someone says,
"My brother-in-law is a real idiot," the speaker is using real to underscore the
extent of the idiocy, not to express the opposite of "imaginary." Such adjectives
are called intensifying adjectives and they are often interchangeableMybest
friend is an utter/total/complete/absolute/real failure. Sometimes horrible and terri-
ble can be used in this way as wellItwas a terrible mess; It was a horrible fiasco.
While most intensifying adjectives can be used in both positive and negative
contexts, horrible and terrible are usually reserved for unpleasant situations. *The
party was a horrible success would be anomalous for most speakers, and ?The
party was a terrible success would be problematic for many.
Intensifiers vary in their ability to act as subject complements. Total and ab-
solute retain their intensifying meaning in predicate adjective position T h ede-
struction was absolute; The chaos was total Complete is somewhat marginal in this
regard?Thedestruction was complete. Utter cannot occur in predicate adjective
position at all, and real loses its intensifier status when it occupies this posi-
tionThedestruction was real
English also contains constructions that downplay rather than intensify

meaning. These constructions precede the entire noun phrase rather than the
noun head, so they are not technically adjectives. Since there is no traditional
grammatical label for these constructions, they are known simply by their se-
mantic label, downtoner.
My boss is sort of a jerk.

She is kind of a prima donna.
Your cousin is rather a fool.
Boris is a bit of a snob.
Zoila is kind of an accountant.
The function of downtoners is to soften the negative connotations of an un-

complimentary noun or to undermine the literal meaning of a neutral noun. It
is certainly better to have a boss that is sort of a jerk than a boss that is a real
jerk. On the other hand, you may not want to trust your taxes to someone who
is kind of an accountant.
LIMITERS
In the following sentences the items in boldface are limiters. They limit the
hearer's attention to the noun phrase that follows and exclude other possibil-
ities. Like downtoners, limiters modify the entire NP. Unlike the other modi-
fying structures in this section, limiters can modify proper nouns.
He ate only the grapes. [He didn't eat the apples,

oranges, or bananas.]
1 invited just the women. [Not the men]
Only Evelyn knew the answer. [No one else knew the answer]
Just the oak trees survived. [Nothing else survived.]
Only the bedroom was ransacked. [No other room was ransacked.]
As you will see later, intensifies, downtoners, and limiters can also modify ad-
jectives, adverbs, and verbs.
GRADABILITY
As you have already seen, some adjectives can be inflected with compar-
ative and superlative suffixes and others require the periphrastic forms more
and most. While {-er} and more and {-est} and most communicate the notions
"greater" and "greatest," respectively, less and least accomplish the same thing
on a descending scale Otto is less friendly than Frieda; Max is the least friendly.
176 Modification
Comparative and superlative forms of all types require a context for compar-
ison. They are always anaphoric or cataphoric. In the following sentences the
context for the comparison is in boldface.
Eric is smarter than Leslie.

The youngest child in the family asks the questions at Passover
There are ten kids in the class and Sarah is the tallest.
Of all the people I have ever known, Anne is the most frugal.
Charlotte is more competent than her sister.
Anastasia seems less confident than Sergei.
I am the least talented member of my team.
If you marched into a room an announced without preamble, "I am older/'

those present would undoubtedly want to know "older than who?" The com-
parative context, however, need not be expressed in the sentence itself; it might
emerge from the previous discourse or be obvious from the situation. When
workers strike for higher wages, the employer knows that they want wages
higher than the ones they currently earn.
Be aware that {-est} and most are not always superlative forms. Sometimes
speakers use these forms as intensifiers without implying a comparison.
I am dating the most wonderful woman.

Rachel is the nicest person.
He is a most happy baby.
This is the worst course.
In each of these sentences most or {-est} is semantically closer to the intensifier

very than the superlative.
Adjectives that can take comparative and superlative forms of either type
are said to be gradable. Gradability means that the quality expressed by the
adjective can be seen as a continuum. Gradable adjectives can always be mod-
ified by intensifiers and downtonersavery nice gift; a rather nice gift.
Not all adjectives are gradable, however. Adjectives that derive from other
parts of speech seldom express scalar qualities. Sentences like *This class is more
freshman than that one or *That was a very school picnic are completely unaccept-
able. Even adjectives carrying adjective producing derivational morphology are
sometimes problematic??This bowl is more wooden than that one; ??My suit is
very woolen. Some past participle adjectives are gradableThischair is more dam-
aged than that one; That's a very damaged chair, but present participle adjectives
never are *Thisbrook is more babbling than that one; *This is a very babbling brook.
Gradable adjectives have some interesting characteristics. Because they refer
to qualities that are inherently scalar, some gradable adjectives have opposites
hot/cold, tall/short, big/small, dark/light, smart/stupid, old/young, rich/poor. Of course

in order to be opposites, two words have to have a great deal in common; both
hot and cold refer to temperature; they merely represent the poles of the same se-
mantic continuum. Be aware that not all adjective opposites are scalar. Some, like
alive and dead, represent absolutes. Dead = not alive and alive = not dead. While
we use expressions like "half-dead/7 someone who is half-dead is in fact alive.
These absolute opposites are not normally gradable but sometimes speakers use
intensifies to engage in hyperboleThegangster was very dead.
A few commonly used scalar opposites exhibit markedness. In the context
of pairs of adjectives, markedness reflects the fact that one member of the pair
represents the "norm" in the grammar. Short and tall are opposites that refer
to height, but tall is the more generally used and therefore "unmarked" form.
No matter how short an individual is, the appropriate question is "How tall
are you?" Short and long usually behave in the same way (although the con-
straints on short are somewhat less stringent). If you go to a hardware store to
buy piece of lumber, the clerk will probably ask "How long do you want it?"
Although young is the opposite of old, we ask even three-year-olds, "How old
are you?" Tall, long, and old are the commonly used unmarked adjectives. Short
and young are considered marked, even though they don't carry any special
morphology, because they are used in more limited circumstances.
Unmarked adjectives can be modified by measurement termsThe child
was eight years old; The room was ten feet long, but marked adjectives cannot
*Tom was two years young; *The room was ten feet short. (The last sentence is
possible in a different context, one in which the room is ten feet short of some
goal.) When someone says "I am seventy years young," we smile in part be-
cause young is a highly marked form here.
ADJECTIVES AND COMPOUND NOUNS

Sometimes an adjective becomes so closely associated with a noun that the
construction becomes a compound noun. A compound noun carries different
stress from an adjective plus noun construction. In an adjective plus noun con-
struction, the second element (i.e., the noun) carries primary stress, while in a
compound the first element carries the primary stress. A house that has been
painted green is a green house but a place for growing plants is a greenhouse. A
bird which simply happens to be blue is a blue bird, while there is an avian
species called a bluebird. Gardening may be dirty work, but your boss may ex-
pect you to do her dirty work. A tall chair is a high chair, but if that chair is for a
baby, it is a highchair. Spelling is irrelevant; compound nouns may be written as
separate words long after they have become compounds in speech. There are,
in fact, many compounds that are still spelled as two wordshot tub, yellow
jacket (a bee), blue book (an examination booklet), high school, potato salad, etc.
Compound nouns can be formed from a number of different elements. The
most common types are adjective plus noun constructions of the sort discussed
above and noun plus noun constructions, e.g., cupboard, freight train, wristwatch,
fanny pack, windbreaker, snowshoes, roller blades. But verb plus preposition/par-
ticle structures can also function as n o u n s a sit-in, a cookout, the lift off, a rip
178 Modification
off, a put on, a turnover (in pastry or basketball). Present participles sometimes
function as the second element of a compound nounchannelcrossing, bungee
jumping, ice fishing. Compounds can be found in other grammatical categories
as well. Among adjectives we find pigheaded, foolproof, bloodthirsty, and out-to-
lunch and among verbs typeset, stir fry, spot weld, sidestep, and broadcast.
In a written text, a phrase like French history teacher is ambiguous. If history
teacher is a compound noun, then French modifies the entire compound, e.g.,
[French [history teacher]]. If, however, this individual is a teacher of French
history, the internal structure is different, e.g., [French history [teacher]]. In
speech, pauses and stress usually make the meaning clear.
Since compounds often depend heavily on metaphor, their meanings are
sometimes opaque. A non-native speaker would have difficulty interpreting a
hotbed of discontent or a highbrow publication. A soft spot for animals has a dis-
tant semantic relationship to a soft spot on the ground. Over time, the underly-
ing structure of even relatively straightforward compounds can become muddy.
Most English speakers have lost sight of the fact that a cupboard was literally a
board on which cups were placed. Sometimes the nature of the referent changes;
these days a lighthouse is often just a tower made of steel beams. Very few Eng-
lish speakers know that daisy derives from an Old English compound dcegeseage
[day's eye], garlic from gar leac (spear leek), warlock from wserloga (oath breaker),
and lord from hldfweard (loaf ward, i.e., the protector of the bread).
We have already seen that adjective plus noun constructions embody many
different semantic relationships. The same is true for the elements of a com-
pound. Alligator shoes are made from alligator skins, horse shoes are made for
horses, and running shoes are made to facilitate running but are worn only by
people. A lumberyard sells lumber, a lumber mill cuts timber into lumber, and a
lumberjack cuts down trees that will be made into lumber (or paper). A bench-
warmer warms the bench by sitting on it, while a babysitter sits with, not on, the
baby. A song called "Why Don't a Tow Truck Haul Toes?" (Penn, 1997) exploits
the variable semantics of compound constructions. (Unfortunately, this pun
loses force when written.)
Occasionally a compound is formed by an NP and a word that was origi-
nally a postnominal adjective, i.e., an adjective that follows the noun. Such com-
pounds tend to refer to quasi-legal or governmental entitiespresidentelect, the
body politic, an attorney general, the heir apparent. Just as in conventional com-
pounds, the stress here falls on the original modifying element, which in this
case is the second word in the compoundpresidentelect, body politic.
Adjective -h noun Compound noun
a bad print a footprint

a hard rock a hard hat [for construction]
a brick walk brickwork
Adjective + noun (cont.) Compound noun (cont.)
a soft ball [like a Nerf ball] a softball

a short child shortbread
good food soul food
a big yard a barnyard
a light room a lighthouse
high gear high school
a large box a cigar box
a proper gentleman the city proper
a public event a notary public
Usually a compound noun is semantically distinct from a comparable ad-

jective plus noun counterpart, e.g., a bluebook is a completely different entity
from a blue book and a greenhouse has little in common with a green house. In
each of these examples the stress signals the difference. Unfortunately, there
are occasions when a construction feels like a compound but does not carry
compound stress. Most English speakers use compound stress in apple sauce
but not in apple cider, apple pie, or apple strudeh Potato salad and potato chips usu-
ally carry compound stress but often potato soup and potato pancakes do not. To
some extent the familiarity of the item in the culture is a factor; most Ameri-
cans eat potato chips but far fewer eat potato pancakes. But this doesn't ex-
plain apple pie, which is a cultural icon and yet doesn't carry compound stress.
For some reason cakes are more likely to carry compound stress than pies
carrot cake, angel food cake, lemon cake but rhubarb pie, lemon meringue pie, pecan
pie. My intuition tells me that in terms of semantic structure carrot cake and ap-
ple pie are identical, since both constructions refer to pastries made from a spec-
ified fruit or vegetable. To argue on the basis of stress alone that carrot cake is
a compound and apple pie is not seems unsatisfactory
ADJECTIVE ORDER IN THE NOUN PHRASE

While an NP can have only one determiner, it can contain many adjectives.
Utterances like my old, brown couch or a tall, brick building are extremely com-
mon. In these phrases, each adjective modifies the noun independently; the
couch is both brown and old and the building is both tall and brick. When there
is more than one adjective in an NP, English speakers usually put these adjec-
tives in a particular order. Most speakers would not say the brown, old couch,
nor would they say a brick, tall building. A beautiful Russian vase is a perfectly
acceptable phrase, but ??a Russian beautiful vase is odd, if not ungrammatical.
You will find that adjectives communicating such attributes as color, size, na-
tionality, and the material from which the noun is made often occupy relatively
180 Modification
predictable positions in the noun phrase. While there is no sure algorithm for
adjective order, English speakers tend to exploit the following pattern:
size + age + color + j material characteristics I -I- noun

[ national origin J
a tall, young woman

an old, brown, leather briefcase
a red, wool coat
an immense, stone barn
a plump, dark-haired child
big, brown eyes
a tall, muscular, Swedish athlete
a tiny, five-year-old boy
You will undoubtedly find exceptions to the pattern described above.
INTERNAL STRUCTURE OF THE ADJECTIVE PHRASE

Sometimes the adjectives in an NP have their own internal structure. In a
phrase like a large white building, large and white each modify building but a
phrase like a light blue dress is potentially ambiguous. The interpretation de-
pends on whether light is construed as modifying blue or dress.
light blue dress a light blue
In actual speech, stress and pauses will probably disambiguate the phrase.
We tend to pause a bit more between adjectives of equal status. (This pause
can be signaled by a comma in edited English.) The following exchange, al-
legedly between two state representatives, was passed around the Internet. It
underscores the potential for ambiguity in structures with multiple modifiers.
Speaker A: "The Knights of Peter Claire is a large Catholic organiza-

tion."
Speaker B: "Tm a large Catholic and I don't belong to it."
When gradable adjectives are modified, they can express a quality in terms
of degree. A painting can be more or less beautiful than another painting, an ath-
lete can be too tall or not tall enough, and music can be sort of loud or really loud.
We use various kinds of degree modifiers to express these differences includ-
ing intensifiers and downtoners.
Intensifiers
Intensifies are ubiquitous in English. We have already seen that very plays
this role; forms like absolutely, really, totally, and extremely have exactly the same
functiona very loud noise; an extremely irritating child; a totally awesome ex-
perience; a really nice woman; a terribly bad accident. So can be used as an in-
tensifies but only with predicate adjectives and object complementsYouare
so smart; Gwen is so lucky; Tom finds Lena so annoying. In New England wicked
is often employed as an intensifierIt's wicked cold out today and in England
bloody serves this same functionThat was bloody rude. Stark can be used as
an intensifier, but usually only with the adjective naked The swimmers were
stark naked. Super has been an informal intensifier for decadesThis is a super
good school. American teenagers often use way as an intensifierThat was way
cool.
Note that many of these intensifiers are closely related semantically to in-
tensifying adjectives, and a number of them can be formed by simply adding
(-ly) to the appropriate adjective.
She is a total incompetent. / She is totally incompetent.

It was a real catastrophe. / It was really catastrophic.
It was an absolute disaster. / It was absolutely disastrous.
He is a terrible fool. / His behavior was terribly foolish.
It was an awful mess. / It was awfully messy.
Like their adjective counterparts, intensifiers like terribly, awfully, and horribly
are not as semantically neutral as other intensifiers. They are usually used to
intensify negative or unpleasant meaningsIt's horribly wet out; He's terribly
sick; Jennifer looks awfully unhappy. ?She is terribly beautiful is an odd sentence
for many speakers, although it is acceptable to some.
When an intensifier modifies an adjective, it becomes part of an adjective
phrase.
predicate adjective prenominal adjective phrase
She is totally incompetent The really tall boy is my son.

intensifier intensifier
Downtoners
Some adjective modifiers are downtoners. Intensifiers and downtoners
aren't really distinct categories; they constitute a semantic continuum and as
one shades into the other, it is sometimes hard to assign a semantic label. A
man who is really angry is angrier than a man who is somewhat angry. A very
easy exam is easier than a pretty easy exam, but two speakers might reasonably
182 Modification
disagree on whether a pretty easy exam is easier or harder than an easy exam. I
would prefer a doctor who is competent to one that was somewhat competent, but
should I prefer a blind date who is handsome to one who is rather handsome?
YouTl recognize many of these words and phrases in this section as the same
forms that "downtone" noun phrases
The quarterback is sort of clumsy.

Your neiv girlfriend is kind of stuffy.
Patsy is rather tall.
Dena is somewhat upset.
It was a pretty nice party.
Her mother is a bit strict.
The downtoner bit must always be used with the indefinite article She is
a bit upset, unless bit is preceded by a superlative form, in which case the su-
perlative is preceded by theHe isn't the slightest bit jealous; She isn't the least
bit contrite. Although this construction can occur in affirmative sentencesShe's
the tiniest bit mad, it most often appears in negatives.
Modification of Comparative and Superlative Forms

Like any other gradable adjective, an inflected comparative form can be
modified by an intensifier or a downtonerChristine is somewhat taller than
her brother; Dick is a lot nicer than Jane. Note that the quantifier a lot cannot be
used with an uninflected adjective*Dickis a lot nice. This is evidence that the
degree quantifier is modifying the comparative meaning rather than the ad-
jective itself. Comparative more and superlative most can also be modified by
these forms. More, which expresses comparative degree, can be modified by a
quantifier that also expresses degreeElisais a lot more competent than her sis-
ter; Alexander is far more intelligent than his cousin; She is so much more outgo-
ing than Alberto. The modification relationships in the constructions can be cap-
tured by means of nesting boxes.
As you can see, in the first diagram far more modifies intelligent and far
modifies more. The second diagram contains another level of nesting; so mod-
ifies much, so much modifies the comparative form more and so much more mod-
ifies outgoing.
Comparative and superlative adjective constructions can be preceded by a
variety of degree modifiers.
Jane is a lot more fun than Philip.

My children are far noisier than my sister's.
Wendy is somewhat taller than Ray.
That office is far less desirable than this one.
Louie isn't as competent as his brother.
Other Degree Modifiers

Too and enough also express degree judgments. Too indicates that the NP
being modified has an excess of the quality in question; the use of too reflects
a negative judgement. Enough indicates that the NP has a sufficient amount of
the quality in question. Enough always follows the noun being modified.
The baby is getting too fat. The baby is fat enough.

It's too cold in here. It's warm enough in here.
This house is too small. This house is big enough.
Too occurs in predicate adjective phrases but it never modifies prenominal

adjectives*The too fat baby is my niece; *This is a too cold room. Enough can oc-
cur prenominally although it sometimes sounds odds in this positionAbig
enough house is essential; IThis is a warm enough room.
Too can, however, precede and modify an adjective when that adjective pre-
cedes the entire noun phraseThis is too big a house; It was too hard an assign-
ment; It was too long a lecture. In the structure too long a lecture, too long pre-
cedes both the noun head and its determiner; in other words it modifies the
entire NP. Without too, the structure is ungrammatical*longa lecture.
predicate nominative
Occasionally too is simply used as an intensifierYou are too kind. This

occurs most often in negative utterancesShe doesn't look too good (i.e., She
doesn't look very good.).
184 Modification
Summary of degree modifiers
Intensifiers Your mom is very angry.

This is an awfully cold room.
I'm really nauseous.
Her apartment is so filthy.
Jonah's claims were totally ridiculous.
Downtoners She's a rather strange person.
The baby is sort of cute.
Max is getting a bit fat.
This cheese is somewhat moldy.
Other The portions are too small.
I'm old enough now.
Adjective C o m p l e m e n t s
Predicate adjectives are often followed by prepositional phrases that are clearly
working with the adjective in a single grammatical structure. Such preposi-
tional phrases are called adjective complements. The relationship of the prepo-
sitional phrase to the preceding adjective is semantically rather like the rela-
tionship of a direct object to the preceding verb. In a sentence like Kate is fond
of Henry, fond of Henry is an adjective phrase containing an adjective head fond
and its complement of Henry.
In the following sentences the adjective complements are in boldface.
Joseph was jealous of the new baby.

1 am glad of that.
I'm aware of her problems.
Ted is resentful of Philip's success.
The children are afraid of spiders.
She is certain of her daughter's victory.
jack is bad at math.
My father is mad at our neighbor.
Use of the Term Adverb 185
I am pleased about Kemp's promotion.

Marilyn is mad about Tom's comment.
I am angry with you.
The predicate adjective fond requires a following prepositional phrase

*Kate is fond is ungrammaticaL In the other examples, the phrase is not required
for grammaticality, but the context or the discourse must indicate the comple-
ment somehow. The sentence Jack is bad without the complement at math will
be misinterpreted as a statement about Jack's moral character, unless the rest
of the discourse makes it clear that this is a statement about math skills. I'm
aware makes little sense without an overt or covert complement.
Clauses can also function as adjective complements and I will explore these
constructions at some length in Chapter 5.
Use of the Term Adverb
Unlike adjectives, adverbs have no characteristic morphology. While |-ly} is

sometimes hailed as an adverb suffix, only a limited number of adverbs actu-
ally carry that ending. (There are also a few adjectives that exploit this suffix
lovely, friendly, fatherly.) As a result, the criteria for establishing adverb status
are somewhat muddy
The term adverb is also a bit problematic. Traditional grammars use it to la-
bel any structure modifying an adjective, any structure modifying an adverb, and
any structure modifying a verb. Some contemporary grammarians try to avoid
this catch-all term, adverb, by using only semantic terms like intensifier or struc-
ture terms like adjunct. But in fact the traditional labeling system arose precisely
because the same words can take on all three of these modification functions.
"Adverb" modifying "Adverb" modifying "Adverb" modifying

an adjective an adverb a verb
Irene is awfully nosey. She talks awfully fast.

She is really nice. She runs really fast. He really enjoyed
the film.
You were extremely Tony talks extremely
rude. fast.
Her dress is just She sings just I just hate this job.
beautiful. beautifully
This is absolutely She did it absolutely I absolutely despise
awful. perfectly. liver.
186 Modification
"Adverb" modifying "Adverb" modifying "Adverb" modifying

an adjective (cont.) an adverb (cont.) a verb (cont.)
Manny is rather tall. Joe dances rather well. I rather like Mitzi.
This is sort of He smiled sort of I sort of enjoyed
suspicious. sweetly. the party.
The place is fairly I hit the nail fairly She fairly sailed
clean. hard. out of the room.
[British English]
My solution to this terminological dilemma is to use semantic terms like

intensifier and downtoner to refer to those words and phrases that modify ad-
jectives and adverbs and to use the term adverb to refer to words and struc-
tures that modify verbs, predicates, and sentences.
A d j u n c t Adverbs
Adjunct is general term that refers to any item (or person) that functions in an
auxiliary capacity. In linguistics it is typically used to describe an optional el-
ement, one that is not essential to the acceptability of the utterance. In this sec-
tion, I'm going to use the term in a restricted sense to refer to a large class of
adverbial constructions. Although these adverbs are usually optional, there will
be a few constructions in which they are required. (An adjunct is optional only
in that it is not required for grammaticality; adjuncts provide crucial informa-
tion in the discourse.)
Adjuncts are integrated into the sentence or clause in which they appear
(Quirk et al., 1972, p. 421). They usually (but not always) appear in the predi-
cate and they usually modify some or all of the VP, although it is not always
easy to specify the exact modification relationship. Adjuncts can be stacked up.
A given simple sentence can contain only one subject, one direct object (or al-
ternatively one subject complement), one indirect object, but it can contain a
number of adjuncts. All of the adverbs discussed in this section are adjuncts.
You will see later how adjuncts differ from two other types of adverbsdis-
juncts and conjuncts.
INTENSIFYING, DOWNTONING, AND LIMITING ADJUNCTS

Adjunct intensifiers and downtoners are closely related to those that mod-
ify nouns, noun phrases, and adjectives. Predictably, when an intensifying ad-
junct modifies a lexical verb, it simply intensifies the meaning of that verb,
while a downtoner downplays it. Most intensifying and downtoning adjuncts
co-occur with a limited number of verbs.
Adjunct Adverbs 187
Intensifiers often co-occur with psych-verbs, though they can modify other
verb types. As you will see, some intensifiers are quite narrowly constrained
in terms of context. Really is the most versatile intensifying adjunct.
Rick really loves the races.

1 just hate theme parks.
Albert's criticism bothered me a lot.
They fully appreciate her predicament.
Jack completely ignored her request.
She needed dental work badly.
I agree with you totally.
You can't possibly expect me to leave now. [Occurs only with can't]
1 don't like her in the least. [Occurs only with negatives]
He doesn't like me at all. [Occurs only with negatives and questions]
My aunt doesn't mind in the slightest. [Occurs only with negatives]
I don't like him a bit. [As an intensifier, occurs only with negatives]
Downtoners are usually quite flexible. Note that a bit can be used as a down-
toner when it appears in an affirmative utterance.
I rather enjoyed the play.

Barbara sort of snickered.
This will hurt a bit.
Stuart was somewhat annoyed by her remarks.
J was kind of hurt by her behavior.
Downtoners rarely occur in negative constructions, probably because it is

redundant to downtone a quality that has already been negated*Ididn't rather
enjoy the play; ??Barbara didn't sort of snicker. The last sentence is possible if a
contrast is impliedBarbaradidn't sort of snicker; she positively guffawed.
Like the negative particle, some intensifying adverbs have scope and that scope
can be manipulated by placing the adverb at different points in the predicate.
I really will slug you. [Intensifying will, i.e., intention]

/ will really slug you. [Intensifying slug]
I will really slug you hard. [Intensifying both slug and hard]
I will slug you really hard. [Intensifying hard]
(Really can be considered an adjunct in all but the last of the above examples.)
Limiting adjuncts focus the hearer on a narrow or literal interpretation of
188 Modification
the verb. They are often used when the speaker wants to undercut a stronger
implication.
I merely spoke to you. [I didn't yell at you.]

I only tapped him. [I didn't hit him.]
I just sneezed. [I'm not dying.]
Note that just can function as both an intensifier and a limiter. In I just hate him,
it's clearly an intensifier and in I just dislike him [I don't despise him], it's a lim-
Intensifiers and limiters each constitute a small class of adverbs.
LOCATIVES (SPACE ADVERBS)

English contains two different types of space or location adverbs. While
adverbs of place and direction might seem very close in meaning, they occur
in different environments. Adverbs of place can appear with both stative and
dynamic verbs, while adverbs of direction co-occur only with dynamic verbs.
Adverbs of Place
Adverbs of place indicate where someone / thing is located or where an
event takes place. Adverbs of place usually answer the question where? These
adverbs are typically prepositional phrases but can also be single lexical items.
Adverbs of place often but not always occur with verbs that reflect states rather
than actions. (Although adverbs of place are technically complements rather
than adjuncts when they occur with copula be, I am including them in this sec-
tion since they so clearly have the same semantic functions as other locative
adverbs.)
They played croquet on the lawn.

Aunt Sue is sitting in the bathtub.
The bank is next to the gas station.
Your book is on the table.
Zoltan is standing by his mother.
The painting hangs over the fireplace.
Jean works opposite the police station.
Jay is here.
I'll live anywhere.
Jorgen has been everywhere.
Adjunct Adverbs 189
Carol is outside.
She has been living there a long time.
Here and there can express both anaphora and deixis. The father who yells
"Come here" at his child is exploiting only deixis. But the teenager who says
to her friend, "I am over at Anne's house. Do you want to come over here?" is
exploiting both deixis and anaphora, Anne's house being the anaphoric referent
for here. If a friend says "I'm going to the new club on the beach tonight," and
you reply with "I wouldn't be caught dead there," you are exploiting both
anaphora and deixis.
Adverbs of Direction
Adverbs of direction indicate just thatthedirection in which an entity is
going or the path that it takes. Unlike adverbs of place, adverbs of direction
must co-occur with dynamic verbs. Adverbs of direction typically include a
preposition that inscribes an actual direction in space: up, doion, over, under,
around, through, across, into.
They loaded into the water.

The horses galloped across the meadow.
The police walked around the crime scene.
The snake wriggled under the log.
The baby crawled up the stairs.
The beagle climbed over the fence.
The rock was thrown through the window.
Not all adverbs of direction are prepositional phrasesWewalked upstairs;

We went downtown; They traveled overland; They climbed aboard. You can see,
however, that these one-word adverbs were originally prepositional phrases,
including aboard, which used to be on board. The forms here, there, everyiuhere,
and anywhere can function as adverbs of direction as well as adverbs of place
The baby is crawling everywhere now; I'll drive there tomorrow. Here and there are
often preceded by overGina is coming over here later; I'll walk over there dur-
ing my lunch hour. (Adverbs of place can also be preceded by overJason is over
at Janet's house.)
In adverbs of direction, English speakers can sometimes omit the object of
a preposition if it is obvious from the discourse context. A child whose mother
has just called her might reply with "But I don't want to come in." It is clear
from the context that the child means in the house. (*I don't want to come into
would be an ungrammatical response, however.) A boy who is standing in a
third floor window might yell to a friend on the street, "Come on up." The boy
190 Modification
obviously means "up the stairs." In each of the following sentences, the object
of the preposition can be deleted as long as the NP is reasonably clear from the
rest of the discourse.
The train comes through town at midnight.
Walk around the muddy spot.
You can climb up the tree by yourself.
A car drove past our house late last night.
Let's saunter by your boyfriend's place.
Nicole nearly fell off the monkey bars.
Place adverbs are far less flexible in this regard. In general the object of the
preposition must be expressed in such constructions*Edwinsat on; *The chil-
dren played in; *She stood beside. There are, however, a few contexts in which a
conventionally understood object can be omitted, e.g., Your shirt is hanging out
[of your pants], and motorcycle racers often talk of hanging off [the motorcycle seat].
Many single-word adverbs and some prepositional phrases can function
as both adverbs of place and adverbs of direction Note the contrasting verbs
in each set.
]ared is ahead. / Jared ran ahead.

Camille is downstairs. / Camille walked downstairs.
The kids are outside. / The kids have gone outside.
The canoe is downstream. / The canoe floated downstream.
She lives across the street. / She walked across the street.
They live aboard their boat. / They went aboard the boat.
In a few cases, clearly related prepositional forms can be used to distin-

guish between position and direction. In these cases the semantic difference
has been lexicalized, i.e., the difference in meaning is expressed by different
lexical items.
Joe danced on the table. / Maggie leapt onto the table.

Nancy sat in the tub. / Hank stepped into the tub.
It is possible for a locative utterance to be ambiguous. In My brother fell

downstairs, two different interpretations are possible depending on whether my
brother fell down the stairs or was downstairs when he fell.
Sometimes adverbs of direction literally name directionsWetraveled west.
Sometimes they indicate moving toward a goalThe kids walked to the store;
They ran toward the lights; They headed for the woods. (Some linguists consider
Adjunct Adverbs 191
goal to be a separate semantic category but that will not concern us here.) In
other cases, adverbs of direction simply indicate a pathShedrove across the
bridge; They strolled through the garden. All direction adverbs can be preceded
by other modifiersRobinwalked straight into the house; The children walked di-
rectly to school; We drove straight east.
Meanings of Spatial Prepositions

Each spatial preposition has a range of related meanings. While the core
meaning of over inscribes direction other nondynamic meanings have
evolved from this (Lakoff, 1987, pp. 418^30). In There was snow all over the side-
walk, over suggests "covered"; in The lamp hung over the table, over suggests
"above." Sometimes over indicates physical contactTheywalked over the bridge
and sometimes it doesn'tTheyflew over the Rockies.
Metaphor has played a significant role in broadening the meanings of
prepositions. Linguist George Lakoff and philosopher Mark Johnson (1980)
have written extensively on the role of metaphor in language. They have
pointed out (p. 59) that, while the core meaning of the preposition in is "inside
a container," this meaning has been extended metaphorically in sentences like
Lucien is in a difficult situation; Pilar is in trouble; and Kirsten is in love. Does it
even make sense to label in trouble and in love adverbs of place? One might be
able to make a case for in trouble but in love strongly suggests a state rather
than a location. We see the same semantic progression with under.
The baby is under the table.

These students are under his authority.
jack is under ]ill's spell
Farouk is under the weather.
The more metaphorical and idiomatic the construction, the harder it is to choose
an appropriate grammatical category for the prepositional phrase.
Direct Object Versus Prepositional Constructions

As you saw in Chapter 1, there is often a subtle difference in meaning be-
tween locative prepositional phrases and simple NPs, which have a locative
meaning. While such NPs are usually considered direct objects, they are se-
mantically related to adverbs. Compare the following pairs of sentences.
They climbed up the mountain. / They climbed the mountain.

She swam across the English Channel. / She swam the English Channel.
Megan hiked through the valley. / Megan hiked the valley.
The first sentence in each pair contains an adverb of direction, which de-
scribes some sort of path. The second sentence in each pair communicates the
192 Modification
notion that this path has been completely traversed. As linguist Beth Levin
(1993, p. 44) has pointed out, the prepositional phrase usually has a "partitive"
interpretation, while the NP has "holistic" interpretation, i.e., They climbed the
[whole] mountain. Locative direct objects sometimes suggest that the subject
has accomplished a feat. One might make the Guinness Book of Records for climb-
ing a mountain, but lots of people climb up mountains.
This contrast between direct objects and directional prepositional phrases
occurs in other contexts as well. In Mary poked her brother, it is clear that phys-
ical contact was made, while this is less clear in Mary poked at her brother. At
often occurs in constructions in which the intent of the agent isn't realized or
the action has an inconclusive result. (Goldberg, 1995, pp. 63-64).
I slapped at the mosquito. /I slapped the mosquito.

Pat kicked at her attacker. / Pat kicked her attacker.
The archeologist chipped at the rock. / The archeologist chipped the rock.
Batman shot at his adversary. / Batman shot his adversary.
Locative Inversion
Sometimes intransitive verbs allow locative inversion. This occurs when
a sentence initial locative adverb is followed directly by the verb, i.e., the sub-
ject and verb are inverted. Locative inversion often has an exclamatory char-
acterHere comes trouble! There goes the most obnoxious employee in the office. It
can also be used to present someone in a social situationHere is my old Eng-
lish teacher Yd like you to meet her. Occasionally it is used to introduce unex-
pected participants or items into the discourse (Givon, 1993b, p. 209). This is
especially true in traditional narratives like fairy tales, which is why the last
two examples in the following set sound a bit archaic. These examples contain
both exclamatory and presentation types of locative inversion.
Here is my wife Judy.

Here comes Jay.
There goes my hope for a promotion!
Behind my boyfriend stood a large grizzly bear.
In the woods lived an evil witch.
In the carriage sat the most handsome man Cinderella had ever seen.
A sentence like Into the room zualked my ex-husband! introduces an unexpected

participant and at the same time expresses surprise.
Locative inversion occurs only with intransitive verbs and copula be. While
Down the street walked Art is fine, *On the table put she the books is completely
ungrammatical. But even intransitive verbs are highly constrained in this re-
gard. Adverbs of direction seem more amenable to locative inversion than ad-
Adjunct Adverbs 193
verbs of place. Around the corner came Nell is far more acceptable than ?On the
table danced Nell. But even adverbs of place can trigger locative inversion when
the verb is stativeIn the corner sat a wizened old man.
As you may recall from Chapter 1, locative inversion represents marked
(i.e., non-prototypical) word order. Marked word order always has a special
communicative function and that is certainly the case in these examples.
TEMPORAL ADVERBS
English has at least four different types of adverbs related to time. Like
locative adverbs, temporal adverbs take a variety of formssingle words,
prepositional phrases, and complex clauses (which will be discussed in Chap-
ter 5).
Adverbs of Point or Boundary in Time

Adverbs of point or boundary in time indicate when an event occurs or a
state endures and, as a rule, they answer the question when? Such adverbs are
often prepositional phrases but they can also be single lexical items or phrases.
Adverbs of time vary in how they constrain the time frame. Some express a
very specific timeYoumust turn in your research paper at 5:00 P.M. on January
7. Some bound the time frame at one end but not the other; in You must turn
in your research project before noon on January 7, the time frame is bounded at
the far end (noon of January 7) but not at the near end (anytime before that.)
There are also time adverbs that bound the time frame on both sidesYoumust
turn in your research project between January 7 and January 9. Some are simply
vagueTurn in your research project later.
Summary of adverbial constructions expressing a point or boundary in time
Specific time frame David finished his test at 3 P.M.

Mary Ann lived in Indiana in 1985.
I washed the car yesterday.
My supervisor was sick this morning.
Steve went to Paris last week.
She lost her job a year ago last Tuesday.
Ms. Rogers is sitting in your office right now.
Time frame bounded You must finish your exam before noon.
on one side
This offer is good until March 15.
We will talk after dinner.
194 Modification
Summary of adverbial constructions expressing a point

or boundary in time (cont.)
Time frame bounded I should arrive between five and six o'clock.
on two sides
She lived here sometime between 1992
and 1994.
Vague time frame My mother was promoted recently.
1 will do the dishes later.
I plan to visit Mr. Kuno in Japan someday.
I haven't seen Paul lately.
As you can see, some time adverbs are deictic and some are not. Deictic ad-
verbs like tomorrow, yesterday, today, last Tuesday, and a year ago are all interpreted
relative to the time of speaking. On Monday, yesterday is Sunday and tomor-
row is Tuesday; but on Tuesday, yesterday is Monday and tomorrow is Wednes-
day. Cyclical time adverbs like days of the week and months of the year are also
deictic. While Beth is arriving Tuesday may seem to express a straightforward
time frame, there are countless future Tuesdays and the hearer will automati-
cally pick the one following the time of speaking. Adverbs that express recur-
ring events are not deictic, however. If I tell you that "In the Alaskan bush the
mail plane comes on Tuesdays," you don't need to know the time of speaking
to interpret this utterance; presumably the mail plane comes every Tuesday.
Now and then are both deictic, and then is anaphoric as well. The time frame
in a sentence like Jason was working in Scotland then is impossible to interpret
unless that time frame has been established elsewhere in the discourseWe
lived in Northumberland in 1970s; Jason was working in Scotland then. Now always
refers to an event which is occurring or imminentIam doing the dishes now;
I'll fix your computer now. Then typically refers to a future or past time relatively
distant from the time of utteranceThe rainy season will end in a month; I will
fix the roof then, although there certainly are occasions when then refers to the
immediate futureThegame ends in one minute; I'll take out the garbage then.
Adverbs of time can sometimes be modified by limitersThebaby was born
just an hour ago; Beth arrived only last night. Adverbs expressing vague time
frames can also be modified by intensifiers and downtonersAlancame a bit
early; They moved into this house very recently; Mary Pat arrived somewhat later.
Since the present perfect typically involves present time in some way, ad-
verbs that specify a particular past time- cannot co-occur with this construction.
A speaker cannot say "Rosie has been to Russia in 1990" or "I have been to the
dentist yesterday." If I say "I have been to the library this morning," it must
still be morning. The present perfect does appear with adverbs that include
present time1have washed four loads of clothes today; Martin has read two chap-
ters so far; Georgia has been here since noon; I've seen Maggie twice this week. It
also co-occurs with adverbs that reflect the recent pastMygreat aunt has been
Adjunct Adverbs 195
sick recently; Silas has just arrived; I haven't seen Renee lately. (Lately often occurs
in negatives and questions.)
Adverbs of Duration
Adverbs of duration specify how long an event or state lasts. They typi-
cally answer the question how long? and usually take the form of prepositional
phrases, noun phrases, or clauses. Remember that unlike the simple past tense,
the perfect typically expresses a time frame with duration. It is not surprising
then that adverbs of duration constitute one of the most important strategies
for constraining the time frames communicated by the perfect, although they
can appear in other constructions as well.
Mary and John have lived in Canada for twenty years.

He has been attending the University of New Mexico since January.
My neighbors had been fighting for hours [when the police arrivedJ.
I worked there a few weeks.
We lived in that cabin from June to September.
Claudia will be here for six days.
He is going to stay here indefinitely.
Evelyn is going to stay awhile.
Adverbs of Frequency
Adverbs of frequency specify the frequency with which an event occurs.
They typically answer the question how often? Nouns referring to time units
can often be transformed into adverbs of frequency by adding an {-ly} suffix
hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, yearly (but not *minutely). Adverbs of frequency
can range from common occurrencesusually, continually to few or zero oc-
currencesseldom,rarely, never.
I had the flu five times last year.

Liz blinked twice.
Lyle travels frequently.
My sister has visited Paris many times.
Martha washes her car annually.
Peter always cleans his plate.
My cousin seldom visits her father.
Do you come here often?
Connie rarely attends these events.
196 Modification
Adverbs of frequency can be modified by both intensifiers and limitersBetsy

very seldom cleans her room; I have been to Poland just twice.
Occasionally the position of an adverb in a sentence will affect its seman-
tic role. The sentence Kirsty once dated Herman indicates that Kirsty dated Her-
man at some unspecified period of time in the past. But in Kirsty dated Herman
once, the adverb indicates frequency. Sometimes a given construction will have
two possible interpretations. In Brett stole a lot, a lot might be a direct object NP,
i.e., Brett stole a lot of stuff, or it might be an adverb of frequency, i.e. Brett
stole often.
More than one temporal adverb can occur in the same predicate. Adverbs
of frequency commonly co-occur with adverbs of point/boundary in time
The baby has fallen twice this morning. They can also co-occur with adverbs of
durationShefrequently coughs for hours.
Time Relationship Adverbs 1
There are some time adverbs that don't fall into any of the above categories.
These adverbs usually communicate a time frame which is relative to some
other time frame and the semantics are sometimes quite complex. (Some gram-
marians call these aspectual adverbs because they communicate information
about the relative time frame.) None of these adverbs comfortably answers the
adverbial questions when? how long? and how often?
Galina first visited Budapest when she was a teenager

Isabel finally turned in her test paper.
I still don't like liver.
I don't drink coffee anymore.
Scott has lost his keys again.
Judy hasn't finished the project yet.
1 have already filed my income tax form.
The adverb first communicates the fact that Galina has visited Budapest
more than once and, in conjunction with a clause which expresses a point in
time, indicates the time frame of the initial visit. Finally doesn't indicate an ac-
tual time frame but suggests that it took Isabel an excessive amount of time to
turn in her paper. Still suggests an unspecified duration and underscores the
fact that circumstances have not changed, while anymore, which co-occurs with
a negative verb, suggests that circumstances have changed. (In some dialects,
anymore can be used in an affirmative sentence to mean "these days"People
just throw their trash out the window anymore.)
Again reflects an activity that has occurred an unspecified number of times
but more than once, while yet, which usually occurs with a negative verb, sug-
gests a time frame that is still open.
Adjunct Adverbs 197
Constraining the Time Frame

In Chapter 3, you saw that tense and even aspect constrain time only in
very general ways. Without modification, both past and future go on indefi-
nitely. Temporal adverbs provide the tools for focusing in on smaller pieces of
this enormous canvas.
Obviously, the nature of the discourse will determine to what degree a time
frame will be manipulated by adverbs. Historical narratives tend to be highly
constrained. The following passage is from Undaunted Courage: Meriwether
Lewis, Thomas Jefferson and the Opening of the American West (Ambrose, 1996).
(Boldface added.)
By June 30, the iron frame was put together and the skins . . . had been pre-
pared. In the morning, the sewing together of the skins over the frame would
begin. Meanwhile, the portage was within two days of completion. Soon the
expedition would be rolling up the river again, (p. 245)
This brief paragraph contains five temporal adverbs, each of which places some
portion of the narrative in a different time frame. ("[W]ithin two days" is a
temporal expression but not technically an adverb.)
Of course time is always an important element in a biography, a history,
or a personal narrative. But even in conversation, speakers are constantly ma-
nipulating temporal adverbs. Consider this exchange from Patricia Cornwall's
novel From Potter's Field (1995). (Boldface added.)
"Mr. Gault," I said. "Do you have any idea where your daughter is now?"
"Well, she eventually went out on her own four or five years ago when Luther
passed on. We usually hear from her at Birthdays, Christmas, whenever the
mood strikes."
"Did you hear from her this Christmas?" I asked.
"Not directly on Christmas day, but a week or two before." (p. 307)
ADVERBS OF MANNER
Adverbs of manner indicate the manner or style in which the subject of the
sentence acts or is acted upon. Adverbs of manner are often formed by simply
adding the {-ly} suffix to an adjective formboldly, loudly, obnoxiously, coldly,
gracefully, recklessly, quickly, carelessly, etc. Adverbs that are derived in this way
are typically gradableThey danced very gracefully, She drove really recklessly.
There are also a few uninflected one-word adverbs of manner that are grad-
ableSheruns really fast. A prepositional phrase headed by the preposition like
or with can be used to construct an adverb of mannerHedrives like a maniac;
She writes with great flair. (As you will see in Chapter 5, clauses can also func-
tion in this way.) Adverbs of manner answer the question how? but it is im-
198 Modification
portant to distinguish them from adverbs of means, which also answer this
question.
The little boy sobbed noisily.

They surreptitiously entered the vault.
She skis like a professional
He replied angrily.
They danced with grace.
He scrubbed the kitchen thoroughly.
The Girl Scouts walked single file.
Lourdes cooks beans Cub an-style.
Our friends are acting like idiots.
The clothes snapped briskly in the breeze.
The limb hit the window with great force.
The baby's aunt accidentally frightened him.
The backhoe can dig a basement efficiently>
As you can see, adverbs of manner most often occur with agent subjects
but they can also occur with patient, causer, and even instrument subjects. Sen-
tences containing experiencer subjects seldom occur with adverbs of manner,
in large part because such sentences reflect private, internal states, and it's hard
to attribute manner to a state. Sentences like She thought longingly about her chil-
dren are certainly possible, however.
In Chapter 3 you examined the structure of pseudo-passives, constructions
that are active in form and passive in meaning. Almost all pseudo-passives con-
tain adverbs of manner and they often depend on these adverbs for grammat-
icality.
Cotton washes well

These shirts iron easily.
Tangerines peel nicely.
This software loads quickly.
If the adverbs are removed, these sentence lose their acceptability for most
speakers?Cotton washes; ??These shirts iron; ??Tangerines peel; ??This software
loads. If a contrasting context is provided, grammaticality can often be re-
storedCottonwashes but wool doesn't; This software loads but that other disk is de-
fective.
Adjunct Adverbs 199
ADVERBS OF MEANS
Adverbs of means indicate by what means or method an action is carried
out. When an agent, causer, or instrument appears in a position other than sub-
ject, it is usually an adverb of means. The by prepositional phrase of a passive
is always an adverb of means, since the agent/ causer /instrument of the active
always becomes the object of by in the corresponding passive. However, as you
will see in the following examples, not all agent/causer/instrument by prepo-
sitional phrases occur in the passive. With prepositional phrases are often (but
not always) instruments. Adverbs derived from adjectives with the suffix {-ly}
can also function as adverbs of means.
The armadillo was hit by a bus.

Ben was fired by his boss.
The dog was frightened by the thunder.
This garment was made by hand.
Paulette always travels by train.
The mobster obtained the money by illegal means.
He flew Air France.
The mole was removed surgically.
Analyze this sentence grammatically.
She repaired the computer with a hammer.
He swayed them with his great charm.
These photos were taken with a telephoto lens.
A passive sentence can contain two adverbs of means, an instrument and

an agentThemole was removed with a laser by my family doctor; The computer
was repaired with a hammer by my assistant. In such cases the by prepositional
phrase will always contain the agent.
Note that an adverb of means need not literally be an agent or an instru-
ment; it can also be a process, a method, or even a mode of behaviorsurgi-
cally, grammatically, by illegal means, with his great charm.
Adverbs of manner and adverbs of means do not co-occur with copulas.
*She is assertive quietly is ungrammatical. (As you will see later, however, some-
times {-ly} forms can modify adjectivesShe is quietly assertive.) Stative verbs
rarely occur with adverbs of manner and means. You will occasionally hear a
sentence like They own that property illegally, but such constructions are rare.
In the sentence Dave wants this car badly, badly is acting as an intensifier rather
than an adverb of manner.
Sometimes adverbs of manner shade into adverbs of means. In fact some
grammarians include both types in a single category called process adverbs
200 Modification
(Quirk et al., 1972, pp. 459-61). Some grammarians would argue that She got the
goods illegally contains an adverb of manner, while She got the goods by illegal means
contains an adverb of means; yet, the two utterances are very close in meaning.
ADVERBS OF REASON/PURPOSE
Adverbs of reason/purpose indicate why or to what purpose something
occurs. They usually answer the question why? These two semantic categories
are often grouped together because there is a great deal of semantic overlap.
He did it for love. [reason]

I searched the room for evidence. [reason, purpose]
We ran for cover. [purpose]
Pete carefully prepared for the race. [purpose]
She stayed married for the sake of the children. [reason, purpose]
The program failed because of a software error. [reason]
The circuit breaker tripped due to a short in [reason]
a wire.
Reason/purpose constructions can often be paraphrased with a clause con-

taining in order to; He did it in order to obtain love; We searched the room in or-
der to obtain evidence.
Note that in She stayed married for the sake of the children, the prepositional
phrase for the sake of the children closely resembles a benefactive. However, the
noun head in a benefactive is always animate, while the noun head sake is inan-
imate. In She did it for the children, for the children is indeed a benefactive phrase.
This illustrates the problems inherent in syntactic labeling. One could certainly
argue that for the children is an adverb of purpose, the purpose being to bene-
fit the children. Traditionally, however, benefactives have been treated as nom-
inal constructions rather than adverbial.
Adverbs of purpose/reason are most often clauses, so I will discuss these
constructions more thoroughly in Chapter 5.
ADVERBS OF RESULT
Occasionally a prepositional phrase will indicate a result.
The jailers starved their prisoner to death.

Their taunting drove the child to tears.
The little girl cried herself to sleep, [i.e., into sleep]
Adverbs of result have a lot in common with other constructions that ex-
press results, including object complementsTheirtaunting drove the child crazy.
Adjunct Adverbs 201
There are some constructions in which a prepositional phrase is locative

but at the same time expresses a strong resultTheaudience booed the actors off
the stage; She laughed him out of the room; Grandma scared the children aiuay from
the garden. In each of these examples the prepositional phrase indicates where
the direct object went as a result of the activities of the subject, e.g., The audi-
ence booed and as a result the actors went off the stage.
ADVERBIAL PROFORMS
Since the term pronoun contains the root noun, it isn't appropriate to use
this label to refer to words that substitute for other parts of speech. Linguists
have coined the all-purpose term proform for a small word that substitutes
for another word or construction. (A pronoun is simply one type of proform.)
Just as pronouns are noun substitutes, adverbial proforms are adverb substi-
tutes. Adverbial proforms are ubiquitous in zuh questions and, as you will see
in Chapter 5, they also occur in dependent clauses of a particular type. Ad-
verb proforms can participate in any kind of adjunct construction except lim-
iters. In the following examples the function of the proform is indicated in
brackets.
Where did he hide? [adverb of place]

When are you coming? [adverb of time]
How often has he fallen? [adverb of frequency]
How long can you stay? [adverb of duration]
Why has she quit her job? [adverb of reason]
How does Fanny dance? [adverb of manner]
How can this situation be remedied? [adverb of means]
How well does she speak Russian? [degree modifier within
adverb of manner]
How much does he love her? [degree modifier within
intensifier]
As you can see, the proform how often acts as a degree modifier within a larger
adverbial construction. Like the other interrogative words, modifier how moves
to sentence initial position in a question but it brings with it the form that it
modifies. How can also be used to modify any quantifier that expresses a non-
specific quantity.
How many books has Inga sold?

How little does he know?
How much snow is there?
202 Modification
SOME OTHER ADJUNCT CATEGORIES

There are a great many other constructions in English that appear adver-
bial in nature. It is difficult to catalog all. of the possible semantic categories, so
IT1 list just a few of them below.
Adverbs of accompaniment usually occur with the preposition withI
walked with my mother; Signe played with her friends; Lu partied with her roommates.
We can also include in this category constructions like They ate chicken with
lemon sauce and I like strudel with vanilla ice cream. On the other hand, in They
ate chicken with their fingers, the with prepositional phrase is clearly an adverb
of means. Our interpretation of these sentences depends a lot on what we know
about the world; we recognize fingers and forks as perfectly reasonable in-
struments for eating chicken, but it's impossible to construe lemon sauce as an
tool in this context. But lemon sauce is an adverb of means in He won her heart
with his wonderful lemon sauce.
There is a small set of verbs that take adverbs of remuneration (payment).
They usually appear as for prepositional phrasesThe realtor will sell you this
house for $150,000; I bought this for very little; My dad works for peanuts.
Adverbs of source indicate the source or place of origin of someone or
somethingHamishis from New Zealand; Jamie borrowed this book from his mother;
Helen stole the stereo from her neighbor; Susan bought that car from Bob; He got the
money from his partner. There is a great deal of semantic overlap between ad-
verbs of direction and adverbs of source. Usually adverbs of direction co-oc-
cur with dynamic verbs and adverbs of source with stative verbsSolangecame
from France yesterday versus Solange comes from France.
Concessive adverbs indicate that one circumstance is surprising in light of
another. While such adverbs are usually clauses, which will be discussed in
Chapter 5, occasionally concessive adverbs appear as prepositional phrases
Joe was a graceful dancer in spite of his size, Farah became an accomplished pianist
despite her arthritis.
PROBLEMS IN CATEGORIZING ADJUNCTS

There is some amount of overlap in the semantic categories discussed in
the adjunct section, and there are a number of other adverbial constructions
for which conventional semantic labels don't exist. How, for example, should
we treat Mary Ann hid the presents from Trevor and The doctors isolated the in-
fected child from the family? Is this an adverb of direction or do we need a sep-
arate "concealment" category? Should we create a special "material/ingredi-
ent" category for constructions like This cake was made with thirty egg whites
and These tiles are made from cement?
There is a large set of verbs all of which communicate some kind of social
interaction and all of which can be followed by a with prepositional phrase.
Tristan flirted with Isolde.

Grade joked with George.
Adjunct Adverbs 203
Alice corresponded with Gertrude.

Charlotte argued with the merchant.
The coach consulted with the umpire.
The fact that all of these sentences are about communication of some sort and
that the participants are not necessarily in proximity suggests that more than
"accompaniment" is at stake. Yet another semantic category may be in order.
Creating semantic categories for all the possible adjuncts in English is a
daunting task. It's not surprising that linguists disagree about what criteria
should be used to create these categories and where the semantic boundaries
should be drawn.
MOVABILITY OF ADJUNCTS
While adjuncts rather naturally follow the verb, they can occur in other po-
sitions in English sentences. As a class, adjuncts can occupy three positions
sentence initial, before the lexical verb, and somewhere after the lexical verb.
Temporal adverbs are particularly flexible. Many of them can occur at the be-
ginning of a sentence as well as at the end.
Next week, my girlfriend will be here. / My girlfriend will be here next

week.
Tomorrow well go to the park. / We'll go to the park tomorrow.
For three years, Marsha lived alone in the woods. / Marsha lived alone in
the woods for three years.
On rare occasions, Toby washes his truck. / Toby washes his truck on
rare occasions.
Some one-word temporal adverbs can occur before the lexical verbThe
train is now arriving; Alicia often arrives late; Bill occasionally washes the dishes;
Henrietta seldom drinks. Never, seldom and rarely can occur in sentence initial
position only if the subject and auxiliary are invertedNever have 1 eaten so
much fudge; Seldom have J been so well treated; Rarely have we been invited to their
home. As you have already seen, subject/auxiliary inversion is often exclama-
tory and that is certainly the case here. Never does not appear in sentence final
position.
Locative adverbs are less flexible than temporal adverbs and adverbs of di-
rection are less flexible than adverbs of place. In the yard, the kids were playing
badminton is far more acceptable than ??Into the yard he drove his car. In general,
however, locative adverbs are most likely to occur in the predicate.
While adverbs of manner and adverbs of means usually occur after the VP,
a single-word adverb can sometimes be found before the lexical verb, even in
204 Modification
a passiveShesecretly dug the hole; The mole was surgically removed; They have
surreptitiously transferred those funds.
One-word adverbs of manner are quite flexible in terms of word order.
Those ending in the {-ly} suffix can usually occupy all three of the positions
discussed above.
Quietly she entered the library. Gracefully they danced across

the floor.
She quietly entered the library. They gracefully danced across
the floor.
She entered the library quietly. They danced across the floor
gracefully.
On the other hand, prepositional phrase manner adverbs almost always fol-
low the lexical verbSheplays tennis like a professional; He lectures with great
enthusiasm. *Like a professional she plays tennis is ungrammatical for most
speakers.
ADJUNCTS AND THE SCOPE OF NEGATION

Scope of negation affects the movability of some adjuncts. As you have
already seen, the negative particle usually negates everything that follows
it. Moving an adverb to sentence initial position removes it from the scope
of negation. In The hikers didn't go into the cave, the entire proposition go into
the cave is negated. While 1 can move the prepositional phrase in an affir-
mative utterance without impairing grammaticality (Into the cave the hikers
went), moving it in a negative utterance produces a marginally acceptable
sentence (??Into the cave the hikers didn't go). A problem arises in this case be-
cause the verb is within the scope of negation but the locative prepositional
phrase is not.
Adverbs of manner are especially strange in this regard. When an adverb
of manner follows the negative particle, it is usually just the adverb that is
negated. In She didn't enter the library quietly, quietly is the only lexical item
within the scope of negation, i.e., she entered the library, but not quietly.) In
Larry isn't working very hard, the verb working is not negated; Larry is working
but not very hard. In Susie didn't hit hex brother on purpose, the assumption is
that Susie did indeed hit her brother, but not on purpose. When we hear Ed
doesn't dress as well as Karl, we assume that Ed does dress, but not as well as
Karl. If I say that "My sister didn't perform well last night," only well is within
the scope of negation; my sister did perform and she performed last night, but
not well. We see the same phenomenon with a few temporal adverbs. If you
heard someone say "Soohee didn't get up until noon," you would assume that
Soohee did get up, but not before noon.
Adjunct Adverbs 205
Certain adverbs of frequency are intrinsically negative and do not co-

occur with the negative particle. Billy seldom cleans his room is perfectly ac-
ceptable, but *Billy doesn't seldom clean his room is ungrammatical, as is *Billy
doesn't rarely clean his room. Many speakers would also reject Susan doesn't hardly
eat, although this usage is common in some dialects.
English speakers often use stress to clarify cases in which the scope of nega-
tion may be misunderstood. In Santiago didn't borrow your car yesterday, yester-
day is stressed to indicate that it is the focus of the negation; Santiago did in-
deed borrow your car, but not yesterday. Constructions other than adverbs can
be stressed in the same way I might say "I didn't loan your car to Santiago."
Here only Santiago is within the scope of negation; I did loan your car to some-
one, but not Santiago.
THE STACKING AND COORDINATION OF ADJUNCTS

As a rule, only adjuncts from the same semantic category can be coordi-
nated with andMary Anne walked over the bridge and through the woods; He
danced gracefully and with great feeling. Attempts to coordinate different seman-
tic adverbial categories usually yield unacceptable utterances*Mary Anne
walked to the park and at noon; *He danced gracefully and across the floor. However,
any number of adjuncts from different categories can be stacked up without
coordinationMaryAnne walked to the park at noon; He danced gracefully across
the floor. *1 hit the latch carefully and with a hammer is very odd, but the deletion
of and makes it perfectly acceptable.
A surprising number of adjuncts can be used in a single sentence.
Last night they argued loudly for an hour in the dining room.
[time] [manner] [duration] [place]
When adjuncts of different types are stacked up in the predicate, there is a

loosely conventional order. Adverbs of duration and adverbs of frequency usu-
ally precede adverbs of timeIwalked for two hours today; I woke up five times
last night. In these cases the more inclusive time frame goes last. Locative ad-
verbs usually precede adverbs of timeWe played volleyball in the park yester-
day. Adverbs of manner typically precede adverbs of timeYou behaved like a
baby last night; The kids whispered loudly during the movie; Josie has been behaving
badly this week.
But these conventions are easily violated if a speaker wishes to focus on a
particular adjunctIworked last night for four hours. Moving the adverb of du-
ration to the end of the sentence focuses the hearer on the issue of duration. In
fact, moving any adverb to the end of the sentence typically puts the focus on
that adverb. In Patricia put the jar on the shelf carefully the adverb of manner is
underscored, while it does not receive focus in Patricia carefully put the jar on
the shelf
206 Modification
Summary of adjuncts
Intensifier Nikki really loves baseball.

Downtoner I rather dislike monster movies.
Focuser I merely touched the painting.
Place Jenny lives in an apartment.
Direction Andrew drove across the lawn.
Time (point/boundary) Charles will arrive at noon.
Duration They stayed for hours.
Frequency Mary Jane sneezed twelve times.
Time relationship Dena doesn't like you anymore.
Manner He drives with great skill.
Means Agnes cut the grass with a scythe.
Reason/purpose She did it for revenge.
Result Chuck polished it to a bright shine.
Adjective Phrases Revisited
Although adverbs and adjectives have different grammatical functions, they

have many things in common. Both express modifying relationships; some ad-
verbs are derived from adjectives; both categories contain intensifiers and
downtoners; adverbs and adjectives can themselves be modified by the same
set of intensifiers and downtoners; prepositional phrases can function in an ad-
jectival or adverbial capacity. Clearly, these two systems overlap in a number
of ways.
ADJUNCT FORMS THAT MODIFY ADJECTIVES

When present and past participles function as adjectives, they don't really
lose their verbal qualities and they can sometimes be modified by adverbs of
manner and temporal adverbs. Consider the following sentences.
The sweetly smiling child kicked me.

The recently discovered galaxy was full of stars.
I am appalled by their rapidly deteriorating marriage.
Adjective Phrases Revisited 207
The newly married couple left for Trinidad.

My often abused transmission finally blew up.
This is a rarely seen species.
The interviezoer rejected the carelessly dressed candidate.
Place the pasta in lightly salted water.
Newly is interesting because it never occurs as an adjunct in the predicate

*The couple was married newly, even though it carries the adverbial {-ly} ending
and expresses the meaning "very recently." Some participial prenominal ad-
jectives can appear only when accompanied by modifiers. *This is a seen species
and *The discovered galaxy was full of stars are both ungrammatical. You have al-
ready seen that a *read manuscript is ungrammatical but a seldom read manuscript
is fine.
Occasionally, even prototypical adjectives can occur with adjunct modi-
fiers.
Ms. Ramsay was sitting in her always tidy living room.

Davy was one of those quietly obnoxious people.
Jane's often nervous laughter is distracting.
ADJECTIVES THAT FUNCTION AS ADJUNCTS

Up until now we've used the term adjunct exclusively in terms of adver-
bial constructions. However, adjectives can function in very much the same
way. You already know that copulas require some sort of a complement, usu-
ally a predicate nominative or a predicate adjective. Sometimes intransitive
verbs are followed by adjectives that modify the subject in much the same way
that predicate adjectives do.
(a) (b)
Charley sleeps nude. The river froze solid.
Mary arrived drunk. The box broke open.
They emerged from the building alive. A door slammed shut.
Cassie walked into the room mad.
Constructions like these pose a number of problems. Clearly the adjectives in

these sentences are not required for grammaticality; they are not complements
in the technical sense. Furthermore, all of these verbs are typical intransitive
verbs; none are copulas. Yet, each of the adjectives in column (a) modifies the
subject by indicating what state it is in and each of the adjectives in column (b)
modifies the subject by specifying a resultant state. The term adjunct adjective
208 Modification
is sometimes used to describe such forms because the adjective is an optional

construction. In addition, some of these adjectives do seem to have an adver-
bial quality. For example, Mary arrived drunk might be paraphrased as Mary ar-
rived while she was drunk and Cassie walked into the room mad might be para-
phrased as Cassie walked into the room while she was mad; in each case the
boldface clause in the paraphrase is an adverb of time (Culicover, 1988, p. 53).
In Chapter 1,1 discussed object complements that co-occur with verbs that
are typically monotransitive.
Pandora broke the box open.

Cyril tied the rope tighter.
The cook wiped the counter clean.
The agents shot the kidnapper dead.
In each of these sentences the adjective reflects a state that results from the
action of the verb. Some grammarians call these adjectives adjuncts rather than
object complements because they are not required for grammaticality.
There is another construction that seems structurally related to the last set
of examples but it has some odd characteristics. Take a look at the following
sentences.
Justin cried himself sick.

Minnie drank herself unconscious.
Trudy talked herself hoarse.
These, too, look like object complement constructions, except that none of these
verbs are complex transitive and cry and talk are actually intransitive. In each
case the verb is followed by a reflexive pronoun and, while that pronoun looks
like a direct object, it's not doing the things reflexive objects normally do: an
individual can't cry himself talk herself or drink herself. These reflexives have
been appropriately called "fake objects" (Goldberg, 1995, p. 192). In each of
these sentences the adjective is actually describing the state that the subject
achieves as a result of the verb. I will label these adjectives adjuncts because
all of the them can be paraphrased as temporal adverbial clausesJustincried
until he became sick; Minnie drank until she became unconscious; Trudy talked
until she was hoarse.
Disjuncts
Disjuncts are a separate category from adjuncts. Disjuncts are so labeled be-
cause they don't modify structures within the sentence and they generally stand
apart at the beginning of the sentence. In other words, disjuncts are to some
Disjuncts 209
extent "disjoined" from the rest of the utterance. Some linguists call disjuncts
sentence modifiers but this label overstates the modification relationship. As
you will soon see, style disjuncts don't modify the sentence at all. (Don't con-
fuse this use of the term disjunct with disjunction in formal logic and seman-
tics.)
ATTITUDE DISJUNCTS
English speakers can use an adverb to express an attitude toward the propo-
sition contained in the sentence. In an utterance like Foolishly, Joan quit school,
the proposition is Joan quit school while foolishly is an "editorial" comment
made by the speaker, i.e., the speaker thinks that Joan's action was foolish. Typ-
ically, attitude adverbs occur first in the utterance and are followed by a pause
(represented by a comma in written text); occasionally they occur last in the
utterance and are preceded by a pause.
Unfortunately, you have not finished your homework.

Luckily, they were saved by a hiker.
Incredibly, he passed the bar examination.
The storm did little damage, surprisingly.
Strangely enough, she never discovered the truth.
Amazingly, Maria married Arnold.
Curiously, she never asked him about the money.
Sometimes attitude disjuncts follow the subjectShefoolishly forged her

mother's signature; He stupidly loaned his boss some money. In these cases the dis-
junct is not marked by pauses.
Attitude disjuncts can be post-modified, usually by enough Oddly enough,
she didn't mind; Strangely enough, Janice stayed. Occasionally they can be
negatedNotsurprisingly, she caught cold.
Editors, style manuals, and composition teachers proscribe most attitude
disjuncts. The Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association (1994,
p. 41) argues that "Hopefully, this is not the case" is incorrect and should be
replaced by "I hope that this is not the case." But in casual speech, attitude dis-
juncts, including hopefully, are extremely common.
STYLE DISJUNCTS
When a speaker exploits a style adverb, s/he is indicating in what mode
the sentence is being uttered, i.e., the speaker is being frank, truthful, honest,
etc. In the film version of Gone With the Wind, when Rhett Butler says to Scar-
lett O'Hara, "Frankly, my dear, I don't give a damn," he indicates his discourse
style, i.e., he is being frank. One might paraphrase a style adverb as "I am
210 Modification
speaking to you ly," although not all style adverbs end in {-ly}. Style dis-
juncts don't modify the content of the sentence in any way
Confidentially, I can't stand my boss.

Truthfully, 1 don't think she did it.
I honestly can't help you.
In strictest confidence, my daughter-in-law has been fired.
Seriously, don't tell anyone.
Sometimes the same form can function as both an adverb of manner and a dis-
junct. Consider the contrasting meanings in the following sentence pairs.
I didn't speak to him, honestly. /1 didn't speak to him honestly.

Frankly, she rarely talks to the kids. / She rarely talks to the kids frankly.
Truthfully, Ned never spoke. / Ned never spoke truthfully.
In each case the adverb of manner modifies the verb that precedes it, while the
disjunct has no impact whatsoever on the grammar of the sentence.
POINT OF VIEW DISJUNCTS

Sometimes speakers will indicate that they are speaking from a particular
point of view or perspective. In a sentence like Politically, the speech was a dis-
aster, the adverb politically indicates that, from the point of view of politics, the
speech was a disaster. Viewpoint adverbs provide the context (social, geo-
physical, philosophical, etc.) in which the utterance is to be understood.
Ethnically, New York is a very diverse city.

Geographically, the Falklands are somewhat isolated.
The government is corrupt morally.
In terms of student aid, this school is outstanding.
EPISTEMIC DISJUNCTS
Epistemic adverbs function very much like epistemic auxiliaries. They con-
vey the speaker's assessment of the possibility or probability that a proposi-
tion is true. Like the various types of speaker comment adverbs discussed
above, they are usually, but not always, sentence initial.
Maybe Alicia will arrive on time.

Perhaps it won't rain tomorrow.
juncts 211
Surely, she won't reveal your secret.

Professor Lee will undoubtedly be angry.
Supposedly, my sister has a great new job.
Summary of disjuncts
Attitude Stupidly, she left the letter in the rain.

Style Frankly, I can't stand the man.
Point of view Politically, the event was a great success.
Epistemic Perhaps tomorrow will be sunny.
Conjuncts
Conjuncts are adverbs that help us organize discourse. Like conjunctions, con-
juncts join elements of an utterance together. As you will see in Chapter 5, con-
junctions typically conjoin sentences and elements within sentences. Conjuncts,
on the other hand, conjoin larger units of discourse. You will see below that
conjuncts are typically used only in the context of two or more sentences.
SEQUENCING CONJUNCTS
In discourse, events normally proceed forward in time (Schiffrin, 1987, p.
250) and we often use conjuncts to organize events serially. Conjuncts are es-
pecially evident in relatively formal discourse. They are used to organize steps
in a process, events in a sequence of events, and points in an argument.
First we place the acid in the test tube. Next we heat it over a lowflame. Finally we
pour the acid into the beaker.
In the first place, the treaty has inadequate inspection provisions. Second, we do not
have the resources to monitor compliance. And third, this government cannot be
trusted.
In the following passage from The Blind Watchmaker, Richard Dawkins

(1996) uses repeated instances of then to express temporal organization. (Bold-
face added.)
The computer starts by drawing a vertical line. Then the line branches into
two. Then each of the branches splits into two sub-branches. Then each of the
sub-branches splits into sub-sub-branches and so on. (p. 51)
212 Modification
Of course we also organize informal discourse in temporal terms, although

casual speech is less tightly structured than highly formal discourse. The fol-
lowing is a segment of an actual conversation (Schiffrin, 1987). (Except for the
first instance, boldface is in the original.)
So first, I played with the b- the twins, who're two and half. And uh. I went
on the beach with them. Then when they went ho- off eh for their, nap, I:- then
I gave the younger son uh . . . attention. So it was quite hectic on Saturday . . .
and then we babysat Saturday night, (p. 251)
Sometimes a sequencing conjunct reflects a parallel time frame.
Out on the range the wranglers were trying to round up all the stray cows. It was
cold and windy. Meanwhile, back at the ranch, Roy and Dale were repairing fences.
ADDING AND REINFORCING CONJUNCTS

Adding and reinforcing conjuncts add material to the discourse and of-
ten reinforce what has been said before.
You really insulted me yesterday. Furthermore, you insulted my boyfriend

by calling him a fraud.
This morning I had a radiator leak and a flat tire. On top of it all, some-
one sideswiped me on the expressway.
Jolene stole the records from the file cabinet. What is more, she deleted my
computer files.
The following passage from Elmore Leonard's novel Out of Sight (1996) ex-
ploits a commonly used, informal reinforcing conjunct. (Boldface added.)
"Like I said, I walked away from prison myself one time . . ." (p. 71)
RESULTING CONJUNCTS
As the label implies, resulting conjuncts communicate the results of events
in the preceding discourse.
Marcel didn't study for his finals. Consequently, he failed out of school.
Beryl wasn't wearing her seat belt. As a result, she was thrown from the
car.
Tom always treats me badly; therefore, I'm not inviting him to my party.
In speech, so is frequently used in this context, sometimes across two or

more speakers, as in the following passage from Tony Hillerman's novel Sa-
cred Clowns (1993). (Boldface added.)
juncts 213
"I don't like that Blizzard theory at all" Janet said. .. . " Collectors know about
these things. . . . They'd know that Tano Pueblo still had its Lincoln Cane. And
so they'd know that the one they'd bought was a fake. . . ."
"So they couldn't brag about it. Or show it off/' Blizzard said. (p. 305)
Sometimes so is used to communicate a resulting conclusion on the part of

the speaker. The following passage is from Leonard's Ought of Sight. (Boldface
added.)
"He said the reason he came to Florida was to see you. So I guess you spent
some time together." (p. 143)
Then often appears in contexts in which one speaker reaches a conclusion

based on something another speaker has said. The following dialogue between
a father and his adult daughter also appears in Leonard's novel. (Boldface
added.)
"He's still married though, huh?"
"Technically. They're separated."
"Oh, he's moved out?"
"He's about to."
"Then they're not separated, are they?" (p. 18)
Because is sometimes used to mark previously mentioned results. The fol-

lowing passage is from Richard Dawkin's The Blind Watchmaker. (Boldface
added.)
This is what cumulative evolution is all about, although, because of our high
mutation rate, we have speeded it up here to unrealistic rates. Because of this,
Figure 4 looks more like a pedigree of species than a pedigree of individuals,
(p. 59)
TRANSITIONAL CONJUNCTS
Transitional conjuncts are used when a speaker wants to change the sub-
ject. They are rarely used in edited English since there are more formal ways
of signaling topic changes in written discourse, i.e., paragraphing, subtitles,
chapter divisions, etc. Conjuncts like the ones below usually occur in the mid-
dle of a conversation and can signal fairly dramatic topic changes.
By the way, have you seen Sylvia's new baby?

Incidentally, I won't be able to come to the wedding.
Oh, did you remember to take out the garbage?
214 Modification
A speaker who wants to move to a different but related topic might choose
as forMr. Borden is a nice guy. As for his daughter Lizzie, she's a bit strange.
CONCESSIVE CONJUNCTS
As we saw above, the term concessive describes a relationship between two
circumstance in which one circumstance is surprising in light of the other. Eng-
lish has a small inventory of concessive conjuncts.
I didn't study very hard. Nevertheless, I got an A on the exam.

Marilyn is always sweet to Herman. In spite of that, he doesn't like her.
I'm wearing a down coat; even so I can't get warm.
But can be used concessively, even in contexts where one speaker is re-
sponding to the comments of another. In the following passage two characters
in Leonard's Out of Sight discuss a failed prison break. (Boldface added.)
"The only thing to stop anybody from leaving is a sign that says Off Limits.
Man, once I was pumped uplisten,they would've had to . . . chain me to a
wall to keep me there."
"But you didn't make it," Foley said. (pp. 60-61)
SOME OTHER CONJUNCTS

The previous list of conjuncts is by no means exhaustive. English contains
summation conjuncts (in conclusion, thus, to summarize, etc.), equating con-
juncts (likewise, correspondingly, similarly), restating conjuncts (in other words,
rather), and a number of other types.
Since conjuncts often appear in subordinate clauses, I will revisit this issue
again in Chapter 5.
CONJUNCTS IN DISCOURSE
Some of the conjuncts discussed previously are used regularly in conver-
sation. This is especially true of the "little" wordsso,then, and but and tran-
sitional conjuncts like by the way. But conversation tends to be a somewhat dis-
organized affair with multiple participants, abrupt shifts in topic, and
interruptions. Speakers don't expect their conversations to be altogether or-
derly and don't necessarily worry about providing smooth transitions. But the
rules of formal, edited English require that a text be tightly organized and in
discourse of this sort, conjuncts are used frequently and systematically. In a
two-page sub-section of a popular linguistics book, the authors exploit five very
different conjuncts. (This passage is highly edited; boldface added.)
Summing Up 215
So far we have given a provisional account of grounding. . . . We have argued,

moreover, that most of our conceptual system is metaphorically structured.
. . . Thus, we do not need an independent definition for the concept BUTTRESS.
. . . Against this, the abstraction view claims that there is a single . . . concept
BUTTRESS. . . . It denies, however, that either concept is understood in terms
of the other. (Lakoff and Johnson, 1980, pp. 106-7)
Summary of conjuncts
Sequencing Next I stirred the egg whites briskly.

Adding and reinforcing Furthermore, you lied to me.
Resulting Consequently, she didn't impress me.
Transitional By the way, I like your new car.
Concessive In spite of her opposition, I got the job.
Summing Up
Adjective and adjective phrase constructions are relatively straightforward in

English. The adverbial system, however, is complex and heterogeneous. No
other part of speech takes so many different forms and has so many different
semantic functions. Grammarians have had difficulty creating coherent and ex-
haustive categories for adverbs and, while the adverbs discussed above repre-
sent some of the most important semantic categories, the list is by no means
complete. You will also find that grammarians disagree on the syntactic cate-
gory as well. Some include intensifiers and downtoners and others include the
negative particle not. These differences will not concern us.
5
Clauses: Coordination and Subordination
Thus far we have examined relatively simple grammatical structures. Our NPs
have contained determiners, adjectives, and noun heads, at most. Our most
complicated adverbial constructions have been prepositional phrases. But Eng-
lish speakers readily create far more complex sentences:
Nancy didn't like what Sid said to her while they were dancing and she told
him so.
Did you know that the man living downstairs thinks that the world is flat,
despite the fact that he is a science teacher?
Linguists are fond of saying that any human language contains an infinite num-
ber of possible sentences. The reason for this extraordinary potential is the re-
cursive quality of language; the same basic structures can be repeated over and
over again in a given sentence.
Clauses
Recursive processes depend a great deal on clauses. A clause is any structure

that contains its own verb. A clause that can stand on its own is called an in-
dependent clause, thus any sentence is technically an independent clause. A
coordinated sentence like Popeye sang the blues and Bluto danced a jig contains
two independent clauses. A subordinate or dependent clause is one that can-
not stand alone as a grammatical entity. In a sentence like 1 wanted the Marlins
to win, the Marlins to win is a subordinate clause. When a structure contains a
subordinate clause, the containing structure is often called a matrix clause. If
the matrix clause also contains the "main verb" of the sentence, it is the main
clause. (Sometimes one subordinate clause is contained within another subor-
dinate clause; in this case the containing matrix clause is not the main clause
of the sentence.)
217
218 Clauses: Coordination and Subordination
I wanted the Marlins to win

main verb subordinate clause
This terminology will seem more natural when we actually begin to examine
clause structure.
Subordinate clauses will usually contain a subordinator (sometimes called
a complementizer), one or more small function words or special suffixes that
signal that the following verb is not to be construed as the main verb of the
sentence. As you will see below, the most common subordinators are that, for,
{-ing}, infinitives, and proforms beginning with wh. Clauses can perform a great
many grammatical functionssubject, direct object, indirect object, subject
complement, object complement, adjective phrase, adverb, and some others
that I have not yet discussed. Once you have mastered the structures discussed
in the previous chapters, clauses are relatively simple. In general, they reca-
pitulate the structures of the simple sentence.
Conjoining
Recursion occurs in two different contexts. We can always add one structure
to another by conjoining two or more elements with a conjunction. Most gram-
marians recognize three conjunctions in Englishand,or, and but, although it
is not altogether clear that these three forms really constitute a coherent gram-
matical category.
CONJUNCTION AND
Conjunction and can be used to conjoin a variety of structures, from single
lexical items to sentences, i.e., independent clauses. Normally conjunction and
only joins the same structural types. When three or more items are conjoined
in edited English, and is used only between the last two. (This constraint does
not apply in spoken English.)
Conjoined NPs Jack and fill went up the hill

(regardless of Jack, Jill, Goldilocks, and the three
function) bears went up the hill.
I like broccoli and liver.
Marina has been to Spain, Morocco,
and Finland.
I gave the deans and the vice-presidents
a big raise.
Conjoining 219
Conjoined verbs Caroline was and is the most competent

member of the family.
They ate and drank everything in sight.
Conjoined modals I can and will help you.
Conjoined predicates Jamie got up and ate breakfast.
Casey hit the ball, ran toward first base,
and was tagged out.
Conjoined adverbs They walked far and fast.
Ginger dances smoothly and gracefully.
Conjoined intensifiers My boss got more and more upset.
Conjoined prepositions The kids ran in and out of the door.
The couple strolled up and over the hill.
Conjoined adverbial Nora walked down the stairs and
prepositional phrases out the door.
Grandma lives up the street and
around the corner.
Conjoined adjectives He was short and blond.
and adjective phrases
She was very angry and very loud.
Conjoined sentences Crystal washed the car and Art mowed
the lawn.
Elvira exercised, Mike slept, and
the kids read comic books.
Most, but not all, grammatical categories can be conjoined with and.
Prenominal adjectives are typically stacked rather than coordinatedabeauti-
ful old photograph, although some can be coordinated quite comfortablyanold
and valuable locket; a mean and nasty person. Since predicate adjectives cannot be
stacked, they must be coordinatedThe child was tall and strong. Articles can-
not be conjoined under any circumstances and conjoined demonstratives are
usually unacceptable111want this and that book. Conjoined genitive deter-
miners are also problematic??This is his and her house; ??This is her and my
project. One reason conjoined demonstratives and genitives are marginal is that
we have separate lexical items for these functions, e.g., those, their, our. How-
ever, conjoined demonstratives and genitive determiners are reasonably ac-
ceptable if the speaker points to the referents while speaking, since the point-
ing gesture underscores the fact that the speaker wishes to separate out the
participants. Conjoined genitive NPs are perfectly acceptable, although the gen-
itive marker generally appears only on the second NPCaroland Bob's house;
my aunt and uncle's car,
Typically, and is an additive conjunction; it adds information by adding a
word or construction of the same type. But the additive relationship between
the two (or more) coordinated constructions is often determined by social con-
vention. If I tell you that The kids ate spaghetti and meatballs, you will assume
that the meatballs were in (or on) the spaghetti, but you would not make the
same assumption in the case of The kids ate spaghetti and salad. Trish bought a
table and chairs suggests a (matched) set, but Trish bought some chairs and a table
does not. The phrase horse and carriage means that the horse pulls the carriage
but horse and rider clearly suggests a very different relationship. When two items
are routinely coordinated in discourse, they sometimes take on a conventional
orderbreadand butter; fish and chips; black and white; law and order; you and I.
In most of these cases the conventional order can be violatedI'll have butter
and bread, but the ordering constraint on you and I is exceptionally strong. *I
and you should fix this faucet is unacceptable in all dialects, but some speakers
do say "Me and you should fix this faucet."
In a few cases frequently coordinated items have taken on the status of id-
ioms, and in such constructions the order is never reversed.
After thefight, Joe's arm was black and blue.

Mary's friends left her high and dry.
The solution is cut and dried.
I packed a few odd and ends.
I love rock and roll.
The union rank and file voted no.
The CEO wined and dined the client.
By and large, they were well behaved.
Wined and dined is especially interesting because this predicate requires co-
ordination for grammaticality; the CEO cannot dine a client nor wine one. By
and large violates the usual rules of coordination, since it conjoins two entirely
different parts of speechapreposition and an adjective, and its meaning can
in no way be deduced from its lexical content.
As you saw in Chapter 3, when and conjoins predicates or sentences, it of-
ten suggests the temporal sequence of events. Since there are constraints on
"excessive" conjoining in edited English, speakers exploit and far more freely
than writers do. The following passages were recorded when subjects in a lin-
guistics experiment were asked to describe events that they had just seen in a
short film (Beaman, 1984). Each instance of and reflects the temporal organiza-
tion of the episode in question. (Boldface added.)
Conjoining 221
So one of the boys whistles to [the man], and stops him, and gives him his hat
back. (p. 55)
As they passed he turned to look at her, and his hat blew off. (p. 57)
And then he gets down out of the tree, and he dumps all his pears into the
basket, and the basket's full, and one of the pears drops to the floor, and he
picks it up, and he takes his kerchief off, and he wipes it off, and places it in
the basket which is very full. (p. 59)
In the final example, you can also see two examples of and used in a resulting
sense; "he dumps all his pears into the basket and [as a result] the basket's full,
and [as a result] one of the pears drops to the floor." Of course temporal se-
quencing and the expression of results are not incompatible semantic functions,
since causes invariably precede results.
Sometimes and can be used in a conditional sense, i.e., if A then B.
Come any closer and I'll scream.

Do that again and you'll be punished.
Put the merchandise back and I wont call the police.
Note that in each of these examples, the subject of the initial clause is a covert
you, even though the first two sentences are not classic imperatives. (The first
speaker is not demanding that the hearer come closer.) Such sentences can be
paraphrased as conditional if clausesIf you come any closer, I'll scream.
With certain verbs and has a reciprocal meaning. In Chapter 3, I discussed
transitive reciprocal verbs, e.g., Alia resembles Julia. Some intransitive verbs take
on a reciprocal meaning when subject NPs are coordinated with and. Brenda
and Cathy argued means that Brenda argued with Cathy and Cathy argued with
Brenda. There are a number of verbs that express this kind of reciprocity when
the subject NPs are conjoined.
Ward and June fought. Hannah and her sister embraced.

Paul and Paula eloped. My aunt and her husband met at the races.
Tom and Jerry wrestled. Archie and Veronica joked.
Language is often used iconically, i.e., the actual form of a word or con-
struction signals meaning. Onomatopoeic expressions like the nouns bow
wow and choo choo in child speech are classic examples of this and so is the
use of vowel elongation to signal intensificationLuba is sooo smart; Dick is
reeeally tall. Similarly, we often use coordinated structures to communicate
the notion "more" on some continuum; more words reflect more of some
other qualityNori talked and talked and talked and talked (more activity); The
bees stung Leah again and again and again (more frequency); The kite flew higher
and higher (more direction); She became more and more agitated (greater inten-
sification).
CONJUNCTION OR
Like and, or is extremely flexible grammatically. It, too, can conjoin a vari-
ety of structures but, as a rule, a given instance of or conjoins only the same
types of structures.
Conjoined NPs Have you seen Ken or Brian?

Conjoined VPs Little Bo Peep has lost or misplaced her
sheep.
Conjoined Mamie will clean the house or fix the
predicates meal
Conjoined PPs The baby always throws her bottle under the
bed or behind the dresser.
Conjoined Should we walk around or through that
prepositions puddle?
Conjoined adjectives My partner is naive or dumb.
Conjoined modals 1 may or may not attend the lecture.
Conjoined sentences Mary Jane's sleeping or she's not at home.
Conjunction or has two somewhat different meanings in discourse. When
your host says "Do you want tea or coffee?" he presumes that you will choose
one beverage or the other, but not both. Not surprisingly, this or is called ex-
clusive or. Occasionally or is used in a context that does not force a choice. An
application which reads, "You may apply for this grant if you are Hispanic or
female," does not imply that a Hispanic woman is ineligible; it's okay to be
both Hispanic and female. This is called inclusive or and it is common in bu-
reaucratic language. In everyday discourse, however, we usually interpret or
to be exclusive and when speakers want to underscore inclusivity, they will of-
ten resort to the and/or conventionYoumay have pie and/or ice cream. This strat-
egy is especially common in written texts.
There are some interesting idioms containing or or its negative counterpart
nor.
In this graduate program you either sink or swim.

We saw neither hide nor hair of him.
As the only linguist in the group, she felt like she was neither fish nor fowl.
Things happen here without rhyme or reason.
Conjoining 223
Shell finish the project sooner or later.

Put up or shut up.
Or often co-occurs with the correlative term, either and you will probably
find that many of the earlier examples sound better when either is included.
Little Bo Peep has either lost or misplaced her sheep.

My partner is either naive or dumb.
Either Mary Jane is sleeping or she's not at home.
The function of either is to explicitly correlate one structure to another and

to underscore the fact that there is an alternative. Either always precedes the
first of the two structures being coordinated. In Either Betty or Todd will go, the
NPs Betty and Todd are being coordinated; in He will either sink or swim, the lex-
ical verbs are being coordinated; in Either you give me your candy bar or I will tell
the teacher, two sentences are being coordinated. Correlative either is not neces-
sary for grammaticality in any of these examples. (Correlative either is seman-
tically related to determiner either as in Either dress will be fine.)
Neither and nor are the negative counterparts of either and or
Neither Sandy nor Gene knew the outcome.

I neither saw her nor called her last night.
Jane neither can nor will help you.
While either . . . or indicates that one alternative or the other is viable, nei-
ther . . . nor indicates that neither alternative is viable. In most cases a neither
. . . nor utterance can be paraphrased by an utterance in which two negative
propositions are coordinated by and I didn't see her and didn't call her last night;
Jane can't and won't help you.
While neither is not required for grammaticality in sentences containing nor,
the first of the coordinated structures must contain some sort of negative word.
Teresa received no help nor support from her sisters.

He didn't study for his exam nor did he write his term paper.
None of the spectators offered help nor did they call the police.
Note that when two independent clauses are conjoined in this way, the word
order of the second is affected, i.e., the subject and the operator are inverted.
CONJUNCTION BUT
But is normally categorized as a conjunction, but it behaves quite differ-
ently from and and or. But is highly constrained in the kinds of structures it can
coordinate. It does not conjoin nouns or noun phrases, one of the most com-
mon functions of the other two conjunctions; it occasionally conjoins modal
auxiliariesShecan but won't help me; it sometimes conjoins verbsShelikes but
fears her teacher; and it readily conjoins predicate adjectivesThey are poor but
happy. Most often but conjoins predicates and independent clauses. (As you saw
in Chapter 4, it is also used as a conjunct to organize larger pieces of discourse.)
Tim saw the prowler but didn't confront him.

He eats bacon but he doesn't really like it.
I like Meg but I can't stand her brother.
But always suggests some sort of contrast and it is sometimes used con-
cessively to indicate that the second item is odd or unexpected in light of the
firstIeat very little but I'm gaining weight. A sentence like ?I eat very little but
I'm not gaining weight is strange precisely because the second sentence is not
unexpected given the content of its predecessor. I have a friend who routinely
makes jokes based on this unconventional use of but:
"It's hot but it's humid."

"He's stupid but he's incompetent."
"These tools are cheap but they're flimsy."1
Because but typically expresses contrast, you will usually find a negative con-
struction in contrast with an affirmative one, as in these actual fragments of
conversation (Schiffrin, 1987). (Boldface in original.)
Henry: Now I don't want you to think that I'm biased, but this is the
way I was brought up. (p. 157)
Debby: And were you born in North Philadelphia?
Ira: No. I was born in uh inSouthPhiladelphia, but I moved to
North Philadelphia when I was a year old. (p. 159)
Jan: I can read Latin but I can't speak it. (p. 161)
COORDINATION AND QUESTIONS

Speakers of English tend to process coordinated items as single structures.
It's impossible, for example, to construct a yes/no question using only one ele-
ment within a coordinated phrase, although echo questions of this type are
fine. Consider the following sentences.
Betsy wants candy or popcorn. Milan gave the job to Phil and Miriam.
Betsy wants candy or what? Milan gave the job to Phil and who?
Conjoining 225
*What does Betsy want *Who did Milan give the job to
candy or? Phil and?
In normal yes/no question formation, the entire coordinated structure must be

replaced by the wh wordWhat does Betsy want? Who did Milan give the job to?
ELLIPSIS AND GAPPING

Coordinated constructions often reflect ellipsis. In general the term ellip-
sis refers to any omission of a word or words; in fact, the dots that are used to
indicate omitted material in a quoted text are called ellipses. Linguistic ellipsis
occurs when material is omitted from a construction but can be recovered by
looking at the previous linguistic context. In Lenore cant ski but Lydia can, we
know that the missing element after Lydia can is ski because we are able to re-
cover it from the syntax of the previous clause. Often, deleted material is sig-
naled by a short function word.
Sylvia may come and she may not [come].

Michelle told me she would fix the furnace and she did [fix the furnace].
Liang bought a leather briefcase and now Lisa wants one [a leather brief-
case].
I was looking for a nice yellow belt and I found one [a nice yellow belt].
Sue skipped school yesterday and Charlene did, too [skipped school].
Kenny should clean his room and Robbie should, too [clean his room].
Daniel will help with the kids and so will I [help with the kids].
Teresa really dislikes romance novels and so does Alec [dislike romance
novels].
I don't like Pat's attitude and I told him so [that I didn't like his attitude].
In the above examples, one replaces missing NPs, while too replaces the
missing elements of the predicate, i.e., everything after the operator. If there is
no operator in the first clause, periphrastic do must appear in the second I like
ice cream and Kemp does, too. So also replaces missing elements of the predicate
but it functions in two distinct ways. It often behaves very much like too, re-
placing everything after the operator, although so also forces subject/operator
inversion in the second predicateIriscan program computers and so can Franny.
So can also replace a clausal direct object construction. In I hate Pam's boyfriend
and I told her so, so stands for the entire proposition "I hate Pam's boyfriend,"
i.e., I hate Pam's boyfriend and I told her [that I hate her boyfriend]. So usually oc-
curs with communication verbs, although psych-verbs are possibleBevthinks
that her office mate is an idiot and I know so. (Direct object clauses will be dis-
cussed in detail shortly.)
Ellipsis can operate across separate sentences and even across speakers.
Consider this scene from Patricia Cornwall's novel From Potter's Field (1995),
which features a first person narrator and a second speaker.
(a) "I'm not crying/7 I said.
(b) "You're about to."

(c) "No, I'm not." (p. 173)
In (b), the second speaker deletes the word cry, which is recoverable from the
narrator's first sentence, (a); in (c), the narrator maintains the deletion of cry
and also deletes about to, which is recoverable from (b).
Gapping is somewhat similar to ellipsis but it is a less common and more
highly constrained phenomenon. It occurs when the lexical verb is deleted from
the second of two coordinated structuresChuckordered beer and Mary Jane wine;
Lu Anne likes bulldogs and Judith poodles.
Embedding
Recursion can also be accomplished by embedding. While coordination in-

volves placing structures side by side, embedding is accomplished by placing
one structure inside another. We have already seen examples of genitive struc-
tures embedded inside other genitive structures and modifiers embedded in-
side other modifiers. Similarly, subordinate clauses can be embedded within a
matrix clause. For example, a that clause can function as the direct object of a
verb. In the following sentence, the boxed clause is the direct object of know
and it is embedded within the main clause.
direct object
I know that Bob told Eve something
The direct object of a verb within a that clause can be another that clause.
In the following sentence, the larger box represents the direct object of know,
while the smaller box represents the direct object of told. (The labels above the
nesting boxes refer to the structures of the main clause, while the labels below
the boxes refer to structures embedded within those larger structures.)
direct object
I know that Bob told Eve that Max had been fired
direct object
The following sentence contains yet another embedded direct object clause.
Nominal Clauses 111
direct object
This embedding process can be repeated over and over to produce (the-
oretically) an infinitely long sentence. But after a certain number of embed-
ded clauses, a sentence becomes hard to process, in large part because the
hearer simply can't recall all the earlier clausesI know that Bobby told Eve-
lyn that Max said that Joan had heard that Marsha felt that everyone knew that she
was a loser. Technically a sentence with two, three, twenty, or fifty such clauses
is possible. The limitation here is human memory, not the grammar of the
language.
You will notice that I often use the terms "higher" and "lower" in refer-
ring to clause structures. This terminology originated in generative grammars
in which embedded structures are lower on a tree diagram than the structures
that contain them. In the following example the subject Megan is lower in the
diagram than the subject she, while the verb knows is higher than the verb hates.
S
/ \
NP VP
/ / \
N V \
I | S'
She knows / ^
NP VP
I / \
N V NP
I I I
Megan hates N
meat
This terminology has become so standard that even syntacticians who do not
use tree diagrams exploit it.
N o m i n a l Clauses
As a class, clauses can perform most of the functions that simple NPs perform;
such clauses are called nominal, meaning that they are noun-like. There are,
however, constraints on individual types of nominal clauses, e.g., only one
clause type can function as an indirect object or an object complement and only
a few types can function as the objects of prepositions. Nominal clauses take a
number of different shapes and I will categorize them in terms of their subor-
dinates, i.e., those words and affixes that signal subordinate clause status.
Nominal clauses are usually embedded within the main clause or another em-
bedded clause.
THAT CLAUSES
In that clauses the subordinator is the function word that. This that has no
semantic content and is unrelated to deictic demonstrative that and relative pro-
noun that, which will be introduced later in this chapter. Nominal that clauses
can function as subjects, direct objects, and predicate nominatives, structures
with which you are already familiar. 1
Apart from its subordinator, a that clause looks exactly like a main clause.
Its verb phrase is finite (i.e., it reflects tense) and it can contain the full range
of verbal morphology and auxiliaries. A that clause can contain any verb form
that a main clause can except for the imperative. In each of the following sen-
tences, the subordinate direct object clause contains something beyond a sim-
ple, tensed verb.
I think that Victoria is going to be sick. semi-auxiliary

I believe that it may rain tomorrow evening. modal auxiliary
Sergio knows that Tina has written to Selma. perfect
I wish that we were going on vacation. progressive
She thinks that the garden was destroyed
by voles. passive
I demand that Yishai leave. subjunctive
The tense of the main verb and the tense of the verb in the clause need not be
the sameWe know that she lied; We now think that she was an informant.
That Clauses as Direct Objects

The number of verbs that can take that clauses as direct objects is limited.2
They include psych-verbs, e.g., know, believe, think, hope, wish, assume, guess;
some sensory verbs, e.g., hear, see, feel (although these verbs do not denote lit-
eral sensory perceptions, as you will see later); and verbs that denote various
ways of communicating, e.g., say, argue, note, insist, demand, agree, suggest, indi-
cate, write. Sentences like I hear that Melinda is doing well and The coach thinks
that Sammy is an excellent athlete are typical.
subject direct object
The coach thinks that Sammy is an excellent athlete
Like any clause, a direct object clause has its own internal structure. This is a
classic example of recursion, structures within structures.
Nominal Clauses
I know that you loaned Ruth my new car

subject indirect direct object
object
Mandative subjunctives require a that clause direct objectImove that the

meeting be adjourned; I demand that she leave; We insist that the client accept
this offer.
Direct object that clauses are common in all kinds of discourse. The fol-
lowing examples come from Tracy Kidder's book House (1985), a nonfiction
narrative, and a Joyce Carol Oates collection of short stories, Will You Always
Love Me? (1997). (Boldface added.)
He'd realize that in the fall he would not be playing soccer. (Kidder, p. 154)
"I assume that primarily we're on the same team." (Kidder, p. 37)
She knew that she admired her stepdaughter. (Oates, p. 184)
Sharp-eyed, Mrs. K has noticed that Mrs. D. has another time glanced sur-
reptitiously at her wristwatch. (Oates, p. 229)
In most cases a direct object that clause can be replaced by a single pronoun.
I know that my best friend cheated on the exam. /1 know something.

Judy believes that Amelia will be found. / Judy believes it.
I realized that my best friend was lying. /1 realized something.
There are, however, a few verbs that can take clausal direct objects but cannot
take simple NPs or pronouns. I insisted that Lindy leave is fine but *I insisted it
is ungrammatical. A simple NP direct object is possible only when the verb is
insist onI insisted on real butter; She insisted on it. (On is a verb particle here.)
The same phenomenon occurs with think. By itself, think typically takes only a
clausal direct objectIthink that Andrew will attend. Occasionally people say "I
thought it, but I didn't say it" or "Think snow!" but these are unusual con-
structions. (Cognate direct objects are possible with think1 think terrible
thoughts all the time; Think good thoughts.) As a rule, a nonclausal direct object
requires the multi-word verb think about 1 think about Mary all the time; I am
thinking about my children.
Theoretically, a direct object that clause can become the subject of a corre-
sponding passive. Unfortunately, the main verbs involved in these construc-
tions are usually stative and don't passivize well. However, if the subject is an
indefinite pronoun, passives are often possible.
Everyone knows that Simon did it. / That Simon did it is known by
everyone.
Anyone can see that Romeo loves Juliet. / That Romeo loves Juliet
can be seen by anyone.
Everx/one assumed that Susanna would be chosen. / That Susanna
would be chosen was assumed by everyone.
When a that clause appears in direct object position, the subordinator that
can readily be omitted. Normally hearers will process the first verb that they
hear as the main verb of the sentence. Upon hearing the sentence I know that
my doctor has the answer, the hearer will automatically process know as the main
verb, thus has is subsequently processed as a subordinate verb. Since the first
verb has already been processed as the main verb, a subordinator isn't really
necessaryI know my doctor has the answer. More often than not we omit the
subordinator in a that clause. The following examples are also from Tracy Kid-
der and Joyce Carol Oates. (Boldface added.)
"I know they have some dreams hidden in the work/' (Kidder, p. 251)
"I decided I would talk to him." (Kidder, p. 159)
He thought Ned looked down on him. (Kidder, p. 147)
"I wish these issues were perfectly clear." (Kidder, p. 195)
. . . she would not have said she knew Ednella Crystal, really. (Oates, p. 184)
Harry believed he heard her being sick in the bathroom. (Oates, p. 84)
He claims he never saw her. (Oates, p. 84)
That Clauses and Ditransitive Verbs

As you saw in Chapter 1, ditransitive verbs take both direct and indirect
objects. There are a few ditransitives that can co-occur with that clause direct
objects.
subject indirect object direct object
Professor Mclntire taught her students that writing can be fun
indirect
subject object direct object
In ditransitive constructions containing a clausal direct object, the indirect

object must precede the direct object construction; a prepositional indirect ob-
Nominal Clauses
ject is impossible*We told that Karl had wrecked her truck to Alice; *Professor
Mclntire taught that writing can be fun to her students.
That clause direct objects
I know that my senator lied.

Margaret believes that Charlie is honest.
We taught the kids that canals are dangerous.
The teacher admitted that the exam was too easy.
I demand that Jan leave, [subjunctive]
I insisted that Mildred be informed, [subjunctive]
Tony can see that his father is uncomfortable.
I hear that they have broken up.
Clauses in which that is deleted
She thinks Sam is nice.

I told her I wouldn't go.
I wish she would leave.
The child admitted she broke the window.
I see you've bought a new car.
That Clauses as Predicate Nominatives

When they follow copulas, that clauses occur as predicate nominatives.
subject predicate nominative
My concern is that he'll never learn responsibility
Structurally such sentences resemble the direct object clauses discussed above.
But a that clause always embodies a proposition involving states, actions, agents
and patients, etc. A proposition is by its very nature an abstraction. Since a
predicate nominative must always have the same referent as the subject of the
sentence, the subject, too, must reflect this abstract quality. As a result, the sub-
jects of such sentences always contain abstract noun heads like plan, idea, no-
Hon, belief, hope, etc. When a that clause functions as a predicate nominative, the
copula is almost always be.
That clause predicate nominatives
The plan was that Linda would leave first.

Her hope is that the exam will be easy.
The presumption was that Jerry had never received the money.
His defense is that he wasn't even in the neighborhood.
My belief is that they'll never find the real culprit.
Because that clauses embody propositions (not people), they never function as
indirect objects.
That Clauses as Verb Complements

There are some structures that look vaguely like indirect object plus direct
object constructions except that the higher verbs are uniformly monotransitive
and have deontic force.
Joanie warned Henry that she was an expert pool player.

Rebecca alerted the family that the basement was flooded.
My colleagues convinced me that I should not apply.
In these sentences, the NP following the main verb, not the clause, is the
direct object. That NP can be made the subject of a corresponding passive
Henry was warned by Joanie that she was an expert pool player; The family was alerted
by Rebecca that the basement was flooded. But even though the NP is the direct
object of the preceding verb, the clause is required for discourse coherence. If
the clause is omitted from one of the above sentences, its content has to be re-
coverable from the preceding conversation or the context. In a sentence like
Joanie warned Henry, the hearer must be able to ascertain the content of the warn-
ing or a great deal of meaning is lost. I will call a nominal clause that follows
an NP direct object and is required by the verb a verb complement. Like any
other nominal clause, the verb complement has internal structure.
direct
subject object ver ^ complement
Joariie warned Henry that she was an expert pool player
subject predicate nominative
Nominal Clauses
The verbs that take that clause complements are "communication" verbs
of a very particular type. They all indicate that the subject is imparting infor-
mation to the direct object and the clause expresses the content of that infor-
mation. However, unlike the ditransitive communication verb to tell, verbs that
take clausal complements are more or less deontic; they always express the fact
that the subject has affected or is attempting to affect the behavior of the direct
object in some way.
That clause verb complements
Edwina convinced her daughter that she would like her new school.
Delila assured Samson that she wouldn't touch his hair.
The officer advised us that the road was closed.
I cautioned my students that they might find the exam difficult.
Beth persuaded Jo that Amy had not stolen the manuscript.
The officer warned us that there were mud slides ahead.
That Clauses as Subjects

That clauses also function as subjects of sentences.
That Habiba had earned that scholarship pleased everybody
And of course the subject clause itself has internal structure
predicate
subject adjective
That clause subjects co-occur with a very limited number of verbs. Most
stative copulas can take that clause subjects and so can verbs that suggest emo-
tional states or personal reactions.
That the election was rigged seemed clear

That my niece has been arrested for shoplifting bothers me.
That I had been chosen thrilled my parents.
A subject that clause can readily be replaced by a single pronounIt seemed

clear; This bothers me.
When a that clause functions as the subject of a sentence, the subordinator
that cannot be deleted. *Habiba had earned the scholarship surprised everybody is
completely ungrammatical. Since hearers will process the first verb encoun-
tered as the main verb of the sentence, the subordinator is necessary to alert
them that next verb Is not the main verb.
A subject that clause expresses a proposition and, since propositions don't
carry number, there is no singular/plural contrast with clausal subjects. Nom-
inal clause subjects always take singular verbs, singular being the fall-back (de-
fault) number when a subject has no intrinsic numberThat the boys want out-
old chairs pleases me; That Eileen hasn't found a job is surprising.
That clause subjects
That Pam and Andy had wrecked my car really annoyed me.
That Orville dislikes Wilbur seems clear.
That Randy was elected bothers me.
That everyone agreed was amazing.
That she is guilty is indisputable.
That Marcie had told Neta the results was surprising.
Extraposition of That Clauses. Actually, English speakers don't often place

that clauses in subject position, even though such sentences are entirely gram-
matical. More often we move such clausal subjects to the end of the sentence,
replacing them with the pronoun it. (See the discussion of cataphoric it in Chap-
ter 1.) Note the pattern in the following sentences.
That Jason lies really bothers my mother. / It really bothers my mother

that Jason lies.
That Samantha resigned surprised everyone. / It surprised everyone that
Samantha resigned.
That our boss had been convicted was shocking. / It was shocking that
our boss had been convicted.
This process is called extraposition. In the first sentence of each pair, the
subject is a that clause. In the second sentence of each pair, the grammatical
subject is the pronoun it, which stands in for the "semantic" subject, the con-
tent of the that clause. In other words, the pronoun it simply holds down the
subject position for the semantic subject, which appears at the end of the sen-
Nominal Clauses
tence. Normally, it has anaphoric reference, i.e., it refers to an entity that has
already been introduced into the discourse. Here, however, it has cataphoric
reference; its referent is a clause that appears later in the utterance.
grammatical subject extraposed clause
It was astonishing that the burglary had not been discovered
r t
While extraposed subject clauses are common in all kinds of discourse, they
are ubiquitous in formal edited English. The following examples all come from
The New York Review of Books (1997, June 12). (Boldface added.)
It is conceivable that some of the skeptics will turn out to be right about the
big-bang theory. (Weinberg, p. 20)
It is not surprising that his patriotism should have taken this bloodcurdling
form. (Ignatieff, p. 32)
It was almost inevitable that Younghusband would become a soldier. (Bern-
stein, p. 45)
Long or complex subject clauses are especially prone to extraposition. This

phenomenon is sometimes called heavy NP shift, and it occurs in other syn-
tactic contexts as well. The following passage is from an instruction manual for
yoga (Hittleman, 1964). (Boldface added.)
It is gratifying to note that more and more companies are realizing the value
of brief exercise periods. . . . It would seem obvious that the efficiency of the
worker will increase if he [sic] has the opportunity to either avoid or release
the onset of . . . fatigue, (p. 143)
In general, that clause subjects seem easier for the hearer to process when they
have been extraposed.
But what about a sentence like It seems that Donna has quit her job? While
that Donna has quit her job may look like a predicate nominative (it follows a
copula), it is not. If the pronoun it in the above sentence were a personal pro-
noun, it would have anaphoric reference but this it is clearly cataphoric. We
find exactly the same phenomenon with copula to appearIt appears that the
Dean is angry. Both these sentences reflect extraposition, despite the fact that
the non-extraposed versions are ungrammatical*That Donna has quit her job
seems; *That the Dean is angry appears.
Even direct object clauses are sometimes extraposed.
I took it for granted that you would help me.

The ski instructor made it obvious that she considered me hopeless.
1 hate it that my daughter smokes.
(In the last example, note that the that clause directly follows cataphoric it. This
is a case of "vacuous" or empty extraposition, i.e., the extraposition of the clause
doesn't really change the structure of the sentence.)
When a sentence includes an object complement, the direct object that clause
must be extraposed. A sentence like Susan made her position clear is perfectly ac-
ceptable, but *Susan made that she didn't like me clear is ungrammatical. Ex-
traposing the direct object restores grammaticalitySusanmade it clear that she
didn't like me. There is a small set of complex transitive verbs that take extra-
posed that clause objects.
She made it obvious that she didn't enjoy the food.

He considers it a miracle that they weren't killed.
I think it wonderful that people have walked on the moon.
(Some speakers may find the last example a bit unnatural.)
Factive and Non-Factive Constructions

In Chapter 3 we saw that epistemic modality is frequently communi-
cated by auxiliaries and in Chapter 4 we saw that it can be communicated
by adverbs as well. Epistemic modality is also commonly expressed in sen-
tences containing that clause constructions. That clauses always contain
propositions and these propositions can be treated as factual or speculative
by the speaker. In some cases the speaker presupposes that the proposition
articulated in the clause is a fact; these are called factive constructionsIt
is odd that jenny didn't come; I regret that I didn't get the job. In other cases,
however, the proposition is treated epistemically; these are non-factive con-
structionsIt is possible that she will have to repeat the fifth grade; I believe that
the safe is empty. It is the matrix predicate which determines whether a clause
is factive or non-factive.
Factives Non-factives
It's tragic that those puppies died. It's possible that he'll be fired
today.
It's exciting that you're going to Is it true that you hate chocolate?
Ireland.
It amuses me that Carol had to I suppose that Bruce ate all the
sell her Corvette. cookies.
He regrets that she resigned. He alleges that she assaulted him.
I resent that you told him.
Nominal Clauses
Factives (cont.) Non-factives (cont.)
That she is still here is significant. 1 imagine that Ivy has already told
him the news.
That she was the embezzler That she will succeed is unlikely,
surprised me.
That the Cubs will lose is
inevitable.
As you can see, both factive and non-factive constructions can contain cat-
aphoric it and extraposed subjects.
INFINITIVE CLAUSES
Infinitive clauses are those in which the verb occurs in its infinitive form
to sleep, to run, to be, etc. Infinitives, as the name suggests, are not finite; they
do not carry tense. Since modal auxiliaries always occur first in the VP and
since modals have no infinitive forms, modals never appear in infinitive clauses.
You will find semi-auxiliaries, perfect, progressive, and passive constructions
in such clauses, however.
I would hate to have to apologize. semi-auxiliary

Merle wants Adam to have finished by noon. perfect
I want you to be cleaning your room by 8 A.M. progressive
Harold hopes to be selected by the committee. passive
Infinitive Clauses as Direct Objects

Infinitive clauses frequently take on nominal roles, and they are very com-
mon in direct object position.
I hope to be a physician someday.

Toby would love to run a marathon in under three hours.
Jesse plans to attend UCLA.
I like to jog in the early morning.
Lee remembered to shave.
She longs to be in Paris.
I want Xi to attend the conference.
I would hate for my father to know about this.
The host would like for you to leave.
Like any other clause, an infinitive clause has internal structure,
The teacher would like for you to leave the note in his mailbox
subject 1direct object adverb of place
But infinitive clauses have one unusual characteristic. Look closely at the di-
rect object clause in the following example.
Stephanie wants to be a firefighter
You may remember that in Chapter 1 I made much of the fact that English is
a subject dominant language. At that time I carefully noted that, with the ex-
ception of the imperative, the main verb of the sentence must have a subject.
However, a verb in an infinitive clause can be subjectless, as in the sentence
above. This verb is subjectless in much the same way that an imperative verb
is subjectless; although there is no overt subject, the hearer can determine the
covert (unexpressed) subject from the grammatical context. In this case the sub-
ject of the embedded clause is the same as the subject of the main clause.
Stephanie wants [Stephanie] to be a firefighter

predicate
nominative
The predicate nominative a firefighter refers back to the covert subject of the
clause, [Stephanie].
The term equi (from the Latin word for equal) is used to characterize any
construction in which an overt NP in one clause and a covert NP in another
are identical. In Stephanie wants to be a firefighter, the equi is subject controlled;
this means that the content of the lower, covert subject is determined by the
content of the higher subject. If the subject of the infinitive clause is different
from that of the higher verb, the subject must be explicitly stated, i.e., overt
Stephanie wants her son to be a firefighter.

Nominal Clauses
The verbs that take infinitive clauses as direct objects are all psych-verbs.
Most of these verbs can take simple NP direct objects as wellStephaniewants
a vacation. Long and hope, however, always take clausal direct objects1long to
hike the Grand Canyon; 1 hope to do well on the bar exam. Only when they are fol-
lowed by the particle for can these verbs take simple NP objects J long for peace;
I am hoping for a new car.
As you will see in the examples below, occasionally a clausal direct
object containing an overt subject will have two subordinators, to and for.
For precedes the subject of the infinitive clause. Which higher verbs re-
quire for in the clause is rather arbitrary; no particular semantic criteria
exist. Like can take for in its infinitive clause but does not require i t I
would like for Beth to come or I would like Beth to come. For many speakers,
however, the verb hate, requires both subordinators1would hate for her
to see you.
Infinitive clause direct objects
Covert subject in clause

William wants to go to Morocco.
Elizabeth planned to take her boyfriend to dinner.
I would like to be elected to the Board of Directors.
She hopes to have left by June.
I would hate to be moving in this weather.
Overt subject in clause

Jack wants his children to eat a better breakfast.
Barb planned for her parents to take a trip.
John would like Sue to be elected.
I would hate for the kids to move so far away.
Infinitive Clauses as Predicate Nominatives

Infinitive predicate nominatives behave very much like that clause predi-
cate nominatives. As in the case of that clauses, the infinitive clause states a
proposition, and the subject to which it refers must be abstract.
Infinitive clause predicate nominatives

My dream was to become a dentist.
Stuart's fantasy was to climb Denali.
Their plan was to break into the apartment quietly.
Her strategy was to make herself indispensable.

David's plan was for Jill to give Ann the information.
The best idea would be for her to tell the truth.
The best thing would be for the kids to stay here.
As you can see, predicate nominative infinitive clauses can contain covert
subjects, but here the covert subject is not necessarily the same as the higher
subject. The pronoun I does not actually appear in My dream was to become a
dentist, yet 1 is clearly the covert subject of becomeMy dream was [I] to become
a dentist. I derives from the genitive my in the subject NP.
My dream was [I] to become a dentist

t t
The same phenomenon occurs in a number of the sentences in the preceding

chart, i.e., the covert subject of the infinitive actually derives from a genitive in
the higher subject. Sometimes the covert subject of an infinitive predicate nom-
inative is simply indefiniteThe best thing would be to tell her the truth.
The best thing would be [for someone] to tell her the truth
Infinitive Clauses as Verb Complements

In a sentence like The teacher wanted Sarah to join us, the boldface clause
is the direct object of wanted and we can easily replace the entire clause with a
pronounThe teacher wanted something; What did the teacher zoant? Sarah is the
overt subject of that direct object clause.
Nominal Clauses
direct object
The teacher wanted Sarah to join us

subject
But a sentence like The teacher persuaded Sarah to join us requires a different
analysis. Here Sarah is the covert subject of join, but she is at the same time the
overt direct object of persuaded. The infinitive clause that follows Sarah is a verb
complement.
direct verb
object complement
The teacher persuaded Sarah [Sarah] to join us.
How do we know that Sarah, rather than the entire clause, is the direct object
of persuade? In more general terms, how do we know that persuade behaves dif-
ferently from want? One piece of evidence lies in the passive; note that I can
make Sarah the subject of a passive with persuadeSarah was persuaded by the
teacher to join us. This operation is impossible when the main verb is want
*Sarah was wanted by the teacher to join us.
There is a second piece of evidence that demonstrates that 1 want Sarah to
join us and I persuaded Sarah to join us require two different analyses. Pronouns
can be reflexivized only when their antecedents occur in the same clause. A
sentence like *Mary didn't want the man to hurt herself is ungrammatical precisely
because it violates this rule; Mary occurs in the matrix clause and herself in the
embedded clause. Mary didn't want the man to hurt himself is fine because both
the man and himself occur in the embedded clause.
Mary didn't want the man to hurt himself

Now consider Harry persuaded himself to attend the party. Himself must be
co-referential with Harry since there isn't any other masculine NP in the sen-
tence. If these two NPs are co-referential, they must be clause mates. If these
two NPs are clause mates, himself must be the direct object of persuade; no other
grammatical relationship is really possible.
direct
subject object verb complement
Harry persuaded himself to attend the party

direct object
A third test that illustrates the difference between infinitive direct objects
and infinitive verb complements involves a passive construction within the em-
bedded clause. A clause is a somewhat autonomous structure; what happens
grammatically within the clause has a very limited effect on the rest of the sen-
tence. For example, in cases in which the infinitive clause is a direct object, it
is possible to change an active infinitive clause into a passive construction with-
out a significant change in meaning:
They wanted the priest to read the eulogy. / They wanted the eulogy to
he read by the priest.
I wanted the doctor to examine my daughter./ I wanted my daughter
to be examined by the doctor.
Notice, however, what happens when the NP after persuade becomes the
subject of a passive within the clause.
I persuaded the doctor to examine my daughter. /1 persuaded my

daughter to be examined by the doctor.
The effect of adding the passive is dramatic. Clearly, these two sentences do
not mean the same thing; in the first example I am persuading the doctor to
do something and in the second I am persuading my daughter to do some-
thing. This semantic disparity occurs because the covert subject of the infini-
tive clause is also the direct object of the main verb. Here equi is object con-
trolled, i.e, the direct object of the higher clause is also the covert subject of the
lower.
subject direct object verb complement
I persuaded the doctor [the doctor] to examine my daughter
subject direct object verb complement

I persuaded my daughter [my daughter] to be examined by the doctor
In all of the examples above, the main verb is followed by two required struc-
tures, a simple NP direct object and an infinitive complement, which takes as
its covert subject that same direct object NP.
Verb complements typically follow verbs that have deontic force.
We forced Antoine to share his chocolate.

The professor persuaded Hilda to drop the course.
The guard ordered the intruders to leave.
Don't urge Lawrence to play his accordion.
Nominal Clauses
Many of the same deontic communication verbs that take that clauses as verb
complements also take infinitive complements.
Dr. Einstein warned the students to leave the lab.

1 advised the tourists to avoid the local restaurants.
Patsy cautioned the hikers to be careful.
The agent advised us to pay by check.
A few normally ditransitive verbs co-occur with infinitive clausesSheasked

Nina to leave; I told Harold to hand me the wrench. There are two possible analy-
ses here. One identifies the NP following the ditransitive verb as the indirect
object and the following clause as the direct object, with equi being controlled
by the indirect object.
indirect
subject object direct object
I told Harold [Harold] to hand me the wrench
But this analysis overlooks the fact that told has deontic force here, some-
thing it lacks in a typical ditransitive construction like 1 told Harold the truth or
I told Harold that it was snowing. In I told Harold to hand me the wrench, told is re-
porting a directive. Whenever a normally ditransitive verb occurs with an in-
finitive clause, it takes on this deontic quality.
1 asked my fiance to leave.

Faye asked Melinda to drive.
Lucas told Sophia to drink her milk.
In each of the above examples, the speaker reports an attempt to affect the be-
havior of another (although the outcome is unspecified). For this reason a verb
complement analysis seems more plausible than an indirect object analysis.
direct
I told Harold [Harold] to hand me the wrench
Only "communication" verbs exhibit this pattern. Other ditransitive verbs like
give, hand, and offer don't take verb complements.
The verb promise poses an interesting problem. In all of the infinitive verb
complements discussed so far, equi is controlled by the higher direct object
1 asked Patricia [Patricia] to leave. But note what happens with promise, another
deontic communication verb. In 1 promised Patricia to leave, the equi is controlled
by the higher subjectI promised Patricia [I] to leave. Infinitive verb comple-
ments offer the grammarian a host of complications like this one.
In the following chart, the direct object of the higher verb is italicized.
Infinitive verb complements
(a) Darlene forced me to move the car.

He persuaded us to leave.
I won't allow the kids to stay there late.
They permit the homeless to sleep in the park.
They coaxed the rabbits to leave the garden.
They won't let the dog sleep on the furniture, [bare infinitive]
The teacher made my daughter sit in the corner, [bare infinitive]
(b) I told Rene to do the dishes.
She asked Penny to calibrate the machine.
I warned the students to fill out the form correctly.
The police ordered the demonstrators to disperse.
(c) I saw my partner steal the money, [bare infinitive]
She heard the neighbors argue, [bare infinitive]
I felt the building shake during the earthquake, [bare infinitive]
(d) She considers her sister to be a success.
We helped him to defeat his opponent.
Sheila helped Scott fix the roof, [bare infinitive]
All of the main verbs in section (a) pattern like force; none of them can take
a clausal direct object and each is followed by an direct object NP, which is it-
self followed by the complement clause. A sentence like *Darlene forced to move
the car is ungrammatical. While it may appear that verbs in category (a) can
take simple NP direct objects, there is always an underlying complement
clauseDarleneforced me [to do something]; They coaxed the rabbits [to do some-
thing]. Many of the verbs in (a) reflect coercion or persuasionforce,make, per-
suade,, coax and all are strongly deontic.
The verbs make and let require that the following infinitive be bare, i.e., that
it occur without to1 made them give up; She let her students take a make-up exam.
Non-native speakers who have more or less mastered the infinitival comple-
Nominal Clauses
ment construction often make mistakes in cases where a bare infinitive is re-
quired, e.g., *She made her students to write an essay.
All of the main verbs in set (b) express communication of some sort. They
pattern grammatically like those in (a), and they, too, have deontic force. But,
unlike most of the verbs in set (a), these verbs are silent on whether or not be-
havior was actually affectedIforced Derek to leave versus I told Derek to leave.
The main verbs in section (c) are sensory and are not the least bit deontic.
Note that these infinitives are all bare. Sensory verbs that take infinitive com-
plements contrast sharply in meaning with those that take that clause objects.
In 1 have heard that you are running for office, the verb hear is not being used lit-
erally; the information contained in the clause may have been acquired by a
means other than hearingsomeonesent me a fax; I read it ip the newspaper;
your publicist wrote me a letter. The same holds true for an utterance like I see
that you don't like Jerry. My conclusion may be based exclusively on the fact that
I heard you screaming at him; the evidence need not be visual. But when an
infinitive clause follows a sensory verb, it expresses an event that was literally
heard, seen, or f e l t Iheard Sethfall; Maneck saw Don leave; I felt the floor shake.
As with the other verbs that take infinitival complements, the NP follow-
ing a sensory verb behaves like a direct object grammatically, e.g., it can occur
as the subject of a passive with the sensory verbThe neighbors were heard to
argue; My uncle was seen to steal the money. Nevertheless, the bare infinitive
clause is required for coherence. I felt Jennifer move does not entail I felt Jennifer.
Category (d) is a garbage can. Since neither consider nor help falls into the
general semantic categories discussed previously, IT1 simply lump them to-
gether. The complement of help can occur with a bare infinitive or a full in-
finitiveWe helped him change his tire; Brian helped me to understand my childen
better. When consider is followed by a verb complement, it behaves semantically
very much like complex transitive consider. In Nancy considers this project to be
her most successful, the verb complement clause could easily be replaced by
an object complement NPNancy considers this project her most successful.
Dual Structure Infinitive Clauses

There is a third type of infinitive clause in English that shares characteris-
tics with both direct object clauses and infinitive complement clauses. Consider
the following sentences.
The lawyer found her to be uncooperative.

Everybody expected Stella to marry Stanley.
The police believe Lizzie to be guilty.
The doctor assumed Portia to be cured.
The teacher proved Jimmy to be the culprit.
The generals declared the war to be over.
In many ways these infinitive clauses resemble direct objects. For one thing,
in each case the infinitive clause can be loosely paraphrased with a that clause,
and that clauses which appear directly after the verb are typically direct objects
(or predicate nominatives)The generals declared that the war was over; Every-
body expected that Stella would marry Stanley. Furthermore, each clause can be
replaced by a simple pronounThe police believe this; The teacher proved it. A
passive within the infinitive clause doesn't really affect the meaning of the sen-
tence. I expect the students to choose Trevor and I expected Trevor to be chosen by the
students are basically synonymous. All of this suggests that the entire infinitive
clause is functioning as the direct object of the higher verb.
On the other hand, the NP following the higher verb can become the sub-
ject of a passive with that verb. This suggests that the infinitive clause is func-
tioning as a verb complement.
She was found to be uncooperative (by the lawyer).

Stella was expected (by everyone) to marry Stanley.
Lizzie is believed to be guilty (by the police).
The war was declared to be over (by the generals).
(Such sentences sound best when the agents are omitted.)

Constructions like these have two potential structures. In one an infinitive
clause with an overt subject is the direct object of the higher verb, while in the
other a direct object NP is followed by a verb complement with a covert sub-
ject.
direct object
direct object v e r b complement
When a direct object NP is followed by a complement clause, both structures

are required for coherence. Without their respective infinitive complements,
found in The lawyer found her to be uncooperative and expected in Everyone expected
Stella to marry Stanley take on a completely different meaningThelawyer found
her; Everyone expected Stella. This fact is dramatically illustrated in the sentence
I believe this politician to be a liar. If the infinitive complement is deleted, the sen-
tence becomes I believe this politician, which clearly contradicts the original ut-
terance.
Nominal Clauses
Many of the verbs in the dual structure category are complex transitive. In
these cases the infinitive complement clause performs much the same function
as an object complement.
The jury found Patty guilty. / The jury found Patty to be guilty.
The President appointed him Ambassador. / The President appointed him to
be Ambassador.
They declared Susan the winner. / They declared Susan to be the winner.
Dual structure infinitive clauses
Everyone expected Lonnie to fall.

Mathematicians have proved this equation to be unsolvable.
The kids believe Dee to be the graffiti artist in the neighborhood.
The inspector found the wiring to be faulty.
NASA declared the launch to be a success.
They assumed Isabella to be the winner.
Infinitive Clauses as Subjects

Infinitive clauses can also function as subjects.
subject predicate adjective
An infinitive subject clause can itself have an overt or covert subject. This poses
an interesting problem since there is no // higher ,/ subject from which to extract
the covert subject of the clause. However, covert subjects can often be recov-
ered from the previous discourse. If you are grousing about a course with a
friend and say, "To require six exams in this course is really stupid," your friend
will undoubtedly interpret the covert subject of to require as the teacher of the
class in question. If Elaine has just saved a drowning child, you might say "To
have done that took real courage," and your hearer will know that the covert
subject of to have done is Elaine. Sometimes the covert subject of a subject in-
finitive clause is simply an indefinite anybody To be stalked by a mountain lion
must be a terrifying experience.
Infinitive clause subjects

To have this kind of house takes money.
To have stolen that software was dumb.
To be a CPA isn't easy.
To join this sorority requires four nominations.
To know her is to love her.

For Ken to win would be wonderful.
For her to have said that was inexcusable.
For Laurie to be honest is crucial.
For those rescuers to succeed will take a miracle.
Note that in those examples in which the infinitive clause has an overt sub-
ject, that subject is preceded by subordinator for. For is always required when
an infinitive clause that contains a subject is itself a subject. When for is omit-
ted in such a sentence, the sentence is ungrammatical*Ken to win would be
wonderful; *Laurie to be honest is crucial. Hearers tend to process the first NP they
hear as the subject of the main clause and the for alerts them that the first NP
is not the main subject.
Extraposition of Infinitive Clauses. Like that clauses, subject infinitive clauses

are frequently extraposed. In fact you will probably find that many of the ex-
amples in the prevoius section actually sound better with extraposed subjects.
It takes money to have this kind of house.

It was dumb to have stolen that software.
It is crucial for Laurie to be honest.
It will take a miracle for those rescuers to succeed.
Here, too, extraposition is especially likely if the subject clause is long and/or
complex.
For my sister to have offered her boyfriend my baseball card collec-

tion was outrageous.
Nominal Clauses
It was outrageous for my sister to have offered her boyfriend my base-

ball card collection.
On those infrequent occasions when an infinitive clause occurs as the di-

rect object of a complex transitive verb, the direct object clause must be extra-
posed.
I find it impossible to be nice to Jethro.

Maria considers it important to be prompt.
My son thinks it unnecessary to bathe daily.
Infinitive Clauses Are Problematic

Infinitive clauses have proven to be a knotty problem for syntacticians.
There is disagreement on how some of the constructions discussed above
should be treated and there are other infinitive clause structures that seem to
require a different analysis altogether. Consider the infinitive clauses in the fol-
lowing sentences.
Kim began to sweat.

The baby started to cry.
Rebecca tried to unlock the door.
Liam condescended to speak to me.
Amy tends to annoy her sisters.
Note that none of these clauses can take an overt subject*Kimbegan Clau-
dia to sweat; *The baby started Benny to cry; *Rebecca tried Stefan to unlock the door.
Began and start seem to have an aspectual dimension but the others do not.
Condescend and try require animate subjects, while begin, start, and tend don't
It began to rain; This paint tends to peel.
Reams of paper have been devoted to discussions of these structures and
there is no real consensus as to how they should be treated. English syntax
poses many challenges and the analysis of the infinitive clause is one of the big
ones. You will find that there are a great many different approaches to the var-
ious infinitive clauses in English. The analysis presented above is designed to
fit infinitive clauses into the basic sentence patterns of Chapter 1 whenever pos-
sible.
ING CLAUSES
In nominal ING clauses, the subordinator is the {-ing} suffix. This subordi-
nating {-ing} should not be confused with the (-ing} of the progressive; unlike
the progressive suffix, subordinator {-ing} can be attached to stative verbsShe
was unhappy about being tall; I enjoy seeing snow on the mountains. ING clauses
are non-finite (i.e., they don't carry tense). They don't contain modal auxiliaries
(since modals have no participle forms) but they do contain semi-auxiliaries,
the perfect, and the passive. Since they carry the {-ing} subordinator, they don't
contain the progressive.
Jackie hates having to take clarinet lessons. semi-auxiliary

Tom liked having been Grandma's favorite. perfect
The baby enjoys being cuddlg. passive
Some grammarians call ING constructions of this type gerunds. This term
is problematic, however. As David Crystal points out in his Dictionary of Lin-
guistics and Phonetics (1997a, p. 279), "the traditional notion of gerund [is] where
the word derived from a verb is used as a NOUN, as in smoking is forbidden."
But this traditional definition of a gerund is a bit misleading. While smoking is
acting as the subject of the sentence in Smoking is forbidden, it never loses its
verbal qualities; it can take a direct object and an adverb like any other verb
Smoking cigars in your office is forbidden. The entire clause, Smoking cigars in your
office is functioning as the subject of the sentence, but smoking is quite verb-like.
subject
Smoking cigars in your office is forbidden.

direct object adverb
This confusion over the status of ING constructions arises because they can
range from very nominal in character to very verbal. A few ING forms have
become so nominalized that they can take the plural markershootings,beat-
ings, feelings, (sand)castings, hearings, shavings, etc. These forms have become
full-fledged nouns. In His loud yelling bothers me, yelling is preceded by a geni-
tive determiner and an adjective, modifiers that are typically associated with
nouns. In The shooting of the cow was accidental, shooting is modified by the ar-
ticle the and an of prepositional phrase, both of which typically accompany
nouns. It is not unreasonable to think of the ING forms in these contexts as a
"verbs used as nouns" and these constructions can appropriately be called
gerunds. The following ING clauses are all on the nominal end of the scale.
ING nominal construction Nominal markers
Her drinking disturbs me. ING form preceded by genitive

determiner
He was ticketed for dangerous ING form preceded by preposition
driving. and adjective
Nominal Clauses
ING nominal construction (cont.) Nominal markers (cont.)
I can't stand their incessant ING form preceded by genitive

criticizing. determiner and adjective
The first warning has been ING form preceded by determiner
issued. and postdeterminer
When an ING form occurs in a very nominal construction, its subject must
take the genitive form, as in Bill's accidental shooting of that cow created a furor.
Bill's accidental shooting of that cow created a furor
However, in the sentence Bill's accidentally shooting that cow last week created
a furor, shooting is clearly acting as verb, not a noun; it takes both a direct ob-
ject and an adverb. When the {-ing} construction is highly verb-like, the geni-
tive form is not necessarily required for grammaticality. Bill accidentally shoot-
ing that cow last week created a furor is fine for many speakers.
Bill accidentally shooting the cow last week created a furor

subject adverb direct object adverb
ING Clauses as Direct Objects

Like infinitive direct object clauses, ING clauses follow psych-verbsIen-
joy riding the subway; Natalie remembers giving you that file. Like infinitive
direct object clauses, ING direct object clauses exhibit equi. In a sentence like
Susan hates driving at night, the covert subject of driving is Susan.
As you saw previously, when the ING clause contains an overt subject, the
subject can be marked with a genitive formI dislike Nancy's using my car; I
don't remember his being there. Prescriptive grammarians demand that the sub-
ject of the ING verb be a genitive form, but many educated speakers use the
uninflected form or (in the case of pronouns) the object form insteadIdislike
Nancy using my car; I don't remember him being there. In fact, for some speakers,
there is a real difference in meaning between a genitive form and an unmarked
form or object pronoun in an ING clause. Compare I hate Cal's driving and I
hate Cal driving. Many people would argue that in the first example the speaker
hates the way Cal drives, while in the second example the speaker expresses
displeasure over the fact that Cal is driving. When prescriptivists argue that
the genitive is always required before an ING form, they ignore dramatic coun-
terexamples like I don't want him doing that. Clearly, *I don't want his doing that
is completely ungrammatical.
Many speakers use an uninflected subject NP in a clausal subjectJimlos-
ing all that money really upset his wife, and some are even comfortable with
an object pronoun in this positionHimlosing all the money really upset his wife.
The covert subject of an ING clause in direct object position can have in-
definite reference if the ING form is nominal enough. In a sentence like I enjoy
racing, racing can be construed as having an indefinite subject (7 like to watch
anyone/anything racing) or it can be analyzed as exhibiting equi (7 like [I] racing).
But in the case of the highly verbal form riding in John hates riding a bicycle dur-
ing rush hour, speakers will automatically interpret the covert subject of riding
as John.
Direct object ING clauses are fairly easy to identify. Like other direct object
clauses, they can often be replaced by a pronoun or a simple NPSusanenjoys
eating in restaurants. / Susan enjoys it. / Susan enjoys this activity.
ING direct object clauses

I hate eating liver.
Tucker loves swimming in the ocean.
She enjoys giving money to the poor.
The kids admitted breaking the window with rocks.
Lisa doesn't remember being there.

I dislike Eric('s) wearing my clothes.
Maeve resented her mom('s) telling those stories.
Do you remember my/me loaning you that book.
As you saw earlier in this chapter, there are some verbs that can take that
clause objects but not simple NP objects, e.g., insist, think. To take simple NP
objects, these verbs must be followed by particles, insist on, think about. These
same verbs also require particles when they are followed by ING object clauses.
Nominal Clauses
In each of the following categories, note how the main verb patterns relative
to the direct object type.
That clause ING clause

direct object NP direct object direct object
I insisted that she The children insisted Maggie insisted on

leave the puppy on ice cream. doing the dishes.
at home.
Everyone thinks that I think about my Jiggs has thought
you should help. problems constantly. about selling his
truck.
I dreamed that I was I dreamed about I dream about owning
an astronaut. my grandmother. a sports car.
Deb complained Deb complained Deb complained
that her soup about the service. about having to
was cold. wait.
Infinitive and ING Clauses Compared. Often direct object infinitive and ING
clauses are quite close in meaningIprefer to eat lunch before noon. /1 prefer eat-
ing lunch before noon. Sometimes, however, the semantic differences are strik-
ing.
I regret to inform you of an accident. [Regretting precedes

informing.]
I regret informing you of the accident. [Informing precedes
regretting.]
Linda forgot to tell Neil about the file. [Forgetting precedes
(not) telling.]
Linda forgot telling Neil about the file. [Telling precedes
forgetting.]
Tim remembered putting the books away. [Putting precedes
remembering.]
Tim remembered to put the books aivay. [Remembering precedes
putting.]
Direct object infinitive clauses usually refer to an event that has not yet oc-
curred or to a nonrealized eventShewants to be a singer; I had hoped to leave
tomorrow; I would hate for my candidate to lose. ING clauses, on the other hand,
often signal an actual event. Contrast I wanted to go to Paris with I enjoyed go-
ing to Paris, Although both contain a past tense main verb, only the ING clause
refers to a trip that actually took place.
ING Clauses as Predicate Nominatives

ING predicate nominative clauses behave very much like infinitive predi-
cate nominative clauses. The copula is almost always be and the subject of the
main verb is always an abstraction. The covert subject of such a clause is some-
times derived from a structure in the higher subjectHer vice is [she] eating
pizza; The problem we face is [us] finding adequate space; The issue for Sergio is [Ser-
gio] locating his natural mother Sometimes the covert subject is simply indefi-
niteThe biggest nightmare is [anyone] shopping on Christmas Eve. Of course,
clausal predicate nominatives can also have overt subjects T h eproblem is Mar-
cia having angered the boss; The difficulty is Nan's demanding a raise.
ING predicate nominative clauses
The issue is merchants selling illegal fireworks.

The trick has been arriving on time.
Pat's problem is yelling at people.
Her concern is Hector('s) drinking when he drives.
Sometimes the copula be plus an ING predicate nominative clause looks a

great deal like a progressive constructionMary'sfavorite activity is fishing in
the Everglades versus Mary is fishing in the Everglades. The semantics of the first
example rules out a progressive analysis, however; fishing requires an agentive
subject and the noun head activity doesn't qualify. The second example can't
be analyzed as a copula plus predicate nominative since Mary can't possibly
have the same referent as fishing in the Everglades.
ING Clauses as Verb Complements

You have already seen that when bare infinitive clauses follow sensory
verbs, they function as verb complementsIfelt the baby kick; I heard Pamela
shout. When an ING clause follows a sensory verb, it behaves in the same way
except that the action is interpreted as repeated or ongoing. In I saw Bobby hit
Billy, bare infinitive hit can refer to a single act, but in I saw Bobby hitting Billy,
hitting clearly refers to repeated action. Hit is a punctual verb and the {-ing}
morpheme affects the meaning of hit in this non-finite clause in the same way
that the progressive affects its meaning in a finite clause. When the clausal verb
is not punctual, the {-ing} indicates that the action is ongoingIfell the baby
moving; I heard Pamela shouting. It is only after sensory verbs that the {-ing) sub-
Nominal Clauses
ordinator carries this "progressive" meaning. In ING verb complement clauses

equi is object controlled.
direct
Everyone saw Alan [Alan] kicking his computer
Because the NP Alan is the direct object of saw, it can become the subject
of a corresponding passiveAlanwas seen kicking his computer.
ING Clauses as Subjects

ING clauses can also function as subjectsChewinggum in class is rude; Hik-
ing up a mountain during a hail storm is painful.
predicate
subject adjective
j Hiking up a mountain during a hail storm is painful
adverb of direction adverb of time
Subjectless ING clauses in subject position usually have indefinite refer-

ence. Taming lions is dangerous means that for anyone taming lions is a dan-
gerous endeavor. Sometimes, however, a more explicit subject is clear from the
situation, the discourse, or the grammatical context. If I have just given a lec-
ture and say,"Speaking to a large audience is so stressful," my hearer will as-
sume that I is the covert subject of speaking. Sometimes a covert subject appears
overtly in another construction in the sentence.
Cleaning the bathrooms every day wore Nate out.

Sleeping in a strange bed is stressful for my daughter.
Looking good is important to Elmer.
Getting up every morning at six was hard on Gayle.
ING subject clauses

Dancing is fun.
Walking in the rain gives me asthma.
Telling stories to children is Theo's job.
Naming that baby Morticia was cruel.
ING subject clauses (cont.)
Looking healthy is important.

Drinking wine in the morning is very decadent.

Sue('s) playing cards every afternoon upsets her mother.
His losing all that money bothers me
Jen('s) being so tall amazed me.
Their lying about the money was really stupid.
RELATIVE TENSE IN NON-FINITE CLAUSES

As you have seen, neither infinitive nor ING clauses carry tense. They do,
however, express what some linguists call relative tense (Comrie, 1985, pp.
56-82). This means that the time frame expressed by the main verb is usually
extended to the non-finite verb. In It bothered me to hear Denny curse, both the
bothering and the cursing took place in the past. In It bothers me to hear Denny
curse, both the bothering and the cursing encompass present time; Denny is ei-
ther cursing at the moment or is a habitual curser. The same pattern occurs in
I hated Janet's wearing my shirts versus I hate Janet's wearing my shirts and Fern
forced Tyrone to leave versus Fern is forcing Tyrone to leave.
It is, however, possible to express past time in a non-finite clause even when
the main verb is present. As we saw in Chapter 3, the perfect is sometimes used
with modal auxiliaries to express past time, and it can perform the same func-
tion in a non-finite clauseItbothers me to have seen such an awful accident; 1 re-
sent Howard's having borrowed my hammer.
WH NOMINAL CLAUSES
The same wh forms that appear in information seeking questions also oc-
cur in nominal clauseswho, what, which, where, when, why, how. (I will treat
how as a wh word even though it is spelled with an initial h.) In such clauses
the wh word is both a proform and a subordinator. Until now all of our sub-
ordinators (except possibly the genitive and the {-ing} after a sensory verb) have
been semantically empty. This is not true of wh words because they do have
referents, even though those referents are not specified in the sentence.
I know who Justine is dating. [Justine is dating someone.]

What he said shocked the reporters. [He said something.]
I saw what she did. [She did something.]
Wh clauses differ from interrogatives in that the operator in the wh clause

Nominal Clauses
does not move. (Because wh questions require subject-auxiliary inversion, non-

native speakers of English sometimes use subject-auxiliary inversion in wh di-
rect object clauses, too, as in "I don't know how old is the baby/') The wh word
usually occurs first in the clause regardless of its function. In the following sen-
tence what is moved out of normal direct object position and appears at the be-
ginning of the clause.
I heard what Geoff said [ ]
Wh clauses can perform all the normal nominal functions.3 They can act as
subjects, direct objects, indirect objects, subject complements, object comple-
ments, and also as the objects of many prepositions. Wh words within nomi-
nal clauses take on a variety of functionssubject,direct object, indirect object,
object complement, subject complement, determiner, adverb, and object of a
preposition.
Wh Clauses as Direct Objects

Wh clauses often function as direct objects. Like any other clause, the wh
clause has internal structure.
Samantha knows what Joyce is doing

direct subject
object
Steve knows where Ian is going

adverb :subject
of place
know

If the ioh word is the object of a preposition, the speaker has two options.
In conversation, most speakers follow the rule of thumb discussed above; the
wh word, i.e., the object of the preposition, appears first in the clause and the
preposition is left stranded in its normal position.
I saw who Hortense gave the secret files to

indirect subject direct object
object
Formal edited English usually requires that the preposition precede its object,
which makes the preposition, not the wh word, the first word in the clause.
I saw to whom Hortense gave the secret files

indirect subject direct object
object
While I often write sentences of this type, I very rarely utter them.
As you saw above, wh words in wh clauses usually have a specific, but un-
specified, referent. If I say "I know who Yvette is dating," who refers to a spe-
cific individual. There are, however, a number of wh compounds all of which
have nonspecific reference. These compounds always take the same shape, a
standard wh proform followed by {-ever} whoever, whatever, wherever, whenever,
whichever, however In I resented what Butch said, what has specific reference, but
in I resent whatever Butch says, whatever does not. In the following examples,
none of the wh words has specific reference.
I will go wherever they send me.

Barney will eat whatever you have in the house.
I always like whoever Alessandra dates.
Read whichever book appeals to you.
You can prepare the turkey however you like.
In the following summary chart, the grammatical function of each itali-

cized wh word or phrase is indicated.
Nominal Clauses
Wh direct object clauses
Marsha reported what Mehmet had said. [direct object]

I saw ivhat Charlie gave Bianca. [direct object]
I know who is stealing her tools. [subject]
Did Bruce know who we gave the money to? [indirect object]
I saw where the kids hid. [adverb of place]
I understand why she might dislike it. [adverb of reason]
I don't know when she left. [adverb of time]
I now understand how they fixed it. [adverb of means]
Do you see how he stands? [adverb of manner]
Do you know how long they stayed? [adverb of duration]
Has anyone told you how often this happens? [adverb of frequency]
I saw which toy she took. [determiner]
I can't imagine whose money that is. [determiner]
I will eat whatever you fix. [direct object]
I don't know whether the defendant is guilty. [no function]
Note that most of the verbs that can take wh clause direct objects can also
take that clause direct objects and the same semantic categories are repre-
sentedmentalstate verbs, some sensory verbs, and communication verbs.
The wh word whether is an atypical subordinator. The function of whether
within the clause is to communicate two alternative possibilities. Sometimes the
possibilities are spelled out in the clause1don't know whether Fergus likes me or
not and sometimes they are implicit1wonder whether Annette speaks Polish. If
behaves in exactly the same way in I don't know if Farouk is attending or not. The
subordinators whether and if have no real grammatical function within the clause.
Clauses containing whether and this kind of if are typically direct object
clauses following certain psych-verbs, verbs of speculation, and verbs of inquiry.
Do you know whether Tammy has moved or not?

She doesn't care whether 1 live or die.
1 wonder if Janice will come or not.
Cynthia asked whether Moira had been invited.
I can't decide whether to wear the blue jacket or the red one.
Wh Clauses as Predicate Nominatives

When wh clauses function as predicate nominatives, they occur in the same
environments that characterize infinitive and that clause predicate nominatives.
Wh predicate nominative clauses
The issue is what she told her boss.

The problem is where we will put the visitors.
The question is why he told her at all.
Wh Clauses as Indirect Objects and Object Complements

While that clauses, infinitive clauses, and ING clauses never function as in-
direct objects or object complements, wh clauses do. However, in the case of
indirect object clauses, this occurs only when the wh word is nonspecific who-
ever or whichever and very occasionally whatever. Who never appears in a wh in-
direct object clause; I will give the silver dollar to whoever gets the highest grades is
fine but *I will give the silver dollar to who gets the highest grades is ungrammati-
cal.
Wh indirect object clauses
He gave whoever answered the door the subpoena.

I will offer my services to whoever I like.
I will tell whichever reporter arrives first my story.
Give the free lunch to whatever group needs it most.
The most common wh forms in object complements are whoever and what-
ever, but what can also occur in these structures. Wh object complement clauses
are somewhat unusual, however.
Wh object complement clauses
You may name the puppy whatever seems suitable.

Paint the room whatever color you like.
Nominal Clauses 261
Wh object complement clauses (cont.)
This makeup artist can make you whoever you want to be.
They named the baby what they were told to name her.
W h Clauses as Subjects
Wh clausal subjects occur in a very limited environment; they most often
precede copulas and verbs that communicate a psychological reactionshock,
bother; disturb, please, thrill, elate. As with direct object clauses, the wh word in
a wh subject clause can take on almost any function.
Wh subject clauses
Who gave me the report is confidential.

Who I loaned my car to is none of your business.
Who Mary's admirer is remains a mystery.
What Louise said pleased me.
What this machine does is to stamp the packages.
Which house they sold isn't relevant.
When they left isn't clear.
Why he screamed was a mystery.
How long we are staying is Gertrude's decision.
Which suspect is guilty hasn't been determined.
Whether she participates or not is immaterial.
Whatever he said shocked his parents.
Whoever told you this lied.
Sometimes wh clause subjects are followed by infinitival predicate nomi-

natives in which the to is optionalWhatSam did was [to] offend the boss; What
this policy does is [to] protect you from flood and fire.
Extraposition of Wh Clauses. Subject wh clauses can be extraposed fairly

readily and many sound better extraposed.
It s none of your business zvho I loaned my car to.

It hasn't been determined which suspect is guilty.
It is immaterial whether she participates or not.

It isn't clear when they left.
Direct object wh clauses containing when are routinely extraposed, even though
the extraposed clause often follows th cataphoric it directly.
I hate it when my brother interrupts me.

I enjoy it when my students seem enthusiastic.
Mom doesn't like it a bit when you whine.
Clauses as Adjective Complements
As you saw in Chapter 2, predicate adjectives can be followed by complements,

e.g., George is not fond of broccoli. Such complements can be clauses as well as
phrases. That clauses often function as adjective complements.
That clauses as adjective complements
I was happy that the auditor didn't find any discrepancies.

Ginny is certain that the project will be a success.
Lena was unaware that the job had been filled.
I am pleased that you are going to work here.
Don't confuse the above constructions with those in which a subject has been
extraposed, e.g., It is crucial that you tell the truth. These always contain cat-
aphoric it.
Infinitive clauses can also function as adjective complements.
Infinitive clauses as adjective complements
Bert was anxious to help us.
I would be happy to travel with you to Madagascar.

She was afraid to tell them the truth.
Gregory was eager to dance the macarena.
I am sorry to give you bad news about your exams.
Clauses as Adjective Complements 263
Infinitive clauses as adjective complements (cont.)
Ed is ready to leave.
Maria is eager for Paul to arrive.
This will be easy for Tina to fix.
Reiko's parents were happy for her to go.
Those infinitive clauses that contain a subject require the subordinator for as
well as to. *Maria is eager Paul to arrive is ungrammatical.
In the chart above, all those adjective complements with covert subjects re-
flect subject controlled equi.
predicate adjective
subject adjective complement
Now consider this pair of sentences made famous by linguist Noam Chomsky.
John is eager to please. / John is easy to please.
It should be clear that while the covert subject of please is John in the first sen-
tence, this is not the case in the second. In John is easy to please the covert sub-
ject of the clause is an indefinite somebody, while John is the direct object of
please. In other words, It is easy for someone to please John.
adjective complement
John is eager [John] to please

subject
adjective complement
John is easy [someone] to please [John]

When a predicate adjective that expresses "ease" or "difficulty" is followed

by an infinitive complement, the structure is often called a tough construction
because the adjective reflects the relative "toughness" of the activity expressed
by the infinitive clause. Tough constructions always reflect the structure of John
is easy to please.
This cabinet will be tough to move.

This computer will be easy to fix.
Hilda is difficult to talk to.
She is hard to work with.
Those kids are impossible to discipline.
There are a number of other predicate adjectives that pattern in exactly the
same way but don't reflect"toughness," e.g., Birds are fascinating to watch; Mo-
torcycles are fun to ride; Sharks are interesting to study.
Predicate adjectives that pattern like eager require an animate subject, while
those patterning like easy do not.
The kids were eager to help. These shirts are easy to iron.
The dog was happy to see them. That system is hard to repair
Ingrid was glad to loan us the money. This floor is tough to clean.
Nigel is anxious to leave. Caroline is hard to convince.
The degree modifiers too and enough are often used in conjunction with in-
finitive adjective complements. Note that enough always follows the adjective
it modifies.
Emily is too sick to work. She's old enough to drink.

Alan is too upset to help us. Luke is tall enough to reach the sink.
Too and enough reflect ends of the same semantic continuumShe's old
enough to be here versus She's too old to be here. Everything between old enough
and too old is an "acceptable" age.
While that clauses and infinitive adjective complements typically follow the
predicate adjective directly, ING clauses are found after prepositionsTony is
unhappy about Mike's leaving; I am furious over the corporation demoting my
sister. In these sentences the prepositional phrase itself is the adjective com-
plement and the clause is the object of the preposition.
ING clauses in prepositional phrase adjective complements
Susan wasn't aware of Jill('s) having been subpoenaed.

I am angry about Anthony('s) quitting school.
Dave was sorry about Rachel('s) having had an accident on her bike.
Gretchen is afraid of her kids getting into bad company.
Post nominal Modification 265
Note that all of the prepositional clauses above can be loosely paraphrased
with a that clauseSusanwasn't aware that Jill had been subpoenaed; 1 am angry
that Anthony is quitting school, etc. Furthermore, many complement clauses can
be paraphrased with a non-clausal prepositional phraseThey are certain that
she is guilty versus They are certain of her guilt. Complement phrases, comple-
ment clauses, and complement prepositional clauses function semantically in
much the same way.
Wh clauses can on occasion function as complements of predicate adjec-
tivesDoriswasn't certain who was coming to the party; 1 wasn't sure whether
Mabel would be there. More often, however, a wh clause functions as the ob-
ject of the preposition in prepositional phrase adjective complements. In the
sentences in the following chart, the adjective complement is a prepositional
phrase in which the object of the preposition is a wh clause.
Wh clauses in prepositional phrase adjective complements
Regina was afraid of what might happen to her house.

Ted was worried about who would feed the cats during the trip.
They were sorry about what their dog had done to my rug.
Evie is unhappy about who was chosen.
Postnominal Modification
English has a number of postnominal modifying constructions. One of the most

common is the relative clause. A relative clause is a wh clause that always fol-
lows an NP; the relative proform, always a wh word or that, has the same ref-
erent as the preceding NP. In The guy who borrowed your car isn't reliable, zvho
and the guy refer to the same individual. The relative proform always has a
grammatical function within the clause and at the same time acts as a subor-
dinator.
English contains two distinct types of relative clauses, each of which has a
different effect on the preceding NP.
RESTRICTIVE RELATIVE CLAUSES

The primary job of a restrictive relative clause is to restrict the possible ref-
erents of the preceding NP, thus making the referent more accessible to the
hearer.
Give the man who is waiting at the door the package.

The repairperson who fixed your computer was totally incompetent.
The dress that Jeanne bought for the wedding is stained.

I really like the house that Peter bought last month.
The steak which you brought me is cold.
In a sentence like The kids who are playing on the doorstep are too noisy,
the restrictive relative clause tells us which kids are being referred to; it's not
the kids who are sitting in the living room or the kids who are hiding in the
attic; it's the kids who are playing on the doorstep.
Since restrictive relative clauses restrict the possible referents of the NP,
such clauses do not occur with proper nouns because proper nouns already
have unique reference. In a sentence like The John Doe who is in my statistics class
is an idiot, John Doe is not technically a proper noun. (See Chapter 2.) The pre-
sumption here is that there is more than one John Doe and the relative clause
restricts the reference to the one in my statistics class. Because of this restrict-
ing function, restrictive relative clauses are usually used in cases in which the
preceding NP has more than one potential referent (although there are excep-
tions to this generalization, as you will see shortly). If I know that a friend has
two daughters, I might say "The daughter who lives in Cleveland just finished
medical school, and the daughter who lives in Tucson is unemployed."
Relative clauses can modify NPs in any position and the clause is embed-
ded in the nominal structure. In other words, if the clause modifies a direct ob-
ject NP, then the relative clause is part of the direct object.
direct object
the student who is standing in the back

restrictive relative clause
Like any other clause, a restrictive relative clause has internal structure and
the wh word typically comes first in the clause, regardless of its grammatical
function within the clause.
restrictive relative clause
I really like the man
Restrictive relative clauses can modify indefinite pronouns:
1 don't know anyone who can fix this.

No one that I know would say such a thing.
This is somebody who has a grudge.
Anybody who would do that is a creep.
They can also modify personal pronouns, but only when the pronouns are used
as indefinitesHe who dies with the most toys wins. Indefinite personal pro-
nouns are fairly rare in Modern English. On rare occasions you is used with a
restrictive relative clause, as in You who's holding up the line, move along.
Although toho and which both function as relative proforms, the most ubiq-
uitous relative proform in English is that. In Old English the only relative pro-
form was the invariable word pe from which relative that is derived (at least
in part). Although who/whom and which existed in Old English as interroga-
t e s , they were not used as relative pronouns until the Middle English pe-
riod. (This usage was modeled on Norman French, which used its interroga-
tive pronouns as relative pronouns.) In casual conversation that is routinely
used with both human and inanimate noun heads, despite the complaints of
prescriptivists.
I hate the coat that my mother bought me.

The car that Nori bought is a lemon.
The dentist that you're seeing just lost his license.
Do you know the people that live there?
While formal edited English requires whom when the relative pronoun func-
tions as an object (including object of a preposition), even highly educated
speakers of English use who in all positions in conversationIknow the woman
who you offered that job to; 1 met the guy who you had that big fight with. This us-
age is actually quite natural; I know the woman to whom you offered that job sounds
stilted in informal social contexts.
Where, when, and why can also be used as relative proforms in very limited
circumstances. Where must follow an NP that indicates a place, when must fol-
low an NP that indicates time, and why typically follows the NP the reason.
The town where 1 was born no longer exists.

Do you remember the time when we danced until dawn.
She won't tell me the reason why she did it.
The indefinite wh proforms (whoever; whatever, wherever, etc.) do not occur as

relative pronouns.
Inanimate NPs pose an interesting problem for relative clause formation.
In Old English, the wh interrogative pronouns had only one genitive form hwxs,
the source of Modern English whose. Ever since the wh forms took on the func-
tion of relative pronoun in Middle English, whose has been used with both an-
imate and inanimate nouns, as in this passage from Shakespeare's Hamlet.
(Boldface added.)
"I could a tale unfold whose lightest word/Would harrow up thy soul" (Act
I, Sc. v, line 15).
Unfortunately, prescriptivists eventually proscribed the use of whose with

inanimate nouns and this proscription created a real gap in the grammatical
system. The only solution in contemporary edited English is a somewhat awk-
ward periphrastic genitive construction.
1 bought a book the cover of which was torn.

Did you see that house the roof of which was missing?
Ivana has a tree the bark of which is dark red.
Inanimate whose does endure in speech, however, and you will often hear sen-
tences like My doctor gave me some pills whose side-effects were terrible or That's
the school whose roof blew off in Hurricane Andrew.
Function of italicized or
Restrictive relative clauses covert proform
I know the lawyer that was subject

just indicted.
I need someone who can fix this. subject
I don't like the new salesman direct object [covert]
they've hired.
Do you know the people she indirect object [covert]
loaned her car to?
The names which Sherry called object complement
Bobby were shocking.
I don't like the person that my subject complement
son has become.
The place where my sister lives adverb of place
is rundown.
The woman on whose porch genitive determiner
you are sitting is my aunt.
The house in which I grew up object of preposition (PP
has been razed. functioning as adverb of place)
Deleting the Relative Proform

Relative proforms that don't function as the subject of the clause are rou-
tinely deleted in many types of discourse. The following examples are from
Elizabeth George's novel In the Presence of the Enemy (1997). (Boldface added.)
Slowly, Luxford replaced the graph he'd been holding, (p. 406)
He had to admit that she'd shown an uncharacteristic mercy in leaving him to
sleep the binge off instead of awakening him and forcing him to engage in the
conversation he'd been so insistent upon having with her. (p. 138)
"Mr. Chambers, I don't need to tell you how serious a situation you're in." (p.
495)
An omitted relative proform can always be recovered because it has the same
referent as the preceding NP.
Extraposition of Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses are sometimes extraposed in conversation.
While such constructions are not acceptable in edited English because the mod-
ifying clause is too far from its noun head, they do occur in casual discourse.
A student ivho had failed physics came in for counseling. / A student

came in for counseling who had failed physics.
The baby that Jane adopted is beautiful. / The baby is beautiful that Jane
adopted.
Alexander gave a book that he had found at a garage sale to Katrina. /
Alexander gave a book to Katrina that he had found at a garage sale.
As is often the case with extraposition, extraposed relatives frequently oc-

cur when the clause itself is long and/or complexHeis going out with a woman
next weekend that he met on a boat during a trip to Tahiti.
Infinitive Restrictive Clauses

While the prototypical restrictive clause is finite (i.e., it carries tense), in-
finitive clauses also restrict NPs. Some restrictive infinitive clauses have overt
subjects and others covert subjects.
Infinitive restrictive clauses
Colleen needs someone to play with.

The dog wants some water to drink.
Nancy has no one to talk to.
I want some boxes to store these antiques in.
Here is a toy for you to give to the baby.
I need a firm mattress for my father-in-law to sleep on.
While many of these infinitive clauses can be loosely paraphrased with a

conventional relative clause, e.g., Colleen needs someone who she can play with; I
have no one that I can talk to, such paraphrases overlook a significant semantic
dimension of these infinitival relatives. Unlike wh relatives, infinitive relatives
focus on the real world function of the NP being modified. Colleen needs some-
one, and that person's function is playmate; the water is for drinking; the boxes
are for storage; and the mattress is for sleeping. Semantically these structures
resemble adverbs of purpose.
Discourse Functions of Restrictive Relative Clauses

Restrictive relative clauses are ubiquitous in discourse. While they routinely
restrict the referents of the preceding NPs, they also have broader discourse
functions. When a speaker believes that a referent is familiar to a hearer but
knows that the referent has not yet been introduced into the immediate dis-
course, s/he will often use an NP plus relative clause to introduce that refer-
ent (Givon, 1993b, p. 108). Such constructions typically feature an NP contain-
ing a definite determiner like the or that.
I lost the book that I borrowed from you last week.

That plumber who Latisha hired is really good.
Do you know that exchange student who's living with the Wilsons?
Presumably the hearer already knows that the speaker borrowed a book,
that Latisha has hired a plumber, and that there is an exchange student living
at the Wilsons. The function of the relative clause is simply to bring that knowl-
edge into consciousness and to then use that knowledge to restrict the poten-
tial referents of the preceding NP.
But sometimes a relative clause follows an NP containing the indefinite ar-
ticle a, and, as you saw in Chapter 2, the indefinite article indicates that the NP
encodes new information. In this context a relative clause will be more de-
scriptive than restrictive if the NP has definite reference. An utterance like Mia
has a son who is extremely handsome is possible even if Mia has only one son.
Here the function of the restrictive clause is to provide descriptive information;
this sentence could even be paraphrased as Mia has an extremely handsome son.
In Mr. Brady wants to marry a woman who really likes children, the primary func-
tion of the clause is to restrict the possible referents of the non-specific NP, a
woman. But in Ms. Brady is a woman who really likes children, the relative clause
characterizes Ms. Brady. The following quotations from Elizabeth George's In
the Presence of the Enemy (1997) contain both restrictive and descriptive relative
clauses. The purely restrictive clauses follow NPs containing the definite arti-
cle, while the descriptive clauses are those in which the preceding NP contains
the indefinite article. (Underlining and boldface added.)
. . . the school was run by the Sisters of the Holy Martyrs. The Sisters were ^
group of women whose mean age appeared to be seventy, (p. 1)
A twentyish boy with the eyes of a frog, he was wearing the grease-splotched
overalls of his profession and a baseball cap that had the word Braves scrolled
across the front, (p. 394)
The clerk from whom Stanley had ordered the coffee stood there with two
plastic cups of it. (p. 395)
"He put those glasses in the car. He's been waiting for the moment when you'd
stumble on them." (p. 410)
Note that the first example would be rather odd if the relative clause were omit-
tedThe Sisters were a group of women. Most of us know that nuns are women.
The purpose of the relative clause construction in the original sentence is to
provide the descriptive comment about age, and without it the sentence is al-
most reduced to a tautology.
OTHER RESTRICTIVE POSTNOMINAL MODIFIERS

In English, there are a number of constructions that do not have all the fea-
tures of relative clauses but nevertheless restrict the possible referents of the
NPs they follow. Consider the following sentences:
The woman chosen for the post used to be my dentist.

1 don't know those kids playing in the backyard.
The gloves lying on that chair belong to my aunt.
The bratwurst in the refrigerator is spoiled.
I know many people from Indonesia.
In each case the structure in boldface plays the same role that a restrictive rel-
ative clause wouldthewoman who was chosen for the post; the kids ivho are
playing in the backyard; the gloves that are lying on that chair, etc.
Early transformational grammarians hypothesized that such structures
were "reduced" relative clauses, i.e., structures in which the relative pronoun
and the verb be have been omitted.
The tree house which was built by my children was destroyed in the storm.
The woman who is sitting over there was my fifth grade teacher.
The motorcycle which is in the garage is Pete's.
This process reduces the relative clause in the first example to a past partici-
ple clause and the relative clause in the second example to an ING clause.
While most contemporary grammarians would reject the notion that these
structures actually derive from full relative clauses, I will exploit this idea
briefly because it's useful in understanding certain postnominal constructions.
Using the reduced relative clause model, a construction like the people who
are sitting on the porch can be reduced to the people sitting on the porch and the
chairs that are in the living room can be reduced to the chairs in the living room. In
the last example it is important to realize that, although the prepositional phrase
in the living room looks like an adverbial phrase, it is not. Consider the sentence
The chairs in the living room are being re-covered. While in the living room expresses
a location, is not an adverb indicating where the chairs are being reupholstered;
on the contrary, this prepositional phrase is indicating which chairs are being
reupholstered, i.e., the chairs in living room, not the ones in the den.
subject
The chairs in the living room are being re-covered.

postnominal modifier
In Chapter 4, we saw examples of postnominal modifiers after indefinite

pronounsSheis wearing something blue; Nobody decent would say such a thing.
These constructions can also be analyzed as reduced relative clausesSheis
wearing something which is blue; Nobody who is decent would say such a thing. In
essence, whatever is left over after a relative clause is reduced takes on the
function of the clause. In Something here smells bad, here retains the semantics of
a locative adverb, but its grammatical function is that of postnominal modifier.
While the reduced relative clause strategy is useful for understanding the
postnominal constructions discussed above, it has its limitations. Consider the
following sentences:
The woman with the smirk on her face is my boss.

Students with strong academic records will be accepted by the program.
A man resembling my boyfriend robbed a convenience store last night.
Anyone knowing the code should punch it in.
Those campers seeing the crash should call the FAA immediately.
None of these modifying structures can readily be replaced by a relative

clause*thewoman who is with the smirk on her face; *a man who is resembling my
boyfriend; *anyone who is knowing the code. (The last three examples are prob-
lematic because each contains a stative clausal verb, which is rendered pro-
gressive in a full relative clause.)
Because there are so many holes in the reduced relative clause analysis, I
will simply label all of the phrases and clauses discussed in this section as re-
strictive postnominal modifiers. Restrictive postnominal modifiers are typi-
cally ING clauses, past participle clauses, and prepositional phrases. Occa-
sionally lexical adjectives and adverbs take on this function.
Restrictive postnominal modifiers
The child standing in the hall wants to see the principal.

Any student having the measles must report to the school nurse.
Do you know the girl being treated by the paramedics?
The coat trimmed in red is mine.
The lamp broken during the argument has been repaired.
The papers on your desk are blowing all over.
I really enjoy the students in my morning class.
Many brides wear something blue.
Everyone there enjoyed the party.
The people here are very snobbish.
Sometimes a prepositional phrase in the predicate is a postnominal modi-

fier and sometimes it is an adverb. This functional flexibility can produce gram-
matical ambiguity as in The police arrested the students in the park. Here in the
park might be an adverbial prepositional phrase indicating where the arrests
took place or it might be a restrictive postnominal modifier indicating which
students were arrested, i.e., the students in park, as opposed to the students in
the administration building.
adverb
subject direct object of place
The police arrested the students in the park
NON-RESTRICTIVE RELATIVE CLAUSES

Non-restrictive relative clauses perform a very different function from re-
strictive relative clauses; they simply provide additional information about the
NP and are never crucial in identifying the referent(s). While non-restrictive
relative clauses are subordinate clauses, i.e., they can't stand alone, they are not
embedded within the NP. Unlike restrictive clauses, they can co-occur with
proper nouns and they don't co-occur with indefinite pronouns. The fact that
non-restrictive clauses provide additional information and are not embedded
is underscored by the pauses that surround these clauses in discourse; these
pauses are reflected by commas in written texts.
Jerry Seinfeld, who is a stand-up comedian, had his own T. v. show.

My oldest sister, who is an accountant in New York, handles my taxes.
George is visiting Cecilia, who is living in Spain.
Absalom, Absalom, which Faulkner published in 1936, was his most dif-
ficult novel.
Although the material provided by non-restrictive relative clauses is "addi-

tional/' it is not superfluous or irrelevant. Sometimes a non-restrictive clause
will provide very important information as in These batteries, which should be
changed monthly, will ensure that your smoke detector can be heard all over the house.
Non-restrictive relative clauses almost never exploit the proform that after
human NPs and only occasionally after inanimate NPs. A sentence like ?My
new couch, that was just delivered yesterday, is already torn is marginal for many
speakers.
Unlike restrictive relative clauses, non-restrictive relative clauses can refer
back to structures other than NPs. Because the referents of these clauses are
structures rather than people, the relative proform is always which.
Diana loves that purple dinosaur, [refers to preceding predicate]

which many kids do.
I know you're mad, which you [refers to predicate adjective]
have every right to be.
Today is Sunday, which means [refers to entire sentence]
I can sleep in.
Aaron lied to his parents, which [refers to entire sentence]
really bothered them.
Non-restrictive modifiers sometimes take the shape of past participle

clauses.
My Uncle Bob, called Bubba by his friends, is a corporate vice-president.

Ms. Grundy, just named teacher of the year, has been fired.
My brother, known by everyone as the best player on the team, was
benched all season.
When a non-restrictive structure is an NP rather than a clause, it is usually

called an appositive. Like non-restrictive relative clauses, appositives refer to
the same entity as the NP they follow.
Non-restrictive relative clause Appositive
My daughter, who is a surgeon My daughter, a surgeon in Texas,

in Texas, has been awarded a has been awarded a big grant.
big grant.
Dr. Keller, who is a well-known Dr. Keller, a well-known chemist,
chemist, made an amazing made an amazing discovery.
discovery.
Ward, which is an old counter- Ward, an old counter-culture
culture community, is fascinating. community, is fascinating.
Discourse Functions of Non-Restrictive Relative

Clauses and Appositives
Non-restrictive relative clauses and, even more commonly, appositives al-
low us to introduce unfamiliar people into discourse by using a common NP
or a proper noun followed by explanatory material, as in this passage from Sis-
ter Helen Prejean's narrative Dead Man Walking (1994). (Boldface added.)
"We hired a man, an electrician, who filled out a civil service application for
the job. Frank Blackburn, the warden at Angola at the time, interviewed the
prospective candidate for the job in some depth/7 (p. 104)
Appositives and non-restrictive relative clauses are especially common in

newspapers, because a journalist is constantly introducing unfamiliar individ-
uals and entities into the discourse. The following passages are from an article
published in The Miami Herald (Kolata, 1997, p. 30A). (Boldface added.)
. . . it is unlikely that irradiated meats could be available before next summer,

said Jacque Knight, a spokeswoman for the Department.
The American Meat Institute, which represents meat processors, said the
agency's action was a "victory."
. . . the irradiation of meats . . . could destroy bacteria such as E. coli, a strain

that infected hamburger meat processed by Hudson Foods.
Dr. Michael Jacobson, director of the Center for Science in the Public Inter-
est, a consumer advocacy organization based in Washington, said he would
prefer that the meat industry use other methods.
276 Clauses Coordination and Subordination
Note that the last example contains an appositive embedded within an appos-
itive.
Both non-restrictive relative clauses and appositives are also extremely
common in contexts in which a speaker or author seeks to explain and define.
They are ubiquitous in textbooks, reference books, and manuals. Consider the
following passages from The Complete Book of Bicycling, a manual for bicycle
owners written by Eugene A. Sloane (1988). (Boldface added.)
More common than bursitis is tendinitis, an inflammation of the tendons and

ligaments, (p. 159)
Cartilage, which separates the major bones of the knee, prevents bone-to-
bone contact, (p. 159)
Vigorous cycling helps to clear away cholesterol deposits, which can lead to
clogged and hardened arteries, (p. 137)
Of course non-restrictive relative clauses and appositives occur in highly

informal discourse as well. In the following passages from God Bless John Wayne
(1996), novelist Kinky Friedman uses non-restrictive clauses to introduce char-
acters to his readers and at the same time provide information about them.
(Boldface added.)
Ratso was my flamboyant fleamarket friend who sometimes served as a rather

weather-beaten Dr. Watson to my postnasal Sherlock Holmes, (p. 11)
Ratso, who'd accompanied me on practically all of my forays into crime solv-
ing, was now a registered guest of the NYPD. (p. 198)
I thought of Ratso's dadhisadoptive fatherJackSloman, who'd died quite

recently in Florida." (p. 29)
RESTRICTIVE APPOSITIVES
There is another construction that resembles both restrictive and non-re-
strictive relative clauses. These are the so-called restrictive appositives. The
most common type of restrictive appositive is a that clause preceded by an ab-
stract NP. The following examples will give you a sense of the structure.
The fact that they had lied bothered me.

I couldn't accept the idea that Eva was leaving us.
The theory that the world is flat has been disproved.
1 reject the notion that he would deceive us.
He harbored the hope that his briefcase would be returned.
We didn't believe the story that they had been kidnapped by pirates.
Adverbial Clauses 111
These clauses differ from normal relative clauses in that the subordinator
is always that, never a wh word, and this subordinator has no grammatical role
within the clause. Subordinator that can always be deleted in a restrictive ap-
positive if the preceding NP is in the predicateIcouldn't accept the idea Eva
was leaving us; He harbored the hope his briefcase would be returned. The dele-
tion of that when the clause is part of subject NP is problematic for many speak-
ers??Thefact they had lied bothered me; ?The story they had been kidnapped
didn't ring true.
Like restrictive relative clauses, restrictive appositives restrict the possible
referents of the NP. In The fact that the file is missing has been noted, the clause
tells us which fact is at issue. However, unlike restrictive relative clauses, re-
strictive appositives occur with a very limited set of NPs. And unlike non-re-
strictive appositives, these clauses are not set off by pauses in speech (or com-
mas in text).
Restricted appositives are sometimes extraposed in casual discourse.
The idea that he could get into Harvard is absurd. / The idea is absurd
that he could get into Harvard.
Her notion that children will eat only what they need is silly. / Her
notion is silly that children will eat only what they need.
When restrictive clauses of any type are extraposed, no cataphoric it is required,

since the preceding NP remains to function as the subject.
Infinitive clauses can also function as restrictive appositives and they, too,
follow a small group of abstract nouns.
The plan to drive to Tucson sounds reasonable.

She had an opportunity to speak to the Director.
The girls made an attempt to help the injured horse.
Malik expressed a desire to study dance.
The first example could be paraphrased as The plan, which is to drive to Tucson,
sounds reasonable.
Infinitive restrictive appositives are not commonly extraposed.
Adverbial Clauses
Adverbial clauses are extremely heterogeneous in form. They include clause

types that don't appear in other constructions. Because of their heterogeneity,
it is much easier to group adverbial clauses by semantic type rather than gram-
matical form. Not all adverbial clauses are embedded structures. As you will
see, some are contained within the predicate of a higher clause, but others sim-
ply stand apart from the sentence. The following discussion focuses on the
types of adverbs discussed in the adjunct adverb section in Chapter 4.
LOCATIVE ADVERBS
Locative adverbial clauses are not especially common in English discourse
and they take a limited number of forms. As a rule, adverbs of space contain the
subordinators where or zoherever. Where suggests that the place referred to in the
clause is specific/am going where the sun shines all winter. Wherever refers to an
indeterminate placeJwill go wherever you send me. It is sometimes hard to de-
cide whether a where(ever) form is an adverb of place or an adverb of direction.
Directional adverbs are most often prepositional phrases in which the preposi-
tion circumscribes a direction, and such prepositions rarely take wh clauses as
objects. Nevertheless, you can usually depend on the preceding verb to give you
a clue as to the adverb's semantic type. In I will stay where I am, it's reasonable
to assume that both the clause and the proform where are adverbs of place.
It is important to distinguish adverbial wh clauses from direct object wh
clauses. In 1 know where you are going, the wh clause is a nominal clause func-
tioning as a direct object and in I will go where you are going, the clause is a
spatial adverbial clause. Within both clauses, however, the wh word is func-
tioning as an adverb.
direct object
I know where you are going

locative
adverb
locative adverb
I will go where you are going

locative
adverb
TEMPORAL ADVERBS
Temporal adverbial clauses are quite common in English and all three ma-
jor semantic types can be expressed by clauses. As you will see, a number of
very different clause types can communicate time frame.
Adverbs of Time (Point or Boundary)

Not surprisingly, the proform zohen can be used as a subordinator in an ad-
verb of time clause. In the sentence 1 will come when I am called, when func-
tions as an adverb of time within the clause, which itself functions as an ad-
verb of time.
Adverbial Clauses
subject adverb of time
will come when I am called

adverb subject
of time
Here the proform when doesn't actually answer the question when? but, like
the clause itself, stands for a time frame that is not specified.
Prepositions can take clauses as their objects, and after is often used as a
subordinator in finite adverb of time clausesIwill help you after I finish the
dishes; Joan arrived after Feryal left. After refers to an open time frame that be-
gins subsequent to the event or action noted in the clause. The subordinator as
soon as functions in much the same way. In I will help you as soon as I finish
my lunch, as soon as marks a specific time frame, which occurs at the point
when the event mentioned in the clause ends.
The preposition until usually occurs in adverbs of duration (I will stay un-
til I am evicted), but until can appear in an adverb of time clause when the
preceding verb is negativeHe didn't help until I insisted; She didn't smile un-
til she saw the results. In these sentences the events articulated in the clause
represent the beginning of the time frame, i.e., the smiling begins when she
sees the results.
The subordinator while is used in clauses in which the speaker wishes to
communicate concurrent eventsLescooked while Kimberly mowed the lawn;
Michelle drove while Scott slept; I will scrub the floors while you wash the win-
dows.
Adverbs of Frequency
Clausal adverbs of frequency are far less common than clausal time
(point/boundary) adverbs. They exploit the subordinator whenever and a few
subordinators containing the construction as ... as.
How often did the baby cry? The baby cried whenever I came into the
room.
How often does Teddy drink wine? Teddy drinks wine whenever he is eat-
ing dinner.
How often do you go to Budapest? I go as often as I can.
How many times can we go to the salad bar? I'll go as many times as
they'll let me.
Adverbs of Duration
There are also a limited number of adverbial clauses that express duration.
The preposition since can take a clausal object, and this construction is often
used to indicate durationPhilhas lived here since he left his parent's house;
We have been friends since ive attended the same grammar school. Sometimes
since is modified by ever, which intensifies the notion of duration1have lived

here ever since I was a kid.
The phrase as long as is also used in adverbs of duration.
How long has Evelyn lived here? Evelyn has lived here as long as I have
known her.
How long will you stay? I will stay as long as they will have me.
Note that adverbs of duration can co-occur with the perfect, since duration
is implicit in this aspect.
Temporal Adverbs in Discourse

Because a clause expresses a proposition, a temporal adverbial clause al-
lows a speaker to manipulate the time frame in complex ways. The following
examples are from Sister Helen Prejean's autobiographical narrative Dead Man
Walking (1994) and Elizabeth George's novel In the Presence of the Enemy (1997).
(Boldface added.)
I had promised her that 1 would be waiting for her at the gate when she came
out. (Prejean, p. 227)
He helped his wife up, and as she tidied everything from her denim skirt to
her greying hair, he introduced himself. (George, p. 510)
"After I gave them the statement I asked the District Attorney investigator if
he would help my Mother." (Prejean, p. 161)
"He's waiting until he's settled completely into the new job." (George, p. 444)
Word Order and Temporal Adverbial Clauses

While all temporal adverbial clauses can appear in the predicate, many also
occur in sentence initial position.
When Ellen fell, she broke two ribs.

After I cooked the meal, I cleaned up the kitchen.
As soon as my old girlfriend arrived, I left.
Ever since she lost her job, she has been morose.
Every time he picks something up, he drops it.
Iconicity may be one reason that temporal clauses sometimes appear first
in the sentence. In all the examples above, the event described in the subordi-
nate clause precedes the event described in the main clause; in other words,
the clause order reflects the temporal order of the events. While sentence ini-
tial clauses are subordinate, they are not embedded.
Adverbial Clauses
Summary of spatial and temporal adverb clauses
Adverbs of place She lives where the sun never sets in

the summer.
The baby will stay wherever you put him.
Adverbs of I will travel wherever the train takes me.
direction
She went wherever she was sent.
Adverbs of time Sasha left the room when she heard the alarm.
(point/boundary)
I will leave as soon as you give me an answer.
Adam arrived after Eve had left.
He didn't sleep until his son got home.
Adverbs of Roberta has been an athlete as long as I've
duration known her.
She has not spoken to me since I told her off.
I have known her ever since I was a child.
Adverbs of Charles attends the opera as often as he can.
frequency I can hit the target as many times as you can.
ADVERBS OF MANNER
Adverbs of manner are usually lexical or phrasal rather than clausal, but
prepositions sometimes take clause objects, which produce adverbs of this type.
The preposition like often participates in adverb of manner constructionsShe
acts like she doesn't know the answer. The child was crying like she would
never stop. As combined with if functions in much the same wayHewas act-
ing as if he were the boss; Marta is talking as if she knows where the report is.
Prescriptivists usually reject like in favor of as if.
ADVERBS OF MEANS
Prepositions readily take ING clause objects, and most adverbial means
clauses take this shape. By is the preposition most often used in such con-
structions.
You can get to Boston by taking the next bus.

Erin angered her boss by proposing that he be more supportive.
Andres was shocked by his friendCs) stealing a bicycle.
Interestingly, without can also participate in an adverb of means clause, but with
cannot. Without clauses express negative meansYoushould be able to open this
without using a hammer, You can fix this without using any special tools; The
kids settled their argument without resorting to violence.
When the clause has no overt subject, which is often the case in such con-
structions, subject controlled equi pertainsYoucan fix this without [you] using
any special tools; The kids settled their argument without [the kids] resorting to vio-
lence.
ADVERBS OF REASON/PURPOSE AND RESULT

A rather heterogeneous set of subordinators operate in adverbial clauses
of reason/purpose and result. Because is the most frequently used subordina-
tor in an adverb of reason clause7dropped the class because I didn't like the
teacher; The engine blew up because he forgot to add oil. Because is so closely as-
sociated with adverbs of reason that children, when asked why they did some-
thing, will often answer in a drawn out "Becauuuse."
So that is a subordinator that also is commonly found in adverbs of reason
and purposeI loaned her my notes so that she wouldn't be embarrassed; I
tripped him so that he would fall in front of the whole class. That can be omit-
ted, leaving so as the sole subordinatorIwhispered so they couldn't hear me.
That occasionally appears alone in adverbs of reason/purpose, although such
constructions sound quite archaicGivethat others may live.
While the subordinator since is usually associated with adverbs of dura-
tion (I've lived here since 1984), since also functions as a subordinator in adverbs
of reason. In these clauses, since has no temporal contentIwashed the car, since
Jane had refused to do it; I invited him in, since I wanted to ask him some ques-
tions.
Adverbs of result are closely related to adverbs of purpose but they un-
derscore the final outcome, rather than the initial motivation. In We did it to im-
press the judge, purpose is highlighted; the sentence is silent on the issue of re-
sult. But in I insulted Philip so he slugged me in the mouth and We did it without
waking the baby, it is the result that is being underscored. Without is often used
to indicate negative results.
Infinitive clauses often function as adverbs of reason/purpose and result.
The subordinator is the infinitive marker to alone or accompanied by the prepo-
sitional phrase in orderThey cheated to win; 1 yelled in order to restore order.
Infinitive clauses can express potential results and when they do, they fre-
quently appear first in the sentenceInorder to fix this, you'll need new cables;
To pass this course, she'll have to get a B on the midterm exam. Strangely enough,
the proform why never appears in adverb of reason clauses. In I know why they
are laughing, why functions as an adverb of reason within a nominal clause.
Adverbial clauses of reason/purpose and result are extremely common in
technical writing and how-to books. Consider these sentences from Sloane's
The Complete Book of Bicycling (1988) and Hittleman's Yoga (1964). (Boldface
added.)
Adverbial Clauses
Make sure the chain is long enough so you can shift to the large, freewheel
cog. (Sloan, p. 308)
I recommend installing a chain guard . . . on your chainstay, to prevent occa-
sional chainrub from damaging its finish. (Sloan, p. 309)
The point is to lower the legs and roll the trunk forward so that the head does
not leave the floor. (Hittleman, p. 110)
Summary of manner, means, reason/purpose, and result clauses
Adverbs of Manner Aldo dances as if he were a professional.

She's acting like she's feeling better.
Adverbs of means You can open this by kicking it with your boot.
I can't fix this pipe without using force.
Adverbs of reason The child stole the cookies because she was
and purpose hungry.
Tammy told those lies to hurt her brother.
We planted a hedge in order to have privacy.
Adverbs of result I left the dog alone too long so she ate my
slippers.
We removed the tile without damaging the
wall.
DISJUNCTS AND CONJUNCTS

Disjuncts and conjuncts occasionally occur as clauses. Such clauses are sub-
ordinate but not embedded. As you saw in Chapter 4, disjuncts and conjuncts
have no modifying relationship within the sentence. The fact that they stand
apart is underscored by the pause that follows or precedes the clause.
Speaking frankly, 1 don't see how she can succeed.

To be brutally candid, I think Mickey will do a lousy job.
1 really don't want this job, to be honest.
What is more, she even paid his bills.
What was even more aggravating, she refused to help us clean up the
mess.
CONCESSIVE AND CONDITIONAL CLAUSES

The category adverbial has become a bit of a garbage can for grammarians.
As you've already seen, it is impossible to assign formal criteria to adverbs,
since there is very little distinctive adverbial morphology and it is not com-
pletely clear what sorts of semantic relations should be considered adverbial.
Many grammarians consider sentence modification an adverbial function. Con-
cessive clauses are among those that modify the entire sentence. They take
many different shapes but in each of the following examples the proposition
expressed by the matrix clause is surprising or unexpected in light of the propo-
sition expressed by the subordinate clause.
He lived with his parents, even though the house was too small for
three adults.
She worked hard, even though they were paying her very little.
No matter how hard I study, I can't master statistics.
I like her, although I hardly know her.
He is still dating her, despite the fact that she is seeing someone else.
Conditional clauses are often discussed in the context of adverbial

clauses, but it is not at all clear that they are really adverbials. F. R. Palmer
(1986, p. 188) notes that "Although conditional sentences are important in all
languages, and although their logic has been thoroughly, if inconclusively, in-
vestigated by philosophers, our knowledge and understanding of them in the
languages of the world is very poor." In the face of this discouraging prog-
nosis, we will examine just a few of the most typical conditional clause types
in English.
Conditional sentences are odd in that they contain two clauses, and in many
cas'es both of the clauses are hypothetical, i.e., neither clause describes an ac-
tual event.
If Fred fails, his father will cut off his funds.

If Lisa should fall, you will be blamed.
If he showed up, I would leave.
Cut down this tree and I'll pay you 100 dollars.
Put your hands up or I'll shoot.
As you can see from the last two examples, conditional clauses need not con-
tain if.
Conditional sentences vary in the extent of their "hypotheticalness." Con-
sider the following examples. (The first comment in the brackets characterizes
Summing Up 285
the verb in the if clause; the second comment characterizes the modal in the
independent clause.)
(a) If she gives me a gift, I will [present tense; present

accept it. modal]
(b) If she gave me a gift, I would [past tense; past modal]
accept it.
(c) If she were to give me a gift, [subjunctive semi-auxiliary;
I would accept it. past modal]
A sentence in which both the matrix clause and the if clause contain present
tense forms is less hypothetical than one in which the verbs are in the past
tense or the subjunctive. The speaker who utters sentence (a) has more hope
of receiving a gift than the speakers of sentences (b) and (c). Note that while
both clauses in sentence (b) are in the past tense, the time frame is not past
time. In conditionals, both past tense and subjunctive forms are used to inten-
sify the hypothetical quality of the utterance.
The perfect has an interesting effect on if clauses. When a speaker uses the
present perfect in an if clause, the hypothetical nature of the utterance is re-
tained. In If Leah has finished her homework, she can go the movies, the speaker in-
dicates not knowing whether or not Leah has finished her homework. But when
a speaker exploits the past perfect in an if clause, the nature of the speculation
changes. In If Leah had finished her homework, she could have gone to the movies,
the speaker indicates that Leah did not finish her homework and thus did not
go to the movies. In this case the speaker speculates on what would have hap-
pened if the situation that did pertain had not pertained. The following exam-
ples reflect the same semantic pattern.
If she had told me, I would have forgiven her. [She didn't tell me.]
If I hadn't been there, there would have been trouble. [I was there.]
7 would have been ecstatic if my aunt had willed me that necklace. [My
aunt didn't will me the necklace.]
Conditional and concessive clauses are subordinated but not embedded.
Summing Up
Recursion is a powerful linguistic tool. English speakers use subordinated

and coordinated structures constantly. Examine any piece of text (aside from
books for small children) and you will find many examples of both coordi-
nation and subordination. Sometimes embedded structures lie four and five
deep.
subject
He wondered
direct object
But as complex as embedded and coordinated structures may appear, when

you look inside the clauses, you find the same basic structures that were ex-
plored in Chapters 1-4, i.e., subjects, direct objects, indirect objects, subject and
object complements, adverbials, and adjectivals. All of this complexity is built
up out of relatively simple structures. Furthermore, although there are a lim-
ited number of clause types in English, each can be used to perform a variety
of these syntactic functions, as the following chart illustrates.
Like all languages, English has always exploited recursive processes, al-
though Old English employed coordination far more than subordination. Our
capacity to embed has increased dramatically over the centuries. Unfortunately,
the terms and analyses that we inherited from classical Greek and Roman gram-
marians and their eighteenth-century English imitators have been inadequate
to the task of describing these deeply complex structures. But even those mod-
ern syntacticians who have developed new models for explaining English
clause structure find some of these constructions extremely problematic. There
is still much to be learned about the nature of subordination in English, and
the study of clause structure is still a highly contentious enterprise.
Function Major clause types
that clause infinitive clause ING clause wh clause
subject That Mr. Nguyen To do well in school Riding a bike is What he did
had left upset me. is important. easy. shocked me.
direct object I know that it's I want to attend She likes walking I know what
wrong. graduation. in the rain. she said.
indirect object Give whoever attends
a souvenir.
predicate The plan is that His solution is to Her favorite activity Life is what
nominative he will leave first. act incompetent. is playing chess. you make it.
object Name the puppy
complement whatever you like.
verb He warned me She forced the I heard him yelling
complement that the stairs child to confess. at the dog.
were bad.
adjective I am angry that Gene was anxious Rory was upset about I'm not sure who
complement she was selected. to help us. leaving home.* took your hammer.
adverbial Give that others She cheated to You can start it by You must come when
might eat. win. pushing this lever.* you are called.
postnominal The fact that they Their plan to rob the The student sitting The folks who live
modifier had lied upset me. bank was thwarted. in front is my son. there raise orchids.
*In these sentences the clause is actually the object of a preposition and the prepositional phrase performs the indicated function.
Notes
Introduction
1. Swift understood that the Romans had been in Britain but he believed (quite correctly)
that Latin had very little impact on the Germanic tribes who settled there in 449.
2. Some linguists use the term syntax to refer only to structural relationships and the term
grammar to refer to structural relationships plus morphology, i.e., root words and affixes.
This distinction has weakened in recent years, and I will use the two terms interchange-
ably.
Chapter I
1. Some linguists call any NP that is located in a place or perceived of as moving from one
place to another a theme. This applies to direct object NPs as well as subject NPsThe
bread is in the cupboard; Joe put the bread in the cupboard. I will not use this label, but you
may encounter it in other books and articles about semantic roles.
2. Actually the dative forms never disappear completely. Him and whom derive from the Old
English dative forms him and hwsem. The Old English accusative (direct object) forms were
hine and hwone.
Chapter 3
1. Periphrastic constructions usually exploit very common lexical items like be, have, and of.
2. Thanks to my colleague Kemp Williams and his aunt Ms. Eddie Vance Pate. Ms. Pate is
from southeast North Carolina.
3. The term operator means something very different in formal semantics, where it refers to
processes like negation.
Chapter 5
1. Thanks to Ric Altobellis.

2. Be aware that some grammarians label any required nominal clause in the predicate a verb
complement. In such grammars, the clauses that I have identified as direct object, indirect ob-
ject, or predicate nominative clauses would simply be categorized as complements of the
verb. While the term verb complement appropriately indicates that all these clauses are re-
quired by the verb, it ignores their kinship with a variety of simple NP constructions. I
will, therefore, reserve the term verb complement for a particular construction, as you will
see later.
3. Certain kinds of wh nominal clauses are considered by some grammarians to be headless
relative clauses, free relatives, or nominal relatives. All of these labels refer to structures in
which (theoretically) the NP head has been deleted in a relative clause construction and
the relative clause then takes on a nominal function.
289
Glossary
abstract noun A noun that expresses a quality that has no concrete physical
reality e.g., fact, truth, idea.
adjective complement A phrase or clause that serves as a complement to a
predicate adjective. Linda was aware of the problem. Bonnie was upset that
all her guests were late.
adjunct Technically an optional element in a construction. In this textbook
the term refers to adverbials of space, time, manner, means, reason /pur-
pose, and result and to non-prenominal adjectives that occur in the predi-
cate but do not follow copulas. Gloria is playing in the park. Morris went to
work angry.
agent The semantic role of an NP that is the willful doer of the action. Ryuji
devoured his lunch. The teacher was slapped by an angry student.
anaphoric reference When a determiner or pronoun refers back to something
that has already been introduced into the discourse. My cousin is a real suc-
cess; she has three advanced degrees.
Anglo-Saxon See Old English.
appositive An NP postnominal construction that provides additional infor-
mation about the NP. Andrea, a point guard on our basketball team, was
recruited by a professional team.
article The determiners the and a!an. Traditionally the is called a definite arti-
cle and a/an is called an indefinite article. Stressed and unstressed some are
often considered articles, as well.
aspect Works with tense to establish the time frame of an action, event, or
state, but has other functions as well. (See perfect and progressive.)
attitude disjunct An adverbial that allows a speaker to comment "editori-
ally" on the content of the sentence. Usually sentence initial. Stupidly, he
left his wallet on the bus.
bare infinitive Infinitive form without to. We saw Jonathan fall.
benefactive The semantic role of an NP that benefits from an action per-
291
292 Glossary
formed by the subject. This NP typically occurs with for and a monotran-
sitive verb. Marty fixed the roof for Don.
cataphoric it Occupies the position of a clause that has been extraposed. It is
shocking that the commissioner embezzled those funds.
causer The semantic role of an inanimate or animate subject NP that inad-
vertently causes something to happen to a direct object. Phyllis accidentally
tripped the boss. The rain ruined the rug.
clause Any structure that contains its own verb. (See matrix clause and subor-
dinate clause.)
closed class Any class of words that will not admit new members, e.g., modal
auxiliaries.
cognate object A direct object that derives from the same lexical source as the
verb. Can be used with a normally intransitive verb. He dreamed a terrible
dream last night.
collective noun Noun that refers to a collection of individuals. Can be used
with a singular or plural verb, depending on the intent of the speaker. Our
team is lousy this year. The faculty are angry about their raises.
common noun Any noun that is not a proper noun, e.g., motorcycle, bush, plate.
comparative An inflected or periphrastic form by which an adjective or ad-
verb compares one entity relative to another. Is Groucho taller than Harpo?
She works more quickly than her sister.
complex transitive verb A verb that takes both a direct object and an object
complement. Blair considers his brother a loser. I find the professor's mono-
logues tedious.
compound A word that is made up of two previously independent lexical
items. In compounds the first element typically carries the primary stress,
e.g., railroad, hot tub.
concessive adverbial A phrase or clause containing a proposition that seems
surprising or unexpected in light of the rest of the sentence. He finished the
marathon despite a stress fracture. I continually loan her books even though
she never returns them.
concrete noun A noun that refers to entities with a physical reality, e.g., book,
tree, woman, nail.
conditional clause Sets up conditions under which the terms of the matrix
clause will be met. If you help me, I'll pay you. Come any closer and Til
scream.
conjunct Words or phrases that join together pieces of discourse, e.g., there-
fore, however, in addition.
Glossary
conjunction A small category of function words (and, or, and but) that con-
join like elements within the sentence or conjoin two or more sentences.
I'll have a hamburger and fries.
control Whereby a covert subject in a non-finite clause is the same as another
NP in the higher clause. Covert NPs can be subject or object controlled. She
wants [she] to eat. Marge persuaded Homer [Homer] to leave.
copula A small class of verbs (some of which have little semantic content)
that link the subject to its complement. A copula can express a current or
resulting state. Annette is unhappy. My parents got upset. She looks ill.
co-referential When two or more forms refer to the same real world entity.
Teddy scratched himself
correctness A traditional doctrine that argues that there are correct and in-
correct ways of speaking. (See prescriptive grammar.)
correlative Either and neither when used with or and nor to express (usually)
mutually exclusive options. Benny is either sick or tired. I neither borrowed nor
lost your book.
covert structure Any structure that is not expressed in the sentence but can
be recovered from the grammatical or discourse context. I want [I] to eat
pizza tonight. [You] Sit down!
created direct object A direct object that is actually brought into existence by
the actions of the subject. Marconi invented the radio.
dative case The form carried by the indirect object (and some other struc-
tures) in Old English and many other Indo-European languages.
deixis/deictic Refers to forms the meanings of which are relative to the con-
text in which they are uttered. First and second person pronouns, demon-
stratives, and some adverbs are deictic. This machine is no good. I'll finish it
tomorrow.
demonstrative A determiner or pronoun that reflects spatial (or sometimes
temporal) deixis. These apples are rotten. This is my room.
denominal adjective A noun form that functions as an adjective, e.g., a city
park.
deontic modality Constructions in which the speaker expresses volition or
obligation and/or attempts to direct the behavior of another. I am going to
fix dinner now. She should be nicer to her parents. Close the door.
derivational suffix A suffix that derives one part of speech from another, e.g.,
the adjective crabby from the noun crab.
described subject The subject of any copula the complement of which is de-
scriptive. Carla is short.
294 Glossary
descriptive grammar Grammars that describe language as it is actually spoken.

determiner A small class of function words (articles, demonstratives, inter-
rogatives, and genitives) that precede both the noun and any adjectives in
the NP. A new woman has joined our research group. My brother is single.
deverbal nouns Nouns that are derived from verbs, e.g., refusal, reaction, ex-
ecution.
directive A construction in which a speaker attempts to influence the behav-
ior of another. Put that game away. Can you pass me the potatoes? I want you
to leave.
discourse Any stretch of speech (or writing) longer than a sentence. A dis-
course can involve any number of speakers.
disjunct A speaker comment construction. Except in the case of epistemic ad-
verbs, disjuncts have little effect on the proposition. Honestly, he is incom-
petent. Amazingly, she found the misplaced money.
ditransitive verb A verb that takes two objects, a direct object and an indi-
rect object. She handed me the gift.
double genitive A structure in which the genitive is marked both inflection-
ally and periphrastically, e.g., a poem of Kipling's.
downtoner A modifying word or phrase that softens the meaning of the word
or phrase it modifies, e.g., They were somewhat angry. She is kind of a prima
donna. I sort of insulted him.
dual object plural A non-count noun that refers to an entity composed of two
identical halves that are connected, e.g., trousers, binoculars, tweezers.
dynamic verb A verb that expresses an action or an event. Can typically co-
occur with the progressive. (See stative verb). Bonilla ran to first base. It is
snowing.
Early Modern English English as it was spoken in Britain from 1500-1800.
echo question A question that typically repeats something a previous speaker
has said. It does not exhibit subject/operator inversion. Dick said he wanted
to go?
edited English Rules for formal writing.
embedding The inclusion of one structure inside another. I know that Kim lied.
empty it Usually the semantically empty subject in sentences that refer to
weather or general ambience, e.g., Ifs cold outside. Occasionally it is a se-
mantically empty direct object, e.g., Let's call it a day.
epistemic modality The expression of possibility or probability. Can be com-
municated by auxiliaries, lexical verbs, and adverbs. She might be late.
Maybe it will snow tomorrow.
Glossary
equi When a covert NP is identical to a higher NP. Selma wanted [Selma] to

leave. We forced the suspect [the suspect] to confess.
existential there A construction in which non-locative there is a subject and is
used to point something out or introduce something into discourse. There
is girl in my neighborhood who raises pot-bellied pigs.
experiencer An animate NP that has a non-volitional sensory or psycho-
logical experience. Tillie heard the explosion. The meat smelled bad to the
cook.
factive A construction containing a direct object that clause, the content of
which is presumed to be fact by the speaker. It is strange that Lee is selling
his truck. (See non-factive.)
finite verb A verb phrase that expresses tense. Guido is sleeping. I know that
she stole it.
gapping A structure in which the second of two coordinated clauses omits
the verb. Adriana loves Merlot and Joanne brandy.
generic reference When an NP refers to all members of a class. The prong-
horn antelope is the fastest animal in North America.
genitive Inflected or prepositional of constructions that express a variety of
semantic relationships including possession, measurement, and part/
whole, e.g., Lilith's coat; the roof of the car.
gerund Traditional label for a highly nominal ING form. The storming of the
castle will take place at dawn.
given information (old information) Information that has already been in-
troduced into the discourse.
gradability The scalar property that allows some adjectives and adverbs to
take comparative and superlative forms and intensifiers. She ran really fast.
Walter is taller than Ben.
grammaticality judgements Judgements about the relative acceptability of a
given utterance. Ungrammatical sentences are typically marked with *,
while marginally grammatical sentences are marked with ?? and odd sen-
tences are marked with ?.
group genitive A construction in which a complex phrase receives the geni-
tive morpheme, e.g., [the Dean of Engineering]'s office.
head The central element in a syntactic structure, e.g., a tall, handsome man.
heavy NP shift The process of moving a particularly long or complex NP or
nominal clause to the end of the sentence. Give the woman standing next
to your brother's car the bag. / Give the bag to the woman standing next to
your brother's car.
296 Glossary
homophones Two or more words that sound the same but have different mean-
ings. They may or may not have the same spelling, e.g., two/to/too and port
(wine) / port (harbor).
iconicity/iconic When the form of a word or structure is influenced by its
function, e.g., repetitions of a word indicate more of the quality it repre-
sents. Charles is very, very talented.
idiom An expression the meaning of which cannot be extrapolated from its
parts, e.g., kick the bucket, bite the bullet.
imperative A normally subjectless directive in which the covert subject is you,
e.g., Sit down. Indefinite third person imperatives, second person impera-
tives with overt subjects, and first person plural imperatives also exist, e.g.,
Nobody move! You leave him alone! Let's leave.
inalienable possession A relationship in which the possessed is not normally
separable from the possessor. Often used to refer to body parts and fam-
ily members, e.g., Jake's leg; my aunt.
indefinite pronoun A determiner or pronoun that has an unspecified refer-
ent, e.g., somebody, anything, nobody.
indefinite this A non-deictic, non-anaphoric determiner that is used to in-
troduce an NP into the discourse. This guy walks up to me and starts punch-
ing me.
independent clause Any clause that can stand alone. Any sentence is an in-
dependent clause.
indirect object The traditional label for the grammatical structure that ex-
presses the recipient. It may appear as an NP directly after the verb or as
a PP after the direct object. I offered them some coffee. 1 loaned a book to
Frances.
infinitive A non-finite form of the verb that typically appears with to, e.g., to
eat, to work. (See bare infinitive.)
inflectional suffix The suffixes taken by an individual lexical item that help
define it as a grammatical category. These suffixes never change the part
of speech, e.g., books, walked, taller.
instrument The semantic role of an inanimate NP that is being used as an in-
strument. Tom fixed his computer with a hammer. The key opened the safe.
intensifier A word or phrase that has little meaning of its own, but intensi-
fies the meaning of the word it modifies, e.g., very tall, really fast.
interrogative Sentence types used in asking questions. Is Rhoda sleeping? What
are you doing?
interrogative proforms Wh words and how. Used in constructing information
seeking questions. Who are you talking to? Where did Tina go?
Glossary
intransitive verb A verb that does not normally take a direct object. The kids
slept. Michael sat on the couch.
lexical verb The final verb in the verb phrase. Usually has significant semantic
content. Pete sang. Sally has been digging a hole.
lexicalization The process whereby a syntactic/semantic difference is re-
flected in the lexicon, e.g., look at versus see; in versus into.
light transitive verb A verb that takes its meaning from the following direct
object. Maurice took a bath. Helene had a smoke.
limiter Limits the hearer's attention to the word or phrase that follows and
excludes other possibilities. I just tapped his fender. Only Joel was selected.
located subject A subject that is located in space by its predicate. Tirana is in
Albania. Your sandwich is on the table.
locative Any structure that expresses location. Often but not always an ad-
verb. She lives in Quebec. They have climbed Mt. Everest. Tucson is hot.
locative inversion Constructions exhibiting operator/subject inversion in
which the locative adverbial appears first in the sentence. Sometimes ex-
clamatory. Here comes Beatrice.
main clause The structure in which all other clauses are embedded. Jonah
wants England to win the World Cup.
main verb The lexical verb in the main clause. I know that Sam likes you.
malefactive Threats that exploit the same construction as benefactives. Til
break your arm for you.
markedness When one form stands in contrast to another (to which it is se-
mantically or structurally related) because it carries a morpheme the other
lacks, e.g., prince versus princess, or because it is used in a more restricted
set of constructions, e.g., How old are you? versus How young are you?
matrix clause The structure in which another clause (or clauses) is embed-
ded. It may be a main clause or a subordinate clause.
Middle English The variety of English spoken in Britain from 1100-1500.
modal auxiliaries A closed set of auxiliary verbs, all of which have uncon-
ventional morphology and all of which share a relatively small set of mean-
ings, e.g., will, should.
modality The expression of nonfacts, e.g., speculations, desires, directives. It
might rain. I wish I were tall. You must clean your room.
monotransitive verb A verb that takes only one object, a direct object, e.g.,
eat, study.
298 Glossary
mood Constructions in which modality is marked by special forms of the

verb. The imperative and subjunctive are both marked for mood. Be quiet.
I wish I were rich.
multi-word verb Lexical verbs that contain a head plus one or more particles.
In some cases the particle is movable and in others it is not. Andrew put
out the cat. I can't put up with this behavior.
non-count noun A noun that does not exhibit number contrast and cannot
be counted without a partitive, e.g., rice, milk, scissors.
non-factive Sentences in which a that clause is treated epistemically by the
speaker. I think that Violetta has finished the project. It's likely that it will rain
tomorrow.
non-finite verb A verb phrase in which tense is not expressed. Winning first
prize was not important. Grandpa wants Heidi to come home.
non-inherent adjective Prenominal adjective that does not express a quality
inherent in the noun it modifies, although it often express a quality inher-
ent in a related noun, e.g., an old friend; a big fool.
non-restrictive relative clauses Wh clauses that provide additional informa-
tion about the NP. Tim's sister, who lives in Liverpool, owns a bicycle shop.
Norman invasion The invasion of England in 1066 by French speakers from
the Kingdom of Normandy in northern France.
noun phrase A noun head and its modifiers, e.g., a sweet kitten; a telegram from
my brother.
number In English, refers to the contrast between singular and plural forms
in nouns, pronouns, and verbs, e.g., cat/cats, I/we, go/goes.
object complement An NP or adjective that follows a complex transitive verb
and a direct object and has the same referent as the direct object or modi-
fies the direct object. They have made Dick an officer. The jury found my sis-
ter guilty.
object genitive A construction in which the genitive plays the semantic role
of direct object within the NP. Joy's promotion pleased her colleagues.
Old English (Anglo Saxon) English as it was spoken in Britain between c.
500-1100.
operator The first auxiliary in the verb phrase. Used in the creation of nega-
tives and questions. Is Cecilia moving away? Liz didn't finish her lunch.
part/whole genitive Construction in which the genitive expresses the whole
and the NP it modifies expresses the part, e.g., the car's battery; the roof of
the house.
partitive A measurement or quantity phrase that allows non-count nouns to
be counted, e.g., four pounds of hamburger; one carton of milk.
Glossary
passive voice A construction that contains the auxiliary be or get plus a past
participle. The subject is typically affected by the action of the verb. Rocky
got mugged last night. They were annoyed by the commotion.
past participle A form of the verb that participates in perfect and passive con-
structions. The baby has fallen. The roof was damaged by the storm. Also used
as an adjective, e.g., the broken swing.
patient The semantic role of an NP that is affected by the action of the verb.
The fisherman caught three trout. The tree toppled. The village was destroyed.
perfect A construction that contains the auxiliary have plus the past partici-
ple form of the following verb. Often expresses duration or current rele-
vance. Janice has lived there thirty years. I have just cut my leg.
performative A construction in which the actual utterance of the words con-
stitutes an act with social and sometimes legal ramifications. I sentence you
to life imprisonment.
periphrasis/periphrastic A construction that exploits additional words rather
than inflectional morphemes. The top of the table as opposed to the table's top.
personal pronoun A pronoun that reflects person (first, second, and third), num-
ber, and subject, genitive, and (except for it) object case, e.g., she, them, its.
phrasal verb See multi-word verb.
possessive genitive A construction in which the genitive reflects the posses-
sor or owner of the NP it modifies, e.g., Brian's pickup truck; Judith's face.
possessive reflexive pronouns Constructions in which a genitive is always
construed as referring back to the subject. May won't help her own father.
Patty blinked her eyes.
postdeterminer A small class of quantifying words that follow the determiner
in the NP. It was her fourth bologna sandwich. The two boys in the group dis-
sented.
predicate adjective An adjective that follows a copula and modifies the sub-
ject. Lucille is smart.
predicate nominative An NP that follows a copula and has the same refer-
ent as the subject. Shirley is a mechanical engineer.
prenominal adjective An adjective that precedes the noun in the NP, e.g., a
big boat.
prescriptive grammar Language rules that focus on which forms and struc-
tures are "correct" and which are not. Don't end a sentence with a preposition
is a classic prescriptive rule.
present participle The {-ing} form of a verb. Participates in the progressive
and also functions as a prenominal adjective. I am eating now. I could hear
a laughing child.
300 Glossary
preterit Another term for past tense.

primary auxiliary The semantically empty auxiliaries be and have (which are
used in constructing the perfect, progressive, and passive) and periphrastic
do.
proform A small word that stands in for another lexical item or construction
e.g., she, where, which, why, everyone.
progressive A construction that contains the auxiliary be plus the present par-
ticiple of the following verb. Typically communicates an ongoing, incom-
plete activity or short-term state. Gus is being mean. I am reading a comic
book.
pronoun A proform that stands for an NP, e.g., she, it, who, what. Some pro-
nouns have indefinite reference, e.g., anyone, somebody, whoever.
proper noun A noun that has unique reference and no determiner or num-
ber contrast, e.g., William Shakespeare, Saudi Arabia.
pseudo passive Constructions that are active in form but passive in mean-
ing. This fabric washes well.
psych-verb A verb expressing a psychological state, e.g., want, consider, think.
punctual verb A verb that refers to an event of very brief duration, e.g., blink,
cough, punch.
quantifier A determiner, predeterminer, postdeterminer, pronoun, or NP that
expresses quantity, e.g., each, many, four, all, a lot of.
quantifier float The process by which some quantifying predeterminers can
move into the verb phrase. All the kids are yelling for ice cream. / The kids are
all yelling for ice cream.
reciprocals Constructions in which two or more elements have the same re-
lationship to each other. Jenna resembles Nolan. Newt and Ed. dislike each other.
Huey, Dewey, and Louie chatted.
recursion The repetition of structures. Recursion can yield conjoined struc-
tures, e.g., Lucy and Ricky or embedded structures, e.g., 1 know that Arlene
is mad.
reduced relative clause A term sometimes used to describe postnominal mod-
ifiers that are not full relative clauses. They can be restrictive, as in The cat
hiding under the couch is my favorite or non-restrictive as in Jeff, a software
engineer, is setting up my computer. (See appositive.)
referent The NP to which a pronoun refers. I like Mindy. She is very generous.
reflexive pronoun A pronoun that has the same referent as a preceding NP
in the same clause. Except in the case of possessive reflexives, a reflexive is
a personal pronoun form plus {-self}, e.g., himself, ourselves, myself.
Glossary
relative pronoun The subordinator in a relative clause. Always has the same
referent as the NP it modifies. I know the woman who sold you that car.
relative tense Occurs when the tense of a non-finite clause is determined by
the matrix clause. I want to win versus I had wanted to win.
restricted copula A small class of copulas that occur with a limited number
of subject complements. The issue loomed large. The audience fell silent.
restrictive relative clause Clause that modifies the preceding NP, usually by
restricting its possible referents. Subordinator is a wh proform or that. All
the trees that Paulette planted are doing well.
resulting copula Copula that reflects a change of state. My brother became
sleepy.
scope of negation Refers to those parts of the sentence actually affected by
the negative particle.
semantic role Delineates the role played by a lexical item, phrase, or clause
in relationship to the verb, e.g., agent, experiencer, adverb of direction.
semi-auxiliaries Multi-word constructions that express deontic and/or epis-
temic modality, as well as ability and habituality, e.g., be going to, is certain
to, used to.
sensory copula A copula that refers to one of our five senses. That guy smells
bad. Your daughter sounds hoarse.
stative adjective A predicate adjective that expresses an ongoing state. Co-
occurs with a stative copula. My great grandmother is very old.
stative verb Any verb, including a copula, that expresses an ongoing state.
Typically does not co-occur with the progressive. Claudia is tall. Melinda en-
joys Tai Chi.
style disjunct Adverbial that indicates in what mode the speaker is speak-
ing. Truthfully, I can't stand the man. Frankly, I think my brother is incompe-
tent.
subject complement An NP or adjective in the predicate that has the same
referent as the subject or modifies the subject, i.e., a predicate adjective or
predicate nominative. The tree is dead. Yesim is a physicist. A locative ad-
verb after copula be is also considered a subject complement. I am in the
garden.
subject dominant language A language in which the subject of the main verb
must be expressed, e.g., English.
subject genitive A construction in which the genitive plays the semantic role
of subject within the NP. The contractor's shortcuts weakened the building.
subjunctive A set of distinctively marked verb forms that are used to ex-
302 Glossary
press directives, volition, and hypothetical situations. I demand that she

leave. He wishes he were a bird.
subordinate clause Any clause that cannot stand alone. I want you to enjoy
yourself. If you talk, you'll have to leave.
subordinator A function word or morpheme that signals a subordinate clause.
I wanted Patricia to have the car. I hate eating with slobs.
superlative An inflected or periphrastic form used with adjectives and ad-
verbs that expresses the final degree of comparison. Joseba ran fastest; She
is the most annoying person here.
suppletive form A form that has a different root from its base form, e.g.,
go/went, good/better.
tag question A question that follows a statement and seeks confirmation of
the truth of that statement. The Yankees are winning, aren't they? You're not
leaving, are you?
tense A small set of inflectional suffixes and special forms that are used to
establish time frame, among other functions. The dog chewed up my slippers.
Libby likes chocolate.
topic What the discourse is about. Topics represent given information.
transitive verb Any verb that can take a direct object. Tarzan eats sushi.
verb complement A clause that follows a direct object NP and complements
the higher verb. I warned Doris that her friends would be upset. I forced Mar-
cus to help me.
verb particle The preposition-like words that occur in multi-word lexical
verbs. Some particles move to a position after the direct object, e.g., Jay put
the cat out and others are unmovable, e.g., Virginia called on her cousins.
volitional Any construction that expresses wants, willingness, promises, or
threats. I wish I were rich. I won't tell anyone that. I'm going to ground you.
References
Aijmer, Karin and Bengt Altenberg (Eds.). 1991. English Corpus Linguistics. London: Long-
man.
Ambrose, Stephen E. 1996. Undaunted Courage: Meriwether Lewis, Thomas Jefferson, and
the Opening of the American West. New York: Simon and Schuster.
American Psychological Association. (1994). Publication Manual of the American Psycho-
logical Association (4th ed.). Washington, DC: Author.
Austin, J. L. 1962. How to Do Things with Words. Oxford: Clarendon Press.
Barry, Dave. 1997, April 27. Mr. Language on the butchered apostrophe. The Denver Post,
Empire Magazine, 7.
Battistella, Edwin L. 1990. Markedness: The Evaluative Superstructure of Language. Albany:
State University of New York Press.
Beach, Hugh. 1993. A Year in Lapland. Washington: Smithsonian Institution Press.
Beaman, Karen. 1984. Coordination and subordination revisited: syntactic complexity
in spoken and written narrative discourse. In Tannen (ed.), 45-80.
Bernstein, Jeremy. 1997, June 12. The road to Lhasa. The New York Review of Books, 44:10,
45^:9.
Berry, Chuck. 1959. Back in the US A/Memphis Tennessee. Chess Records 1729.
Boyce, Jim, et al. 1995. Inside Windows 95. Indianapolis: New Riders Publishing.
Brown, Penelope and Stephen C. Levinson. 1987. Politeness: Some Universals in Language
Usage. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Burke, James Lee. 1995. Burning Angel. New York: Hyperion.
Bybee, Joan, Revere Perkins, and William Pagliuca. 1994. The Evolution of Grammar.
Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Chandler, Raymond. 1971. The Little Sister. New York: Ballantine Books.
Chomsky, Noam. 1957. Syntactic Structures. The Hague: Mouton.
Cloran, Carmel. 1995. Defining and relating text segments: subject and theme in dis-
course. In Hasan and Fries, 361-403.
Collins, Peter. 1991. The modals of obligation and necessity in Australian English. In Ai-
jmer and Altenberg, 145-165.
Comrie, Bernard. 1976. Aspect. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Comrie, Bernard. 1985. Tense. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Cornwall, Patricia. 1995. From Potter's Field. New York: Berkley Books.
Crystal, David. 1997a. A Dictionary of Linguistics and Phonetics. 4th ed. Oxford: Blackwell
Publishers.
Crystal, David. 1997b. The Cambridge Encyclopedia of Language. 2nd ed. Cambridge: Cam-
bridge University Press.
Culicover, Peter. 1988. Autonomy, predication, and thematic relations. In Wilkins, 37-60.
Dahl, H. 1979. Word Frequencies of Spoken American English. Essex, CT: Verbatim.
303
304 References
Dawkins, Richard. 1996. The Blind Watchmaker: Why the Evidence of Evolution Reveals a
Universe Without Design. New York: W. W. Norton.
The Denver Post 1997, May 6, D-l.
Dibdin, Michael. 1996. Dead Lagoon. New York: Vintage Crime /Black Lizard.
Dowty, David. 1986. Aspectual class and discourse. Linguistics and Philosophy, 9, 37-61.
Fillmore, Charles and Paul Kay. 1995. Construction Grammar. Stanford: Center for the
Study of Language and Information.
Fox, Barbara. 1987. Discourse Structure and Anaphora: Written and Conversational English.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Fox, Barbara and Paul J. Hopper. (Eds.). 1994. Voice: Form and Function. Amsterdam: John
Benjamins.
Friedman, Kinky. 1996. Gold Bless John Wayne. New York: Bantam Books.
Fries, Peter H. 1995. Themes, methods of development, and texts. In Hasan and Fries,
317-359.
George, Elizabeth. 1997. In the Presence of the Enemy. New York: Bantam Paperback.
Gillagan, Gary. 1987. A cross linguistic approach to the Pro-Drop Parameter. Ph.D. dis-
sertation: University of Southern California.
Givon, Talmy. 1979. On Understanding Grammar. Orlando, FL.: Academic Press.
Givon, Talmy. 1993a. English Grammar: A Function-Based Introduction, Vol 1. Amsterdam:
John Benjamins.
Givon, Talmy. 1993b. English Grammar: A Function-Based Introduction, Vol. 2. Amsterdam:
John Benjamins.
Givon, Talmy. 1995. Functionalism and Grammar. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Givon, Talmy and Lynne Yang. 1994. The rise of the English GET passive. In Fox and
Hopper, 119-149.
Glassner, Andrew S. 1995. Principles of Digital Image Synthesis. San Francisco: Morgan
Kaufmann.
Glaves, Paul. 1997, March. Steering head bearing adjustments. BMW Owner's Nezvs, 16-19.
Goldberg, Adele E. 1995. Constructions: A Construction Grammar Approach to Argument
Structure. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Grob, Gerald N. and Robert N. Beck. 1963. The Declaration of Independence. American
Ideas, Vol. 1. 186-189. New York: The Free Press of Glencoe.
Grundel, Jeanette, Nancy Hedberg, and Ron Zacharski. 1993. Cognitive status and the
form of referring expressions in discourse. Language, 69:2, 274-307.
Haiman, John (Ed.). 1985. Iconicity in Syntax. Amsterdam: John Benajmins.
Hall, James. 1993. Hard Aground. New York: Dell.
Harrison, G. B. (Ed.). 1952. Shakespeare: The Complete Works. New York: Harcourt, Brace,
& World.
Hasan, Ruqaiya and Peter H. Fries (Eds.). 1995. On Subject and Theme: A Discourse Func-
tional Perspective. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Hillerman, Tony. 1993. Sacred Clowns. New York: HarperCollins.
Hittleman, Richard L. 1964. Yoga. New York: Warner Books.
The Holy Bible, n.d. Authorized or King James Version. Chicago: John C. Winston.
The Holy Scriptures. 1917. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society of America.
Hopper, Paul and Sandra Thompson. 1980. Transitivity in grammar and discourse. Lan-
guage, 56:2, 251-299.
Hopper, Paul and Sandra Thompson. 1984. The discourse basis for lexical categories in
universal grammar. Language, 60:4, 703-752.
Hopper, Paul and Sandra Thompson. 1985. The iconicity of the universal categories
'noun7 and 'verbs7. In Haiman, 151-183.
References
Hulme, Keri. 1983. The Bone People. New York: Penguin Books.
Hussey, Stanley. 1995. The English Language: Structure and Development. New York: Long-
man.
Ignatieff, Michael. 1997, June 12. The center of the earthquake. The Neiv York Review of
Books, 44:10, 31-33.
Joshi, Aravind K., Bonnie L. Webber, and Ivan A. Sag (Eds.). 1981. Elements of Discourse
Understanding. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Kidder, Tracy. 1985. House. Boston: Houghton Mifflin.
Kingsolver, Barbara. 1994. Pigs in Heaven. New York: HarperPerennial.
Klein-Andreu, Flora (Ed.). 1983. Discourse: Perspectives on Syntax. New York: Academic
Press.
Kolata, Gina. 1997, December 3. The FDA OKs irradiation of red meat. The Miami Her-
ald, 30A.
Lakoff, George. 1987. Women, Fire and Dangerous Things. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Lakoff, George and Mark Johnson. 1980. Metaphors We Live By. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press.
Lambrecht, Knud. 1994. Information Structure and Sentence Form. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press.
Langacker, Ronald. 1987. Foundations of Cognitive Grammar, Vol. 1. Stanford: Stanford
University Press.
Leonard, Elmore. 1996. Out of Sight. New York: Dell.
Levin, Beth. 1993. English Verb Classes and Alternations. Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
Levin, Beth and Steven Pinker (Eds.). 1992. Lexical and Conceptual Semantics. Oxford:
Blackwell.
Lowth, Robert. 1767. A Short Introduction to English Grammar with Critical Notes. A new
edition, corrected. London: A. Millar, T. Cadell, and J. Dodsley.
Lui, C.L. and James Layland. 1973. Scheduling Algorithms for Multiprogramming in a
hard-real-time environment. Journal of the Association for Computing Machinery, 20:1,
46-61.
MacDonald, Ross. 1996. Black Money. New York: Vintage Crime/Black Lizard.
Martin, Rux, Patricia Jamieson, and Elizabeth Hiser. 1991. The Eating Well Cookbook. Char-
lotte, VT: Camden House.
McGinley, Patrick. 1982. Goosefoot. New York: E. P. Dutton.
Miller, George A. 1996. The Science of Words. New York: Scientific American Library.
Miller, George A. and Christiane Fellbaum. 1992. Semantic networks of English. In Levin
and Pinker, 197-229.
Mindt, Dieter. 1991. Syntactic evidence for semantic distinctions in English. In Aijmer
and Altenberg, 182-196.
Moore, Samuel and Thomas A. Knott. 1955. The Elements of Old English. (James R. Hul-
bert, rev. ed.). Ann Arbor, MI: George Wahr Publishing.
Mosley Walter. 1997. Gone Fishin'. Baltimore: Black Classic Press.
Motorcyclist. 1997, April, 96.
Oates, Joyce Carol. 1997. Will You Always Love Me? New York: Plume/Penguin.
Palmer, F. R. 1986. Mood and Modality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Paretsky, Sara. 1995. Windy City Blues: V. 1. Warshawski Stories. New York: Dell.
Parker, Robert. 1996. Thin Air. New York: Berkley
Penn, Larry 1997. Why don't a tow truck haul toes? The Whiskey's Gone. Cookie Man
Music.
306 References
Pickthall, Marmaduke (transl.). 1992. The Koran. New York: Everyman's Library, Alfred
A. Knopf.
Piraro, Dan. 1997, April 1. Cartoon distributed by Universal Press Syndicate. The Den-
ver Post, 6E.
Prejean, Sister Helen. 1994. Dead Man Walking. New York: Vintage Books.
Prince, Ellen. 1981. On the reference of indefinite-f/n's NPs. In Joshi, et. al., 231-250.
Proulx, E. Annie. 1993. Shipping News. New York: Touchstone.
Quirk, Randolph, Sidney Greenbaum, Geoffrey Leech, and Jan Svartvik. 1972. A Gram-
mar of Contemporary English. London: Longman.
Scarry, Richard. 1992. Huckle Cat's Busiest Day Ever! New York. Random House.
Schiffrin, Deborah. 1987. Discourse Markers. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Schwarzchild, Roger. 1996. Pluralities. Dordrecht, The Netherlands: Kluwer Academic
Publishers.
Sloane Eugene A. 1988. The Complete Book of Bicycling. New York: Simon and Schuster.
Swift, Jonathan. 1957. A proposal for correcting the English tongue. In Herbert Davis
(Ed.). Jonathan Swift, Vol. 4: Polite Conversation, Etc. Oxford: Blackwell.
Tannen, Deborah (Ed.). 1984a. Coherence in Spoken and Written Discourse. Norwood, NJ:
Ablex Publishing.
Tannen, Deborah. 1984b. Spoken and written narrative in English and Greek. In Tan-
nen 1984a, 21-41. (
Ward, Benji. 1983. Reference and topic within and across discourse units. In Klein-An-
dreu, 91-116.
Weinberg, Steven. 1997, June 12. Before the Big Bang. The New York Reviezv of Books 44:10,
16-20.
Wierzbicka, Anna. 1988a. The Semantics of Grammar. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Wierzbicka, Anna. 1988b. Oats and wheat: mass nouns, iconicity, and human catego-
rization. In Wierzbicka 1988a, 499-560.
Wierzbicka, Anna. 1988c. Why can you have a drink when you can't *have an eat? In
Wierzbicka, 1988a, 293-357.
Wierzbicka, Anna. 1997. Understanding Cultures Through Their Key Words. Oxford: Ox-
ford University Press.
Wilkins, Wendy (Ed.). 1988. Syntax and Semantics Vol 21: Thematic Relations. San Diego:
Academic Press.
Visser, T. Th. (1978). An Historical Syntax of the English Language. Vol. 4. Leidin: E. J. Brill.
Index
a, 58-61 prenominal, 169-71

with few and little, 66 relationship, 171
Ability as subject complements, 44-49
and modal auxiliaries, 137 Adjuncts, 186-208
and semi-auxiliaries, 141 of accompaniment, 202
Absolute opposites, 177 as adjectives, 207-8
Abstract nouns concessive, 202
and characteristic nominal defined, 186
morphology, 56-57 of direction, 189-91
and determiners, 60-61 downtoning, 186-87
non-count, 79 of duration, 195
and plural marker, 57 of frequency, 195-96
and restrictive appositives, 276-77 intensifying, 186-87
as subjects of sentences containing limiting, 186, 187-88
clausal predicate nominatives, locative, 188-93
231-32, 239, 254, 260 of manner, 197-98
Acceptability judgments. See of means, 199-200
Grammaticality judgments modifying adjectives, 206-7
Accusative case, 55 movability of, 203^1
Active voice, 116, 119 of place, 188-89
passive in meaning, 122 problems in categorizing, 202-3
Adding and reinforcing conjuncts, 212 of reason /purpose, 200
Adjective complements, 184-85, 262-65 of remuneration, 202
Adjectives and adjective phrases, 165-85 of result, 200
as adjuncts, 207-8 and scope of negation, 204-5
adjuncts that modify, 206-7 of source, 202
complements of, 184-85, 262-65 stacking and coordination of, 205
vs. compound nouns, 177-79 temporal, 193-97
denominal, 167, 169, 173 of time (point/boundary), 193-95
derivational morphology of, 167 of time relationship, 196
downtoning, 175 Adverbial clauses, 277-85
gradability of, 175-77 Adverbs. See also Adjuncts, Conjuncts,
inflectional morphology of, 165 Disjuncts
intensifying, 174 and the perfect, 195, 280
internal structure of, 180-84 proforms, 201
limiters, 175 use of term, 185-86
non-inherent, 171 Agent semantic role
as object complements, 49-50, 173-74 as adverb of means in passive, 199
participial, 166-77 as subject, 15
postnominal, 172-73 Agentless passive, 120-22
predicate, 45, 169, 171-72 Alternation patterns of recipients, 39-41
307
308 Index
Anaphoric reference embedded, 226-27

and adverbs, 189, 194 embedded vs. subordinate, 274-75
and the definite article, 60, 85, 173 factive constructions, 236-37
and demonstratives, 85, 90 finite, 228
and genitive determiners, 63 non-factive constructions, 236-37
and personal pronouns, 21, 83-86, 235 nonfinite, 237, 250, 256
and, 218-22 Closed classes, 58, 63, 138
Anglo-Saxon. See Old English , Cognate direct objects, 33, 229
Antecedents, 85 Collective nouns, 82
Appositives, 275 Comment vs. topic, 24
restrictive, 276-77 Common nouns, 78
Arbitrary divisibility, 79 Communication verbs
Articles, 58-61 and clausal direct objects, 228, 259
Aspect and ellipses, 225
in general, 106-7 and verb complements, 233, 243
perfect, 106, 107, 110-13, 195, 280 Comparative constructions, 165-66, 167,
progressive, 107-10, 115 175-76
and semi-auxiliaries, 142-43 modification of, 182-83
and tense in discourse, 114-15 Complementizers. See Subordinators
at Complements, 44
and actions with inconclusive results, 192 adjective, 18^85, 262-65
in adverbs of time, 193 object, 49-51, 173-74, 245, 247
Attitude disjuncts, 209 subject, 44^19
Attributive adjectives. See Prenominal verb, 232-33, 240-45, 254-55
adjectives Complex transitive verbs, 49-51, 247
degrees of complex transitivity, 50-51
Bare infinitives, 244, 245 Compound nouns, 177-79
be Concessive adverbials, 202, 284
as copula, 47 Concessive conjuncts, 214
as operator, 151, 156-57 Conditional clauses
as primary auxiliary, 107, 116, 123, 124 containing and, 221
be able to, 141, 143, 144, 147 containing if, 284-85
be going to, 105, 139, 140, 141, 142, 143, Conjoining, 218-26
145, 153, 157 Conjunctions, 218-24
be supposed to, 141 Conjuncts, 211-15
be to, 105, 145 Contractions, 124-25, 133, 151-52
Benefactives, 43-44 Coordination, 218-26
Bible, language of in King James version, Copulas, 44^8, 235
99, 134-35 be, 47
but, 223-24 change of state, 46^7, 47-48, 109-10
by prepositional phrases multi-word, 47, 128
in adverbs of means, 199-200, 281 and the progressive, 109-10
in passive 116, 120 restricted, 47-48
with reflexive pronoun, 88 sensory, 45^16
stative, 46, 47-48, 109, 233
can, 132, 133, 134, 137,138, 143, 152, 154 Co-referentiality, 87, 241
Cataphoric it, 21-22, 235 Correlatives, 223
Causers could, 132, 133, 134, 137, 138, 143, 144
as adverbs of means in passive, 199 Count nouns, 79, 80
as subjects, 16-17 Covert noun phrases
Change of state copulas, 46-^7, 47-48 as direct objects, 30
Chomsky, Noam, 3, 263 in the imperative, 146
Clauses. See also Adverbial clauses, in infinitive clauses, 238, 240, 242-44, 246
Nominal clauses, Relative clauses in ING clauses, 251, 255
as adjective complements, 262-65 as reflexives, 88
conjoined, 218-26 Created direct objects, 28-29, 37
Index 309
dare, 136 and semi-auxiliaries, 142

Dative case, 40, 55 and subjects, 23-24
Definite article, 58-61 tense and aspect in, 114-15
Degree modifiers, 181-84 topic and comment, 23-24
Deixis, 61-62 and the verb phrase, 161-63
in adverbs, 61, 189, 194 Disjuncts, 208-11
in determiners, 61-62 Ditransitive verbs, 34-41, 230-31
in pronouns, 61, 86 degrees of ditransitivity, 39
Demonstratives do
determiners, 61-62 in light transitive verbs, 31
pronouns, 90 periphrasis, 147, 152, 154, 157, 158
Denominal adjectives, 167, 169, 173 Double genitives, 73-74
Deontic modality Downtoners, 175, 187
in general, 131-32 Dual object plurals, 80
and the imperative, 146 Dual structure infinitive clauses, 245^7
and modal auxiliaries, 134-37 Dynamic verbs, 108
and semi-auxiliaries, 140-41 vs. stative verbs, 108-10
and the subjunctive, 149
Derivational suffixes, 167 Early Modern English, 6
Described subjects, 20 Echo questions, 153-54, 224
Descriptive grammar, 3 Edited English, 6-7
Determiners, 57-65 and capitalization of proper nouns,
and abstract nouns, 60-61 75-76, 78
articles, 58-61 and commas between adjectives, 180
demonstratives, 61-62 and commas setting off non-restrictive
genitives, 63-64 relative clauses, 274
indefinite this, 62-63 and conjoining with and, 218
interrogatives, 64 and conjuncts, 214
with non-count nouns, 79, 81 and constraints on concessive
and proper nouns, 77-78 conjoining, 220
quantifying, 63 and extraposed relative clauses, 269
Deverbal nouns, 70 and extraposed subject clauses, 235
Direct objects, 25-32 and gender, 86, 92
as clauses, 228-31, 237-39, 251-53, and multiple modals, 137-38
257-59 and number, 93
covert, 30 and prepositions in indirect object
created, 28-29, 37 constructions, 258
empty it, 29 and transitional conjuncts, 213
experiencer, 27-28 and whom, 267
locative, 29 and whose, 268
patient, 27 Ellipses, 225-26
Directives, 131-32 Embedding, 226-27
and the imperative, 146 Emphatic reflexive, 89
and modal auxiliaries, 134-35 Empty it
and semi-auxiliaries, 140-41 as direct object, 29
and the subjunctive, 149 as subject, 21
Discourse, 4, 9 Epistemic modality
and appositives, 275-76, 277 and disjuncts, 210-11
and conjuncts, 214-15 in general, 130-31
and indirect objects, 41-43 and modal auxiliaries, 133-34
and non-restrictive relative clauses, and non-factive constructions, 236-37
275-76 semi-auxiliaries, 139-40
and noun phrases, 93-94 Equating conjuncts, 214
and the passive, 119-22 Equi
and personal pronouns, 86 object controlled, 242
and restrictive relative clauses, 270-71 subject controlled, 238
310 Index
Event semantic role, 22 Grammaticality judgments, 4^5

Exclamations, 158 Group genitives, 74-75
and locative inversion, 192
Exclusive or, 222
Existential there, 158-61 Habitual activities and events
Experiencer semantic role and modal auxiliaries, 137
as direct object, 27-28 and present tense, 102, 104
in prepositional phrase, 46 and semi-auxiliaries, 141
as subject, 17-18, 117 and temporal ordering, 115
Extraposition, 234 had better, 141, 143, 145, 153
of direct object clauses, 235-36, 249, have
262 as lexical verb, 123, 124-25
as lexical operator, 151
of relative clauses, 269
of subject clauses, 234-35, 248-49, as light transitive verb, 31-32
261-62
as primary auxiliary, 123
have got to, 139, 140, 142, 143
have to, 139, 140, 142, 143, 145
Factives, 236-37
Head, 57
Fake objects, 208
few, 66 Headless relative, 289, Ch. 5, n. 3
Finite verbs, 105 Heavy NP shift, 235
First person imperative, 147 Higher vs. lower structure, 227
First person pronouns, 83, 86 Historical present, 103
for Homophones/homophonous, 48, 81, 140
in adverbs of duration, 195 Hypothetical clauses, 284-85
in adverbs of remuneration, 202
with benefactives, 43-44 Iconicity/iconic, 221-22, 280
with indirect objects, 37-38 Imperatives, 146-49
with malefactives, 44 with covert subject, 146
as subordinator in an infinitive clause, in discourse, 1489
239, 248 first person, 147
as verb particle, 127, 239 third person, 148
Formulaic subjunctive, 150 Imperfect, 106
Free relative. See Headless relative Inalienable possession, 69, 118
French. See Norman French Inclusive or, 222
Functional grammars, 4 Indefinite articles, 58-61, 66
Future time reference, 102-3, 105 Indefinite pronouns, 91-92, 172
and postnominal modifiers, 172, 266
Gapping, 226 Indefinite reference
Gender and indefinite articles, 58-61
and indefinite pronouns, 92 and indefinite pronouns, 91-92
and personal pronouns, 83, 85 and indefinite this, 62-63
Generative grammars, 3, 11-12, 97, 227 and the passive, 117
Generic reference, 75 and personal pronouns, 267
Genitive specific vs. nonspecific, 59, 91-92
case, 55 Indefinite this, 62-63
determiners, 63-64, 65 Independent clause, 217
double constructions, 73-74 Indicative mood, 146, 147, 148
group, 74-75 Indirect objects, 34-43
noun phrases, 67-75 discourse functions of, 4 1 ^ 3
semantic types, 68-73 embedded clauses as, 260
Gerunds, 250 as subject of passive, 119
get passive, 118-19 Infinitive clauses, 237-249
Given information, 23, 42, 127 and ING clauses compared, 253-54
Goal, 190-91 Infinitives, 99, 227
Gradability, 175-77 bare infinitives, 244, 245
Index 311
Inflectional suffixes may, 132, 133, 134, 138, 144, 145, 152
on adjectives, 165-66 Measurement genitives, 72
in Old English, 55, 98-99 Mental state verbs. See Psych-verbs
on nouns, 55-57 Metaphor
on verbs, 98-100, 107, 110-11, 116, and spatial prepositions, 191
132-33 and verb particles, 126
Information seeking questions (wh Middle English, 6, 133, 157, 165
questions), 154-55 might, 132, 133, 134, 138, 144, 145, 152
ING clauses, 249-56, 272 might could, 138
and infinitive clauses compared, 253-54 Modal auxiliaries, 132-38, 151
Instrument semantic role and ability, 137
as adverb of means, 199 and deontic modality, 134-37
as subject, 17 and epistemic modality, 133-34
Intensifiers and habitual actions and events, 137
as adjectives, 174 morphology of, 132-33
as adverbs, 186-88 multiple, 137-38
Interrogative determiners, 64 as operators, 156
Interrogative proforms, 93, 201 and past time, 143-45
Interrogatives. See Questions and prediction, 133
Intransitive verbs, 32-34 and word order, 137-38
it Modality, 130-51
anaphoric, 85 deontic, 131-32, 134-37, 146-51
cataphoric, 21-22, 235 epistemic 130-31, 133-34, 139-40,
empty, 21, 29 210-11
Monotransitive verbs, 39
Jewish Scriptures, language of, 99 Mood, 146-51
imperative, 146-49, 151
King James Bible, language of, 99, 134-35 subjunctive, 149-50, 151
Koran, language of, 99 Morphology, 9. See also Derivational
suffixes, Inflectional suffixes
Latin grammars, 2-3 Movable particles, 126-27
Lexical verb, 123-25 Multi-word lexical verbs, 125-30
Lexicalization, 18, 190 identifying, 128-30
Light transitive verbs, 31-32 with movable particles, 126-27
Limiters, 175, 187-88, 194 with unmovable particles, 127-28
Linking verbs. See Copulas must, 132, 133, 134, 135, 138, 144, 152,
little 153
adjective vs. postdeterminer, 66
Located subjects, 20-21 Narrative present. See Historical present
Locative constructions need, 136-37
adverbials, 188-93, 278 negation, 151-53
direct objects, 29, 191-92 and the imperative, 147
subjects, 22 scope of, 152-53, 204-5
Locative inversion, 192-93 New information, 42-43, 59, 121, 127, 270
Lower vs. higher structures, 227 No synonymy rule, 41, 120
Nominal clauses
Main clauses, 217 infinitive clauses, 237-49
Main verbs, 217 ING clauses, 249-56
Malefactives, 44 that clauses, 228-37
Mandative subjunctives, 149-50, 229 wh clauses, 256-62
Markedness Nominative case, 55
and adjectives, 177 Non-count nouns, 78-82
and word order, 51-52 Non-factives, 236-37
Mass nouns, 78, 79 Non-finite verbs, 105-6, 237
Matrix clauses, 217 Non-inherent adjectives, 171
312 Index
Non-restrictive relative clauses, 273-76 origins of the and that, 61

and appositives, 275 verb inflections of, 98-99
discourse functions of, 275-76 and whose with inanimate nouns, 267
Nonspecific reference, 59, 85, 91-92 Old information. See Given information
and zvh proforms, 258, 260, 278 Operators, 154, 155, 156-58
Norman French, 6 Opposites, 176-77
adjectives and or, 222-23
comparative/superlative forms, 165 ought to, 133, 134, 135, 138, 145, 153, 156
influence on Old English dative, 40-41
influence on Old English periphrastic Part /whole genitives, 71
genitive, 70-71 Participles. See Past participles, Present
influence on relative proform, 267 participles
influence on semi-auxiliaries, 139 Particles
Norse, 139 movable, 126-27
notln't, 151-53 unmovable, 127-28
in the imperative, 147 Partitives, 78-79
in tag questions, 156 Passive voice, 116-23
in yes/no questions, 154 vs. active voice, 116, 119
Nouns, 55-57 agentless, 120-22
Number with clausal subjects, 229-30
and indefinite pronouns, 92-93 direct object used in construction of, 26
and non-count nouns, 78-79 in discourse, 119-22
and proper nouns, 77 get passive, 118-19
and quantifying determiners, 92-93 and pseudo-passives, 122
and verbs with clausal subjects, 234 and reciprocal verbs, 117-18
and transitive verbs that don't
Object complements, 49-51, 173-74, 245, passivize readily, 116-18
247 and word order, 122-23
Object genitives, 69-70 Past participles
Obligation as adjectives, 166-67
and modal auxiliaries, 134-35 in passive constructions, 116
and semi-auxiliaries, 140-41 in perfect constructions, 110-11
of prepositional phrases in postnominal modifiers, 271, 273
in genitive constructions, 71-74 Past tense, 101-2
in indirect object constructions, 38 and modal auxiliaries, 132-33, 143-44
as nominal marker in ING clauses, 250 and semi-auxiliaries, 144-45
with quantifying pronoun, 65 Past time, 101-2
Old English (Anglo Saxon), 5-6 communicating past in past, 112
and comparative and superlative using perfect to communicate, 112,
forms, 165 144-45
and compounds, 178 Patient semantic role
and coordination vs. subordination, 286 as direct object, 19-20, 27
and dative survivals in pronouns, 289, as subject, 19-20
Ch. 1, n. 2 Perfect aspect, 106-7, 110-13
determiners in, 58 and temporal adverbs, 195, 280
genitive in, 70-71 used to express past time, 112, 14415
and genitive of measure, 72 Performatives, 103^1
grammatical form and function, 83 Periphrastic do, 147, 152, 154, 157, 158
and heads in multi-word verbs, 129 Periphrastic genitives, 71, 72, 73-74
indirect objects in, 4011 Permission, 134
and mood markers, 146, 149, 150 Personal pronouns, 83-87
noun inflections of, 55, 56 Plural markers, 55, 56-57
and operators, 157 and abstract nouns, 60
origins of modal auxiliaries, 132, 144, and non-count nouns, 78-79, 80, 81-82
145 and proper nouns, 77
Index 313
Point of view disjuncts, 210 Proper nouns, 75-78

Positive tags, 156 and relative clauses, 266, 274
Possessive genitive, 68-69 Pseudo passives, 122, 198
Possessive reflexive pronouns, 89 Psych-verbs, 18
Postdeterminers, 66-67 with clausal objects, 228, 239, 251, 259
Postnominal adjectives and adjective and ellipses, 225
phrases, 172-73 and passive, 117
Postnominal clauses, 265-77 Punctual verbs, 110, 254
non-restrictive relative clauses, 273-76
restrictive appositives, 276-77 Quantifier float, 65-66
restrictive infinitives, 269-270 Quantifiers
restrictive relatives, 265-69, 270-71 as determiners, 63
Predeterminers, 65-66 as postdeterminers, 66
Predicate, 11-13, 25 as predeterminers, 65
and first mention of topic, 23 as pronouns, 91
Predicate adjectives, 45, 169, 171-72 Questions, 153-58
Predicate nominatives, 44^5, 47, 48, echo, 153-54, 224
231-32, 239-40, 254, 260 information seeking (wh), 154-55
Prenominal adjectives, 169-71 tag, 155-56
Prepositional phrases yes/no, 154
as adjective complements, 184-85
as adverbials, 188, 189-92, 193, 195, Recipients, 35-39
197, 199, 200, 201, 202 alternation of, 39-41
as indirect objects, 36-38, 39 Reciprocal constructions
in passive, 116, 117, 120 and conjunction and, 221
as postnominal modifiers, 173, 272-73 pronouns, 90
Prepositions verbs and the passive 117-18
in adverbs of direction, 189-91 Recursion, 217, 285
as head of adverbial clause, 279, Reduced relative clauses, 271-72
281-82, 283 Reference
and metaphor, 191 nonspecific, 59, 85, 91-92
vs. verb particles, 128-30 specific, 59, 85, 91
Prescriptive grammar, 1-3 Reflexive pronouns, 87-89, 208, 241
Present participles Relationship adjectives, 171
as adjective, 166 Relative clauses, 265-76
in progressive, 107 discourse functions of, 270-71, 275-76
Present tense, 102^4 and modification of indefinite
in Old English, 98-99 pronouns, 266-67
Preterit. See Past tense non-restrictive, 273-76
Primary auxiliaries, 123-24 reduced, 271-72
Process adverbs, 199-200 restrictive, 265-69
Progressive aspect, 107-10 Relative proforms, 267-69
in discourse, 115 deletion of, 268-69
Promises, 136, 243^4 Relative tense, 256
Pronouns, 83-93, 94 Reprimands, 134
demonstrative, 90 Restating conjuncts, 214
and given vs. new information, 42-43, Restricted copulas, 47-48
121, 127 Restrictive appositives, 276-77
indefinite, 91-93 Restrictive infinitive clauses, 269-70
interrogative, 93 Restrictive postnominal modifiers, 271-73
personal, 83-87, 94 Restrictive relative clauses, 265-71
possessive reflexive, 89 Resultative constructions
quantifying, 91 object complements, 49-51
reciprocal, 90 subject complements, 44-49
reflexive, 87-89 Resulting conjuncts, 212-13
English Syntax: From Word to Discourse is a clear and highly accessible descriptive
grammar of English with a strong semantic and discourse/functional focus. Designed for
beginning graduate students and advanced undergraduates in linguistics, it isÎso suitable
for use in TESOL/ESL programs and in English departments. The text explains the basics
of English syntax while providing students with a comprehensive view of the richness and
complexity of the system. Each structure is discussed in terms of its syntactic features, its
meaning, and its uses in discourse, and each discussion is extensively illustrated by exam-
ples from written texts of all kinds and by excerpts of spoken language. While the
presentation has been influenced by a number of theories, the book presumes no theoret-
ical background on the part of the student and the approach is relatively informal.
Syntactic structures are graphically illustrated by means of nesting boxes rather than tree
diagrams. Historical information illuminates some particularly problematic constructions,
and the book is punctuated with intriguing facts about English syntax. All terminology is
carefully explained and most terms are defined again in the extensive glossary. Berk antic-
ipates areas where students are likely to have trouble, warns them of pitfalls, and shows
them how to avoid common mistakes. English Syntax: From Word to Discourse provides
a unique alternative to the formal, generative approach of other texts in the field.
ABOUT THE AUTHOR
Lynn M. Berk is Professor Emeritus in the Linguistics Program at Florida International

University. She has taught linguistics for more than twenty-five years and regularly teaches
courses in syntax, semantics, and history of the English language. Having spent much of her
professional life introducing relative novices to the discipline, she has a keen interest in the ped-
agogy of linguistics.
C O V E R D E S I G N BY A N N L O W E

Berk PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Berk PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Berk PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the book about?

What is the book about?

What approach does the book take to explaining English syntax?

What approach does the book take to explaining English syntax?

ENGLISH

New York Oxford

Oxford New York

and associated companies in

Copyright 1999 by Lynn M. Berk

Published by Oxford University Press, Inc.

Oxford is a registered trademark of Oxford University Press, Inc.

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced,

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data

Printed in the United States of America

Chapter I. Basic Sentence Structure 9

Chapter 2. The Noun Phrase 55

Chapter 3. The Verb Phrase 97

Chapter 4. Modification 165

Modification of the Noun and the Noun Phrase 165

Adjective Order in the Noun Phrase 179

Some Other Conjuncts 214

Chapter 5. Clauses: Coordination and Subordination 217

Restrictive Relative Clauses 265

Don't say ain't.

Never chew with your mouth open.

Grammaticality (Acceptability) Judgments

*We shot herself

If a sentence is marginally acceptable, i.e., it might be used by speakers

??She has been going to finish that project for years.

If a sentence is merely odd, I have marked it with one question mark.

?This land is possessed by the Jones family.

Sometimes knowing the historical origins of a grammatical form or construc-

Du ure feeder, J)e eart on heofonum, sy J^in nama gehalgod.

Cume {3in rice. Sy J)m willa on eorf^an swaswa on heofonum.

we forgyfaj) >aem \>e wi\y us agylta|}. (Hussey, 1995, p. 1)

It's All in Your Head

by rearranging just 10 words or phrases. Some sentences omit words or phrases,

Words and phrases

Goldy ate. Goldy gave the bear my porridge.

Although many of these sentences are closely related, careful scrutiny

SYNTAX OF THE SUBJECT

The generative grammars of the 1970s exploited tree diagrams in which

Children love animals

Each of these graphic devices underscores the same insightthatall Eng-

The basic structure of a noun phrase

noun rice music boys hatred

1 can't eat clams. They give me a rash.

In many European languages (e.g., Russian, Greek, and Lithuanian), the

Josephine danced all night.

The child slept

The child threw Marty the ball

The child threw Marty the ball during the game

English subjects have a profound effect on other grammatical categories in

SEMANTIC ROLES OF THE SUBJECT

Catherine's boss fired her. The little boy yelled.

Mavis inadvertently touched the wet paint.

Sometimes animate causers inadvertently affect another person's psycho-

The clown (accidentally) frightened my daughter.

Butch disgusts everyone.